How do I start the engine using my Toyota remote engine starter?

Press the LOCK button on the remote. Press the LOCK button a second time within 1 second. Press the LOCK button again, this time holding it for 3 seconds. The engine will start.

What warranty coverage do I have on my Toyota vehicle?

The factory coverage warranty period begins on the vehicle’s in-service date, which is the first date the vehicle is either delivered to the original purchaser, lessor, or used as a company car or demonstration vehicle. Basic Coverage is 36 months/36,000 miles, whichever occurs first, from the date of first use and covers all components other than normal wear and maintenance items. This warranty covers repairs and adjustments needed to correct defects in materials or workmanship or any part supplied by Toyota, subject to exceptions. Powertrain Coverage is 60 months/60,000 miles, whichever occurs first, from the date of first use and includes engine, transmission/transaxle, front-wheel- drive system and rear-wheel drive system. Rust-Through Coverage is 60 months/unlimited miles, from the date of first use regardless of mileage and covers corrosion perforation of sheet metal. Emissions Coverage varies under Federal and California regulations. Refer to your Warranty and Maintenance Guide booklet for complete details.

How does the Tire Pressure Monitoring System work in my vehicle?

If the Tire Pressure Monitor System senses seriously low pressure in one of your tires, the low tire pressure icon will appear in the instrument display and you'll see a warning message in the Multi-Information Display. If the indicator light stays on, check all the tires and refill, repair or replace any that are below the proper pressure. Rotating tires, changing tire pressures, or switching tire sizes could trigger the warning. To reset the system, first make sure the tire pressures are correct. Turn the engine on, then press and hold the reset button. You'll find it low and to the right of the steering wheel on the instrument panel. Hold the button down until the TPMS indicator light in the instrument panel blinks slowly 3 three times. Wait for several minutes with the engine running, to allow the system to record each tire's pressure, then turn the engine off. If the light comes on and blinks when you start the car, something may not be working properly, and you should take it to a Toyota dealership to be inspected. If you replace one of the original wheels or pressure sensors, you'll need to have a Toyota dealership register it.

What does ToyotaCare roadside assistance include?

The 24-hour roadside assistance plan covers battery jump start, tire service, emergency fuel delivery, lockout protection, towing and winching[3] for two years and unlimted miles from the date of first use. For detailed information on ToyotaCare roadside assistance, click here. Impaired tire will be replaced with your inflated spare. Towing will be provided to the nearest Toyota dealership (or to the Toyota dealership of your choice within 25 miles of the nearest dealer). Extrication from ditch, mud, sand or snow. Vehicle must be immediately adjacent to a regularly traveled road and capable of being serviced with standard servicing equipment.

How do I operate the cruise control in my vehicle?

To use Cruise Control, turn it on first by pressing the button on the end of the control stalk behind the lower right side of the steering wheel. The green cruise control icon will appear in the instrument display to show the system is ready. Then accelerate to the speed you want, and press the stalk down to set it. The SET indicator will appear underneath the CRUISE CONTROL icon to let you know you can take your foot off the accelerator. If you need to increase your speed, lift and hold the stalk up until you reach the speed you want, and then release it. To reduce the set speed, push the stalk down and hold it to slow down to your target speed, and then release it. To temporarily suspend cruise control, pull the stalk towards you, or tap the brakes. To resume the set speed, push the lever up briefly.

Toyota RAV4 2020 XLE User Manual

RAV4_OM_OM0R024U_(U)

Pictorial index

Search by illustration

For safety

and security

Make sure to read through them

(Main topics: Child seat, theft deterrent system)

Vehicle status

information and

indicators

Reading driving-related information

(Main topics: Meters, multi-information display)

Before driving

Opening and closing the doors and windows,

adjustment before driving

(Main topics: Keys, doors, seats)

Driving

Operations and advice which are necessary for

driving

(Main topics: Starting engine, refueling)

Audio

Operating the Audio

(Main topics: Audio/visual, phone, Connected Services)

Interior features

Usage of the interior features

(Main topics: Air conditioner, storage features)

Maintenance

and care

Caring for your vehicle and maintenance

procedures

(Main topics: Interior and exterior, light bulbs)

When trouble

arises

What to do in case of malfunction and emergency

(Main topics: Battery discharge, flat tire)

Vehicle

specifications

Vehicle specifications, customizable features

(Main topics: Fuel, oil, tire inflation pressure)

For owners

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, and seat

belt and SRS airbag instructions for Canadian

owners

Index

Search by symptom

Search alphabetically

TABLE OF CONTENTS

For your information...................8

Reading this manual................12

How to search..........................13

Pictorial index ..........................14

1-1. For safe use

Before driving...................26

For safe driving ................27

Seat belts.........................29

SRS airbags.....................33

Front passenger occupant

classification system ......43

Exhaust gas precautions..48

1-2. Child safety

Riding with children..........49

Child restraint systems.....50

1-3. Emergency assistance

Safety Connect ................65

1-4. Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer system

.......................................70

Alarm................................73

2-1. Instrument cluster

Warning lights and indicators

.......................................76

Gauges and meters (with 4.2-

inch display)...................82

Gauges and meters (with 7-

inch display)...................85

Multi-information display..89

Fuel consumption information

.......................................99

3-1. Key information

Keys ..............................102

3-2. Opening, closing and lock-

ing the doors

Side doors.....................108

Back door......................114

Smart key system..........128

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Front seats ....................134

Rear seats.....................135

Driving position memory 137

Head restraints..............140

3-4. Adjusting the steering

wheel and mirrors

Steering wheel...............142

Inside rear view mirror...143

Digital Rear-view Mirror.145

Outside rear view mirrors

....................................154

3-5. Opening, closing the win-

dows and moon roof

Power windows .............156

Moon roof......................159

Panoramic moon roof....162

4-1. Before driving

Driving the vehicle.........169

Cargo and luggage........175

Vehicle load limits..........178

For safety and security

Vehicle status

information and

indicators

Before driving

Driving

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Trailer towing................. 179

Dinghy towing ............... 191

4-2. Driving procedures

Engine (ignition) switch (vehi-

cles without smart key sys-

tem)............................. 193

Engine (ignition) switch (vehi-

cles with smart key system)

.................................... 194

Automatic transmission. 199

Turn signal lever............ 202

Parking brake................ 203

Brake Hold .................... 206

4-3. Operating the lights and

wipers

Headlight switch............ 209

AHB (Automatic High Beam)

.................................... 212

Fog light switch ............. 215

Windshield wipers and

washer......................... 215

Rear window wiper and

washer......................... 218

4-4. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap

.................................... 220

4-5. Using the driving support

systems

Toyota Safety Sense 2.0223

PCS (Pre-Collision System)

.................................... 229

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)

.................................... 237

RSA (Road Sign Assist) 247

Dynamic radar cruise control

with full-speed range...250

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)

....................................260

Intuitive parking assist...270

PKSB (Parking Support

Brake)..........................277

Parking Support Brake func-

tion (static objects) ......282

Parking Support Brake func-

tion (rear-crossing vehicles)

....................................288

Rear view monitor system

....................................292

Toyota parking assist monitor

....................................300

Panoramic view monitor 313

Stop & Start system.......345

Driving mode select switch

....................................351

Multi-terrain Select (AWD

vehicles) ......................353

Snow mode switch (AWD

vehicles) ......................357

Downhill assist control sys-

tem ..............................358

Driving assist systems...360

4-6. Driving tips

Winter driving tips..........367

Utility vehicle precautions

....................................370

5-1. Basic function

Buttons overview...........375

Menu screen..................377

Status icon.....................378

“Setup” screen...............380

Audio

TABLE OF CONTENTS

5-2. Basic information before

operation

Initial screen.................. 381

Touch screen................. 382

Home screen................. 384

Entering letters and num-

bers/list screen operation

.................................... 385

Screen adjustment........ 388

Linking multi-information dis-

play and the system.... 389

5-3. Connectivity settings

Registering/Connecting a

Bluetooth

device ....... 390

Setting Bluetooth

details

.................................... 394

Wi-Fi

Hotspot.............. 402

5-4. Apple CarPlay/Android

Auto

Apple CarPlay

/Android Auto

.................................... 407

5-5. Other settings

General settings............ 414

Voice settings................ 418

Vehicle settings............. 419

5-6. Using the audio/visual sys-

tem

Quick reference............. 420

Some basics ................. 421

5-7. Radio operation

AM/FM/SiriusXM (SXM) radio

.................................... 425

5-8. Media operation

USB memory................. 432

iPod/iPhone

(Apple CarPlay)........... 434

Android Auto.................. 437

Bluetooth

audio ...........438

5-9. Audio/visual remote con-

trols

Steering switches..........442

5-10.Audio settings

Setup.............................444

5-11.Tips for operating the

audio/visual system

Operating information....446

5-12.Voice command system

operation

Voice command system 458

Command list ................461

5-13.Phone operation (Hands-

free system for cellular

phones)

Quick reference.............465

Some basics..................466

Placing a call using the

Bluetooth

hands-free sys-

tem ..............................470

Receiving a call using the

Bluetooth

hands-free sys-

tem ..............................473

Talking on the Bluetooth

hands-free system.......474

Bluetooth

phone message

function........................476

5-14.Phone settings

Setup.............................481

5-15.What to do if...

(Bluetooth

)

Troubleshooting.............491

TABLE OF CONTENTS

5-16.Connected Services over-

view

Connected Services...... 495

Type A: Function achieved by

using a smartphone or DCM

.................................... 496

Type B: Function achieved by

using DCM and the system

.................................... 498

Type C: Function achieved by

using DCM .................. 499

Type D: Function achieved by

using DCM and a smart-

phone.......................... 502

5-17.Connected Services opera-

tion

Toyota Apps .................. 504

5-18.Setup

Toyota Apps settings..... 508

6-1. Using the air conditioning

system and defogger

Manual air conditioning sys-

tem.............................. 510

Automatic air conditioning

system......................... 515

Heated steering wheel/seat

heaters/seat ventilators522

6-2. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list............ 525

6-3. Using the storage features

List of storage features . 528

Luggage compartment fea-

tures............................ 532

6-4. Using the other interior fea-

tures

Other interior features...537

Garage door opener......548

7-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the

vehicle exterior ............558

Cleaning and protecting the

vehicle interior .............561

7-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements

....................................564

General maintenance....565

Emission inspection and

maintenance (I/M) programs

....................................568

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precau-

tions.............................569

Hood..............................571

Positioning a floor jack ..572

Engine compartment.....574

Tires ..............................581

Tire inflation pressure....595

Wheels ..........................597

Air conditioning filter......599

Wiper insert replacement

....................................601

Wireless remote control/elec-

tronic key battery.........604

Checking and replacing fuses

....................................607

Light bulbs.....................609

Interior features

Maintenance and care

TABLE OF CONTENTS

8-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers...... 618

If your vehicle has to be

stopped in an emergency

.................................... 618

If the vehicle is trapped in ris-

ing water...................... 619

8-2. Steps to take in an emer-

gency

If your vehicle needs to be

towed........................... 621

If you think something is

wrong .......................... 626

Fuel pump shut off system

.................................... 627

If a warning light turns on or a

warning buzzer sounds628

If a warning message is dis-

played.......................... 639

If you have a flat tire...... 642

If the engine will not start651

If you lose your keys ..... 653

If the electronic key does not

operate properly (vehicles

with smart key system) 653

If the vehicle battery is dis-

charged....................... 655

If your vehicle overheats659

If the vehicle becomes stuck

.................................... 661

9-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil

level, etc.)....................664

Fuel information.............676

Tire information .............678

9-2. Customization

Customizable features...688

9-3. Initialization

Items to initialize............699

10-1.For owners

Reporting safety defects for

U.S. owners.................702

Seat belt instructions for

Canadian owners (in

French)........................703

SRS airbag instructions for

Canadian owners (in

French)........................704

What to do if... (Troubleshoot-

ing) .............................714

Alphabetical Index ........717

When trouble arises

Vehicle specifications

For owners

Index

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Please note that this manual

applies to all models and

explains all equipment, including

options. Therefore, you may find

some explanations for equip-

ment not installed on your vehi-

cle.

All specifications provided in this

manual are current at the time of

printing. However, because of

the Toyota policy of continual

product improvement, we

reserve the right to make

changes at any time without

notice.

Depending on specifications,

the vehicle shown in the illustra-

tions may differ from your vehi-

cle in terms of equipment.

Approximately five hours after

the engine is turned off, you

may hear sound coming from

under the vehicle for several

minutes. This is the sound of a

fuel evaporation leakage check

and, it does not indicate a mal-

function.

A wide variety of non-genuine

spare parts and accessories for

Toyota vehicles are currently

available in the market. You

should know that Toyota does

not warrant these products and

is not responsible for their per-

formance, repair, or replace-

ment, or for any damage they

may cause to, or adverse effect

they may have on, your Toyota

vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modi-

fied with non-genuine Toyota

products. Modification with non-

genuine Toyota products could

affect its performance, safety or

durability, and may even violate

governmental regulations. In

addition, damage or perfor-

mance problems resulting from

the modification may not be cov-

ered under warranty.

The installation of a mobile two-

way radio system in your vehicle

could affect electronic systems

such as:

 Multiport fuel injection sys-

tem/sequential multiport fuel

injection system

 Toyota Safety Sense 2.0

For your information

Main Owner’s Manual

Noise from under vehicle

after turning off the engine

Accessories, spare parts

and modification of your

Toyota

Installation of a mobile

two-way radio system

 Anti-lock brake system

 SRS airbag system

 Seat belt pretensioner system

Be sure to check with your

Toyota dealer for precautionary

measures or special instructions

regarding installation of a mobile

two-way radio system.

The vehicle is equipped with

sophisticated computers that will

record certain data, such as:

• Engine speed/ Electric motor

speed (traction motor speed)

• Accelerator status

• Brake status

• Vehicle speed

• Operation status of the driving

assist systems

• Images from the front camera

(available only when certain

safety systems are activated,

which varies depending on

the vehicle specifications).

The recorded data varies

according to the vehicle grade

level and options with which it is

equipped.

These computers do not record

conversations or sounds, and

only record images outside of

the vehicle in certain situations.

 Data Transmission

Your vehicle may transmit the data

recorded in these computers to

Toyota without notification to you.

 Data usage

Toyota may use the data recorded

in this computer to diagnose mal-

functions, conduct research and

development, and improve quality.

Toyota will not disclose the

recorded data to a third party

except:

• With the consent of the vehicle

owner or with the consent of the

lessee if the vehicle is leased

• In response to an official request

by the police, a court of law or a

government agency

• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit

• For research purposes where the

data is not tied to a specific vehi-

cle or vehicle owner

 Recorded image information

can be erased by your Toyota

dealer.

The image recording function can

be disabled. However, if the func-

tion is disabled, data from when the

system operates will not be avail-

able.

 To learn more about the vehi-

cle data collected, used and

shared by Toyota, please visit

www.toyota.com/privacyvts/

If your Toyota has Safety Con-

nect and if you have subscribed

to those services, please refer to

the Safety Connect Telematics

Subscription Service Agreement

Vehicle data recording

Usage of data collected

through Safety Connect

(U.S.mainland only)

for information on data collected

and its usage.

 To learn more about the vehi-

cle data collected, used and

shared by Toyota, please visit

www.toyota.com/privacyvts/

This vehicle is equipped with an

event data recorder (EDR). The

main purpose of an EDR is to

record, in certain crash or near

crash-like situations, such as an

air bag deployment or hitting a

road obstacle, data that will

assist in understanding how a

vehicle’s systems performed.

The EDR is designed to record

data related to vehicle dynamics

and safety systems for a short

period of time, typically 30 sec-

onds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is

designed to record such data

as:

 How various systems in your

vehicle were operating;

 Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts were

buckled/fastened;

 How far (if at all) the driver

was depressing the accelera-

tor and/or brake pedal; and,

 How fast the vehicle was trav-

eling.

These data can help provide a

better understanding of the cir-

cumstances in which crashes

and injuries occur.

NOTE: EDR data are recorded

by your vehicle only if a non-triv-

ial crash situation occurs; no

data are recorded by the EDR

under normal driving conditions

and no personal data (e.g.,

name, gender, age, and crash

location) are recorded. How-

ever, other parties, such as law

enforcement, could combine the

EDR data with the type of per-

sonally identifying data rou-

tinely acquired during a crash

investigation.

To read data recorded by an

EDR, special equipment is

required, and access to the

vehicle or the EDR is needed. In

addition to the vehicle manufac-

turer, other parties, such as law

enforcement, that have the spe-

cial equipment, can read the

information if they have access

to the vehicle or the EDR.

 Disclosure of the EDR data

Toyota will not disclose the data

recorded in an EDR to a third party

except when:

• An agreement from the vehicle’s

owner (or the lessee for a leased

vehicle) is obtained

• In response to an official request

by the police, a court of law or a

government agency

• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit

However, if necessary, Toyota may:

• Use the data for research on

Event data recorder

vehicle safety performance

• Disclose the data to a third party

for research purposes without

disclosing information about the

specific vehicle or vehicle owner

The SRS airbag and seat belt

pretensioner devices in your

Toyota contain explosive chemi-

cals. If the vehicle is scrapped

with the airbags and seat belt

pretensioners left as they are,

this may cause an accident such

as fire. Be sure to have the sys-

tems of the SRS airbag and seat

belt pretensioner removed and

disposed of by a qualified ser-

vice shop or by your Toyota

dealer before you scrap your

vehicle.

Special handling may apply,

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/

hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Your vehicle has components

that may contain perchlorate.

These components may include

the airbags, seat belt preten-

sioners, wireless remote control

batteries, and the batteries in

the tire pressure warning valve

and transmitters.

Scrapping of your Toyota

Perchlorate Material

WARNING

■ General precautions while

driving

Driving under the influence: Never

drive your vehicle when under the

influence of alcohol or drugs that

have impaired your ability to oper-

ate your vehicle. Alcohol and cer-

tain drugs delay reaction time,

impair judgment and reduce coor-

dination, which could lead to an

accident that could result in death

or serious injury.

Defensive driving: Always drive

defensively. Anticipate mistakes

that other drivers or pedestrians

might make and be ready to avoid

accidents.

Driver distraction: Always give

your full attention to driving. Any-

thing that distracts the driver, such

as adjusting controls, talking on a

cellular phone or reading can

result in a collision with resulting

death or serious injury to you,

your occupants or others.

■ General precaution regarding

children’s safety

Never leave children unattended

in the vehicle, and never allow

children to have or use the key.

Children may be able to start the

vehicle or shift the vehicle into

neutral. There is also a danger

that children may injure them-

selves by playing with the side

windows, the moon roof or the

panoramic moon roof, or other

features of the vehicle. In addi-

tion, heat build-up or extremely

cold temperatures inside the vehi-

cle can be fatal to children.

Reading this manual

Explains symbols used in

this manual

Symbols in this manual

Symbols Meanings

WARNING:

Explains something

that, if not obeyed,

could cause death or

serious injury to people.

NOTICE:

Explains something

that, if not obeyed,

could cause damage to

or a malfunction in the

vehicle or its equip-

ment.

Indicates operating or

working procedures.

Follow the steps in

numerical order.

Symbols in illustrations

Symbols Meanings

Indicates the action

(pushing, turning, etc.)

used to operate

switches and other

devices.

Indicates the outcome

of an operation (e.g. a

lid opens).

Symbols Meanings

Indicates the compo-

nent or position being

explained.

Means Do not, Do not

do this, or Do not let

this happen.

■ Searching by name

 Alphabetical index: P.717

■ Searching by installation

position

 Pictorial index: P. 14

■ Searching by symptom or

sound

 What to do if... (Troubleshoot-

ing): P.714

■ Searching by title

 Table of contents: P.2

How to search

Pictorial index

■Exterior

Side doors ..........................................................................P.108

Locking/unlocking ................................................................P.108

Opening/closing the side windows.......................................P.156

Locking/unlocking by using the key .............................P.109, 653

Warning messages ..............................................................P.639

Back door ........................................................................... P.114

Locking/unlocking ................................................................ P.115

Opening from inside the cabin

............................................ P.118

Opening from outside....................................................P.116, 118

Warning messages ..............................................................P.639

Outside rear view mirrors .................................................P.154

Adjusting the mirror angle....................................................P.154

Folding the mirrors...............................................................P.154

Defogging the mirrors

................................................. P.511, 517

Windshield wipers..............................................................P.215

Pictorial index

Precautions against winter season......................................P.367

To prevent freezing (windshield wiper de-icer)

....................P.520

Precautions against car wash

(Rain-sensing windshield wipers)

.......................................P.559

Replacing the wiper insert....................................................P.601

Fuel filler door....................................................................P.220

Refueling method.................................................................P.220

Fuel type/fuel tank capacity .................................................P.666

Tires.....................................................................................P.581

Tire size/inflation pressure ...................................................P.671

Winter tires/tire chain ...........................................................P.367

Checking/rotation/tire pressure warning system

.................P.581

Coping with flat tires.............................................................P.642

Hood....................................................................................P.571

Opening ...............................................................................P.571

Engine oil.............................................................................P.666

Coping with overheat...........................................................P.659

Warning messages ..............................................................P.639

Headlights...........................................................................P.209

Turn signal lights ...............................................................P.202

Parking lights .....................................................................P.209

Daytime running lights......................................................P.209

Side marker lights..............................................................P.209

Fog lights

...........................................................................P.437

Stop lights/tail lights/turn signal lights....................P.202, 209

Tail lights.............................................................................P.209

Back-up lights

Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving

(Replacing method: P.609, Watts: P.675)

Pictorial index

Shifting the shift lever to R...................................................P.199

License plate lights............................................................P.209

Side turn signal lights

......................................................P.202

: If equipped

Pictorial index

■Instrument panel

Engine switch.............................................................P.193, 194

Starting the engine/changing the modes .............P.193, 194, 197

Emergency stop of the engine.............................................P.618

When the engine will not start..............................................P.651

Warning messages ..............................................................P.639

Shift lever............................................................................P.199

Changing the shift position...................................................P.200

Precautions against towing..................................................P.621

When the shift lever does not move.....................................P.200

Meters .............................................................................P.82, 85

Reading the meters/adjusting the instrument panel

light ......................................................................P.82, 84, 85, 88

Warning lights/indicator lights ................................................P.76

When the warning lights come on........................................P.628

Multi-information display ....................................................P.89

Display ...................................................................................P.89

Pictorial index

When the warning messages are displayed ........................P.639

Turn signal lever.................................................................P.202

Headlight switch ................................................................P.209

Headlights/parking lights/tail lights/

license plate lights/daytime running lights............................P.209

Fog lights

...........................................................................P.437

Windshield wiper and washer switch...............................P.215

Rear window wiper and washer switch ...........................P.218

Usage...........................................................................P.215, 218

Adding washer fluid..............................................................P.580

Warning messages ..............................................................P.639

Emergency flasher switch.................................................P.618

Hood lock release lever.....................................................P.571

Tilt and telescopic steering lock release lever................P.142

Adjustment...........................................................................P.142

Air conditioning system............................................P.510, 515

Usage...........................................................................P.510, 515

Rear window defogger................................................. P.511, 517

Audio

................................................................................P.375

Audio Plus

*1, 2

Premium Audio

*1, 2

Fuel filler door opener lever..............................................P.221

:If equipped

:Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MAN-

UAL”.

Pictorial index

■Switches

Driving position memory switches

.................................P.137

Window lock switch...........................................................P.158

Power window switches....................................................P.156

Door lock switches ............................................................ P.112

Outside rear view mirror switches ...................................P.154

“ODO TRIP” switch........................................................P.84, 88

Instrument panel light control dial...............................P.84, 88

Automatic High Beam switch ...........................................P.212

Windshield wiper de-icer switch

.....................................P.520

Camera switch

...................................................................P.315

Heated steering wheel switch

..........................................P.522

Power back door switch

................................................... P.118

: If equipped

Pictorial index

Meter control switches........................................................P.90

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch...................................P.255

Cruise control switches

Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range.............P.250

Audio remote control switches

.......................................P.442

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) switch .....................................P.237

Phone switch

.....................................................................P.468

Talk switch

.........................................................................P.458

: Vehicles with Audio Plus or Premium Audio, refer to “NAVIGATION AND

MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

Pictorial index

VSC OFF switch .................................................................P.361

Front seat heater switches

...............................................P.522

Front seat heater/ventilator switches

.............................P.523

Stop & Start cancel switch

...............................................P.346

Parking brake switch.........................................................P.203

Applying/releasing................................................................P.203

Precautions against winter season......................................P.368

Warning buzzer/message ............................................P.634, 639

Brake hold switch ..............................................................P.206

Driving mode select switch...............................................P.351

Multi-terrain Select switch

...............................................P.353

SNOW mode switch

..........................................................P.357

“DAC” switch

....................................................................P.358

: If equipped

Pictorial index

■Interior

SRS airbags..........................................................................P.33

Floor mats.............................................................................P.26

Front seats..........................................................................P.134

Rear seats...........................................................................P.135

Head restraints...................................................................P.140

Seat belts..............................................................................P.29

Console box .......................................................................P.529

Inside lock buttons ............................................................ P.112

Cup holders........................................................................P.529

Assist grips ........................................................................P.547

Rear seat heater switches

................................................P.522

: If equipped

Pictorial index

■Ceiling

“SOS” button

.....................................................................P.65

Auxiliary box ......................................................................P.530

Moon roof switches

.........................................................P.159

Interior lights

...................................................................P.525

Personal lights ...................................................................P.526

Electronic sunshade switch

...........................................P.162

Vanity mirrors.....................................................................P.537

Sun visors...........................................................................P.537

Inside rear view mirror

....................................................P.143

Digital Rear-view Mirror

..................................................P.145

Garage door opener switches

........................................P.548

:If equipped

:The illustration shows the front, but they are also equipped in the rear.

Pictorial index

For safety and security

1-1. For safe use

Before driving.................26

For safe driving ..............27

Seat belts.......................29

SRS airbags...................33

Front passenger occupant

classification system ....43

Exhaust gas precautions48

1-2. Child safety

Riding with children........49

Child restraint systems...50

1-3. Emergency assistance

Safety Connect ..............65

1-4. Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer system

.....................................70

Alarm..............................73

1-1. For safe use

1-1.For safe use

Use only floor mats designed

specifically for vehicles of the

same model and model year as

your vehicle. Fix them securely

in place onto the carpet.

1 Insert the retaining hooks

(clips) into the floor mat eye-

lets.

2 Turn the upper knob of each

retaining hook (clip) to secure

the floor mats in place.

Always align the marks .

The shape of the retaining hooks

(clips) may differ from that shown in

the illustration.

Before driving

Observe the following

before starting off in the

vehicle to ensure safety of

driving.

Installing floor mats

WARNING

Observe the following precau-

tions.

Failure to do so may cause the

driver’s floor mat to slip, possibly

interfering with the pedals while

driving. An unexpectedly high

speed may result or it may

become difficult to stop the vehi-

cle. This could lead to an acci-

dent, resulting in death or serious

injury.

■ When installing the driver’s

floor mat

● Do not use floor mats designed

for other models or different

model year vehicles, even if

they are Toyota Genuine floor

mats.

● Only use floor mats designed

for the driver’s seat.

● Always install the floor mat

securely using the retaining

hooks (clips) provided.

● Do not use two or more floor

mats on top of each other.

● Do not place the floor mat bot-

tom-side up or upside-down.

1-1. For safe use

For safety and security

Adjust the angle of the seat-

back so that you are sitting

straight up and so that you do

not have to lean forward to

steer. (P.134)

Adjust the seat so that you

can depress the pedals fully

and so that your arms bend

slightly at the elbow when

gripping the steering wheel.

(P.134)

Lock the head restraint in

place with the center of the

head restraint closest to the

top of your ears. (P.140)

Wear the seat belt correctly.

(P.30)

WARNING

■ Before driving

● Check that the floor mat is

securely fixed in the correct

place with all the provided

retaining hooks (clips). Be espe-

cially careful to perform this

check after cleaning the floor.

● With the engine stopped and

the shift lever in P, fully depress

each pedal to the floor to make

sure it does not interfere with

the floor mat.

For safe driving

For safe driving, adjust the

seat and mirror to an appro-

priate position before driv-

ing.

Correct driving posture

1-1. For safe use

Make sure that all occupants are

wearing their seat belts before

driving the vehicle. (P. 3 0)

Use a child restraint system

appropriate for the child until the

child becomes large enough to

properly wear the vehicle’s seat

belt. (P.5 0 )

Make sure that you can see

backward clearly by adjusting

the inside rear view mirror (if

equipped), Digital Rear-view

Mirror (if equipped) and outside

rear view mirrors properly.

(P.143, 145, 154)

WARNING

Observe the following precau-

tions.

Failure to do so may result in

death or serious injury.

● Do not adjust the position of the

driver’s seat while driving.

Doing so could cause the driver

to lose control of the vehicle.

● Do not place a cushion between

the driver or passenger and the

seatback. A cushion may pre-

vent correct posture from being

achieved, and reduce the effec-

tiveness of the seat belt and

head restraint.

● Do not place anything under the

front seats.

Objects placed under the front

seats may become jammed in

the seat tracks and stop the

seat from locking in place. This

may lead to an accident and the

adjustment mechanism may

also be damaged.

● Always observe the legal speed

limit when driving on public

roads.

● When driving over long dis-

tances, take regular breaks

before you start to feel tired.

Also, if you feel tired or sleepy

while driving, do not force your-

self to continue driving and take

a break immediately.

Correct use of the seat

belts

Adjusting the mirrors

1-1. For safe use

For safety and security

Seat belts

Make sure that all occu-

pants are wearing their seat

belts before driving the

vehicle.

WARNING

Observe the following precautions

to reduce the risk of injury in the

event of sudden braking, sudden

swerving or an accident.

Failure to do so may cause death

or serious injury.

■ Wearing a seat belt

● Ensure that all passengers wear

a seat belt.

● Always wear a seat belt prop-

erly.

● Each seat belt should be used

by one person only. Do not use

a seat belt for more than one

person at once, including chil-

dren.

● Toyota recommends that chil-

dren be seated in the rear seat

and always use a seat belt

and/or an appropriate child

restraint system.

● To achieve a proper seating

position, do not recline the seat

more than necessary. The seat

belt is most effective when the

occupants are sitting up straight

and well back in the seats.

● Do not wear the shoulder belt

under your arm.

● Always wear your seat belt low

and snug across your hips.

■ Pregnant women

Obtain medical advice and wear

the seat belt in the proper way.

(P.30)

Women who are pregnant should

position the lap belt as low as

possible over the hips in the same

manner as other occupants,

extending the shoulder belt com-

pletely over the shoulder and

avoiding belt contact with the

rounding of the abdominal area.

If the seat belt is not worn prop-

erly, not only the pregnant

woman, but also the fetus could

suffer death or serious injury as a

result of sudden braking or a colli-

sion.

■ People suffering illness

Obtain medical advice and wear

the seat belt in the proper way.

(P.30)

■ When children are in the vehi-

cle

P.5 8

■ Seat belt damage and wear

● Do not damage the seat belts

by allowing the belt, plate, or

buckle to be jammed in the

door.

1-1. For safe use

 Extend the shoulder belt so

that it comes fully over the

shoulder, but does not come

into contact with the neck or

slide off the shoulder.

 Position the lap belt as low as

possible over the hips.

 Adjust the position of the

seatback.

Sit up straight and well back

in the seat.

 Do not twist the seat belt.

■ Child seat belt usage

The seat belts of your vehicle were

principally designed for persons of

adult size.

● Use a child restraint system

appropriate for the child, until the

child becomes large enough to

properly wear the vehicle’s seat

belt. (P.5 0)

● When the child becomes large

enough to properly wear the vehi-

cle’s seat belt, follow the instruc-

tions regarding seat belt usage.

(P. 29)

■ Seat belt extender

If your seat belts cannot be fastened

securely because they are not long

enough, a personalized seat belt

extender is available from your

Toyota dealer free of charge.

WARNING

● Inspect the seat belt system

periodically. Check for cuts,

fraying, and loose parts. Do not

use a damaged seat belt until it

is replaced. Damaged seat belts

cannot protect an occupant

from death or serious injury.

● Ensure that the belt and plate

are locked and the belt is not

twisted.

If the seat belt does not function

correctly, immediately contact

your Toyota dealer.

● Replace the seat assembly,

including the belts, if your vehi-

cle has been involved in a seri-

ous accident, even if there is no

obvious damage.

● Do not attempt to install,

remove, modify, disassemble or

dispose of the seat belts. Have

any necessary repairs carried

out by your Toyota dealer. Inap-

propriate handling may lead to

incorrect operation.

Correct use of the seat

belts

WARNING

■ Using a seat belt extender

Observe the following precautions

to reduce the risk of injury in the

event of sudden braking, sudden

swerving or an accident.

Failure to do so may cause death

or serious injury.

1-1. For safe use

For safety and security

1 To fasten the seat belt, push

the plate into the buckle until

a click sound is heard.

2 To release the seat belt,

press the release button .

■ Emergency locking retractor

(ELR)

The retractor will lock the belt during

a sudden stop or on impact. It may

also lock if you lean forward too

quickly. A slow, easy motion will

allow the belt to extend so that you

can move around fully.

■ Automatic locking retractor

(ALR)

When a passenger’s shoulder belt is

completely extended and then

retracted even slightly, the belt is

locked in that position and cannot

be extended. This feature is used to

hold a child restraint system (CRS)

firmly. To free the belt again, fully

retract the belt and then pull the belt

out once more.

1 Push the seat belt shoulder

anchor down while pressing

the release button .

2 Push the seat belt shoulder

anchor up.

Move the height adjuster up and

down as needed until you hear a

WARNING

● Do not wear the seat belt

extender if you can fasten the

seat belt without the extender.

● Do not use the seat belt

extender when installing a child

restraint system because the

belt will not securely hold the

child restraint system, increas-

ing the risk of death or serious

injury in the event of an acci-

dent.

● The personalized extender may

not be safe on another vehicle,

when used by another person,

or at a different seating position

other than the one originally

intended.

NOTICE

■ When using a seat belt

extender

When releasing the seat belt,

press on the buckle release but-

ton on the extender, not on the

seat belt.

This helps prevent damage to the

vehicle interior and the extender

itself.

Fastening and releasing

the seat belt

Adjusting the seat belt

shoulder anchor height

(front seats)

1-1. For safe use

click.

The pretensioners help the seat

belts to quickly restrain the

occupants by retracting the seat

belts when the vehicle is sub-

jected to certain types of severe

frontal or side collision or a vehi-

cle rollover.

The pretensioners do not activate

in the event of a minor frontal

impact, a minor side impact or a

rear impact.

■ Replacing the belt after the pre-

tensioner has been activated

If the vehicle is involved in multiple

collisions, the pretensioner will acti-

vate for the first collision, but will not

activate for the second or subse-

quent collisions.

WARNING

■ Adjustable shoulder anchor

Always make sure the shoulder

belt is positioned across the cen-

ter of your shoulder. The belt

should be kept away from your

neck, but not falling off your shoul-

der. Failure to do so could reduce

the amount of protection in an

accident and cause death or seri-

ous injuries in the event of a sud-

den stop, sudden swerve or

accident.

Seat belt pretensioners

(front seats)

WARNING

■ Seat belt pretensioners

Observe the following precautions

to reduce the risk of injury in the

event of sudden braking, sudden

swerving or an accident.

Failure to do so may cause death

or serious injury.

● Do not place anything, such as

a cushion, on the front passen-

ger’s seat.

Doing so will disperse the pas-

senger’s weight, which prevents

the sensor from detecting the

passenger’s weight properly. As

a result, the seat belt preten-

sioner for the front passenger’s

seat may not activate in the

event of a collision.

● If the pretensioner has acti-

vated, the SRS warning light will

come on. In that case, the seat

belt cannot be used again and

must be replaced at your Toyota

dealer.

1-1. For safe use

For safety and security

■ Location of the SRS airbags

 SRS front airbags

SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag

Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from

impact with interior components

SRS knee airbag

Can help provide driver protection

SRS seat cushion airbag

Can help restrain the front passenger

 SRS side and curtain shield airbags

SRS side airbags

Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants

SRS airbags

The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to cer-

tain types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury

to the occupants. They work together with the seat belts to

help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.

SRS airbag system

1-1. For safe use

SRS curtain shield airbags

• Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer seats

• Can help prevent the occupants from being thrown from the vehicle in the

event of vehicle rollover

■ SRS airbag system components

Front impact sensors

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights

Front passenger airbag

Side impact sensors (front door)

Curtain shield airbags

Seat belt pretensioners and force limiters

Side impact sensors (front)

Side airbags

Seat cushion airbag

Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch

Side impact sensors (rear)

Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

Driver’s seat position sensor

1-1. For safe use

For safety and security

Driver airbag

Front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sen-

sors)

Knee airbag

SRS warning light

Airbag sensor assembly

Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed

based on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The

airbag sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on

information obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system

components diagram above. This information includes crash sever-

ity and occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a chemical

reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to

help restrain the motion of the occupants.

■ If the SRS airbags deploy

(inflate)

● Slight abrasions, burns, bruising

etc., may be sustained from SRS

airbags, due to the extremely high

speed deployment (inflation) by

hot gases.

● A loud noise and white powder will

be emitted.

● Parts of the airbag module (steer-

ing wheel hub, airbag cover and

inflator) as well as the front seats,

parts of the front and rear pillars,

and roof side rails, may be hot for

several minutes. The airbag itself

may also be hot.

● The windshield may crack.

● The brakes and stop lights will be

controlled automatically. (P.361)

● The interior lights will turn on auto-

matically. (P.526)

● The emergency flashers will turn

on automatically. (P.618)

● Fuel supply to the engine will be

stopped. (P.627)

● For Safety Connect subscribers, if

any of the following situations

occur, the system is designed to

send an emergency call to the

response center, notifying them of

the vehicle’s location (without

needing to push the “SOS” button)

and an agent will attempt to speak

with the occupants to ascertain

the level of emergency and assis-

tance required. If the occupants

are unable to communicate, the

agent automatically treats the call

as an emergency and helps to dis-

patch the necessary emergency

services. (P.65)

• An SRS airbag is deployed.

• A seat belt pretensioner is acti-

vated.

• The vehicle is involved in a severe

rear-end collision.

■ SRS airbag deployment condi-

tions (SRS front airbags)

● The SRS front airbags will deploy

in the event of an impact that

exceeds the set threshold level

(the level of force corresponding

to an approximately 12-18 mph

[20-30 km/h] frontal collision with

a fixed wall that does not move or

deform).

However, this threshold velocity will

1-1. For safe use

be considerably higher in the follow-

ing situations:

• If the vehicle strikes an object,

such as a parked vehicle or sign

pole, which can move or deform

on impact

• If the vehicle is involved in an

underride collision, such as a colli-

sion in which the front of the vehi-

cle underrides, or goes under, the

bed of a truck

● Depending on the type of collision,

it is possible that only the seat belt

pretensioners will activate.

● The SRS front airbags for the front

passenger will not activate if there

is no passenger sitting in the front

passenger seat. However, the

SRS front airbags for the front

passenger may deploy if luggage

is put in the seat, even if the seat

is unoccupied.

● The SRS seat cushion airbag on

the front passenger seat will not

operate if the occupant is not

wearing a seat belt.

■ SRS airbag deployment condi-

tions (SRS side and curtain

shield airbags)

● The SRS side and curtain shield

airbags will deploy in the event of

an impact that exceeds the set

threshold level (the level of force

corresponding to the impact force

produced by an approximately

3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding

with the vehicle cabin from a

direction perpendicular to the

vehicle orientation at an approxi-

mate speed of 12 -18 mph [20 -30

km/h]).

● Both SRS curtain shield airbags

may deploy in the event of a

severe side collision.

● Both SRS curtain shield airbags

will deploy in the event of vehicle

rollover.

● Both SRS curtain shield airbags

may also deploy in the event of a

severe frontal collision.

■ Conditions under which the

SRS airbags may deploy

(inflate), other than a collision

The SRS front airbags and SRS cur-

tain shield airbags may also deploy

if a serious impact occurs to the

underside of your vehicle. Some

examples are shown in the illustra-

tion.

● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement

or hard surface

● Falling into or jumping over a deep

hole

● Landing hard or falling

The SRS curtain shield airbags may

also deploy under the situations

shown in the illustration.

● The angle of vehicle tip-up is mar-

ginal.

● The vehicle skids and hits a curb

stone.

■ Types of collisions that may not

deploy the SRS airbags (SRS

front airbags)

The SRS front airbags do not gener-

ally inflate if the vehicle is involved

in a side or rear collision, if it rolls

over, or if it is involved in a low-

speed frontal collision. But, when-

ever a collision of any type causes

sufficient forward deceleration of the

vehicle, deployment of the SRS

1-1. For safe use

For safety and security

front airbags may occur.

● Collision from the side

● Collision from the rear

● Vehicle rollover

■ Types of collisions that may not

deploy the SRS airbags (SRS

side and curtain shield airbags)

The SRS side and curtain shield air-

bags may not activate if the vehicle

is subjected to a collision from the

side at certain angles, or a collision

to the side of the vehicle body other

than the passenger compartment.

● Collision from the side to the vehi-

cle body other than the passenger

compartment

● Collision from the side at an angle

The SRS side airbags do not gener-

ally inflate if the vehicle is involved

in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls

over, or if it is involved in a low-

speed side collision.

● Collision from the front

● Collision from the rear

● Vehicle rollover

The SRS curtain shield airbags do

not generally inflate if the vehicle is

involved in a rear collision, if it

pitches end over end, or if it is

involved in a low-speed side or low-

speed frontal collision.

● Collision from the rear

● Pitching end over end

■ When to contact your Toyota

dealer

In the following cases, the vehicle

will require inspection and/or repair.

Contact your Toyota dealer as soon

as possible.

● Any of the SRS airbags have

been inflated.

● The front of the vehicle is dam-

aged or deformed, or was

involved in an accident that was

not severe enough to cause the

SRS front airbags to inflate.

● A portion of a door or its surround-

ing area is damaged, deformed or

has had a hole made in it, or the

1-1. For safe use

vehicle was involved in an acci-

dent that was not severe enough

to cause the SRS side and curtain

shield airbags to inflate.

● The pad section of the steering

wheel, dashboard near the front

passenger airbag or lower portion

of the instrument panel is

scratched, cracked, or otherwise

damaged.

● The front passenger’s seat cush-

ion surface is scratched, cracked,

or otherwise damaged.

● The surface of the seats with the

SRS side airbag is scratched,

cracked, or otherwise damaged.

● The portion of the front pillars, rear

pillars or roof side rail garnishes

(padding) containing the SRS cur-

tain shield airbags inside is

scratched, cracked, or otherwise

damaged.

WARNING

■ SRS airbag precautions

Observe the following precautions

regarding the SRS airbags.

Failure to do so may cause death

or serious injury.

● The driver and all passengers in

the vehicle must wear their seat

belts properly.

The SRS airbags are supple-

mental devices to be used with

the seat belts.

● The SRS driver airbag deploys

with considerable force, and

can cause death or serious

injury especially if the driver is

very close to the airbag. The

National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA)

advises:

Since the risk zone for the driver’s

airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75

mm) of inflation, placing yourself

10 in. (250 mm) from your driver

airbag provides you with a clear

margin of safety. This distance is

measured from the center of the

steering wheel to your breast-

bone. If you sit less than 10 in.

(250 mm) away now, you can

change your driving position in

several ways:

1-1. For safe use

For safety and security

WARNING

• Move your seat to the rear as

far as you can while still reach-

ing the pedals comfortably.

• Slightly recline the back of the

seat.

Although vehicle designs vary,

many drivers can achieve the

10 in. (250 mm) distance, even

with the driver seat all the way

forward, simply by reclining the

back of the seat somewhat. If

reclining the back of your seat

makes it hard to see the road,

raise yourself by using a firm,

non-slippery cushion, or raise

the seat if your vehicle has that

feature.

• If your steering wheel is adjust-

able, tilt it downward. This

points the airbag toward your

chest instead of your head and

neck.

The seat should be adjusted as

recommended by NHTSA above,

while still maintaining control of

the foot pedals, steering wheel,

and your view of the instrument

panel controls.

● If the seat belt extender has

been connected to the front

seat belt buckles but the seat

belt extender has not also been

fastened to the latch plate of the

seat belt, the SRS front airbags

will judge that the driver and

front passenger are wearing the

seat belt even though the seat

belt has not been connected. In

this case, the SRS front airbags

may not activate correctly in a

collision, resulting in death or

serious injury in the event of a

collision. Be sure to wear the

seat belt with the seat belt

extender.

● The SRS front passenger air-

bag also deploys with consider-

able force, and can cause death

or serious injury especially if the

front passenger is very close to

the airbag. The front passenger

seat should be as far from the

airbag as possible with the seat-

back adjusted, so the front pas-

senger sits upright.

● Improperly seated and/or

restrained infants and children

can be killed or seriously injured

by a deploying airbag. An infant

or child who is too small to use

a seat belt should be properly

secured using a child restraint

system. Toyota strongly recom-

mends that all infants and chil-

dren be placed in the rear seats

of the vehicle and properly

restrained. The rear seats are

safer for infants and children

than the front passenger seat.

(P.5 0)

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

● Do not sit on the edge of the

seat or lean against the dash-

board.

● Do not allow a child to stand in

front of the SRS front passenger

airbag unit or sit on the knees of

a front passenger.

● Do not allow the front seat occu-

pants to hold items on their

knees.

● Do not lean against the door,

the roof side rail or the front,

side and rear pillars.

● Do not allow anyone to kneel on

the passenger seat toward the

door or put their head or hands

outside the vehicle.

● Do not attach anything to or

lean anything against areas

such as the dashboard, steering

wheel pad and lower portion of

the instrument panel.

These items can become pro-

jectiles when the SRS driver,

front passenger and knee air-

bags deploy.

● Do not attach anything to areas

such as a door, windshield, side

windows, front or rear pillar, roof

side rail and assist grip.

1-1. For safe use

For safety and security

WARNING

● Vehicles without smart key sys-

tem: Do not attach any heavy,

sharp or hard objects such as

keys and accessories to the

key. The objects may restrict the

SRS knee airbag inflation or be

thrust into the driver’s seat area

by the force of the deploying air-

bag, thus causing a danger.

● Do not hang coat hangers or

other hard objects on the coat

hooks. All of these items could

become projectiles and may

cause death or serious injury,

should the SRS curtain shield

airbags deploy.

● If a vinyl cover is put on the area

where the SRS knee airbag will

deploy, be sure to remove it.

● Do not use seat accessories

which cover the parts where the

SRS side airbags and SRS seat

cushion airbag inflate as they

may interfere with inflation of

the SRS airbags. Such acces-

sories may prevent the side air-

bags and seat cushion airbag

from activating correctly, disable

the system or cause the side

airbags and seat cushion airbag

to inflate accidentally, resulting

in death or serious injury.

● Do not strike or apply significant

levels of force to the area of the

SRS airbag components or the

front doors.

Doing so can cause the SRS

airbags to malfunction.

● Do not touch any of the compo-

nent parts immediately after the

SRS airbags have deployed

(inflated) as they may be hot.

● If breathing becomes difficult

after the SRS airbags have

deployed, open a door or side

window to allow fresh air in, or

leave the vehicle if it is safe to

do so. Wash off any residue as

soon as possible to prevent skin

irritation.

● If the areas where the SRS air-

bags are stored, such as the

steering wheel pad and front

and rear pillar garnishes, are

damaged or cracked, have

them replaced by your Toyota

dealer.

● Do not place anything, such as

a cushion, on the front passen-

ger’s seat. Doing so will

disperse the passenger’s

weight, which prevents the sen-

sor from detecting the passen-

ger’s weight properly. As a

result, the SRS front airbags for

the front passenger may not

deploy in the event of a colli-

sion.

■ Modification and disposal of

SRS airbag system compo-

nents

Do not dispose of your vehicle or

perform any of the following modi-

fications without consulting your

Toyota dealer. The SRS airbags

may malfunction or deploy

(inflate) accidentally, causing

death or serious injury.

● Installation, removal, disassem-

bly and repair of the SRS air-

bags

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

● Repairs, modifications, removal

or replacement of the steering

wheel, instrument panel, dash-

board, seats or seat upholstery,

front, side and rear pillars, roof

side rails, front door panels,

front door trims or front door

speakers

● Modifications to the front door

panel (such as making a hole in

it)

● Repairs or modifications of the

front fender, front bumper, or

side of the occupant compart-

ment

● Installation of a grille guard (bull

bars, kangaroo bar, etc.), snow

plows, winches or roof luggage

carrier

● Modifications to the vehicle’s

suspension system

● Installation of electronic devices

such as mobile two-way radios

and CD players

● Modifications to your vehicle for

a person with a physical disabil-

ity

1-1. For safe use

For safety and security

SRS warning light

Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light

“AIR BAG ON” indicator light

Front passenger occupant classification system

Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant

classification system. This system detects the conditions of

the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the front

passenger airbag and seat cushion airbag in the front passen-

ger side.

System components

WARNING

■ Front passenger occupant

classification system precau-

tions

Observe the following precautions

regarding the front passenger

occupant classification system.

Failure to do so may cause death

or serious injury.

● Wear the seat belt properly.

● Make sure the front passenger’s

seat belt plate has not been left

inserted into the buckle before

someone sits in the front pas-

senger seat.

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

● Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF”

indicator light is not illuminated

when using the seat belt

extender for the front passenger

seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indi-

cator light is illuminated, discon-

nect the extender tongue from

the seat belt buckle, and recon-

nect the seat belt. Reconnect

the seat belt extender after

making sure the “AIR BAG ON”

indicator light is illuminated. If

you use the seat belt extender

while the “AIR BAG OFF” indi-

cator light is illuminated, the

SRS airbags for the front pas-

senger will not activate, which

could cause death or serious

injury in the event of a collision.

● Do not apply a heavy load to the

front passenger seat or equip-

ment (e.g. seatback pocket).

● Do not put weight on the front

passenger seat by putting your

hands or feet on the front pas-

senger seat seatback from the

rear passenger seat.

● Do not let a rear passenger lift

the front passenger seat with

their feet or press on the seat-

back with their legs.

● Do not put objects under the

front passenger seat.

● Do not recline the front passen-

ger seatback so far that it

touches a rear seat. This may

cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indi-

cator light to be illuminated,

which indicates that the SRS

airbags for the front passenger

will not activate in the event of a

severe accident. If the seatback

touches the rear seat, return the

seatback to a position where it

does not touch the rear seat.

Keep the front passenger seat-

back as upright as possible

when the vehicle is moving.

Reclining the seatback exces-

sively may lessen the effective-

ness of the seat belt system.

● If an adult sits in the front pas-

senger seat, the “AIR BAG ON”

indicator light is illuminated. If

the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is

illuminated, ask the passenger

to sit up straight, well back in

the seat, feet on the floor, and

with the seat belt worn correctly.

If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator

still remains illuminated, either

ask the passenger to move to

the rear seat, or if that is not

possible, move the front pas-

senger seat fully rearward.

● When it is unavoidable to install

a forward-facing child restraint

system on the front passenger

seat, install the child restraint

system on the front passenger

seat in the proper order.

(P.5 3)

● Do not modify or remove the

front seats.

● Do not kick the front passenger

seat or subject it to severe

impact. Otherwise, the SRS

warning light may come on to

indicate a malfunction of the

front passenger occupant clas-

sification system. In this case,

contact your Toyota dealer

immediately.

1-1. For safe use

For safety and security

■ Adult

WARNING

● Child restraint systems installed

on the rear seat should not con-

tact the front seatbacks.

● Do not use a seat accessory,

such as a cushion and seat

cover, that covers the seat

cushion surface.

● Do not modify or replace the

upholstery of the front seat.

● Adjust the front passenger seat

so that the head restraint does

not touch the ceiling. If the head

restraint is left in contact with

the ceiling, the system may not

detect the front passenger prop-

erly, leading to improper opera-

tion of the airbags.

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant

classification system

Indicator/warn-

ing light

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”

indicator lights

“AIR BAG ON”

SRS warning light Off

Driver’s and front passenger’s seat

belt reminder light

Off

or flashing

Devices

Front passenger airbag Activated

Front passenger seat cushion airbag

Activated

deactivated

1-1. For safe use

■ Child

■ Child restraint system with infant

■ Unoccupied

Indicator/warn-

ing light

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”

indicator lights

“AIR BAG OFF”

or “AIR BAG

ON”

SRS warning light Off

Driver’s and front passenger’s seat

belt reminder light

Off

or flashing

Devices

Front passenger airbag

Deactivated or

activated

Front passenger seat cushion airbag

Deactivated or

activated

*2, 4

Indicator/warn-

ing light

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”

indicator lights

“AIR BAG OFF”

SRS warning light Off

Driver’s and front passenger’s seat

belt reminder light

Off

or flashing

Devices

Front passenger airbag

Deactivated

Front passenger seat cushion airbag

Indicator/warn-

ing light

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”

indicator lights

“AIR BAG OFF”

SRS warning light

Off

Driver’s and front passenger’s seat

belt reminder light

Devices

Front passenger airbag

Deactivated

Front passenger seat cushion airbag

1-1. For safe use

For safety and security

■ There is a malfunction in the system

:The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller

adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may not recognize

him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique and posture.

:In the event the front passenger is wearing a seat belt.

:In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.

:For some children, child in seat, child in booster seat or child in convert-

ible seat, the system may not recognize him/her as a child. Factors

which may affect this can be the physique or posture.

:Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger

seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on

the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (P.53)

:In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how

to install the child restraint system properly. (P.50)

Indicator/warn-

ing light

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”

indicator lights

“AIR BAG OFF”

SRS warning light

Driver’s and front passenger’s seat

belt reminder light

Devices

Front passenger airbag

Deactivated

Front passenger seat cushion airbag

1-1. For safe use

Exhaust gas precau-

tions

Harmful substance to the

human body is included in

exhaust gases if inhaled.

WARNING

Exhaust gases contain harmful

carbon monoxide (CO), which is

colorless and odorless. Observe

the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause

exhaust gases to enter the vehicle

and may lead to an accident

caused by light-headedness, or

may lead to death or a serious

health hazard.

■ Important points while driving

● Keep the back door closed.

● If you smell exhaust gases in

the vehicle even when the back

door is closed, open the side

windows and have the vehicle

inspected at your Toyota dealer

as soon as possible.

■ When parking

● If the vehicle is in a poorly venti-

lated area or a closed area,

such as a garage, stop the

engine.

● Do not leave the vehicle with

the engine running for a long

time.

If such a situation cannot be

avoided, park the vehicle in an

open space and ensure that

exhaust fumes do not enter the

vehicle interior.

● Do not leave the engine running

in an area with snow build-up,

or where it is snowing. If snow-

banks build up around the vehi-

cle while the engine is running,

exhaust gases may collect and

enter the vehicle.

■ Exhaust pipe

The exhaust system needs to be

checked periodically. If there is a

hole or crack caused by corro-

sion, damage to a joint or abnor-

mal exhaust noise, be sure to

have the vehicle inspected and

repaired by your Toyota dealer.

1-2. Child safety

For safety and security

1-2.Child safety

Riding with children

Observe the following pre-

cautions when children are

in the vehicle.

Use a child restraint system

appropriate for the child,

until the child becomes

large enough to properly

wear the vehicle’s seat belt.

 It is recommended that chil-

dren sit in the rear seats to

avoid accidental contact

with the shift lever, wiper

switch, etc.

 Use the rear door child-pro-

tector lock or the window

lock switch to avoid children

opening the door while driv-

ing or operating the power

window accidentally.

(P.112, 158)

 Do not let small children

operate equipment which

may catch or pinch body

parts, such as the power

window, hood, back door,

seats, etc.

WARNING

■ When children are in the vehi-

cle

Never leave children unattended

in the vehicle, and never allow

children to have or use the key.

Children may be able to start the

vehicle or shift the vehicle into

neutral. There is also a danger

that children may injure them-

selves by playing with the side

windows, the moon roof (if

equipped), the panoramic moon

roof (if equipped) or other features

of the vehicle. In addition, heat

build-up or extremely cold tem-

peratures inside the vehicle can

be fatal to children.

1-2. Child safety

Points to remember: P.50

Child restraint system: P.52

When using a child restraint sys-

tem: P.53

Child restraint system installa-

tion method

• Fixed with a seat belt: P.54

• Fixed with a child restraint

LATCH anchor: P.59

• Using an anchor bracket (for

top tether strap): P.61

The laws of all 50 states of the

U.S.A. as well as Canada now

require the use of child restraint

systems.

 Prioritize and observe the

warnings, as well as the laws

and regulations for child

restraint systems.

 Use a child restraint system

until the child becomes large

enough to properly wear the

vehicle’s seat belt.

 Choose a child restraint sys-

tem that suits your vehicle

and is appropriate to the age

and size of the child.

Child restraint sys-

tems

Before installing a child

restraint system in the vehi-

cle, there are precautions

that need to be observed,

different types of child

restraint systems, as well as

installation methods, etc.,

written in this manual.

Use a child restraint system

when riding with a small child

that cannot properly use a

seat belt. For the child’s

safety, install the child

restraint system to a rear seat.

Be sure to follow the installa-

tion method that is in the oper-

ation manual enclosed with

the restraint system.

Table of contents

Points to remember

WARNING

■ When a child is riding

Observe the following precau-

tions.

Failure to do so may result in

death or serious injury.

● For effective protection in auto-

mobile accidents and sudden

stops, a child must be properly

restrained, using a seat belt or

child restraint system which is

correctly installed. For installa-

tion details, refer to the opera-

tion manual enclosed with the

child restraint system. General

installation instructions are pro-

vided in this manual.

1-2. Child safety

For safety and security

WARNING

● Toyota strongly urges the use of

a proper child restraint system

that conforms to the weight and

size of the child, installed on the

rear seat. According to accident

statistics, the child is safer when

properly restrained in the rear

seat than in the front seat.

● Holding a child in your or some-

one else’s arms is not a substi-

tute for a child restraint system.

In an accident, the child can be

crushed against the windshield

or between the holder and the

interior of the vehicle.

■ Handling the child restraint

system

If the child restraint system is not

properly fixed in place, the child or

other passengers may be seri-

ously injured or even killed in the

event of sudden braking, sudden

swerving, or an accident.

● If the vehicle were to receive a

strong impact from an accident,

etc., it is possible that the child

restraint system has damage

that is not readily visible. In

such cases, do not reuse the

restraint system.

● Make sure you have complied

with all installation instructions

provided with the child restraint

system manufacturer and that

the system is properly secured.

● Keep the child restraint system

properly secured on the seat

even if it is not in use. Do not

store the child restraint system

unsecured in the passenger

compartment.

● If it is necessary to detach the

child restraint system, remove it

from the vehicle or store it

securely in the luggage com-

partment.

1-2. Child safety

■ Types of child restraint system installation methods

Confirm with the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint

system about the installation of the child restraint system.

Child restraint system

Installation method Page

Seat belt attachment P.5 4

Child restraint LATCH

anchors attachment

P.5 9

Anchor brackets (for

top tether strap) attach-

ment

P.6 1

1-2. Child safety

For safety and security

■ When installing a child

restraint system to a front

passenger seat

For the safety of a child, install a

child restraint system to a rear

seat. When installing a child

restraint system to the front pas-

senger seat is unavoidable,

adjust the seat as follows and

install the child restraint system.

 Adjust the seatback angle to

the most upright position.

 Move the front seat fully rear-

ward.

 If the head restraint interferes

with the child restraint system

installation and the head

restraint can be removed,

remove the head restraint.

Otherwise, put the head

restraint in the upper most

position.

When using a child

restraint system

WARNING

■ When using a child restraint

system

Observe the following precau-

tions.

Failure to do so may result in

death or serious injury.

● Never install a rear-facing child

restraint system on the front

passenger seat even if the “AIR

BAG OFF” indicator light is illu-

minated. In the event of an acci-

dent, the force of the rapid

inflation of the front passenger

airbag can cause death or seri-

ous injury to the child if the rear-

facing child restraint system is

installed on the front passenger

seat.

● A forward-facing child restraint

system may be installed on the

front passenger seat only when

it is unavoidable. A child

restraint system that requires a

top tether strap should not be

used in the front passenger seat

since there is no top tether strap

anchor for the front passenger

seat.

1-2. Child safety

A child restraint system for a

small child or baby must itself be

properly restrained on the seat

with the lap portion of the

lap/shoulder belt.

■ Installing child restraint

system using a seat belt

(child restraint lock func-

tion belt)

Install the child restraint system

in accordance to the operation

● A forward-facing child restraint

system may be installed on the

front passenger seat only when

it is unavoidable. When install-

ing a forward-facing child

restraint system on the front

passenger seat, adjust the seat-

back angle to the most upright

position, move the seat to the

rearmost position, even if the

“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is

illuminated.

If the head restraint interferes

with the child restraint system

installation and the head

restraint can be removed,

remove the head restraint.

WARNING

● Do not allow the child to lean

his/her head or any part of

his/her body against the door or

the area of the seat, front or rear

pillars, or roof side rails from

which the SRS side airbags or

SRS curtain shield airbags

deploy even if the child is

seated in the child restraint sys-

tem. It is dangerous if the SRS

side and curtain shield airbags

inflate, and the impact could

cause death or serious injury to

the child.

● When a booster seat is

installed, always ensure that the

shoulder belt is positioned

across the center of the child’s

shoulder. The belt should be

kept away from the child’s neck,

but not so that it could fall off the

child’s shoulder.

● Use a child restraint system

suitable to the age and size of

the child and install it to the rear

seat.

● If the driver’s seat interferes

with the child restraint system

and prevents it from being

attached correctly, attach the

child restraint system to the

right-hand rear seat.

● Adjust the front passenger seat

so that it does not interfere with

the child restraint system.

Child restraint system

fixed with a seat belt

1-2. Child safety

For safety and security

manual enclosed with the child

restraint system.

■ Rear-facing  Infant

seat/convertible seat

1 Adjust the rear seat.

If there is a gap between the child

restraint system and the seatback,

adjust the seatback angle until

good contact is achieved.

2 Place the child restraint sys-

tem on the rear seat facing

the rear of the vehicle.

3 Run the seat belt through the

child restraint system and

insert the plate into the

buckle. Make sure that the

belt is not twisted.

4 Fully extend the shoulder belt

and allow it to retract to put it

in lock mode. In lock mode,

the belt cannot be extended.

5 While pushing the child

restraint system down into

the rear seat, allow the shoul-

der belt to retract until the

child restraint system is

securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has

retracted to a point where there is

no slack in the belt, pull the belt to

check that it cannot be extended.

6 After installing the child

restraint system, rock it back

and forth to ensure that it is

installed securely. (P. 58 )

■ Forward-facing  Convert-

ible seat

1 Adjust the seat.

When using the front passenger

seat: If installing the child restraint

system to the front passenger seat

is unavoidable, refer to P.53 for

front passenger seat adjustment.

1-2. Child safety

When using the rear seat: If there is

a gap between the child restraint

system and the seatback, adjust

the seatback angle until good con-

tact is achieved.

2 If the head restraint interferes

with the child restraint system

installation and the head

restraint can be removed,

remove the head restraint.

(P.141)

3 Place the child restraint sys-

tem on the seat facing the

front of the vehicle.

4 Run the seat belt through the

child restraint system and

insert the plate into the

buckle. Make sure that the

belt is not twisted.

5 Fully extend the shoulder belt

and allow it to retract to put it

in lock mode. In lock mode,

the belt cannot be extended.

6 While pushing the child

restraint system into the rear

seat, allow the shoulder belt

to retract until the child

restraint system is securely in

place.

After the shoulder belt has

retracted to a point where there is

no slack in the belt, pull the belt to

1-2. Child safety

For safety and security

check that it cannot be extended.

7 If the child restraint has a top

tether strap, follow the child

restraint manufacturer’s

operation manual regarding

the installation, using the top

tether strap to latch onto the

top tether strap anchor.

(P. 61 )

8 After installing the child

restraint system, rock it back

and forth to ensure that it is

installed securely. (P. 58 )

■ Booster seat

1 If installing the child restraint

system to the front passen-

ger seat is unavoidable, refer

to P.53 for front passenger

seat adjustment.

2 High back type: If the head

restraint interferes with your

child restraint system, and

the head restraint can be

removed, remove the head

restraint. (P.141)

3 Place the child restraint sys-

tem on the seat facing the

front of the vehicle.

 Booster type

 High back type

4 Sit the child in the child

restraint system. Fit the seat

belt to the child restraint sys-

tem according to the manu-

facturer’s instructions and

insert the plate into the

1-2. Child safety

buckle. Make sure that the

belt is not twisted.

Check that the shoulder belt is cor-

rectly positioned over the child’s

shoulder and that the lap belt is as

low as possible. (P. 2 9 )

■ Removing a child restraint

system installed with a seat

belt

Press the buckle release button

and fully retract the seat belt.

When releasing the buckle, the

child restraint system may spring

up due to the rebound of the seat

cushion. Release the buckle while

holding down the child restraint

system.

Since the seat belt automatically

reels itself, slowly return it to the

stowing position.

WARNING

■ When installing a child

restraint system

Observe the following precau-

tions.

Failure to do so may result in

death or serious injury.

● Do not allow children to play

with the seat belt. If the seat belt

becomes twisted around a

child’s neck, it may lead to

choking or other serious injuries

that could result in death.

If this occurs and the buckle

cannot be unfastened, scissors

should be used to cut the belt.

● Ensure that the belt and plate

are securely locked and the

seat belt is not twisted.

● Shake the child restraint system

left and right, and forward and

backward to ensure that it has

been securely installed.

● After securing a child restraint

system, never adjust the seat.

● When a booster seat is

installed, always ensure that the

shoulder belt is positioned

across the center of the child’s

shoulder. The belt should be

kept away from the child’s neck,

but not so that it could fall off the

child’s shoulder.

● Follow all installation instruc-

tions provided by the child

restraint system manufacturer.

1-2. Child safety

For safety and security

■ Child restraint LATCH

anchors

LATCH anchors are provided for

the outboard rear seats.

■ When installing in the rear

outboard seats

Install the child restraint system

in accordance to the operation

manual enclosed with the child

restraint system.

1 Adjust the seat.

If there is a gap between the child

restraint system and the seatback,

adjust the seatback angle until

good contact is achieved.

2 If the head restraint interferes

with the child restraint system

installation and the head

restraint can be removed,

● When securing some types of

child restraint systems in rear

seats, it may not be possible to

properly use the seat belts in

positions next to the child

restraint without interfering with

it or affecting seat belt effective-

ness. Be sure your seat belt fits

snugly across your shoulder

and low on your hips. If it does

not, or if it interferes with the

child restraint, move to a differ-

ent position. Failure to do so

may result in death or serious

injury.

● When installing a child restraint

system in the center rear seat,

adjust both seatbacks at the

same angle. Otherwise, the

child restraint system cannot be

securely restrained and this

may cause death or serious

injuries in the event of sudden

braking, sudden swerving or an

accident.

■ When installing a booster

seat

To prevent the belt from going into

ALR lock mode, do not fully

extend the shoulder belt. ALR

mode causes the belt to tighten

only. This could cause injury or

discomfort to the child. (P. 3 1 )

WARNING

■ Do not use a seat belt

extender

If a seat belt extender is used

when installing a child restraint

system, the seat belt will not

securely hold the child restraint

system, which could cause death

or serious injury to the child or

other passengers in the event of

sudden braking, sudden swerv-

ing or an accident.

Child restraint system

fixed with a child restraint

LATCH anchor

1-2. Child safety

remove the head restraint.

(P.141)

 With flexible lower attach-

ments

3 Latch the hooks of the lower

attachments onto the LATCH

anchors.

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child

restraint system indicates

the presence of a lower con-

nector system.

 With rigid lower attachments

3 Latch the buckles onto the

LATCH anchors.

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child

restraint system indicates

the presence of a lower con-

nector system.

4 If the child restraint has a top

tether strap, follow the child

restraint manufacturer’s

operation manual regarding

the installation, using the top

tether strap to latch onto the

top tether strap anchor.

(P.61)

5 After installing the child

restraint system, rock it back

and forth to ensure that it is

installed securely. (P. 58 )

1-2. Child safety

For safety and security

■ When installing in the rear

center seat

There are no LATCH anchors

behind the rear center seat.

However, the inboard LATCH

anchors of the outboard seats,

which are 17.3 in. (440 mm)

apart, can be used if the child

restraint system manufacturer’s

instructions permit use of those

anchors with the anchor spacing

stated.

Child restraint systems with rigid

lower attachments cannot be

installed in the center seat. This

type of child restraint system

can only be installed in the out-

board seat.

■ Laws and regulations pertain-

ing to anchors

The LATCH system conforms to

FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.

Child restraint systems conforming

to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 speci-

fications can be used.

This vehicle is designed to conform

to SAE J1819.

■ Anchor brackets (for top

tether strap)

Anchor brackets are provided

for each rear seat.

Use anchor brackets when fix-

ing the top tether strap.

WARNING

■ When installing a child

restraint system

Observe the following precau-

tions.

Failure to do so may result in

death or serious injury.

● When using the LATCH

anchors, be sure that there are

no foreign objects around the

anchors and that the seat belt is

not caught behind the child

restraint system.

● Follow all installation instruc-

tions provided by the child

restraint system manufacturer.

● Never attach two child restraint

system attachments to the

same anchor. In a collision, one

anchor may not be strong

enough to hold two child

restraint system attachments

and may break.

If the LATCH anchors are

already in use, use the seat belt

to install a child restraint system

in the center seat.

● When securing some types of

child restraint systems in rear

seats, it may not be possible to

properly use the seat belts in

positions next to the child

restraint without interfering with

it or affecting seat belt effective-

ness. Be sure your seat belt fits

snugly across your shoulder

and low on your hips. If it does

not, or if it interferes with the

child restraint, move to a differ-

ent position. Failure to do so

may result in death or serious

injury.

● If the seat is adjusted, reconfirm

the security of the child restraint

system.

Using an anchor bracket

(for top tether strap)

1-2. Child safety

 Outboard rear seats

Anchor brackets

Top tether strap

 Center rear seat

Anchor bracket

Top tether strap

■ Fixing the top tether strap

to the anchor bracket

Install the child restraint system

in accordance to the operation

manual enclosed with the child

restraint system.

 Outboard rear seats

1 Remove the head restraint.

(P.141)

2 Latch the hook onto the

anchor bracket and tighten

the top tether strap.

Make sure the top tether strap is

securely latched. (P.5 8)

Hook

Top tether strap

3 If the head restraint does not

interfere with the child

1-2. Child safety

For safety and security

restraint system installation,

install the head restraint.

 Center rear seat

1 Adjust the head restraint to

the upmost position.

If the head restraint interferes with

your child restraint system, and the

head restraint can be removed,

remove the head restraint.

(P.141)

2 Latch the hook onto the

anchor bracket and tighten

the top tether strap.

Make sure the top tether strap is

securely latched.

When installing the child restraint

system with the head restraint

being raised, be sure to have the

top tether strap pass underneath

the head restraint.

Hook

Top tether strap

■ Laws and regulations pertain-

ing to anchors

The LATCH system conforms to

FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.

Child restraint systems conforming

to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 speci-

fications can be used.

This vehicle is designed to conform

to SAE J1819.

WARNING

■ When installing a child

restraint system

Observe the following precau-

tions.

Failure to do so may result in

death or serious injury.

● Firmly attach the top tether

strap and make sure that the

belt is not twisted.

● Do not attach the top tether

strap to anything other than the

anchor bracket.

● After securing a child restraint

system, never adjust the seat.

● Follow all installation instruc-

tions provided by the child

restraint system manufacturer.

1-2. Child safety

WARNING

● Center rear seat: When install-

ing the child restraint system

with the head restraint being

raised, after the head restraint

has been raised and then the

anchor bracket has been fixed,

do not lower the head restraint.

1-3. Emergency assistance

For safety and security

1-3.Emergency assistance

: If equipped

Microphone

“SOS” button

LED light indicators

Safety Connect

Safety Connect is a sub-

scription-based telematics

service that uses Global

Positioning System (GPS)

data and embedded cellular

technology to provide

safety and security features

to subscribers. Safety Con-

nect is supported by

Toyota’s designated

response center, which

operates 24 hours per day, 7

days per week.

Safety Connect service is

available by subscription on

select, telematics hardware-

equipped vehicles.

By using the Safety Connect

service, you are agreeing to

be bound by the Telematics

Subscription Service Agree-

ment and its Terms and

Conditions, as in effect and

amended from time to time,

a current copy of which is

available at Toyota.com in

the United States,

Toyotapr.com in Puerto Rico

and Toyota.ca in Canada. All

use of the Safety Connect

service is subject to such

then-applicable Terms and

Conditions.

System components

1-3. Emergency assistance

■ Certification for the Safety Connect

Subscribers have the following

Safety Connect services avail-

able:

 Automatic Collision Notifica-

tion

Helps drivers receive necessary

response from emergency service

providers. (

P. 68)

: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2

 Stolen Vehicle Location

Helps drivers in the event of vehicle

theft. (

P.6 8 )

 Emergency Assistance Button

Services

1-3. Emergency assistance

For safety and security

(“SOS”)

Connects drivers to response-cen-

ter support. (

P. 68)

 Enhanced Roadside Assis-

tance

Provides drivers various on-road

assistance. (

P.6 9)

After you have signed the

Telematics Subscription Service

Agreement and are enrolled,

you can begin receiving ser-

vices.

A variety of subscription terms

are available for purchase. Con-

tact your Toyota dealer, call the

following appropriate Customer

Experience Center or push the

“SOS” button in your vehicle for

further subscription details.

 The United States

1-800-331-4331

 Canada

1-888-869-6828

 Puerto Rico

1-877-855-8377

■ Safety Connect Services Infor-

mation

● Phone calls using the vehicle’s

Bluetooth

technology will not be

possible when Safety Connect is

active and in use.

● Safety Connect is available begin-

ning Fall 2009 on select Toyota

models (in the contiguous United

States only). Contact with the

Safety Connect response center

is dependent upon the telematics

device being in operative condi-

tion, cellular connection availabil-

ity, and GPS satellite signal

reception, which can limit the abil-

ity to reach the response center or

receive emergency service sup-

port. Enrollment and Telematics

Subscription Service Agreement

are required. A variety of subscrip-

tion terms are available; charges

vary by subscription term selected

and location.

● Automatic Collision Notification,

Emergency Assistance and Stolen

Vehicle Location are available in

the United States, including

Hawaii and Alaska, Puerto Rico

and Canada, and Enhanced

Roadside Assistance are avail-

able in the United States, Puerto

Rico and Canada.

● Automatic Collision Notification,

Emergency Assistance, Stolen

Vehicle and Enhanced Road

Assistance are not available in the

U.S. Virgin Islands.

For vehicles first sold in the U.S.

Virgin Islands, no Safety Connect

services will function in or outside

the U.S. Virgin Islands.

● Safety Connect services are not

subject to section 255 of the Tele-

communications Act and the

device is not TTY compatible.

■ Languages

The Safety Connect response cen-

ter will offer support in multiple lan-

guages. The Safety Connect system

will offer voice prompts in English,

Spanish, and French. Please indi-

cate your language of choice when

enrolling.

■ When contacting the response

center

You may be unable to contact the

response center if the network is

busy.

Subscription

1-3. Emergency assistance

When the engine switch is

turned to ON, the red indicator

light comes on for 2 seconds

then turns off. Afterward, the

green indicator light comes on,

indicating that the service is

active.

The following indicator light pat-

terns indicate specific system

usage conditions:

 Green indicator light on =

Active service

 Green indicator light flashing

= Safety Connect call in pro-

cess

 Red indicator light (except at

vehicle start-up) = System

malfunction (contact your

Toyota dealer)

 No indicator light (off) =

Safety Connect service not

active

■ Automatic Collision Notifi-

cation

In case of either airbag deploy-

ment or severe rear-end colli-

sion, the system is designed to

automatically call the response

center. The responding agent

receives the vehicle’s location

and attempts to speak with the

vehicle occupants to assess the

level of emergency. If the occu-

pants are unable to communi-

cate, the agent automatically

treats the call as an emergency,

contacts the nearest emer-

gency services provider to

describe the situation, and

requests that assistance be sent

to the location.

■ Stolen Vehicle Location

If your vehicle is stolen, Safety

Connect can work with local

authorities to assist them in

locating and recovering the

vehicle. After filing a police

report, call the Customer Experi-

ence Center at 1-800-331-4331

in the United States, 1-877-855-

8377 in Puerto Rico or 1-888-

869-6828 in Canada, and follow

the prompts for Safety Connect

to initiate this service.

In addition to assisting law

enforcement with recovery of a

stolen vehicle, Safety-Connect-

equipped vehicle location data

may, under certain circum-

stances, be shared with third

parties to locate your vehicle.

Further information is available

at Toyota.com in the United

States, Toyotapr.com in Puerto

Rico and Toyota.ca in Canada.

■ Emergency Assistance But-

ton (“SOS”)

In the event of an emergency on

the road, push the “SOS” button

to reach the Safety Connect

response center. The answer-

Safety Connect LED light

Indicators

Safety Connect services

1-3. Emergency assistance

For safety and security

ing agent will determine your

vehicle’s location, assess the

emergency, and dispatch the

necessary assistance required.

If you accidentally press the “SOS”

button, tell the response-center

agent that you are not experiencing

an emergency.

■ Enhanced Roadside Assis-

tance

Enhanced Roadside Assistance

adds GPS data to the already

included warranty-based Toyota

roadside service.

Subscribers can press the

“SOS” button to reach a Safety

Connect response-center agent,

who can help with a wide range

of needs, such as: towing, flat

tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a

description of the Enhanced

Roadside Assistance services

and their limitations, please see

the Safety Connect Terms and

Conditions, which are available

at Toyota.com in the United

States, Toyotapr.com in Puerto

Rico and Toyota.ca in Canada.

Important! Read this informa-

tion before using Safety Con-

nect.

■ Exposure to radio fre-

quency signals

The Safety Connect system

installed in your vehicle is a low-

power radio transmitter and

receiver. It receives and also

sends out radio frequency (RF)

signals.

In August 1996, the Federal

Communications Commission

(FCC) adopted RF exposure

guidelines with safety levels for

mobile wireless phones. Those

guidelines are consistent with

the safety standards previously

set by the following U.S. and

international standards bodies.

 ANSI (American National

Standards Institute) C95.1

[1992]

 NCRP (National Council on

Radiation Protection and

Measurement) Report 86

[1986]

 ICNIRP (International Com-

mission on Non-Ionizing Radi-

ation Protection) [1996]

Those standards were based on

comprehensive and periodic

evaluations of the relevant sci-

entific literature. Over 120 scien-

tists, engineers, and physicians

from universities, and govern-

ment health agencies and

industries reviewed the avail-

able body of research to

develop the ANSI Standard

(C95.1).

The design of Safety Connect

complies with the FCC guide-

lines in addition to those stan-

dards.

Safety information for

Safety Connect

1-4. Theft deterrent system

1-4.Theft deterrent system

 Vehicles without smart key

system

The indicator light flashes after

the key has been removed from

the engine switch to indicate

that the system is operating.

The indicator light stops flashing

after the registered key has

been inserted into the engine

switch to indicate that the sys-

tem has been canceled.

 Vehicles with smart key sys-

tem

The indicator light flashes after

the engine switch has been

turned to OFF to indicate that

the system is operating.

The indicator light stops flashing

after the engine switch has been

turned to ACC or ON to indicate

that the system has been can-

celed.

■ System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free

type engine immobilizer system.

■ Conditions that may cause the

system to malfunction

● If the grip portion of the key is in

contact with a metallic object

● If the key is in close proximity to or

touching a key to the security sys-

tem (key with a built-in transpon-

der chip) of another vehicle

Engine immobilizer

system

The vehicle’s keys have

built-in transponder chips

that prevent the engine from

starting if a key has not

been previously registered

in the vehicle’s on-board

computer.

Never leave the keys inside

the vehicle when you leave

the vehicle.

This system is designed to

help prevent vehicle theft but

does not guarantee absolute

security against all vehicle

thefts.

Operating the system

1-4. Theft deterrent system

For safety and security

■ Certification for the engine immobilizer system

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, American Samoa, Guam, Saipan

and Puerto Rico

 For vehicles sold in Canada

1-4. Theft deterrent system

NOTICE

■ To ensure the system oper-

ates correctly

Do not modify or remove the sys-

tem. If modified or removed, the

proper operation of the system

cannot be guaranteed.

1-4. Theft deterrent system

For safety and security

: If equipped

■ Items to check before lock-

ing the vehicle

To prevent unexpected trigger-

ing of the alarm and vehicle

theft, make sure of the following:

 Nobody is in the vehicle.

 The side windows and moon

roof (if equipped) or pan-

oramic moon roof (if

equipped) are closed before

the alarm is set.

 No valuables or other per-

sonal items are left in the

vehicle.

■ Setting

Close the doors and hood, and

lock all the doors. The system

will be set automatically after 30

seconds.

The security indicator changes from

being on to flashing when the sys-

tem is set.

■ Canceling or stopping

Do one of the following to deac-

tivate or stop the alarm:

 Unlock the doors.

 Turn the engine switch to

ACC or ON, or start the

engine. (The alarm will be

deactivated or stopped after a

few seconds.)

■ System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free

type alarm system.

■ Triggering of the alarm

The alarm may be triggered in the

following situations:

Alarm

The alarm uses light and

sound to give an alert when

an intrusion is detected.

The alarm is triggered in the

following situations when

the alarm is set:

 Vehicles without smart key

system: A locked door is

unlocked or opened in any

way other than using the

wireless remote control or

key. (The doors will lock

again automatically.)

 Vehicles with smart key sys-

tem: A locked door is

unlocked or opened in any

way other than using the

entry function, wireless

remote control or mechani-

cal key. (The doors will lock

again automatically.)

 The hood is opened.

Setting/canceling/stop-

ping the alarm system

1-4. Theft deterrent system

(Stopping the alarm deactivates the

alarm system.)

● A person inside the vehicle opens

a door or hood, or unlocks the

vehicle using an inside lock but-

ton.

● The battery is recharged or

replaced when the vehicle is

locked. (P.655)

■ Alarm-operated door lock

In the following cases, depending

on the situation, the door may auto-

matically lock to prevent improper

entry into the vehicle:

● When a person remaining in the

vehicle unlocks the door and the

alarm is activated.

● While the alarm is activated, a

person remaining in the vehicle

unlocks the door.

● When recharging or replacing the

battery.

NOTICE

■ To ensure the system oper-

ates correctly

Do not modify or remove the sys-

tem. If modified or removed, the

proper operation of the system

cannot be guaranteed.

Vehicle status information and indicators

Vehicle status informa-

tion and indicators

2-1. Instrument cluster

Warning lights and indica-

tors...............................76

Gauges and meters (with

4.2-inch display)...........82

Gauges and meters (with

7-inch display).............85

Multi-information display 89

Fuel consumption informa-

tion ...............................99

2-1. Instrument cluster

2-1.Instrument cluster

For the purpose of explanation, the following illustrations display all

warning lights and indicators illuminated.

■ With 4.2-inch display

The units used on the meters and some indicators may differ depending on

the target region.

■ With 7-inch display

The display of the speedometer can be selected from two types,

analog or digital. (P.9 4 )

Warning lights and indicators

The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster,

center panel and outside rear view mirrors inform the driver

of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.

Instrument cluster

2-1. Instrument cluster

Vehicle status information and indicators

 When analog speedometer is displayed

The units used on the meters and some indicators may differ depending on

the target region.

 When digital speedometer is displayed

The units used on the meters and some indicators may differ depending on

the target region.

Warning lights inform the driver

of malfunctions in the indicated

vehicle’s systems.

Warning lights

(U.S.A.)

Brake system warn-

ing light

(P.628)

(Canada)

(Red)

Brake system warn-

ing light

(P.628)

2-1. Instrument cluster

:These lights turn on when the

engine switch is turned to ON to

(Yellow)

Brake system warn-

ing light

(P.628)

Charging system

warning light

(P.628)

High coolant tempera-

ture warning light

(P.629)

Low engine oil pres-

sure warning light

(P.629)

(U.S.A.)

Malfunction indicator

lamp

(P. 62 9)

(Canada)

Malfunction indicator

lamp

(P. 62 9)

SRS warning light

(P.629)

(U.S.A.)

ABS warning light

(P.630)

(Canada)

ABS warning light

(P.630)

(Red/yellow)

Electric power steer-

ing system warning

light

(P.630)

(Flashes or

illuminates)

PCS warning light

(P.630)

(Orange)

LTA indicator

(P.631)

(Flashes)

Stop & Start cancel

indicator

(if

equipped) (P.631)

(Flashes)

Intuitive parking assist

OFF indicator

(if

equipped) (P.631)

PKSB OFF indica-

tor

(if equipped)

(P.632)

(Flashes)

RCTA OFF indicator

(if equipped) (P.632)

Slip indicator light

(P.632)

Brake Override Sys-

tem/Drive-Start Con-

trol/PKSB (if

equipped) warning

light

(P.633)

(Flashes)

Brake hold operated

indicator

(P.633)

(U.S.A.)

(Flashes)

Parking brake indica-

tor (P.634)

(Canada)

(Flashes)

Parking brake indica-

tor (P.634)

Tire pressure warning

light

(if equipped)

(P.634)

Low fuel level warn-

ing light (P.634)

Driver’s and front pas-

senger’s seat belt

reminder light

(P.635)

Rear passengers’ seat

belt reminder light (if

equipped) (P.635)

2-1. Instrument cluster

Vehicle status information and indicators

indicate that a system check is

being performed. They will turn

off after the engine is started, or

after a few seconds. There may

be a malfunction in a system if

the light does not come on, or

turn off. Have the vehicle

inspected by your Toyota dealer.

:This light illuminates on the

multi-information display with a

message.

:Intuitive parking assist OFF indi-

cator turns on when the engine

switch is turned to ON while the

Intuitive parking assist function is

on. It will turn off after a few sec-

onds.

The indicators inform the driver

of the operating state of the

vehicle’s various systems.

WARNING

■ If a safety system warning

light does not come on

Should a safety system light such

as the ABS and SRS warning light

not come on when you start the

engine, this could mean that

these systems are not available to

help protect you in an accident,

which could result in death or seri-

ous injury. Have the vehicle

inspected by your Toyota dealer

immediately if this occurs.

Indicators

Turn signal indicator

(P.202)

(U.S.A.)

Headlight indicator

(P.209)

(Canada)

Tail light indicator

(P.209)

Headlight high beam

indicator (P. 2 11)

Automatic High Beam

indicator (P.212)

Fog light indicator (if

equipped) (P.437)

Smart key system

indicator

(if

equipped) (P.194)

Cruise control indica-

tor (P.250)

Dynamic radar cruise

control indicator

(P.250)

Cruise control “SET”

indicator (P.250)

LTA indicator

(P.242)

Intuitive parking assist

OFF indicator

*3, 4

(if

equipped) (P.271)

PKSB OFF indicator

*3, 5

(if equipped) (



P.278)

2-1. Instrument cluster

:This light illuminates on the

multi-information display with a

message.

:Depending on the operating con-

ditions of the system, the color

and state (illuminated/blinking) of

the indicator change.

:The light comes on when the

system is turned off.

:Intuitive parking assist OFF indi-

cator turns on when the engine

switch is turned to ON while the

Intuitive parking assist function is

on. It will turn off after a few sec-

onds.

:These lights turn on when the

engine switch is turned to ON to

indicate that a system check is

being performed. They will turn

off after the engine is started, or

after a few seconds. There may

be a malfunction in a system if

the lights do not turn on, or turn

off. Have the vehicle inspected

by your Toyota dealer.

:This light illuminates on the out-

(Flashes)

Slip indicator light

(P. 36 1)

VSC OFF indicator

*3,

(P.362)

PCS warning light

*3, 5

(P. 23 1)

BSM outside rear view

mirror indicators

*5, 6

(if

equipped) (P.261)

BSM indicator (if

equipped) (P.261)

RCTA OFF indicator

*3, 5

(if equipped) (



P.261)

Stop & Start indica-

tor

(if equipped)

(P. 34 5)

Stop & Start cancel

indicator

*3, 5

(if

equipped) (P.346)

Brake hold standby

indicator

(P.206)

Brake hold operated

indicator

(P.206)

Security indicator

(P.70, 73)

Low outside tempera-

ture indicator

(P.83, 87)

Eco Driving Indicator

Light

(P. 9 2 )

(U.S.A.)

Parking brake indica-

tor (P.203)

(Canada)

Parking brake indica-

tor (P.203)

Eco drive mode indi-

cator (P.351)

Sport mode indicator

(P.351)

Mud & sand mode

indicator (if equipped)

(P.354)

Rock & dirt mode indi-

cator (if equipped)

(P.354)

Snow mode indicator

(if equipped) (P.357)

Downhill assist control

system indicator

(if

equipped) (P.358)

“AIR BAG ON/OFF”

indicator

*5, 8

(P. 43 )

2-1. Instrument cluster

Vehicle status information and indicators

side rear view mirrors.

:When the outside temperature is

approximately 37°F (3°C) or

lower, the indicator will flash for

approximately 10 seconds, then

stay on.

:This light illuminates on the cen-

ter panel.

■ BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) out-

side rear view mirror indicators

(if equipped)

In order to confirm operation, the

BSM outside rear view mirror indica-

tors illuminate in the following situa-

tions:

● When the engine switch is turned

to ON while the BSM function is

enabled on the screen of the

multi-information display.

● When the BSM function is

enabled on the screen of the

multi-information display while the

engine switch is in ON.

If the system is functioning correctly,

the BSM outside rear view mirror

indicators will turn off after a few

seconds.

If the BSM outside rear view mirror

indicators do not illuminate or do not

turn off, there may be a malfunction

in the system. If this occurs, have

the vehicle inspected by your Toyota

dealer.

2-1. Instrument cluster

The units used on the meter and display may differ depending on the target

region.

Tachometer

Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute

Outside temperature (P. 8 3)

Clock (P. 8 4)

Multi-information display

Presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data (P. 89 )

Displays warning messages if a malfunction occurs (P.639)

Speedometer

Displays the vehicle speed

Fuel gauge

Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank

Odometer and trip meter

Odometer:

Displays the total distance that the vehicle has been driven

Trip meter:

Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last

Gauges and meters (with 4.2-inch display)

The meters display various drive information.

Meter display

2-1. Instrument cluster

Vehicle status information and indicators

reset. Trip meters “A” and “B” can be used to record and display different

distances independently.

Shift position and shift range indicator

Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range (P.199)

Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the engine coolant temperature

■ The meters and display illumi-

nate when

The engine switch is in ON.

■ Outside temperature display

● In the following situations, the cor-

rect outside temperature may not

be displayed, or the display may

take longer than normal to

change.

• When stopped, or driving at low

speeds (less than 12 mph [20

km/h])

• When the outside temperature

has changed suddenly (at the

entrance/exit of a garage, tunnel,

etc.)

● When “--” or “E” is displayed, the

system may be malfunctioning.

Take your vehicle to your Toyota

dealer.

● Displays the outside temperature

within the range of -40°F (-40°C)

to 122°F (50°C).

● When the outside temperature is

approximately 37°F (3°C) or

lower, the indicator will flash

for approximately 10 seconds,

then stay on.

■ Liquid crystal display

P.9 0

WARNING

■ The information display at

low temperatures

Allow the interior of the vehicle to

warm up before using the liquid

crystal information display. At

extremely low temperatures, the

display monitor may respond

slowly, and display changes may

be delayed.

For example, there is a lag

between the driver’s shifting and

the new gear number appearing

on the display. This lag could

cause the driver to downshift

again, causing rapid and exces-

sive engine braking and possibly

an accident resulting in death or

injury.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the

engine and its components

● Do not let the indicator needle

of the tachometer enter the red

zone, which indicates the maxi-

mum engine speed.

● The engine may be overheating

if the engine coolant tempera-

ture gauge is in the red zone

(“H”). In this case, immediately

stop the vehicle in a safe place,

and check the engine after it

has cooled completely.

(P.659)

2-1. Instrument cluster

Switches the items of the odom-

eter, trip meter A and trip meter

B by pressing the “ODO TRIP”

switch.

When the trip meter is dis-

played, pressing and holding the

switch will reset the trip meter.

The brightness of the instrument

panel lights can be adjusted by

turning the dial.

1 Brighter

2 Darker

■ Instrument cluster brightness

adjustment

The instrument cluster brightness

levels when the tail lights are on and

off can be adjusted individually.

However, when the surroundings

are bright (daytime, etc.), turning on

the tail lights will not change the

instrument cluster brightness.

The clocks can be adjusted on

the audio system screen.

 Vehicles with Audio

P.415

 Vehicles with Audio Plus or

Premium Audio

Refer to “NAVIGATION AND

MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM

OWNER’S MANUAL”.

Using the “ODO TRIP”

switch

Instrument panel light

control

Adjusting the clock

2-1. Instrument cluster

Vehicle status information and indicators

The display of the speedometer can be selected from two types,

analog or digital. (P.9 4 )

 Analog speedometer

The units used on the meter and display may differ depending on the target

region.

Tachometer

Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute

Speedometer

Displays the vehicle speed

Clock (P. 8 8)

Fuel gauge

Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank

Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the engine coolant temperature

Odometer and trip meter

Odometer:

Displays the total distance that the vehicle has been driven

Trip meter:

Gauges and meters (with 7-inch display)

The meters display various drive information.

Meter display

2-1. Instrument cluster

Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last

reset. Trip meters “A” and “B” can be used to record and display different

distances independently.

Outside temperature (P. 8 7)

Multi-information display

Presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data (P. 89 )

Displays warning messages if a malfunction occurs (P.639)

Shift position and shift range indicator

Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range (P.199)

 Digital speedometer

The units used on the meter and display may differ depending on the target

region.

Tachometer

Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute

Speedometer

Displays the vehicle speed

Clock (P. 8 8)

Fuel gauge

Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank

Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the engine coolant temperature

Odometer and trip meter

Odometer:

Displays the total distance that the vehicle has been driven

2-1. Instrument cluster

Vehicle status information and indicators

Trip meter:

Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last

reset. Trip meters “A” and “B” can be used to record and display different

distances independently.

Outside temperature (P. 8 3)

Multi-information display

Presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data (P. 89 )

Displays warning messages if a malfunction occurs (P.639)

Shift position and shift range indicator

Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range (P.199)

■ The meters and display illumi-

nate when

The engine switch is in ON.

■ When changing driving mode

● Speedometer color is changed fol-

lowing the selected driving mode.

(P.351)

● AWD models: Speedometer color

is changed following the selected

driving mode or Multi-terrain

Select mode. (P.351, 353)

■ Outside temperature display

● In the following situations, the cor-

rect outside temperature may not

be displayed, or the display may

take longer than normal to

change.

• When stopped, or driving at low

speeds (less than 12 mph [20

km/h])

• When the outside temperature

has changed suddenly (at the

entrance/exit of a garage, tunnel,

etc.)

● When “--” or “E” is displayed, the

system may be malfunctioning.

Take your vehicle to your Toyota

dealer.

● Displays the outside temperature

within the range of -40°F (-40°C)

to 122°F (50°C).

● When the outside temperature is

approximately 37°F (3°C) or

lower, the indicator will flash

for approximately 10 seconds,

then stay on.

■ Liquid crystal display

P. 9 0

■ Customization

Settings (e. g. meter display) can be

changed on the screen of the

multi-information display. (P. 94 )

WARNING

■ The information display at

low temperatures

Allow the interior of the vehicle to

warm up before using the liquid

crystal information display. At

extremely low temperatures, the

display monitor may respond

slowly, and display changes may

be delayed.

For example, there is a lag

between the driver’s shifting and

the new gear number appearing

on the display. This lag could

cause the driver to downshift

again, causing rapid and exces-

sive engine braking and possibly

an accident resulting in death or

injury.

2-1. Instrument cluster

Switches the items of the odom-

eter, trip meter A and trip meter

B by pressing the “ODO TRIP”

switch.

When the trip meter is dis-

played, pressing and holding the

switch will reset the trip meter.

The brightness of the instrument

panel lights can be adjusted by

turning the dial.

1 Brighter

2 Darker

■ Instrument cluster brightness

adjustment

The instrument cluster brightness

levels when the tail lights are on and

off can be adjusted individually.

However, when the surroundings

are bright (daytime, etc.), turning on

the tail lights will not change the

instrument cluster brightness.

The clocks can be adjusted on

the audio system screen.

 Vehicles with Audio

P.415

 Vehicles with Audio Plus or

Premium Audio

Refer to “NAVIGATION AND

MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM

OWNER’S MANUAL”.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the

engine and its components

● Do not let the indicator needle

of the tachometer enter the red

zone, which indicates the maxi-

mum engine speed.

● The engine may be overheating

if the engine coolant tempera-

ture gauge is in the red zone

(“H”). In this case, immediately

stop the vehicle in a safe place,

and check the engine after it

has cooled completely.

(P.659)

Using the “ODO TRIP”

switch

Instrument panel light

control

Adjusting the clock

2-1. Instrument cluster

Vehicle status information and indicators

Following information is dis-

played on the multi-information

display.

■ Vehicles with 4.2-inch dis-

play

Driving support system infor-

mation

Displays recognized signs while the

RSA system (if equipped) is operat-

ing. (P.247)

Displays an image when the follow-

ing systems are operating and a

menu icon other than is

selected:

• LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)

(P.237)

• Dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range (P.250)

Menu icons (P. 9 0)

Information display area

A variety of information can be dis-

played by selecting a menu icon.

Additionally, warning or sugges-

tion/advice pop-up displays will be

displayed in some situations.

■ Vehicles with 7-inch display

Driving support system infor-

mation

Displays recognized signs while the

RSA system (if equipped) is operat-

ing. (P.247)

Displays an image when the follow-

ing systems are operating and a

menu icon other than is

selected:

• LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)

(P.237)

• Dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range (P.250)

Information display area

A variety of information can be dis-

played by selecting a menu icon.

Additionally, warning or sugges-

tion/advice pop-up displays will be

displayed in some situations.

Menu icons (P. 9 0)

Multi-information dis-

play

The multi-information dis-

play is used to display fuel

efficiency related informa-

tion and various types of

driving-related information.

The multi-information dis-

play can also be used to

change the display settings

and other settings.

Display contents

2-1. Instrument cluster

■ The multi-information display is

displayed when

The engine switch is in ON.

■ When changing driving mode

● Background color of the multi-

information display is changed fol-

lowing the selected driving mode.

(P.351)

● AWD models: Background color of

the multi-information display is

changed following the selected

driving mode or Multi-terrain

Select mode. (P.351, 353)

■ Liquid crystal display

Small spots or light spots may

appear on the display. This phenom-

enon is characteristic of liquid crys-

tal displays, and there is no problem

continuing to use the display.

The multi-information display is

operated using the meter control

switches.

Scroll the screen

/switch the

display

/move the cursor

Press: Enter/Set

Press and hold: Reset/Dis-

play customizable items

Return to the previous screen

Call sending/receiving and

history display (if equipped)

Linked with the hands-free

system, sending or receiving

call is displayed. For details

regarding the hands-free sys-

tem, refer to P.465 (vehicles

with Audio) or “NAVIGATION

AND MULTIMEDIA SYS-

TEM OWNER’S MANUAL”

(vehicles with Audio Plus or

Premium Audio).

: On screens where the screen can

be scrolled and the display can

be switched, a scroll bar or a

round icon that shows the num-

ber of registered screens is dis-

played.

Information related to each icon

can be displayed by selecting

the icon with the meter control

switches.

Some of the information may be

displayed automatically depending

on the situation.

Changing the display

WARNING

■ Caution for use while driving

For safety, avoid operating the

meter control switch while driving

as much as possible, and do not

look continuously at the multi-

information display while driving.

Stop the vehicle and operate the

meter control switch. Failure to do

so may cause a steering wheel

operation error, resulting in an

unexpected accident.

Menu icons

2-1. Instrument cluster

Vehicle status information and indicators

Select to display fuel consump-

tion data in various forms.

■ Speedometer display/Dis-

tance to empty (4.2-inch

display)

Speedometer display

Displays the vehicle speed.

Distance to empty

Displays the driving range with

remaining fuel. (P. 92 )

■ Fuel Economy

Following information is dis-

played.

Distance to empty

Displays the driving range with

remaining fuel. (P. 92 )

Current fuel economy

Displays the instantaneous current

fuel Economy.

Average fuel economy

Displays the average fuel economy

since the function was reset or the

average fuel economy after starting

or refueling.

*1, 2,3

The average fuel economy selected

by “Fuel Economy” on the

screen is displayed. (P.94)

:Use the displayed fuel consump-

tion as a reference only.

:Average fuel economy since the

function was reset can be reset

by pressing and holding .

:Average fuel economy after

starting is reset each time the

engine stops.

Icon Display

Driving information dis-

play (P.91)

Driving support system

information display

(P.93)

Audio system-linked dis-

play (if equipped)

(P.93)

Vehicle information dis-

play (P.93)

Settings display (P.9 4 )

Warning message dis-

play (P.98)

Driving information dis-

play

2-1. Instrument cluster

■ Eco Driving Indicator/Dis-

tance to empty

 Display contents

Eco Driving Indicator

Distance to empty

Displays the driving range with

remaining fuel. (P.92)

 Eco Driving Indicator

Eco Driving Indicator Light

During Eco-friendly acceleration

operation (Eco driving), the Eco

Driving Indicator Light will turn on.

When the acceleration exceeds

Zone of Eco driving, or when the

vehicle is stopped, the light turns

off.

Eco Driving Indicator Zone

Display

Suggests the Zone of Eco driving

with current Eco driving ratio based

on acceleration.

Eco driving ratio based on

acceleration

If the acceleration exceeds Zone of

Eco driving, the right side of Eco

Driving Indicator Zone Display will

illuminate.

At this time, the Eco Driving Indica-

tor Light will turn off.

Zone of Eco driving

■ Distance to empty

● This distance is computed based

on your average fuel consump-

tion. As a result, the actual dis-

tance that can be driven may differ

from that displayed.

● When only a small amount of fuel

is added to the tank, the display

may not be updated. When refuel-

ing, turn the engine switch off. If

the vehicle is refueled without

turning the engine switch off, the

display may not be updated.

● When “Refuel” is displayed, the

remaining fuel amount is low and

the distance that can be driven

with the remaining fuel cannot be

calculated.

Refuel immediately.

■ The ECO Driving indicator will

not operate when

Eco Driving Indicator will not oper-

ate in the following conditions:

● The shift lever is in any position

other than D.

● Neither normal mode nor Eco

drive mode is selected.

● The vehicle speed is approxi-

mately 80 mph (130 km/h) or

higher.

2-1. Instrument cluster

Vehicle status information and indicators

■ Driving support system

information display

Select to display the operational

status of the following systems:

 LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)

(P.237)

 Dynamic radar cruise control

with full-speed range

(P.250)

■ Navigation system-linked

display (if equipped)

Select to display the following

navigation system-linked infor-

mation.

 Route guidance

 Compass display (north-up

display/heading-up display)

Select to enable selection of an

audio source or track on the dis-

play.

■ Drive information

2 items that are selected using

the “Drive Info Items” setting

(average speed, distance and

total time) can be displayed ver-

tically.

The displayed information

changes according to the “Drive

Info Type” setting (since the sys-

tem was started or between

resets). (P. 9 4)

Use the displayed information as a

reference only.

Following items will be displayed.

 “Trip”

• “Average Speed”: Displays the

average vehicle speed since

engine start

• “Distance”: Displays the distance

driven since engine start

• “Total Time”: Displays the elapsed

time since engine start

: These items are reset each time

the engine stops.

 “Total”

• “Average Speed”: Displays the

average vehicle speed since the

display was reset

• “Distance”: Displays the distance

driven since the display was

reset

• “Total Time”: Displays the elapsed

time since the display was reset

: To reset, display the desired item

and press and hold .

Driving support system

information display

Audio system-linked dis-

play (if equipped)

Vehicle information dis-

play

2-1. Instrument cluster

■ AWD system display (AWD

models)

Torque distribution display

Displays the drive status of each

wheel in 6 steps from 0 to 5.

G-force display

Displays the size and direction of

the G-force applied to the vehicle

via changes to the position of the

ball on the display.

Maximum G-force course

This item is linked with the G-force

display and the course of the past

movement of the ball is displayed.

Press and hold to reset the

record.

Wheel spin display

When a tire is spinning, its icon on

the display changes its color and

blinks.

: This item is displayed only when

driving mode is set to sport mode.

Vehicle settings and the content

displayed on the screen can be

changed by using the meter

control switches.

■ Setting procedure

1 Operate or of the

meter control switches and

select .

2 Operate or of the

meter control switches and

select the desired item.

• If the function is turned on and

off or the volume, etc. is

changed on the setting

screen, the setting is changed

each time is pressed.

• For functions that allow oper-

ation contents, display con-

tents, etc., of function to be

selected, the setting screen is

displayed by pressing and

holding . When the setting

screen is displayed, select the

setting or desired value (time,

etc.) with .

3 After changing the settings,

press of the meter control

switches.

■ LTA (Lane Tracing

Assist) (P.237)

Select to set up the following

items.

 “Lane Center”

Select to enable/disable the lane

centering function.

 “Steering Assist”

Select to enable/disable steering

wheel assistance.

 “Sensitivity”

Settings display

2-1. Instrument cluster

Vehicle status information and indicators

Select to set the lane departure

alert sensitivity.

 “Sway Warning”

Select to enable/disable the vehicle

sway warning.

 “Sway Sensitivity”

Select to set the vehicle sway warn-

ing sensitivity.

■ PCS (Pre-Collision Sys-

tem) (P.229)

Select to set up the following

items.

 PCS on/off

Select to enable/disable the pre-

collision system.

 “Sensitivity”

Select to change the pre-collision

warning timing.

■ BSM (Blind Spot Moni-

tor) (if equipped) (P.260)

Select to set up the following

items.

 BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)

on/off

Select to enable/disable the BSM

system.

 “Brightness”

Select to switch the brightness of

the outside rear view mirror indica-

tors. (P.261)

 “Sensitivity”

Select to change the alert timing for

an approaching vehicle.

■ (Intuitive parking

assist) (if equipped)

(P.270)

Select to set up the following

items.

 Intuitive parking assist on/off

Select to enable/disable the Intui-

tive parking assist.

 “Volume”

Select to set the volume of the

buzzer which sounds when the

Intuitive parking assist is operated.

■ RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic

Alert) (if equipped) (P.260)

 RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic

Alert) on/off

Select to enable/disable the RCTA

system.

 “Volume”

Select to change the RCTA buzzer

volume.

■ PKSB (Parking Sup-

port Brake System) (if

equipped) (P.277)

Select to enable/disable the

Parking Support Brake function.

■ RSA (Road Sign

Assist) (if equipped)

(P.247)

Select to set up the following

items.

 Road Sign Assist on/off

Select to enable/disable the RSA

system.

 “Notification method”

2-1. Instrument cluster

Select to change each notification

method used to warn the driver

when the system recognizes

excess speed, no overtaking and

no-entry sign.

 “Notification Level”

Select to change each notification

level used to warn the driver when

the system recognizes a speed limit

sign.

■ Vehicle Settings

 PBD (Power Back Door)

(if equipped) (P.118)

Select to set up the following items.

• System settings

Select to enable/disable the power

back door system.

• “Kick Sensor”

Select to enable/disable the kick

sensor.

• “Opening Adjustment”

Select the open position when

power back door is fully open.

•“Volume”

Select to set the volume of the

buzzer which sounds when the

power back door system operates.

: Vehicles with hands free power

back door

 (Stop & Start system) (if

equipped) (P.345)

Select to set the length of time the

Stop & Start system will operate

when the “A/C” switch of the air

conditioning system is on.

 “TPWS” (Tire Pressure Warn-

ing System) (if equipped)

(P.584)

• “Set Pressure”

Select to initialize the tire pressure

warning system.

• “Change Wheel” (except for mod-

els made in Japan

without tire

inflation pressure display func-

tion)

Select to register the ID codes of

the tire pressure sensors to the tire

pressure warning system.

• “Change Wheel” (for models

made in Japan

without tire infla-

tion pressure display function)

Select to change the tire pressure

warning system sensor ID code set.

To enable this function, a second

set of tire pressure warning system

sensor ID codes must be registered

by a Toyota dealer. For information

regarding changing the registered

ID code set, contact your Toyota

dealer.

: The country of production is writ-

ten on the Certification Regula-

tion label. (P.665)

 “Scheduled Maintenance”

(P.565)

Select to reset the scheduled main-

tenance information (message indi-

cating maintenance is required and

distance until the next mainte-

nance) after all maintenance is per-

formed.

■ Settings

 “Language”

Select to change the language on

the multi-information display.

 “Units”

2-1. Instrument cluster

Vehicle status information and indicators

Select to change the units of mea-

sure displayed.

 “Meter Type” (7-inch display)

Select to change the speedometer

display.

 (Eco Driving Indicator

Light) (P.92)

Select to activate/deactivate the

Eco Driving Indicator Light.

 (Driving information dis-

play settings)

Select to change the display on

Fuel Economy (P.91).

 (Audio settings) (if

equipped)

Select to enable/disable

screen.

 (Vehicle information dis-

play settings)

• “Display Contents”

Select to enable/disable the AWD

system display (P.94). (AWD

models)

• “Drive Info Type”

Select to change the drive informa-

tion type display between trip and

total. (P.9 3) .

• “Drive Info Items”

Select to set the items on the upper

and lower side of the drive informa-

tion screen. from three items, aver-

age speed, distance and total time.

 “Pop-Up Display”

Select to enable/disable the follow-

ing pop-up displays, which may

appear in some situations.

• Intersection guidance display of

the navigation system-linked sys-

tem (if equipped)

• Incoming call display of the

hands-free phone system (if

equipped)

• Audio operation (if equipped)

• Volume operation (if equipped)

• Voice control (if equipped)

• Stop & Start system duration (if

equipped)

• Stop & Start system status (if

equipped)

 “MID OFF”

A blank screen is displayed

 “Default Settings”

Select to reset the meter display

settings.

■ Suspension of the settings dis-

play

● In the following situations, opera-

tion of the settings display will be

temporarily suspended.

• When a warning message

appears on the multi-information

display

• When the vehicle begins to move

● Settings for functions not

equipped to the vehicle are not

displayed.

● When a function is turned off, the

related settings for that function

are not selectable.

2-1. Instrument cluster

Select to display warning mes-

sages and measures to be

taken if a malfunction is

detected. (P.639)

Displays suggestions to the

driver in the following situations.

To select a response to a dis-

played suggestion, use the

meter control switches.

■ Suggestion to turn on the

headlights

If the headlight switch is in other

than or , and the vehicle

speed is 3 mph (5 km/h) or

higher for a certain amount of

time when the surroundings are

dark, a suggestion message will

be displayed.

■ Suggestion to turn off the

headlights

If the headlights are left on for a

certain amount of time after the

engine switch has been turned

off, a suggestion message will

be displayed.

When the headlight switch is in

the AUTO position: The mes-

sage asking if you wish to turn

the headlights off is displayed.

To turn the headlights off, select

“Yes”.

If the driver’s door is opened after

the engine switch is turned off, this

suggestion message will not be dis-

played.

■ Customization

The suggestion function can be

turned on/off. (Customizable fea-

tures: P.689)

WARNING

■ Cautions during setting up

the display

As the engine needs to be run-

ning during setting up the display,

ensure that the vehicle is parked

in a place with adequate ventila-

tion. In a closed area such as a

garage, exhaust gases including

harmful carbon monoxide (CO)

may collect and enter the vehicle.

This may lead to death or a seri-

ous health hazard.

NOTICE

■ During setting up the display

To prevent battery discharge,

ensure that the engine is running

while setting up the display fea-

tures.

Warning message display

Suggestion function

2-1. Instrument cluster

Vehicle status information and indicators

Audio system screen

■ Trip information

 Audio or Audio Plus (vehicles

without Data Communication

Module)

1 Press the “MENU” button.

2 Select “Info” on the “Menu”

screen.

If the “History” screen is displayed,

select “Trip information”.

 Audio or Audio Plus (vehicles

with Data Communication

Module)/Premium Audio

1 Press the “MENU” button.

2 Select “Info” on the “Menu”

screen.

3 Select “ECO” on the “Infor-

mation” screen.

If the “History” screen is displayed,

select “Trip information”.

The image is an example only, and

may vary slightly from actual condi-

tions.

Fuel consumption in the past

15 minutes

Current fuel consumption

Resetting the consumption

data

Average vehicle speed since

the engine was started

Elapsed time since the

engine was started

Cruising range (P.100)

Average fuel consumption for

the past 15 minutes is divided

by color into past averages and

averages attained since the

engine switch was last turned to

ON. Use the displayed average

fuel consumption as a refer-

ence.

Fuel consumption

information

The fuel consumption infor-

mation can be displayed on

the audio system screen.

System components

Consumption

100

2-1. Instrument cluster

■ History

 Audio or Audio Plus (vehicles

without Data Communication

Module)

1 Press the “MENU” button.

2 Select “Info” on the “Menu”

screen.

If the “Trip Information” screen is

displayed, select “History”.

 Audio or Audio Plus (vehicles

with Data Communication

Module)/Premium Audio

1 Press the “MENU” button.

2 Select “Info” on the “Menu”

screen.

3 Select “ECO” on the “Infor-

mation” screen.

If the “Trip Information” screen is

displayed, select “History”.

The image is an example only, and

may vary slightly from actual condi-

tions.

Best recorded fuel consump-

tion

Latest fuel consumption

Previous fuel consumption

record

• Audio and Audio Plus:

Displays the daily average fuel con-

sumption. (Instead of the date, “Trip

1” through “Trip 5” will be dis-

played.)

• Premium Audio:

Displays the daily average fuel con-

sumption.

Updating the latest fuel con-

sumption data

Resetting the history data

The average fuel consumption

history is divided by color into

past averages and the average

fuel consumption since the last

time updated. Use the displayed

average fuel consumption as a

reference.

■ Updating the history data

Update the average fuel consump-

tion by selecting “Clip” to measure

the current fuel consumption again.

■ Resetting the data

The fuel consumption data can be

deleted by selecting “Clear”.

■ Cruising range

Displays the estimated maximum

distance that can be driven with the

quantity of fuel remaining.

This distance is computed based on

your average fuel consumption. As

a result, the actual distance that can

be driven may differ from that dis-

played.

101

Before driving

3-1. Key information

Keys............................ 102

3-2. Opening, closing and

locking the doors

Side doors................... 108

Back door.................... 114

Smart key system ....... 128

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Front seats.................. 134

Rear seats................... 135

Driving position memory

.................................. 137

Head restraints............ 140

3-4. Adjusting the steering

wheel and mirrors

Steering wheel ............ 142

Inside rear view mirror 143

Digital Rear-view Mirror145

Outside rear view mirrors

.................................. 154

3-5. Opening, closing the win-

dows and moon roof

Power windows........... 156

Moon roof.................... 159

Panoramic moon roof.. 162

102

3-1. Key information

3-1.Ke y information

The following keys are provided

with the vehicle.

 Vehicles without smart key

system

Master keys

Operating the wireless remote con-

trol function (P.104)

Key number plate

 Vehicles with smart key sys-

tem

Electronic keys

• Operating the smart key system

(P.128)

• Operating the wireless remote

control function (P.104)

Mechanical keys

Key number plate

■ When riding in an aircraft

When bringing a key with wireless

remote control function onto an air-

craft, make sure you do not press

any buttons on the key while inside

the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying

the key in your bag etc., ensure that

the buttons are not likely to be

pressed accidentally. Pressing a

button may cause the key to emit

radio waves that could interfere with

the operation of the aircraft.

■ Key battery depletion

 Vehicles without smart key system

● The standard battery life is 1 to 2

years.

● The battery will become depleted

even if the wireless key is not

used. The following symptoms

indicate that the wireless key bat-

tery may be depleted. Replace the

battery when necessary. (P.604)

• The wireless remote control does

not operate.

• The detection area becomes

smaller.

 Vehicles with smart key system

● The standard battery life is 1 to 2

years.

● If the battery becomes low, an

alarm will sound in the cabin and a

message will be displayed on the

multi-information display when the

engine stops.

● To reduce key battery depletion

when the electronic key is to not

be used for long periods of time,

set the electronic key to the bat-

tery-saving mode. (P.129)

● As the electronic key always

receives radio waves, the battery

will become depleted even if the

electronic key is not used. The fol-

lowing symptoms indicate that the

electronic key battery may be

depleted. Replace the battery

when necessary.

Keys

Key types

103

3-1. Key information

Before driving

• The smart key system or the wire-

less remote control does not oper-

ate.

• The detection area becomes

smaller.

• The LED indicator on the key sur-

face does not turn on.

You can replace the battery by your-

self (P.604). However, as there is

a danger that the electronic key may

be damaged, it is recommended

that replacement is carried out by

your Toyota dealer.

● To avoid serious deterioration, do

not leave the electronic key within

3 ft. (1 m) of the following electri-

cal appliances that produce a

magnetic field:

•TVs

• Personal computers

• Cellular phones, cordless phones

and battery chargers

• Table lamps

• Induction cookers

■ If a message regarding the state

of the electronic key or engine

switch mode, etc. is shown

(vehicles with smart key sys-

tem)

To prevent trapping the electronic

key inside the vehicle, leaving the

vehicle carrying the electronic key

on your person without turning the

engine switch to OFF or other pas-

sengers from unintentionally taking

the key out of the vehicle, etc., a

message that prompts the user to

confirm the state of the electronic

key or engine switch mode may be

shown on the multi-information dis-

play. In those cases, follow the

instructions on the display immedi-

ately.

■ If “Key Battery Low Replace

Key Battery” is displayed on

the multi-information display

(vehicles with smart key sys-

tem)

The electronic key has a low battery.

Replace the electronic key battery.

(P.604)

■ Replacing the battery

P.604

■ Confirmation of the registered

key number

The number of keys already regis-

tered to the vehicle can be con-

firmed. Ask your Toyota dealer for

details.

■ If “A New Key has been Regis-

tered Contact Your Dealer for

Details” is displayed on the

multi-information display (vehi-

cles with smart key system)

This message will be displayed

each time the driver’s door is

opened when the doors are

unlocked from the outside for

approximately 10 days after a new

electronic key has been registered.

If this message is displayed but you

have not had a new electronic key

registered, ask your Toyota dealer to

check if an unknown electronic key

(other than those in your posses-

sion) has been registered.

NOTICE

■ To prevent key damage

● Do not drop the keys, subject

them to strong shocks or bend

them.

● Do not expose the keys to high

temperatures for long periods of

time.

● Do not get the keys wet or wash

them in an ultrasonic washer,

etc.

● Do not attach metallic or mag-

netic materials to the keys or

place the keys close to such

materials.

● Do not disassemble the keys.

104

3-1. Key information

The keys are equipped with the

following wireless remote con-

trol:

 Vehicles without smart key

system

Locks all the doors (P.108)

Sounds the alarm (P.105)

Unlocks all the doors

(P.108)

Opens the side windows

(P.108)

: This setting must be customized

at your Toyota dealer.

 Vehicles with smart key sys-

tem

Locks all the doors (P.108)

Unlocks all the doors

(P.108)

Opens the side windows

and the moon roof

*1, 2

panoramic moon roof

*1, 2

(P.108)

NOTICE

● Do not attach a sticker or any-

thing else to the surface of the

keys.

● Do not place the keys near

objects that produce magnetic

fields, such as TVs, audio sys-

tems and induction cookers.

● Do not place the keys near

medical electrical equipment

such as low-frequency therapy

equipment or microwave ther-

apy equipment, and do not

receive medical attention with

the keys on your person.

■ Carrying the electronic key

on your person (vehicles with

smart key system)

Carry the electronic key 3.9 in.

(10 cm) or more away from elec-

tric appliances that are turned on.

Radio waves emitted from electric

appliances within 3.9 in. (10 cm)

of the electronic key may interfere

with the key, causing the key to

not function properly.

■ In case of a smart key system

malfunction or other key-

related problems (vehicles

with smart key system)

P.6 53

■ When an electronic key is lost

(vehicles with smart key sys-

tem)

P.6 53

Wireless remote control

105

3-1. Key information

Before driving

Opens and closes the power

back door

(P.118)

Sounds the alarm (P.105)

:These settings must be custom-

ized at your Toyota dealer.

:If equipped

■ Theft deterrent panic mode

 Vehicles without smart key system

When is pressed for longer

than about 1 second, an alarm will

sound intermittently and the vehicle

lights will flash to deter any person

from trying to break into or damage

your vehicle.

To stop the alarm, press any button

on the key.

 Vehicles with smart key system

When is pressed for longer

than about 1 second, an alarm will

sound intermittently and the vehicle

lights will flash to deter any person

from trying to break into or damage

your vehicle.

To stop the alarm, press any button

on the electronic key.

■ Conditions affecting operation

 Vehicles without smart key system

The wireless remote control function

may not operate normally in the fol-

lowing situations.

● When the wireless key battery is

depleted

● Near a TV tower, electric power

plant, gas station, radio station,

large display, airport or other facil-

ity that generates strong radio

waves or electrical noise

● When carrying a portable radio,

cellular phone or other wireless

communication device

● When the wireless key is in con-

tact with, or is covered by a metal-

lic object

● When other wireless key (that

emits radio waves) is being used

nearby

● If window tint with a metallic con-

tent or metallic objects are

attached to the rear window

 Vehicles with smart key system

P.129

106

3-1. Key information

■ Certification for wireless remote control

107

3-1. Key information

Before driving

1 Releasing

To release the key, press the but-

ton.

2 Folding

To stow the key back in its case,

push the key back to the stowed

position while pressing the button.

To take out the mechanical key,

slide the release lever and

take the key out.

The mechanical key can only be

inserted in one direction, as the key

only has grooves on one side. If the

key cannot be inserted in a lock cyl-

inder, turn it over and re-attempt to

insert it.

After using the mechanical key,

store it in the electronic key. Carry

the mechanical key together with

the electronic key. If the electronic

key battery is depleted or the entry

function does not operate properly,

you will need the mechanical key.

(P.653)

■ If you lose your keys

P.653

■ If a wrong key is used

The key cylinder rotates freely to

isolate inside mechanism.

Using the master key

(vehicles without smart

key system)

Using the mechanical key

(vehicles with smart key

system)

108

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

3-2.Opening, closing and locking t he doors

■ Using the entry function

(vehicles with smart key

system)

Carry the electronic key to

enable this function.

1 Grip the driver’s door handle

to unlock the door. Holding

the driver’s door handle for

approximately 2 seconds

unlocks all the doors.

Grip the front passenger’s

door handle or rear door han-

dle (some models) to unlock

all the doors

Make sure to touch the sensor on

the back of the handle.

The doors cannot be unlocked for 3

seconds after the doors are locked.

: The door unlock settings can be

changed. (P.109)

2 Touch the lock sensor (the

indentation on the upper part

of the door handle) to lock

the doors.

Check that the door is securely

locked.

■ Using the wireless remote

control

 Vehicles without smart key

system

1 Locks all the doors

Check that the door is securely

locked.

2 Unlocks all the doors

Pressing the button unlocks the

driver’s door. Pressing the button

again within 5 seconds unlocks the

other doors.

Press and hold to open the side

windows.

: This setting must be customized

at your Toyota dealer.

Side doors

The vehicle can be locked

and unlocked using the

entry function, wireless

remote control, key or door

lock switch.

Unlocking and locking the

doors from the outside

109

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

 Vehicles with smart key sys-

tem

1 Locks all the doors

Check that the door is securely

locked.

2 Unlocks all the doors

Pressing the button unlocks the

driver’s door. Pressing the button

again within 5 seconds unlocks the

other doors.

Press and hold to open the side

windows and moon roof (if

equipped) or panoramic moon roof

(if equipped).

: This setting must be customized

at your Toyota dealer.

■ Using the key

 Vehicles without smart key

system

1 Locks all the doors

Turn and hold to close the side win-

dows.

2 Unlocks all the doors

Turning the key unlocks the driver’s

door. Turning the key again within 5

seconds unlocks the other doors.

Turn and hold to open the side win-

dows.

: These settings must be custom-

ized at your Toyota dealer.

 Vehicles with smart key sys-

tem

The doors can also be locked

and unlocked with the mechani-

cal key. (P.653)

■ Switching the door unlock func-

tion (vehicles with smart key

system)

It is possible to set which doors the

entry function unlocks using the

wireless remote control.

1 Turn the engine switch to OFF.

2 When the indicator light on the

key surface is not on, press and

hold , or for

approximately 5 seconds while

pressing and holding .

The setting changes each time an

operation is performed, as shown

below. (When changing the setting

continuously, release the buttons,

wait for at least 5 seconds, and

repeat step 2.)

110

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Vehicles with alarm: To prevent

unintended triggering of the alarm,

unlock the doors using the wireless

remote control and open and close

a door once after the settings have

been changed. (If a door is not

opened within 60 seconds after

is pressed, the doors will be

locked again and the alarm will

automatically be set.)

In a case that the alarm is triggered,

immediately stop the alarm. (P.73)

■ Operation signals

Doors: A buzzer sounds and the

emergency flashers flash to indicate

that the doors have been

locked/unlocked using the entry

function or wireless remote control.

(Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)

Side windows and moon roof (if

equipped) or panoramic moon roof

(if equipped): A buzzer sounds to

indicate that the side windows and

moon roof or panoramic moon roof

are operating using the wireless

remote control.

■ Security feature

 Vehicles without smart key system

If a door is not opened within

approximately 60 seconds after the

vehicle is unlocked using the wire-

less remote control, the security fea-

ture automatically locks the vehicle

again.

 Vehicles with smart key system

If a door is not opened within

approximately 60 seconds after the

vehicle is unlocked using the entry

function or wireless remote control,

the security feature automatically

locks the vehicle again. (However,

depending on the location of the

electronic key, the key may be

detected as being in the vehicle. In

this case, vehicle may be unlocked.)

■ When the door cannot be

locked by the lock sensor on

the upper part of the door han-

dle (vehicles with smart key

system)

If the door will not lock even when

the topside sensor area is touched,

try touching both the topside and

underside sensor areas at the same

time.

When gloves are being worn,

remove the gloves.

■ Door lock buzzer (vehicles with

smart key system)

If an attempt to lock the doors using

the entry function or wireless remote

control is made when a door is not

fully closed, a buzzer sounds contin-

uously for 5 seconds. Fully close the

door to stop the buzzer, and lock the

Multi-informa-

tion dis-

play/Beep

Unlocking func-

tion

Exterior: Beeps 3

times

Interior: Pings

once

Holding the

driver’s door han-

dle unlocks only

the driver’s door.

Holding the pas-

senger’s door

handle or press-

ing the back door

opener switch

unlocks all the

doors.

Exterior: Beeps

twice

Interior: Pings

once

Holding a door

handle or press-

ing the back door

opener switch

unlocks all the

doors.

111

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

vehicle once more.

■ Setting the alarm (if equipped)

Locking the doors will set the alarm

system. (P. 7 3 )

■ Conditions affecting the opera-

tion of the smart key system or

wireless remote control

 Vehicles without smart key system

P.105

 Vehicles with smart key system

P.129

■ If the smart key system (if

equipped) or the wireless

remote control does not oper-

ate properly

● Vehicles with smart key system:

Use the mechanical key to lock

and unlock the doors. (P. 65 3)

● Replace the key battery with a

new one if it is depleted. (P.604)

■ If the battery is discharged

The doors cannot be locked and

unlocked using the smart key sys-

tem (if equipped) or wireless remote

control. Lock or unlock the doors

using the key (vehicles without

smart key system) or mechanical

key (vehicles with smart key sys-

tem). (P.109, 653)

■ Customization

Settings (e.g. unlocking function

using a key) can be changed.

(Customizable features: P.690)

WARNING

■ To prevent an accident

Observe the following precautions

while driving the vehicle.

Failure to do so may result in a

door opening and an occupant

could be thrown out of the vehicle,

resulting in death or serious injury.

● Ensure that all doors are prop-

erly closed and locked.

● Do not pull the inside handle of

the doors while driving.

Be especially careful for the

front doors, as the doors may

be opened even if the inside

lock buttons are in locked posi-

tion.

● Set the rear door child-protector

locks when children are seated

in the rear seats.

■ When opening or closing a

door

Check the surroundings of the

vehicle such as whether the vehi-

cle is on an incline, whether there

is enough space for a door to

open and whether a strong wind

is blowing. When opening or clos-

ing the door, hold the door handle

tightly to prepare for any unpre-

dictable movement.

■ When using the wireless

remote control, key or

mechanical key and operating

the power windows, moon

roof (if equipped) or pan-

oramic moon roof (if

equipped)

Operate the power window, moon

roof or panoramic moon roof after

checking to make sure that there

is no possibility of any passenger

having any of their body parts

caught in the side window, moon

roof or panoramic moon roof.

Also, do not allow children to

operate the wireless remote con-

trol, key or mechanical key. It is

possible for children and other

passengers to get caught in the

side window, moon roof or pan-

oramic moon roof.

112

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Using the door lock switch

1 Locks all the doors

2 Unlocks all the doors

■ Using the inside lock but-

tons

1 Locks the door

2 Unlocks the door

The front doors can be opened by

pulling the inside handle even if the

lock buttons are in the lock position.

■ Locking the front doors from

the outside without a key

1 Move the inside lock button to

the lock position.

2 Close the door.

 Vehicles without smart key system

The door cannot be locked if the key

is in the engine switch.

 Vehicles with smart key system

The door cannot be locked if the

engine switch is in ACC or ON, or

the electronic key is left inside the

vehicle.

Depending on the position of the

electronic key, the key may not be

detected correctly and the door may

be locked.

■ Open door warning buzzer

If the vehicle speed reaches 3 mph

(5 km/h), a buzzer sounds to indi-

cate that the door(s) or the hood is

not fully closed.

The open door(s) or hood is dis-

played on the multi-information dis-

play.

■ When all the doors are locked

with the entry function (vehicles

with smart key system), wire-

less remote control or key

● The doors cannot be unlocked

with the door lock switch.

● The door lock switch can be reset

by unlocking all the doors with the

entry function (vehicles with smart

key system), wireless remote con-

trol or key.

The door cannot be opened

from inside the vehicle when the

lock is set.

Unlocking and locking the

doors from the inside

Rear door child-protector

lock

113

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

1 Unlock

2 Lock

These locks can be set to prevent

children from opening the rear

doors. Push down on each rear

door switch to lock both rear doors.

The following functions can be

set or canceled:

For instructions on customizing,

refer to P.688.

Automatic door locking

and unlocking systems

Function Operation

Speed linked

door locking

function

All doors are

automatically

locked when

vehicle speed is

approximately

12mph (20 km/h)

or higher.

Shift position

linked door lock-

ing function

All doors are

automatically

locked when

shifting the shift

lever to position

other than P.

Shift position

linked door

unlocking func-

tion

All doors are

automatically

unlocked when

shifting the shift

lever to P.

Driver’s door

linked door

unlocking func-

tion

All doors are

automatically

unlocked when

driver’s door is

opened within

approximately 45

seconds after

turning the

engine switch off.

114

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Back door

The back door can be

locked/unlocked and

opened/closed by the fol-

lowing procedures.

WARNING

Observe the following precau-

tions.

Failure to do so may result in

death or serious injury.

■ Before driving

● Make sure that the back door is

fully closed.

If the back door is not fully

closed, it may open unexpect-

edly while driving and hit near-

by objects or luggage in the lug-

gage compartment may be

thrown out, causing an acci-

dent.

● Do not allow children to play in

the luggage compartment.

If a child is accidentally locked

in the luggage compartment,

they could get heat exhaustion

or other injuries.

● Do not allow a child to open or

close the back door.

Doing so may cause the back

door to operate unexpectedly,

or cause the child’s hands,

head, or neck to be caught by

the closing back door.

■ Important points while driving

● Keep the back door closed

while driving.

If the back door is left open, it

may hit near-by objects or lug-

gage in the luggage compart-

ment may be thrown out,

causing an accident.

● Never let anyone sit in the lug-

gage compartment.

In the event of sudden braking,

sudden swerving or a collision,

they are susceptible to death or

serious injury.

■ Back door handles

Do not hang any object to the

back door handles.

If any object is hung, the back

door may suddenly shut, causing

parts of the body to be caught,

resulting in death or serious injury.

■ Operating the back door

Observe the following precau-

tions.

Failure to do so may cause parts

of the body to be caught, resulting

in death or serious injury.

● Remove any heavy loads, such

as snow and ice, from the back

door before opening it. Failure

to do so may cause the back

door to suddenly shut again

after it is opened.

● When opening or closing the

back door, thoroughly check to

make sure the surrounding area

is safe.

● If anyone is in the vicinity, make

sure they are safe and let them

know that the back door is

about to open or close.

● Use caution when opening or

closing the back door in windy

weather as it may move

abruptly in strong wind.

115

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

■ Using the entry function

(vehicles with smart key

system)

Carry the electronic key to

enable this function.

WARNING

● Vehicles without power back

door: The back door may sud-

denly shut if it is not opened

fully. It is more difficult to open

or close the back door on an

incline than on a level surface,

so beware of the back door

unexpectedly opening or closing

by itself. Make sure that the

back door is fully open and

secure before using the luggage

compartment.

● Vehicles with power back door:

The back door may suddenly

shut if it is not opened fully,

while on a steep incline. Make

sure that the back door is

secured before using the lug-

gage compartment.

● When closing the back door,

take extra care to prevent your

fingers, etc. from being caught.

● Vehicles without power back

door: When closing the back

door, make sure to press it

lightly on its outer surface. If the

back door handle is used to fully

close the back door, it may

result in hands or arms being

caught.

● Do not pull on the back door

damper stay (vehicles without

power back door) (P.118) or

back door spindle (vehicles with

power back door) (P.125) to

close the back door, and do not

hang on the back door damper

stay (vehicles without power

back door) or back door spindle

(vehicles with power back door).

Doing so may cause hands to

be caught or the back door

damper stay (vehicles without

power back door) or back door

spindle (vehicles with power

back door) to break, causing an

accident.

● Vehicles without power back

door: If a bicycle carrier or simi-

lar heavy object is attached to

the back door, it may suddenly

shut again after being opened,

causing someone’s hands,

head or neck to be caught and

injured. When installing an

accessory part to the back door,

using a genuine Toyota part is

recommended.

Unlocking and locking the

back door from the out-

side

116

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

1 Unlocks all the doors

The doors cannot be unlocked for 3

seconds after the doors are locked.

2 Locks all the doors

Check that the door is securely

locked.

■ Using the wireless remote

control

P. 1 08

■ Operation signals

A buzzer sounds and the emer-

gency flashers flash to indicate that

the doors have been

locked/unlocked using the entry

function (if equipped) or wireless

remote control. (Locked: once;

Unlocked: twice)

■ Security feature

 Vehicles without smart key system

If a door is not opened within

approximately 60 seconds after the

vehicle is unlocked using the wire-

less remote control, the security fea-

ture automatically locks the vehicle

again.

 Vehicles with smart key system

If a door is not opened within

approximately 60 seconds after the

vehicle is unlocked using the entry

function or wireless remote control,

the security feature automatically

locks the vehicle again. (However,

depending on the location of the

electronic key, the key may be

detected as being in the vehicle. In

this case, vehicle may be unlocked.)

■ Using the door lock switch

P. 11 2

■ Open

Raise the back door while

pressing up the back door

opener switch.

■ Close

Lower the back door using the

back door handle , and make

sure to push the back door

down from the outside to close

it.

Be careful not to pull the back door

sideways when closing the back

door with the handle.

Unlocking and locking the

back door from the inside

Opening/closing the back

door (vehicles without

power back door)

117

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

■ Luggage compartment light

The luggage compartment light

turns on when the back door is

opened with the luggage compart-

ment light switch on.

When the engine switch is turned to

OFF, the light will go off automati-

cally after 20 minutes.

1 On

2 Off

■ If the back door opener is inop-

erative

The back door can be unlocked

from the inside.

1 Remove the cover.

To prevent damage, cover the tip of

the screwdriver with a rag.

2 Loosen the screw.

3 Turn the cover.

4 Move the lever.

5 When installing, reverse the

steps listed.

■ Open door warning buzzer

P. 11 2

118

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Using the wireless remote

control

Press and hold the switch.

The power back door automatically

opens/closes.

Pressing the switch while the power

back door is opening/closing stops

the operation. When the switch is

pressed again during the halted

operation, the back door will per-

form the reverse operation.

■ Using the power back door

switch on the instrument

panel

Press and hold the switch.

The power back door automatically

opens/closes.

Unlock the back door before oper-

ating.

Pressing the switch while the power

back door is opening/closing stops

the operation. When the switch is

pressed again during the halted

operation, the back door will per-

form the reverse operation.

■ Using the back door opener

switch

When the back door is

unlocked: Press the back door

NOTICE

■ Back door damper stays

The back door is equipped with

damper stays that hold the back

door in place.

Observe the following precau-

tions.

Failure to do so may cause dam-

age to the back door damper stay,

resulting in malfunction.

● Do not attach any foreign

objects, such as stickers, plastic

sheets, or adhesives to the

damper stay rod.

● Do not touch the damper stay

rod with gloves or other fabric

items.

● Do not attach any accessories

other than genuine Toyota parts

to the back door.

● Do not place your hand on the

damper stay or apply lateral

forces to it.

Opening/closing the back

door (vehicles with power

back door)

119

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

opener switch.

When the back door is locked:

While carrying the electronic key

on your person, press and hold

the back door opener switch.

The power back door automatically

opens.

Pressing the switch while the power

back door is opening/closing stops

the operation.

■ Using the power back door

switch on the back door

Press the switch.

The power back door automatically

closes.

Pressing the switch while the power

back door is operating will stop the

operation.

When the switch is pressed again

during the halted operation, the

back door will perform the reverse

operation.

■ Using the back door han-

dles

Lower the back door using the

back door handle .

The back door closing assist

(P.121) will be activated, and the

power back door will fully close

automatically.

■ Using the kick sensor (vehi-

cles with Hands Free Power

Back Door)

The Hands Free Power Back

Door enables automatic opening

and closing of the power back

door by putting your foot near

the lower center part of the rear

bumper and moving it away

from the rear bumper. When

operating the Hands Free

Power Back Door, make sure

that the engine switch is in OFF,

the kick sensor operation is

enabled (P.94) and you are

carrying an electronic key.

1 While carrying an electronic

key, stand within the smart

key system operation range,

approximately 11.8 to 19.7 in.

120

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

(30 to 50 cm) from the rear

bumper.

Kick sensor

Hands Free Power Back

Door operation detection

area

Smart key system operation

detection area (P.128)

2 Perform a kick operation by

moving your foot to within

approximately 3.9 in. (10 cm)

of the rear bumper and then

pulling it back.

Perform the entire kick operation

within 1 second.

The back door will not start operat-

ing while a foot is detected under

the rear bumper.

Operate the Hands Free Power

Back Door without contacting the

rear bumper with your foot.

If another electronic key is in the

cabin or luggage compartment, it

may take slightly longer than nor-

mal for the operation to occur.

Kick sensor

Hands Free Power Back

Door operation detection

area

3 When the kick sensor detects

that your foot is pulled back,

a buzzer will sound and the

back door will automatically

fully open/close.

If a foot is moved under the rear

bumper while the back door is

opening/closing, the back door will

stop moving.

If a foot is moved under the rear

bumper again during the halted

operation, the back door will per-

form the reverse operation.

■ Luggage compartment light

The luggage compartment light

turns on when the back door is

opened with the luggage compart-

ment light switch on.

When the engine switch is turned to

OFF, the light will go off automati-

cally after 20 minutes.

121

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

1 On

2 Off

■ Back door closer

In the event that the back door is left

slightly open, the back door closer

will automatically close it to the fully

closed position.

Whatever the state of the engine

switch, the back door closer oper-

ates.

■ Power back door operating con-

ditions

The power back door can automati-

cally open and close under the fol-

lowing conditions:

● When the power back door sys-

tem is enabled. (P.9 4)

● When the engine switch is in ON,

in addition to the above for the

opening operations, the back door

operates for any of the following

conditions:

• Parking brake is engaged

• The brake pedal is depressed

• The shift lever is in P.

■ Operation of the power back

door

● A buzzer sounds and the emer-

gency flashers flash twice to indi-

cate that the back door is

opening/closing.

● When the power back door sys-

tem is disabled, the power back

door does not operate but it can

be opened and closed by hand.

● When the power back door auto-

matically opens, if an abnormality

due to people or objects is

detected, operation will stop.

■ Jam protection function

Sensors are equipped on both sides

of the power back door. If anything

obstructs the power back door while

it is closing, the back door will auto-

matically operate in the opposite

direction or stop.

■ Fall-down protection function

While the power back door is open-

ing automatically, applying exces-

sive force to it will stop the opening

operation to prevent the power back

door from suddenly shutting.

■ Back door closing assist

If the back door is lowered manually

when the back door is stopped at an

open position, the back door will

fully close automatically.

■ Back door reserve lock function

This function is a function which

reserves locking of all doors, before-

hand, when the power back door is

open.

When the following procedure is

performed, all the doors except the

power back door are locked and

then power back door will also be

locked at the same time it is closed.

1 Close all doors, except the back

door.

2 During the power back door clos-

ing operation, lock the doors

using the smart key system from

the side doors (P.108) or the

wireless remote control.

(P.108)

A buzzer sounds and the emer-

gency flashers flash to indicate that

all the doors have been closed and

locked.

● If the electronic key is placed

inside the vehicle after starting a

close operation via the door

reserve lock function, the elec-

tronic key may become locked

inside the vehicle.

● If the power back door does not

fully close due to the operation of

122

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

the jam protection function, etc.,

while the back door is automati-

cally closing after a door reserve

lock operation is performed, the

door reserve lock function is can-

celed and all the doors will unlock.

● Before leaving the vehicle, make

sure that all the doors are closed

and locked.

■ Kick sensor operating condi-

tions (vehicles with Hands Free

Power Back Door)

The Hands Free Power Back Door

will open/close automatically when

the following conditions are met:

● The kick sensor operation is

enabled (P.94)

● The engine switch is in OFF.

● The electronic key is within the

operational range. (P.128)

● A foot is put near the lower center

part of the rear bumper and

moved away from the rear

bumper.

The power back door may also be

operated by putting a hand, an

elbow, a knee, etc. near the lower

center part of the rear bumper and

moving it away from the rear

bumper. Make sure to put it close

enough to the center part of the

rear bumper.

■ Situations in which the Hands

Free Power Back Door may not

operate properly (vehicles with

Hands Free Power Back Door)

In the following situations, the

Hands Free Power Back Door may

not operate properly:

● When a foot remains under the

rear bumper

● If the rear bumper is strongly hit

with a foot or is touched for a while

If the rear bumper has been touched

for a while, wait for a short time

before attempting to operate the

Hands Free Power Back Door

again.

● When operated while a person is

too close to the rear bumper

● When an external radio wave

source interferes with the commu-

nication between the electronic

key and the vehicle (P.129)

● When the vehicle is parked near

an electrical noise source which

affects the sensitivity of the Hands

Free Power Back Door, such as a

pay parking spot, gas station,

electrically heated road, or fluo-

rescent light

● When the vehicle is near a TV

tower, electric power plant, radio

station, large display, airport or

other facility that generates strong

radio waves or electrical noise

● When a large amount of water is

applied to the rear bumper, such

as when the vehicle is being

washed or in heavy rain

● When mud, snow, ice, etc. is

attached to the rear bumper

● When the vehicle has been

parked for a while near objects

that may move and contact the

rear bumper, such as plants

● When an accessory is installed to

the rear bumper

If an accessory has been installed,

turn the Hands Free Power Back

Door (kick sensor) operation setting

off.

■ Preventing unintentional opera-

tion of the Hands Free Power

Back Door (vehicles with Hands

Free Power Back Door)

When an electronic key is in the

operation range, the Hands Free

Power Back Door may operate unin-

tentionally, so be careful in the fol-

lowing situations.

● When a large amount of water is

applied to the rear bumper, such

as when the vehicle is being

washed or in heavy rain

● When dirt is wiped off the rear

123

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

bumper

● When a small animal or small

object, such as a ball, moves

under the rear bumper

● When an object is moved from

under the rear bumper

● If someone is swinging their legs

while sitting on the rear bumper

● If the legs or another part of some-

one’s body contacts the rear

bumper while passing by the vehi-

cle

● When the vehicle is parked near

an electrical noise source which

affects the sensitivity of the Hands

Free Power Back Door, such as a

pay parking spot, gas station,

electrically heated road, or fluo-

rescent light

● When the vehicle is near a TV

tower, electric power plant, radio

station, large display, airport or

other facility that generates strong

radio waves or electrical noise

● When the vehicle is parked in a

place where objects such as

plants are near the rear bumper

● If luggage, etc. is set near the rear

bumper

● If accessories or a vehicle cover is

installed/removed near the rear

bumper

● When the vehicle is being towed

To prevent unintentional operation,

turn the Hands Free Power Back

Door (kick sensor) operation setting

off. (P.94)

■ When reconnecting the battery

To enable the power back door to

operate properly, close the back

door manually.

■ If the back door opener is inop-

erative

The back door can be unlocked

from the inside.

1 Remove the cover.

To prevent damage, cover the tip of

the screwdriver with a rag.

2 Loosen the screw.

3 Turn the cover.

4 Move the lever.

5 When installing, reverse the

steps listed.

■ Customization

Settings (e.g. power back door

opening angle) can be changed.

(Customizable features: P.692)

124

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

WARNING

■ Back door closer

● In the event that the back door

is left slightly open, the back

door closer will automatically

close it to the fully closed posi-

tion. It takes several seconds

before the back door closer

begins to operate. Be careful

not to catch fingers or anything

else in the back door, as this

may cause bone fractures or

other serious injuries.

● Use caution when using the

back door closer as it still oper-

ates when the power back door

system is canceled.

■ Power back door

Observe the following precautions

when operating the power back

door.

Failure to do so may cause death

or serious injury.

● Check the safety of the sur-

rounding area to make sure

there are no obstacles or any-

thing that could cause any of

your belongings to get caught.

● If anyone is in the vicinity, make

sure they are safe and let them

know that the back door is

about to open or close.

● If the power back door system is

turned off while the back door is

operating automatically, the

automatic operation is stopped.

The back door then has to be

operated manually. Take extra

care when on an incline, as the

back door may open or close

unexpectedly.

● If the operating conditions of the

power back door are no longer

met, a buzzer may sound and

the back door may stop opening

or closing. The back door then

has to be operated manually.

Take extra care when on an

incline, as the back door may

open or close abruptly.

● On an incline, the back door

may suddenly shut after it

opens. Make sure the back door

is fully open and secure.

● In the following situations, the

power back door may detect an

abnormality and automatic

operation may be stopped. In

this case, the back door has to

be operated manually. Take

extra care when on an incline,

as the back door may open or

close abruptly.

• When the back door contacts an

obstacle

• When the battery voltage sud-

denly drops, such as when the

engine switch is turned to ON or

the engine is started during

automatic operation

● If a bicycle carrier or similar

heavy object is attached to the

back door, it may suddenly shut

again after being opened, caus-

ing someone’s hands, head or

neck to be caught and injured.

When installing an accessory

part to the back door, using a

genuine Toyota part is recom-

mended.

125

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

WARNING

■ Jam protection function

Observe the following precau-

tions.

Failure to do so may cause death

or serious injury.

● Never use any part of your body

to intentionally activate the jam

protection function.

● The jam protection function may

not work if something gets

caught just before the back door

fully closes. Be careful not to

catch fingers or anything else.

● The jam protection function may

not work depending on the

shape of the object that is

caught. Be careful not to catch

fingers or anything else.

■ Hands Free Power Back Door

(if equipped)

Observe the following precautions

when operating the Hands Free

Power Back Door.

Failure to do so may cause death

or serious injury.

● Check the safety of the sur-

rounding area to make sure

there are no obstacles or any-

thing that could cause any of

your belongings to get caught.

● When putting your foot near the

lower center part of the rear

bumper and moving it from the

rear bumper, be careful not to

touch the exhaust pipes until

they have cooled down suffi-

ciently, as touching hot exhaust

pipes can cause burns.

● Do not leave the electronic key

within the effective range

(detection area) of the luggage

compartment.

NOTICE

■ Back door spindles

The back door is equipped with

spindles that hold the back door in

place.

Observe the following precau-

tions.

Failure to do so may cause dam-

age to the back door spindle,

resulting in malfunction.

● Do not attach any foreign

objects, such as stickers, plastic

sheets, or adhesives to the

spindle rod.

● Do not touch the spindle rod

with gloves or other fabric items.

● Do not attach heavy accesso-

ries to the back door. When

attaching, ask your Toyota

dealer for details.

● Do not place your hand on the

spindle or apply lateral forces to

it.

■ To prevent back door closer

malfunction

Do not apply excessive force to

the back door while the back door

closer is operating. Applying

excessive force may cause the

back door closer to malfunction.

126

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the

power back door

● Make sure that there is no ice

between the back door and

frame that would prevent move-

ment of the back door. Operat-

ing the power back door when

excessive load is present on the

back door may cause a mal-

function.

● Do not apply excessive force to

the back door while the power

back door is operating.

● Take care not to damage the

sensors (installed on the right

and left edges of the power

back door) with a knife or other

sharp object. If the sensor is

disconnected, the power back

door will not close automatically.

■ Hands Free Power Back Door

precautions (if equipped)

The kick sensor is located behind

lower center part of the rear

bumper. Observe the following to

ensure that the Hands Free

Power Back Door function oper-

ates properly:

● Keep the lower center part of

the rear bumper clean at all

times.

If the lower center part of the

rear bumper is dirty or covered

with snow, the kick sensor may

not operate. In this situation,

clean off the dirt or snow, move

the vehicle from the current

position and then check if the

kick sensor operates.

If it does not operate, have the

vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

● Do not apply coatings that have

a rain clearing (hydrophilic)

effect, or other coatings, to the

lower center part of the rear

bumper.

● Do not park the vehicle near

objects that may move and con-

tact the lower center part of the

rear bumper, such as grass or

trees.

If the vehicle has been parked

for a while near objects that

may move and contact the

lower center part of the rear

bumper, such as grass or trees,

the kick sensor may not oper-

ate. In this situation, move the

vehicle from the current position

and then check if the kick sen-

sor operates. If it does not oper-

ate, have the vehicle inspected

by your Toyota dealer.

● Do not subject the kick sensor

or its surrounding area to a

strong impact.

If the kick sensor or its sur-

rounding area has been sub-

jected to a strong impact, the

kick sensor may not operate

properly. If the kick sensor does

not operate in the following situ-

ations, have the vehicle

inspected by your Toyota

dealer.

• The kick sensor or its surround-

ing area has been subjected to

a strong impact.

• The lower center part of the rear

bumper is scratched or dam-

aged.

● Do not disassemble the rear

bumper.

● Do not attach stickers to the

rear bumper.

● Do not paint the rear bumper.

● If a bicycle carrier or similar

heavy object is attached to the

power back door, disable the

kick sensor. (P.94)

127

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

The settings of the power back

door system can be changed by

displaying the “Vehicle Set-

tings” - “PBD” screen from the

screen of the multi-informa-

tion display. (P. 94 )

The changed power back door set-

tings are not reset by turning the

engine switch to OFF. In order to

restore the original settings, they

need to be changed back on the

screen of the multi-information

display.

The open position of the power

back door can be adjusted.

1 Stop the back door in the

desirable position. (P. 11 8)

2 Press and hold the power

back door switch on the back

door for approximately 2 sec-

onds.

When the settings are completed,

the buzzer sounds 4 times.

When opening the back door the

next time, the back door will stop at

that position.

■ Canceling the adjusted open

position of the back door

Press and hold the power back door

switch on the back door for approxi-

mately 7 seconds.

After the buzzer sounds 4 times, it

sounds twice more. When the

power back door does the opening

operation the next time, the door will

open to the initial settings position.

■ Customization

The opening position can be set

with the multi-information display.

(P. 94 )

Priority for the stop position is given

to the last position set by either the

power back door switch on the back

door or multi-information display.

Changing settings of the

power back door system

(vehicles with power back

door)

Adjusting the open posi-

tion of the back door

(vehicles with power back

door)

128

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

: If equipped

■ Antenna location

Antennas outside the cabin

(front)

Antennas outside the cabin

(rear) (if equipped)

Antenna outside the luggage

compartment

Antennas inside the cabin

■ Effective range (areas within

which the electronic key is

detected)

When locking or unlocking the

doors

The system can be operated when

the electronic key is within about 2.3

ft. (0.7 m) of the front door handles,

rear door handles (if equipped) and

back door opener switch. (Only the

doors detecting the key can be

operated.)

When starting the engine or

changing engine switch modes

The system can be operated when

the electronic key is inside the vehi-

cle.

■ If an alarm sounds or a warning

message is displayed

An alarm sounds and warning mes-

sage displays shown on the multi-

information display are used to pro-

tect against unexpected accidents

or theft of the vehicle resulting from

erroneous operation. When a warn-

ing message is displayed, take

appropriate measures based on the

displayed message.

When only an alarm sounds, cir-

cumstances and correction proce-

dures are as follows.

Smart key system

The following operations

can be performed simply by

carrying the electronic key

on your person, for example

in your pocket. The driver

should always carry the

electronic key.

 Locks and unlocks the side

doors (P.108)

 Locks and unlocks the back

door (P.115)

 Starts the engine (P.194)

129

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

● When an exterior alarm sounds

once for 5 seconds

● When an interior alarm pings con-

tinuously

■ Battery-saving function

The battery-saving function will be

activated in order to prevent the

electronic key battery and the bat-

tery from being discharged while the

vehicle is not in operation for a long

time.

● In the following situations, the

smart key system may take some

time to unlock the doors.

• The electronic key has been left in

an area of approximately 6 ft. (2

m) of the outside of the vehicle for

10 minutes or longer.

• The smart key system has not

been used for 5 days or longer.

● If the smart key system has not

been used for 14 days or longer,

the doors cannot be unlocked at

any doors except the driver’s door.

In this case, take hold of the

driver’s door handle, or use the

wireless remote control or the

mechanical key, to unlock the

doors.

■ Turning an electronic key to

battery-saving mode

● When battery-saving mode is set,

battery depletion is minimized by

stopping the electronic key from

receiving radio waves.

Press twice while pressing

and holding .

Confirm that the electronic key indi-

cator flashes 4 times.

While the battery-saving mode is

set, the smart key system cannot be

used. To cancel the function, press

any of the electronic key buttons.

● Electronic keys that will not be

used for long periods of time can

be set to the battery-saving mode

in advance.

■ Conditions affecting operation

The smart key system uses weak

radio waves. In the following situa-

tions, the communication between

the electronic key and the vehicle

may be affected, preventing the

smart key system, wireless remote

control and engine immobilizer sys-

tem from operating properly.

(Ways of coping: P. 65 3)

● When the electronic key battery is

depleted

● Near a TV tower, electric power

plant, gas station, radio station,

large display, airport or other facil-

ity that generates strong radio

waves or electrical noise

● When the electronic key is in con-

Situation

Correction pro-

cedure

An attempt was

made to lock the

vehicle while a

door was open.

Close all of the

doors and lock

the doors again.

Situation

Correction pro-

cedure

The engine

switch was

turned to ACC

while the driver’s

door was open

(or the driver’s

door was opened

while the engine

switch was in

ACC).

Turn the engine

switch to OFF

and close the

driver’s door.

130

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

tact with, or is covered by the fol-

lowing metallic objects

• Cards to which aluminum foil is

attached

• Cigarette boxes that have alumi-

num foil inside

• Metallic wallets or bags

•Coins

• Hand warmers made of metal

• Media such as CDs and DVDs

● When other wireless key (that

emits radio waves) is being used

nearby

● When carrying the electronic key

together with the following devices

that emit radio waves

• Portable radio, cellular phone,

cordless phone or other wireless

communication devices

• Another vehicle’s electronic key or

a wireless key that emits radio

waves

• Personal computers or personal

digital assistants (PDAs)

• Digital audio players

• Portable game systems

● If window tint with a metallic con-

tent or metallic objects are

attached to the rear window

● When the electronic key is placed

near a battery charger or elec-

tronic devices

● When parking in a coin-operated

parking lot (Radio waves used to

detect vehicles may affect the

smart key system.)

■ Note for the entry function

● Even when the electronic key is

within the effective range (detec-

tion areas), the system may not

operate properly in the following

cases:

• The electronic key is too close to

the window or outside door han-

dle, near the ground, or in a high

place when the doors are locked

or unlocked.

• The electronic key is on the instru-

ment panel, luggage cover or

floor, or in the door pockets or

glove box when the engine is

started or engine switch modes

are changed.

● Do not leave the electronic key on

top of the instrument panel or near

the door pockets when exiting the

vehicle. Depending on the radio

wave reception conditions, it may

be detected by the antenna out-

side the cabin and the door will

become lockable from the outside,

possibly trapping the electronic

key inside the vehicle.

● As long as the electronic key is

within the effective range, the

doors may be locked or unlocked

by anyone. However, only the

doors detecting the electronic key

can be used to unlock the vehicle.

● Even if the electronic key is not

inside the vehicle, it may be possi-

ble to start the engine if the elec-

tronic key is near the window.

● The doors may unlock if a large

amount of water splashes on the

door handle, such as in the rain or

in a car wash when the electronic

key is within the effective range.

(The doors will automatically be

locked after approximately 60 sec-

onds if the doors are not opened

and closed.)

● If the wireless remote control is

used to lock the doors when the

electronic key is near the vehicle,

there is a possibility that the door

may not be unlocked by the entry

function. (Use the wireless remote

control to unlock the doors.)

● Touching the door lock sensor

while wearing gloves may delay or

prevent lock operation. Remove

the gloves and touch the lock sen-

sor again.

● When the lock operation is per-

formed using the lock sensor, rec-

ognition signals will be shown up

to two consecutive times. After

this, no recognition signals will be

given.

● If the door handle becomes wet

while the electronic key is within

131

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

the effective range, the door may

lock and unlock repeatedly. In that

case, follow the following correc-

tion procedures to wash the vehi-

cle:

• Place the electronic key in a loca-

tion 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from

the vehicle. (Take care to ensure

that the key is not stolen.)

• Set the electronic key to battery-

saving mode to disable the smart

key system. (P.129)

● If the electronic key is inside the

vehicle and a door handle

becomes wet during a car wash, a

message may be shown on the

multi-information display and a

buzzer will sound outside the vehi-

cle. To turn off the alarm, lock all

the doors.

● The lock sensor may not work

properly if it comes into contact

with ice, snow, mud, etc. Clean

the lock sensor and attempt to

operate it again, or use the lock

sensor on the lower part of the

door handle.

● A sudden approach to the effec-

tive range or door handle may pre-

vent the doors from being

unlocked. In this case, return the

door handle to the original position

and check that the doors unlock

before pulling the door handle

again.

● If there is another electronic key in

the detection area, it may take

slightly longer to unlock the doors

after the door handle is gripped.

■ When the vehicle is not driven

for extended periods

● To prevent theft of the vehicle, do

not leave the electronic key within

6 ft. (2 m) of the vehicle.

● The smart key system can be

deactivated in advance. (P.691)

● Battery-saving mode can reduce

the power consumption of elec-

tronic keys. (P.129)

■ To operate the system properly

Make sure to carry the electronic

key when operating the system. Do

not get the electronic key too close

to the vehicle when operating the

system from the outside of the vehi-

cle.

Depending on the position and hold-

ing condition of the electronic key,

the key may not be detected cor-

rectly and the system may not oper-

ate properly. (The alarm may go off

accidentally, or the door lock pre-

vention may not operate.)

■ If the smart key system does

not operate properly

● Locking and unlocking the doors:

Use the mechanical key. (P.653)

● Starting the engine: P. 65 4

■ Customization

Settings (e.g. smart key system)

can be changed.

(Customizable features: P.691)

If the smart key system has been

deactivated in a customized setting,

refer to the explanations for the fol-

lowing operations.

● Locking and unlocking the doors:

Use the wireless remote control or

mechanical key. (P.108, 653)

● Starting the engine and changing

engine switch modes: P. 65 4

● Stopping the engine: P.196

132

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Certification for the smart key system

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, American Samoa, Guam, Saipan

and Puerto Rico

 For vehicles sold in Canada

133

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

WARNING

■ Caution regarding interfer-

ence with electronic devices

● People with implantable car-

diac pacemakers, cardiac

resynchronization therapy-

pacemakers or implantable car-

dioverter defibrillators should

maintain a reasonable distance

between themselves and the

smart key system antennas.

(P.128)

The radio waves may affect the

operation of such devices. If

necessary, the entry function

can be disabled. Ask your

Toyota dealer for details, such

as the frequency of radio waves

and timing of the emitted radio

waves. Then, consult your doc-

tor to see if you should disable

the entry function.

● Users of any electrical medical

device other than implantable

cardiac pacemakers, cardiac

resynchronization therapy-

pacemakers or implantable car-

dioverter defibrillators should

consult the manufacturer of the

device for information about its

operation under the influence of

radio waves.

Radio waves could have unex-

pected effects on the operation

of such medical devices.

Ask your Toyota dealer for details

on disabling the entry function.

134

3-3. Adjusting the seats

3-3.Adjusting the seats

 Manual seat

1 Seat position adjustment

lever

2 Seatback angle adjustment

lever

3 Vertical height adjustment

lever (driver’s side only)

 Power seat (driver’s side

only)

1 Seat position adjustment

switch

2 Seatback angle adjustment

switch

3 Seat cushion (front) angle

adjustment switch

4 Vertical height adjustment

switch

5 Lumbar support adjustment

switch

■ When adjusting the seat

Take care when adjusting the seat

so that the head restraint does not

touch the ceiling.

Front seats

The seats can be adjusted

(longitudinally, vertically,

etc.). Adjust the seat to

ensure the correct driving

posture.

Adjustment procedure

WARNING

■ When adjusting the seat posi-

tion

● Take care when adjusting the

seat position to ensure that

other passengers are not

injured by the moving seat.

135

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Before driving

Pull the seatback angle adjust-

ment lever , and adjust the

seatback angle.

WARNING

● Do not put your hands under the

seat or near the moving parts to

avoid injury.

Fingers or hands may become

jammed in the seat mechanism.

● Make sure to leave enough

space around the feet so they

do not get stuck.

● Manual seat only: After adjust-

ing the seat, make sure that the

seat is locked in position.

■ Seat adjustment

To reduce the risk of sliding under

the lap belt during a collision, do

not recline the seat more than

necessary.

If the seat is too reclined, the lap

belt may slide past the hips and

apply restraint forces directly to

the abdomen, or your neck may

contact the shoulder belt, increas-

ing the risk of death or serious

injury in the event of an accident.

Adjustments should not be made

while driving as the seat may

unexpectedly move and cause

the driver to lose control of the

vehicle.

Rear seats

Reclining adjustments and

folding the seatbacks can

be done with lever opera-

tion.

Adjustment procedure

WARNING

■ When operating the seatback

Observe the following precau-

tions.

Failure to do so may cause death

or serious injury.

● Keep other passengers from

being hit with the seatback.

● Do not bring your hands close

to the moving parts or between

the seats, as well as do not let

any part of your body get

caught.

136

3-3. Adjusting the seats

■ Before folding down the

seatbacks

1 Park the vehicle in a safe

place.

Apply the parking brake (P.203)

and shift the shift lever to P.

(P.200)

2 Adjust the position of the

front seat and the angle of

the seatback. (P.134)

Depending on the position of the

front seat, if the seatback is folded

backward, it may interfere with the

operation of the rear seat.

3 Lift up and push down the

head restraints of the rear

outboard seats, and lower

the head restraint of the rear

center seat. (P.140)

4 Stow the armrest of the rear

seat if it is pulled out.

(P.547)

This step is not necessary when

operating the left side seat only.

■ Folding down the seat-

backs

While pulling the seatback angle

adjustment lever , fold the

seatback down.

■ Returning the rear seat-

backs

To avoid trapping the seat belt

between the seat and the inside

of the vehicle, pass the seat belt

outside the seat belt guide

and then return the seatback

securely to the locked position.

WARNING

● After adjusting the seat, make

sure that the seat is locked in

position.

If the seatback is not securely

locked, the red marking will be

visible. Make sure that the red

marking is not visible.

Folding down the rear

seatbacks

WARNING

Observe the following precau-

tions.

Failure to do so may result in

death or serious injury.

137

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Before driving

: If equipped

■ Recording procedure

1 Check that the shift lever is in

2 Turn the engine switch to

ON.

3 Adjust the driver’s seat to the

desired positions.

4 While pressing the “SET” but-

ton, press button “1” or “2”

until the buzzer sounds.

If the selected button has already

been preset, the previously

recorded position will be overwrit-

WARNING

■ When folding the rear seat-

backs down

● Do not fold the seatbacks down

while driving.

● Stop the vehicle on level

ground, set the parking brake

and shift the shift lever to P.

● Do not allow anyone to sit on a

folded seatback or in the lug-

gage compartment while driv-

ing.

● Do not allow children to enter

the luggage compartment.

● Do not operate the rear seat if it

is occupied.

● Be careful not to get feet or

hands caught in the moving

parts or joints of the seats

during operation.

● Do not allow children to operate

the seat.

■ After returning the rear seat-

back to the upright position

● Make sure that the seatback is

securely locked in position by

lightly pushing it back and forth.

If the seatback is not securely

locked, the red marking will be

visible. Make sure that the red

marking is not visible.

● Check that the seat belts are

not twisted or caught in the

seatback.

Driving position mem-

ory

This feature automatically

adjusts the driver’s seat to

suit your preferences.

Your preferred driving posi-

tion (the position of the

driver’s seat) can be

recorded and recalled by

pressing a button.

Two different driving posi-

tions can be recorded into

memory.

Each electronic key can be

registered to recall your pre-

ferred driving position.

Recording/recalling a

driving position

138

3-3. Adjusting the seats

ten.

■ Recall procedure

1 Check that the shift lever is in

2 Turn the engine switch to

ON.

3 Press one of the buttons for

the driving position you want

to recall until the buzzer

sounds.

■ To stop the position recall oper-

ation part-way through

Perform any of the following:

● Press the “SET” button.

● Press button “1” or “2”.

● Operate any of the seat adjust-

ment switches.

■ Seat positions that can be

memorized (P.134)

The adjusted positions other than

the position adjusted by lumbar sup-

port switch can be recorded.

■ Operating the driving position

memory after turning the

engine switch to OFF

Recorded seat positions can be

activated up to 180 seconds after

the driver’s door is opened and

another 60 seconds after it is closed

again.

■ In order to correctly use the

driving position memory func-

tion

If a seat position is already in the

furthest possible position and the

seat is operated in the same direc-

tion, the recorded position may be

slightly different when it is recalled.

■ When recalling the driving posi-

tion

Take care when recalling the driving

position so that the head restraint

does not touch the ceiling.

■ If the battery is disconnected

The memorized positions are

erased.

■ Registering procedure

Record your driving position to

button “1” or “2” before perform-

ing the following:

Carry only the key you want to

WARNING

■ Seat adjustment caution

Take care during seat adjustment

so that the seat does not strike

the rear passenger or squeeze

your body against the steering

wheel.

Registering/recall/cancel-

ing a driving position to

an electronic key (mem-

ory recall function)

139

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Before driving

driver’s door.

If 2 or more keys are in the vehi-

cle, the driving position cannot

be recorded properly.

1 Check that the shift lever is in

2 Turn the engine switch to

ON.

3 Recall the driving position

that you want to record.

4 While pressing the recalled

button, press and hold the

door lock switch (either lock

or unlock) until the buzzer

sounds.

If the button could not be regis-

tered, the buzzer sounds continu-

ously for approximately 3 seconds.

■ Recall procedure

Make sure that the doors are

locked before recalling the driv-

ing position.Carry the electronic

key that has been registered to

the driving position, and then

unlock and open the driver’s

door using the smart key system

or wireless remote control.

The driving position will move to the

recorded position.

If the driving position is in a position

that has already been recorded, the

seat will not move.

■ Cancelation procedure

Carry only the key you want to

cancel and then close the

driver’s door.

If 2 or more keys are in the vehi-

cle, the driving position cannot

be canceled properly.

1 Check that the shift lever is in

2 Turn the engine switch to

ON.

3 While pressing the “SET” but-

ton, press and hold the door

lock switch (either lock or

unlock) until the buzzer

sounds twice.

If the button could not be canceled,

the buzzer sounds continuously for

approximately 3 seconds.

■ Recalling the driving position

using the memory recall func-

tion

● Different driving positions can be

registered for each electronic key.

Therefore, the driving position that

is recalled may be different

depending on the key being car-

ried.

● If a door other than the driver’s

door is unlocked with smart key

system, the driving position can-

not be recalled. In this case, press

the driving position button which

has been set.

■ Customization

Settings (e.g. the unlock door set-

tings of the memory recall function)

can be customized. (Customizable

features: P.693)

140

3-3. Adjusting the seats

■ Front seats

1 Up

Pull the head restraints up.

2 Down

Push the head restraint down while

pressing the lock release button

■ Center rear seat

1 Up

Pull the head restraints up.

2 Down

Push the head restraint down while

pressing the lock release button

■ Outboard rear seats

Head restraints cannot be

adjusted.

■ Adjusting the height of the head

restraints (front seats)

Make sure that the head restraints

are adjusted so that the center of

the head restraint is closest to the

top of your ears.

■ Adjusting the center rear seat

head restraint

Always raise the head restraint one

level from the stowed position when

using.

Head restraints

Head restraints are provided

for all seats.

WARNING

■ Head restraint precautions

Observe the following precautions

regarding the head restraints.

Failure to do so may result in

death or serious injury.

● Use the head restraints

designed for each respective

seat.

● Adjust the head restraints to the

correct position at all times.

● After adjusting the head

restraints, push down on them

and make sure they are locked

in position.

● Do not drive with the head

restraints removed.

Vertical adjustment

141

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Before driving

Pull the head restraint up while

pressing the lock release button

If the head restraint touches the

ceiling, making the removal difficult,

change the seat height or angle.

(P.134)

■ Front and center rear seats

Align the head restraint with the

installation holes and push it

down to the lock position.

Press and hold the lock release

button when lowering the

head restraint.

■ Outboard rear seats

Align the head restraint with the

installation holes and push it

down to the lowest lock position.

Removing the head

restraints

Installing the head

restraints

142

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

3-4.Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

1 Hold the steering wheel and

push the lever down.

2 Adjust to the ideal position by

moving the steering wheel

horizontally and vertically.

After adjustment, pull the lever up

to secure the steering wheel.

To sound the horn, press on or

close to the mark.

Steering wheel

Adjustment procedure

WARNING

■ Caution while driving

Do not adjust the steering wheel

while driving.

Doing so may cause the driver to

mishandle the vehicle and cause

an accident, resulting in death or

serious injury.

■ After adjusting the steering

wheel

Make sure that the steering wheel

is securely locked.

Otherwise, the steering wheel

may move suddenly, possibly

causing an accident, and resulting

in death or serious injury. Also,

the horn may not sound if the

steering wheel is not securely

locked.

Sounding the horn

143

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Before driving

: If equipped

The height of the rear view mir-

ror can be adjusted to suit your

driving posture.

Adjust the height of the rear

view mirror by moving it up and

down.

Reflected light from the head-

lights of vehicles behind can be

reduced by operating the lever.

1 Normal position

2 Anti-glare position

Responding to the level of

brightness of the headlights of

vehicles behind, the reflected

light is automatically reduced.

Changing automatic anti-glare

function mode on/off

When the automatic anti-glare func-

tion is in ON mode, the indicator

illuminates.

The function will set to ON mode

each time the engine switch is

turned to ON.

Pressing the button turns the func-

tion to OFF mode. (The indicator

also turns off.)

Inside rear view mir-

ror

The rear view mirror’s posi-

tion can be adjusted to

enable sufficient confirma-

tion of the rear view.

Adjusting the height of

rear view mirror

WARNING

■ Caution while driving

Do not adjust the position of the

mirror while driving.

Doing so may lead to mishandling

of the vehicle and cause an acci-

dent, resulting in death or serious

injury.

Anti-glare function (vehi-

cles with manual anti-

glare inside rear view mir-

ror)

Anti-glare function (vehi-

cles with auto anti-glare

inside rear view mirror)

144

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

 Vehicles without garage door

opener

 Vehicles with garage door

opener

■ To prevent sensor error (vehi-

cles with auto anti-glare inside

rear view mirror)

To ensure that the sensors operate

properly, do not touch or cover

them.

 Vehicles without garage door

opener

 Vehicles with garage door opener

145

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Before driving

: If equipped

Camera indicator

Indicates that the camera is operat-

ing normally.

Icon display area

Displays icons, adjusting gauge,

etc. (P.147)

Select button

Press to change the setting of the

item you want to adjust.

Menu button

Press to display the icon display

area and select the item you want

to adjust.

Lever

Operate to change between digital

mirror mode and optical mirror

mode.

Digital Rear-view Mir-

ror

The Digital Rear-view Mirror

is a system that uses the

camera on the rear of the

vehicle and displays its

image on the display of the

Digital Rear-view Mirror.

The Digital Rear-view Mirror

can be changed between

optical mirror mode and dig-

ital mirror mode by operat-

ing the lever.

The Digital Rear-view Mirror

allows the driver to see the

rear view despite obstruc-

tions, such as the head

restraints or luggage, ensur-

ing rear visibility. Also, the

rear seats are not displayed

and privacy of the passen-

gers is enhanced.

WARNING

Observe the following precau-

tions.

Failure to do so may result in

death or serious injury.

■ Before using the Digital Rear-

view Mirror

● Make sure to adjust the mirror

before driving. (P. 14 7)

• Change to optical mirror mode

and adjust the position of the

Digital Rear-view Mirror so that

the area behind your vehicle

can be viewed properly.

• Change to digital mirror mode

and adjust the display settings.

● As the range of the image dis-

played by the Digital Rear-view

Mirror is different from that of

the optical mirror, make sure to

check this difference before

driving.

System components

146

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Operate the lever to change

between digital mirror mode and

optical mirror mode.

1 Digital mirror mode

Displays an image of the area

behind the vehicle.

will illuminate in this mode.

2 Optical mirror mode

Turns off the display of the Digital

Rear-view Mirror allows it to be

used as an optical mirror.

■ Digital mirror mode operating

condition

The engine switch is turned to ON.

When the engine switch is changed

from ON to OFF or ACC, the image

will disappear after several seconds.

■ When using the Digital Rear-

view Mirror in digital mirror

mode

● If it is difficult to see the displayed

image due to light reflected off the

Digital Rear-view Mirror, the cam-

era being dirty, or if lights of a

vehicle behind your vehicle or the

displayed image are bothering

you, change to optical mirror

mode.

● When the back door is open, the

Digital Rear-view Mirror image

may not display properly. Before

driving, make sure the back door

is closed.

● If the display is difficult to see due

to reflected light, close the sun-

shade for the moon roof (if

equipped) or the electronic sun-

shade for the panoramic moon

roof (if equipped).

● Any of the following conditions

may occur when driving in the

dark, such as at night. None of

them indicates that a malfunction

has occurred.

• Colors of objects in the displayed

image may differ from their actual

color.

• Depending on the height of the

lights of the vehicle behind, the

area around the vehicle may

appear white and blurry.

• Automatic image adjustment for

brighter surrounding image may

cause flickering.

If it is difficult to see the displayed

image or flickering bothers you,

change to optical mirror mode.

● The Digital Rear-view Mirror may

become hot while it is in digital

mirror mode.

This is not a malfunction.

● Depending on your physical con-

dition or age, it may take longer

than usual to focus on the dis-

played image. In this case,

change to optical mirror mode.

● Do not let passengers stare at the

displayed image when the vehicle

is being driven, as doing so may

cause motion sickness.

■ When the system malfunctions

If the symbol shown in the illustra-

tion is displayed when using the

Digital Rear-view Mirror in digital

mirror mode, the system may be

malfunctioning. The symbol will dis-

appear in a few seconds. Operate

the lever, change to optical mirror

mode and have the vehicle

inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Changing modes

147

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Before driving

■ Adjusting the mirror height

The height of the rear view mir-

ror can be adjusted to suit your

driving posture.

Change to optical mirror mode,

adjusting the height of the rear

view mirror by moving it up and

down.

■ Display settings (digital mir-

ror mode)

Settings of the display in the dig-

ital mirror mode, on/off operation

of the automatic anti-glare func-

tion, etc. can be changed.

1 Press the menu button.

The icons will be displayed.

2 Press the menu button

repeatedly and select the

item you want to adjust.

3 Press or to

change the setting.

The icons will disappear if a button

is not operated for approximately 5

seconds or more.

Adjusting the mirror

Icons Settings

Select to adjust the bright-

ness of the display.

Select to adjust the area

displayed up/down.

Select to adjust the area

displayed to the left/right.

Select to adjust the angle of

the displayed image.

148

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

: This is a function for the optical

mirror mode, however, the setting

can also be changed while using

the digital mirror mode.

■ Enabling/disabling the

automatic anti-glare func-

tion (optical mirror mode)

The automatic anti-glare func-

tion in the optical mirror mode

can be enabled/disabled. The

setting can be changed in both

the digital mirror mode and the

optical mirror mode.

 When using the digital mirror

mode

P. 1 47

 When using the optical mirror

mode

1 Press the menu button.

The icons will be displayed.

2 Press the menu button

repeatedly and select .

The setting display will be dis-

played.

3 Press or to

enable (ON)/disable (OFF)

the automatic anti-glare func-

tion.

The icons will disappear if a button

is not operated for approximately 5

seconds or more.

■ Adjusting the display (digital

mirror mode)

● If the displayed image is adjusted,

it may appear distorted. This is not

a malfunction.

● If the brightness of the Digital

Rear-view Mirror is set too high, it

may cause eye strain. Adjust the

Digital Rear-view Mirror to an

appropriate brightness. If your

eyes become tired, change to

optical mirror mode.

● The brightness of the Digital Rear-

view Mirror will change automati-

cally according to the brightness

of the area in front of your vehicle.

■ To prevent the light sensors

from malfunctioning

To prevent the light sensors from

malfunctioning, do not touch or

cover them.

Select to zoom in/out the

displayed image.

Select to enable/disable the

automatic anti-glare func-

tion.

Responding to the bright-

ness of the headlights of

vehicles behind, the

reflected light is automati-

cally adjusted.

The automatic anti-glare

function is enabled each

time the engine switch is

changed to ON.

Icons Settings

149

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Before driving

■ Cleaning the mirror surface

If the mirror surface is dirty, the

image on the display may be dif-

ficult to see.

Clean the mirror surface gently

using a soft dry cloth.

■ Cleaning the camera

If the camera lens is dirty, the

displayed image may not be

clear. In this case, clean it with a

soft cloth dampened with water

or a swab.

■ The camera

The camera for the Digital Rear-

view Mirror is located as shown.

WARNING

Observe the following precau-

tions.

Failure to do so may result in

death or serious injury.

■ While driving

● Do not adjust the position of the

Digital Rear-view Mirror or

adjust the display settings while

driving.

Stop the vehicle and operate

the Digital Rear-view Mirror

control switches.

Failure to do so may cause a

steering wheel operation error,

resulting in an unexpected acci-

dent.

● Always pay attention to the

vehicle’s surroundings.

The size of the vehicles and other

objects may look different when in

digital mirror mode and optical

mirror mode.

When backing up, make sure to

directly check the safety of the

area around your vehicle, espe-

cially behind the vehicle.

Additionally, if a vehicle

approaches from the rear in the

dark, such as at night, the sur-

rounding area may appear dim.

■ To prevent causes of fire

If the driver continues using the

Digital Rear-view Mirror while

smoke or odor comes from the

mirror, it may result in fire. Stop

using the system immediately and

contact your Toyota dealer.

Cleaning the Digital Rear-

view Mirror

150

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the following

table for the likely cause and the solution.

If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle

inspected by your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

■ To prevent the Digital Rear-

view Mirror from malfunction-

ing

● Do not use detergents, such as

thinner, benzene, and alcohol to

clean the mirror. They may dis-

color, deteriorate or damage the

mirror surface.

● Do not smoke, use matches,

use cigarette lighters or allow

open flames near the mirror. It

may damage the mirror or

cause a fire.

● Do not remove, disassemble or

modify the mirror.

■ To prevent the camera from

malfunctioning

● Observe the following precau-

tions, otherwise the Digital

Rear-view Mirror may not oper-

ate properly.

• Do not strike or hit the camera

or subject it to a strong impact,

as the camera installation posi-

tion and angle may be changed.

• Do not remove, disassemble or

modify the camera.

• Do not allow an organic solvent,

car wax, window cleaner or

glass coating to adhere to the

camera. If this happens, wipe it

off as soon as possible.

• When cleaning the camera lens,

wipe the camera lens with a

damp soft cloth.

Do not strongly rub the camera

lens, as it may be scratched and

will not be able to transmit a

clear image.

• When applying colored film

(including transparent film) to

the rear window glass, do not

apply it to the area in front of the

camera.

If film is applied to the area in

front of the camera, the image

from the camera may not dis-

play properly.

● Do not subject the camera to a

strong impact as this could

cause a malfunction.

If this happens, have the vehicle

inspected by your Toyota dealer

as soon as possible.

If you notice any symptoms

151

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Before driving

Symptom Likely cause Solution

The image is difficult to

see.

The mirror surface is

dirty.

Clean the mirror surface

gently, using a soft dry

cloth.

Sunlight or headlights

are shining directly into

the Digital Rear-view

Mirror.

Change to optical mirror

mode.

(If the light is coming

through the moon roof [if

equipped] or panoramic

moon roof [if equipped],

close the sunshade or

electronic sunshade.)

• The vehicle is in a dark

area.

• The vehicle is near a

TV tower, broadcast-

ing station, electric

power plant, or other

location where strong

radio waves or electri-

cal noise may be pres-

ent.

• The temperature

around the camera is

extremely high/low.

• The ambient tempera-

ture is extremely low.

• It is raining or humid.

• Sunlight or headlights

are shining directly into

the camera lens.

• The vehicle is under

fluorescent lights,

sodium lights, mer-

cury lights, etc.

• Exhaust gas is

obstructing the cam-

era.

Change to optical mirror

mode.

(Change back to digital

mirror mode when the

conditions have

improved.)

152

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

The image is difficult to

see.

The luggage in the lug-

gage compartment is

reflected off the rear win-

dow glass and obstruct-

ing the camera.

• Change to optical mir-

ror mode.

• Move the luggage to a

position where it does

not obstruct the cam-

era or cover it with a

black cloth to reduce

the amount it is

reflected off the rear

window glass.

The rear window glass is

fogged up.

Change to optical mirror

mode.

After defogging the rear

window using the rear

window defogger

(P.517), use the digi-

tal mirror mode again.

The outside of the rear

window glass is dirty.

Use the rear window

wiper to remove dirt.

The inside of the rear

window glass is dirty.

Wipe the inside of rear

window glass with a

damp soft cloth.

The image is out of

alignment.

The back door is not fully

closed.

Fully close the back

door.

The camera or its sur-

rounding area has

received a strong

impact.

Change to optical mirror

mode and have the vehi-

cle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

The display is dim and

is displayed.

The system may be mal-

functioning.

Change to optical mirror

mode and have the vehi-

cle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

goes off.

Symptom Likely cause Solution

153

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Before driving

is displayed.

The Digital Rear-view

Mirror is extremely hot.

(The display will gradu-

ally become more dim. If

the temperature contin-

ues to increase, the Digi-

tal Rear-view Mirror will

turn off.)

Reducing the cabin tem-

perature is recom-

mended to reduce the

temperature of the mir-

ror.

( will disappear when

the mirror becomes

cool.)

If does not disap-

pear even though the

mirror is cool, have the

vehicle inspected by

your Toyota dealer.

The lever cannot be

operated properly.

The lever may be mal-

functioning.

Change to optical mirror

mode and have the vehi-

cle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

(To change to optical

mirror mode, press and

hold the menu button for

approximately 10 sec-

onds.)

Symptom Likely cause Solution

154

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

■ Defogging the mirrors (if

equipped)

The outside rear view mirrors can

be cleared using the mirror defog-

gers. Turn on the rear window

defogger to turn on the outside rear

view mirror defoggers.

(P.511, 517)

1 To select a mirror to adjust,

press the switch.

Left

Right

2 To adjust the mirror, press

the switch.

Right

Down

Left

■ Mirror angle can be adjusted

when

The engine switch is in ACC or ON.

Push the mirror back in the

direction of the vehicle’s rear.

Outside rear view mir-

rors

The rear view mirror’s posi-

tion can be adjusted to

enable sufficient confirma-

tion of the rear view.

WARNING

■ Important points while driving

Observe the following precautions

while driving.

Failing to do so may result in loss

of control of the vehicle and cause

an accident, resulting in death or

serious injury.

● Do not adjust the mirrors while

driving.

● Do not drive with the mirrors

folded.

● Both the driver and passenger

side mirrors must be extended

and properly adjusted before

driving.

■ When the mirror defoggers

are operating (if equipped)

Do not touch the rear view mirror

surfaces, as they can become

very hot and burn you.

Adjustment procedure

Folding the mirrors

155

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Before driving

WARNING

■ When a mirror is moving

To avoid personal injury and mir-

ror malfunction, be careful not to

get your hand caught by the mov-

ing mirror.

156

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

3-5.Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

The power windows can be

opened and closed using the

switches.

Operating the switch moves the

side windows as follows:

1 Closing

2 One-touch closing

3 Opening

4 One-touch opening

: To stop the side window partway,

operate the switch in the opposite

direction.

■ The power windows can be

operated when

The engine switch is in ON.

■ Operating the power windows

after turning the engine off

The power windows can be oper-

ated for approximately 45 seconds

even after the engine switch is

turned to ACC or OFF. They cannot,

however, be operated once either

front door is opened.

■ Jam protection function

If an object becomes jammed

between the side window and the

window frame while the side window

is closing, side window movement is

stopped and the side window is

opened slightly.

■ Catch protection function

If an object becomes caught

between the door and side window

while the side window is opening,

side window movement is stopped.

■ When the power window cannot

be opened or closed

When the jam protection function or

catch protection function operates

unusually and the side window can-

not be opened and closed, perform

the following operations with the

power window switch of that door.

● Stop the vehicle. With the engine

switch in ON, within 4 seconds of

the jam protection function or

catch protection function activat-

ing, continuously operate the

power window switch in the one-

touch closing direction or one-

touch opening direction so that the

side window can be opened and

closed.

● If the side window cannot be

opened and closed even when

performing the above operations,

perform the following procedure

for function initialization.

1 Turn the engine switch to ON.

2 Pull and hold the power window

switch in the one-touch closing

direction and completely close

the side window.

3 Release the power window

switch for a moment, resume

pulling the switch in the one-

touch closing direction, and hold

it there for approximately 6 sec-

onds or more.

4 Press and hold the power win-

dow switch in the one-touch

opening direction. After the side

window is completely opened,

continue holding the switch for

an additional 1 second or more.

Power windows

Opening and closing the

power windows

157

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Before driving

5 Release the power window

switch for a moment, resume

pushing the switch in the one-

touch opening direction, and

hold it there for approximately 4

seconds or more.

6 Pull and hold the power window

switch in the one-touch closing

direction again. After the side

window is completely closed,

continue holding the switch for a

further 1 second or more.

If you release the switch while the

side window is moving, start again

from the beginning.

If the side window reverses and

cannot be fully closed or opened,

have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

■ Door lock linked power window

operation

● The power windows can be

opened and closed using the key

(vehicles without smart key sys-

tem) or mechanical key (vehicles

with smart key system).

(P.109,

654)

● The power windows can be

opened using the wireless remote

control.

(P.108)

● Vehicles with alarm: The alarm

may be triggered if the alarm is set

and the power window is closed

using the door lock linked power

window operation function.

(P. 73 )

: These settings must be custom-

ized at your Toyota dealer.

■ Power window open reminder

function

 Vehicles without smart key system

The buzzer sounds and a message

is shown on the multi-information

display when the key has been

removed from the engine switch and

the driver’s door is opened with the

power windows open.

 Vehicles with smart key system

The buzzer sounds and a message

is shown on the multi-information

display when the engine switch is

turned to OFF and the driver’s door

is opened with the power windows

open.

■ Customization

Settings (e.g. linked door lock oper-

ation) can be changed. (Customiza-

ble features: P.693)

WARNING

Observe the following precau-

tions.

Failing to do so may result in

death or serious injury.

■ Closing the power windows

● The driver is responsible for all

the power window operations,

including the operation for the

passengers. In order to prevent

accidental operation, especially

by a child, do not let a child

operate the power windows. It is

possible for children and other

passengers to have body parts

caught in the power window.

Also, when riding with a child, it

is recommended to use the win-

dow lock switch. (P.158)

● Check to make sure that all pas-

sengers do not have any part of

their body in a position where it

could be caught when a power

window is being operated.

158

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

This function can be used to

prevent children from acciden-

tally opening or closing a pas-

senger window.

Press the switch.

The indicator will come on and

the passenger windows will be

locked.

The passenger windows can still be

opened and closed using the

driver’s switch even if the lock

switch is on.

■ The window lock switch can be

operated when

The engine switch is in ON.

■ When the battery is discon-

nected

The window lock switch is disabled.

If necessary, press the window lock

switch after reconnecting the bat-

tery.

WARNING

● When using the wireless remote

control, key or mechanical key

and operating the power win-

dows, operate the power win-

dow after checking to make

sure that there is no possibility

of any passenger having any of

their body parts caught in the

side window. Also, do not let a

child operate the power window

by the wireless remote control,

key or mechanical key. It is pos-

sible for children and other pas-

sengers to get caught in the

power window.

● When exiting the vehicle, turn

the engine switch to OFF, carry

the key and exit the vehicle

along with the child. There may

be accidental operation, due to

mischief, etc., that may possibly

lead to an accident.

■ Jam protection function

● Never use any part of your body

to intentionally activate the jam

protection function.

● The jam protection function may

not work if something gets

jammed just before the side

window is fully closed. Be care-

ful not to get any part of your

body jammed in the side win-

dow.

■ Catch protection function

● Never use any part of your body

or clothing to intentionally acti-

vate the catch protection func-

tion.

● The catch protection function

may not work if something gets

caught just before the side win-

dow is fully opened. Be careful

not to get any part of your body

or clothing caught in the side

window.

Preventing accidental

operation (window lock

switch)

159

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Before driving

: If equipped

■ Opening and closing

1 Opens the moon roof

The moon roof stops slightly before

the fully open position to reduce

wind noise.

Press the switch again to fully open

the moon roof.

2 Closes the moon roof

: Lightly press either side of the

moon roof switch to stop the

moon roof partway.

■ Tilting up and down

1 Tilts the moon roof up

2 Tilts the moon roof down

: Lightly press either side of the

moon roof switch to stop the

moon roof partway.

■ The moon roof can be operated

when

The engine switch is in ON.

■ Operating the moon roof after

turning the engine off

The moon roof can be operated for

approximately 45 seconds after the

engine switch is turned to ACC or

OFF. It cannot, however, be oper-

ated once either front door is

opened.

■ Jam protection function

If an object is detected between the

moon roof and the frame while the

moon roof is closing or tilting down,

travel is stopped and the moon roof

opens slightly.

■ Sunshade

The sunshade can be opened and

closed manually. However, the sun-

shade will open automatically when

the moon roof is opened.

■ Door lock linked moon roof

operation

● The moon roof can be opened

and closed using the mechanical

key.

(P.654)

● The moon roof can be opened

using the wireless remote control.

(P.108)

● Vehicles with alarm: The alarm

may be triggered if the alarm is set

and the moon roof is closed using

the door lock linked moon roof

operation function. (P. 7 3 )

: These settings must be custom-

ized at your Toyota dealer.

Moon roof

Use the overhead switches

to open and close the moon

roof and tilt it up and down.

Operating the moon roof

160

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

■ When the moon roof does not

close normally

Perform the following procedure:

1 Stop the vehicle.

2 Press and hold the “CLOSE”

switch.

The moon roof will close, reopen

and pause for approximately 10 sec-

onds. Then it will close again and

stop at the completely closed posi-

tion.

3 Check to make sure that the

moon roof is completely closed

and then release the switch.

: If the switch is released at the

incorrect time, the procedure will

have to be performed again from

the beginning.

If the moon roof does not fully close

even after performing the above

procedure correctly, have the vehi-

cle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

■ If the moon roof does not move

normally

If the moon roof does not open or

close normally or the automatic

opening function does not operate,

perform the following initialization

procedure.

1 Stop the vehicle.

2 Press and hold the “DOWN”

switch.

The moon roof will stop at the tilt-up

position. After that, it will open,

close, tilt up, tilt down, and stop at

the fully closed position.

3 Confirm that the moon roof has

completely stopped and release

the switch.

: If you release the switch while the

moon roof is moving, perform the

procedure again from the begin-

ning.

If, after performing the above proce-

dures correctly, the moon roof still

does not open or close normally or

the automatic opening function does

not operate, have the vehicle

inspected by your Toyota dealer.

■ Moon roof open reminder func-

tion

The buzzer sounds and a message

is shown on the multi-information

display when the engine switch is

turned to OFF and the driver’s door

is opened with the moon roof open.

■ Customization

Settings (e.g. linked door lock oper-

ation) can be changed. (Customiza-

ble features: P.693)

WARNING

Observe the following precau-

tions.

Failure to do so may cause death

or serious injury.

■ Opening the moon roof

● Do not allow any passengers to

put their hands or head outside

the vehicle while it is moving.

● Do not sit on top of the moon

roof.

■ Opening and closing the

moon roof

● The driver is responsible for

moon roof opening and closing

operations.

In order to prevent accidental

operation, especially by a child,

do not let a child operate the

moon roof. It is possible for chil-

dren and other passengers to

have body parts caught in the

moon roof.

161

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Before driving

WARNING

● Check to make sure that all pas-

sengers do not have any part of

their body in a position where it

could be caught when the moon

roof is being operated.

● When using the wireless remote

control or mechanical key and

operating the moon roof, oper-

ate the moon roof after checking

to make sure that there is no

possibility of any passenger

having any of their body parts

caught in the moon roof. Also,

do not let a child operate moon

roof by the wireless remote con-

trol or mechanical key. It is pos-

sible for children and other

passengers to get caught in the

moon roof.

● When exiting the vehicle, turn

the engine switch to OFF, carry

the key and exit the vehicle

along with the child. There may

be accidental operation, due to

mischief, etc., that may possibly

lead to an accident.

■ Jam protection function

● Never use any part of your body

to intentionally activate the jam

protection function.

● The jam protection function may

not work if something gets

caught just before the moon

roof is fully closed. Also, the jam

protection function is not

designed to operate while the

switch is being pressed. Take

care so that your fingers, etc. do

not get caught.

162

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

: If equipped

■ Opening and closing the

electronic sunshade

1 Opens the electronic sun-

shade

Slide and hold the switch

backward. The electronic sunshade

will fully open automatically.

2 Closes the electronic sun-

shade

Slide and hold the switch for-

ward. The electronic sunshade will

fully close automatically.

If the panoramic moon roof is not

fully closed, it will close fully before

the electronic sunshade closes.

: Quickly slide and release the

switch in either direction to

stop the electronic sunshade

partway.

■ Tilting the panoramic moon

roof up and down

Press the switch to tilt the

panoramic moon roof up.

When the panoramic moon roof is

tilted up, the electronic sunshade

will open to the half-open position

of the roof.

: Lightly press the switch

again to stop the panoramic

moon roof partway.

Press and hold the switch

to tilt the panoramic moon roof

down.

The panoramic moon roof can be

tilted down only when it is in the tilt-

up position.

■ Opening and closing the

panoramic moon roof

Opens the panoramic moon

roof

Slide and hold the switch

Panoramic moon roof

Use the overhead switches

to operate the panoramic

moon roof and electronic

sunshade.

Operating the electronic

sunshade and panoramic

moon roof

163

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Before driving

backward. The panoramic moon

roof and electronic sunshade will

open automatically.

The panoramic moon roof can be

opened from the tilt-up position.

: Quickly slide and release the

switch in either direction to

stop the panoramic moon roof

partway.

Closes the panoramic moon

roof

Slide and hold the switch for-

ward. The panoramic moon roof will

fully close automatically.

■ The panoramic moon roof can

be operated when

The engine switch is in ON.

■ Operating the panoramic moon

roof after turning the engine off

The panoramic moon roof and elec-

tronic sunshade can be operated for

approximately 45 seconds after the

engine switch is turned to ACC or

OFF. They cannot, however, be

operated once either front door is

opened.

■ Jam protection function

If an object is detected between the

panoramic moon roof and the frame

in the following situations, travel is

stopped and the panoramic moon

roof opens slightly.

● The panoramic moon roof is clos-

ing or tilting down.

● The electronic sunshade is clos-

ing.

■ Closing both the panoramic

moon roof and electronic sun-

shade

Slide the switch forward.

The electronic sunshade will close

to the half-open position and pause.

The panoramic moon roof will then

fully close. Then the electronic sun-

shade will fully close.

■ Door lock linked panoramic

moon roof operation

● The panoramic moon roof can be

opened and closed using the

mechanical key.

(P.654)

● The panoramic moon roof can be

opened using the wireless remote

control.

(P.108)

● Vehicles with alarm: The alarm

may be triggered if the alarm is set

and the panoramic moon roof is

closed using the door lock linked

panoramic moon roof operation

function. (P.73)

: These settings must be custom-

ized at your Toyota dealer.

■ When the panoramic moon roof

or electronic sunshade does

not close normally

Perform the following procedure:

1 Stop the vehicle.

164

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

2 Turn the engine switch to ON.

3 Slide and hold the switch

or switch forward. Continue

sliding and holding the switch for

approximately 10 seconds after

the panoramic moon roof or elec-

tronic sunshade closes and

reopens. The panoramic moon

roof and electronic sunshade will

start to close.

4 Check that the panoramic moon

roof and electronic sunshade are

fully closed and release the

switch.

: If the switch is released at the

incorrect time, the procedure will

have to be performed again from

the beginning.

If the panoramic moon roof or elec-

tronic sunshade does not fully close

even after performing the above

procedure correctly, have the vehi-

cle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

■ Panoramic moon roof open

reminder function

A buzzer sounds and a message is

shown on the multi-information dis-

play when the engine switch is

turned to OFF and the driver’s door

is opened with the panoramic moon

roof open.

■ Customization

Settings (e.g. linked door lock oper-

ation) can be changed. (Customiza-

ble features: P.693)

WARNING

Observe the following precau-

tions.

Failure to do so may result in

death or serious injury.

■ Opening and closing the elec-

tronic sunshade

● Check to make sure that all pas-

sengers do not have any part of

their body in a position where it

could be caught when the elec-

tronic sunshade is being oper-

ated.

● Do not let a child operate the

electronic sunshade. Closing

the electronic sunshade on

someone can cause death or

serious injury.

■ Opening the panoramic moon

roof

● Do not allow any passengers to

put their hands or head outside

the vehicle while it is moving.

● Do not sit on top of the pan-

oramic moon roof.

■ Opening and closing the pan-

oramic moon roof

● The driver is responsible for

panoramic moon roof opening

and closing operations.

In order to prevent accidental

operation, especially by a child,

do not let a child operate the

panoramic moon roof. It is pos-

sible for children and other pas-

sengers to have body parts

caught in the panoramic moon

roof.

165

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Before driving

WARNING

● Check to make sure that all pas-

sengers do not have any part of

their body in a position where it

could be caught when the pan-

oramic moon roof is being oper-

ated.

● When using the wireless remote

control or mechanical key and

operating the panoramic moon

roof, operate the panoramic

moon roof after checking to

make sure that there is no pos-

sibility of any passenger having

any of their body parts caught in

the panoramic moon roof. Also,

do not let a child operate pan-

oramic moon roof by the wire-

less remote control or

mechanical key. It is possible for

children and other passengers

to get caught in the panoramic

moon roof.

● When exiting the vehicle, turn

the engine switch to OFF, carry

the key and exit the vehicle

along with the child. There may

be accidental operation, due to

mischief, etc., that may possibly

lead to an accident.

■ Jam protection function

● Never use any part of your body

to intentionally activate the jam

protection function.

● The jam protection function may

not work if something gets

caught just before the pan-

oramic moon roof or electronic

sunshade is fully closed. Also,

the jam protection function is

not designed to operate while

the switch is being pressed.

Take care so that your fingers,

etc. do not get caught.

■ To prevent burns or injuries

Do not touch the area between

the underside of the panoramic

moon roof and the electronic sun-

shade. Your hand may get caught

and you could injure yourself.

Also, if the vehicle is left in direct

sunlight for a long time, the under-

side of the panoramic moon roof

could become very hot and could

cause burns.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the

panoramic moon roof

● Before opening the panoramic

moon roof, make sure that there

are no foreign objects, such as

stones or ice, around the open-

ing.

● Do not hit the surface or edge of

the panoramic moon roof with

hard objects.

■ After the vehicle has been

washed or rained on

Before opening the panoramic

moon roof, wipe any water off the

panoramic moon roof. Otherwise,

water may enter the cabin when

the panoramic moon roof is

opened.

166

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

167

Driving

4-1. Before driving

Driving the vehicle....... 169

Cargo and luggage ..... 175

Vehicle load limits ....... 178

Trailer towing............... 179

Dinghy towing ............. 191

4-2. Driving procedures

Engine (ignition) switch

(vehicles without smart key

system)...................... 193

Engine (ignition) switch

(vehicles with smart key

system)...................... 194

Automatic transmission199

Turn signal lever.......... 202

Parking brake.............. 203

Brake Hold .................. 206

4-3. Operating the lights and

wipers

Headlight switch.......... 209

AHB (Automatic High

Beam)........................ 212

Fog light switch ........... 215

Windshield wipers and

washer....................... 215

Rear window wiper and

washer....................... 218

4-4. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap

.................................. 220

4-5. Using the driving support

systems

Toyota Safety Sense 2.0

.................................. 223

PCS (Pre-Collision System)

.................................. 229

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)

.................................. 237

RSA (Road Sign Assist)

.................................. 247

Dynamic radar cruise con-

trol with full-speed range

.................................. 250

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)

.................................. 260

Intuitive parking assist. 270

PKSB (Parking Support

Brake)........................277

Parking Support Brake func-

tion (static objects) ....282

Parking Support Brake func-

tion (rear-crossing vehi-

cles)...........................288

Rear view monitor system

.................................. 292

Toyota parking assist moni-

tor.............................. 300

Panoramic view monitor

.................................. 313

Stop & Start system .... 345

Driving mode select switch

.................................. 351

168

Multi-terrain Select (AWD

vehicles).................... 353

Snow mode switch (AWD

vehicles).................... 357

Downhill assist control sys-

tem............................ 358

Driving assist systems 360

4-6. Driving tips

Winter driving tips ....... 367

Utility vehicle precautions

.................................. 370

169

4-1. Before driving

Driving

4-1.Before driving

■ Starting the engine

P.193, 194

■ Driving

1 With the brake pedal

depressed, shift the shift

lever to D. (P.199)

2 Release the parking brake.

(P.203)

If the parking brake is in automatic

mode, the parking brake is

released automatically when shift-

ing the shift lever to any position

other than P. (P.204)

3 Gradually release the brake

pedal and gently depress the

accelerator pedal to acceler-

ate the vehicle.

■ Stopping

1 With the shift lever in D,

depress the brake pedal.

2 If necessary, set the parking

brake. (P.203)

If the vehicle is to be stopped for an

extended period of time, shift the

shift lever to P. (P.199)

■ Parking the vehicle

1 With the shift lever in D,

depress the brake pedal.

2 Set the parking brake

(P.203), and shift the shift

lever to P (P.199).

3 Turn the engine switch to

OFF to stop the engine.

4 Lock the door, making sure

that you have the key on your

person.

If parking on a hill, block the wheels

as needed.

■ Starting off on a steep

uphill

1 With the brake pedal

depressed, shift the shift

lever to D. (P.199)

2 Pull the parking brake switch

and parking brake is set man-

ually. (P.203)

3 Release the brake pedal and

gently depress the accelera-

tor pedal to accelerate the

vehicle.

Parking brake automatic release

function (P.205)

■ When starting off on a uphill

The hill-start assist control will acti-

vate. (P.360)

■ Driving in the rain

● Drive carefully when it is raining,

because visibility will be reduced,

the windows may become fogged-

up, and the road could be slippery.

● Drive carefully when it starts to

rain, as the road surface could be

especially slippery.

● Refrain from high speeds when

driving on an expressway in the

rain, because there may be a

layer of water between the tires

and the road surface, preventing

Driving the vehicle

The following procedures

should be observed to

ensure safe driving:

Driving procedure

170

4-1. Before driving

the steering and brakes from

operating properly.

■ Engine speed while driving

In the following conditions, the

engine speed may become high

while driving. This is due to auto-

matic up-shifting control or down-

shifting implementation to meet driv-

ing conditions. It does not indicate

sudden acceleration.

● The vehicle is judged to be driving

uphill or downhill

● When the accelerator pedal is

released

● When the brake pedal is

depressed while sport mode is

selected

■ Restraining the engine output

(Brake Override System)

● When the accelerator and brake

pedals are depressed at the same

time, the engine output may be

restrained.

● A warning message is displayed

on the multi-information display

while the system is operating.

(P.633)

■ Restraining sudden start (Drive-

Start Control)

● When the following unusual oper-

ation is performed, the engine out-

put may be restrained.

• When the shift lever is shifted from

R to D, D to R, N to R, P to D, or P

to R (D includes S) with the accel-

erator pedal depressed, a warning

message appears on the multi-

information display. If a warning

message is shown on the multi-

information display, read the mes-

sage and follow the instructions.

• When the accelerator pedal is

depressed too much while the

vehicle is in reverse.

● While Drive-Start Control is being

activated, your vehicle may have

trouble escaping from the mud or

fresh snow. In such case, deacti-

vate TRAC (P.361) to cancel

Drive-Start Control so that the

vehicle may be able to escape

from the mud or fresh snow.

● Drive-Start Control does not work

when Mud & Sand or Rock & Dirt

mode is selected for Multi-terrain

Select.

■ Breaking in your new Toyota

To extend the life of the vehicle,

observing the following precautions

is recommended:

● For the first 200 miles (300 km):

Avoid sudden stops.

● For the first 500 miles (800 km):

Do not tow a trailer.

● For the first 600 miles (1000 km):

• Do not drive at extremely high

speeds.

• Avoid sudden acceleration.

• Do not drive continuously in low

gears.

• Do not drive at a constant speed

for extended periods.

■ Operating your vehicle in a for-

eign country

Comply with the relevant vehicle

registration laws and confirm the

availability of the correct fuel.

(P.666)

WARNING

Observe the following precau-

tions.

Failure to do so may result in

death or serious injury.

■ When starting the vehicle

Always keep your foot on the

brake pedal while stopped with

the engine running. This prevents

the vehicle from creeping.

171

4-1. Before driving

Driving

WARNING

■ When driving the vehicle

● Do not drive if you are unfamil-

iar with the location of the brake

and accelerator pedals to avoid

depressing the wrong pedal.

• Accidentally depressing the

accelerator pedal instead of the

brake pedal will result in sudden

acceleration that may lead to an

accident.

• When backing up, you may twist

your body around, leading to a

difficulty in operating the pedals.

Make sure to operate the pedals

properly.

• Make sure to keep a correct

driving posture even when mov-

ing the vehicle only slightly. This

allows you to depress the brake

and accelerator pedals properly.

• Depress the brake pedal using

your right foot. Depressing the

brake pedal using your left foot

may delay response in an emer-

gency, resulting in an accident.

● Do not drive the vehicle over or

stop the vehicle near flammable

materials such as leaves, paper

or rags.

The exhaust system and

exhaust gases can be

extremely hot. These hot parts

may cause a fire if there is any

flammable material nearby.

● During normal driving, do not

turn off the engine. Turning the

engine off while driving will not

cause loss of steering or brak-

ing control, but the power assist

to these systems will be lost.

This will make it more difficult to

steer and brake, so you should

pull over and stop the vehicle as

soon as it is safe to do so.

However, in the event of an

emergency, such as if it

becomes impossible to stop the

vehicle in the normal way:

P.6 18

● Use engine braking (downshift)

to maintain a safe speed when

driving down a steep hill.

Using the brakes continuously

may cause the brakes to over-

heat and lose effectiveness.

(P.659)

● Do not adjust the position of the

steering wheel, the seat, or the

inside or outside rear view mir-

rors while driving.

Doing so may result in a loss of

vehicle control.

● Always check that all passen-

gers’ arms, head or other parts

of their body are not outside the

vehicle.

● Do not drive in excess of the

speed limit. Even if the legal

speed limit permits it, do not

drive over 85 mph (140 km/h)

unless your vehicle has high-

speed capability tires. Driving

over 85 mph (140 km/h) may

result in tire failure, loss of con-

trol and possible injury. Be sure

to consult a tire dealer to deter-

mine whether the tires on your

vehicle are high-speed capabil-

ity tires or not before driving at

such speeds.

172

4-1. Before driving

WARNING

■ When driving on slippery

road surfaces

● Sudden braking, acceleration

and steering may cause tire

slippage and reduce your ability

to control the vehicle.

● Sudden acceleration, engine

braking due to shifting, or

changes in engine speed could

cause the vehicle to skid.

● After driving through a puddle,

lightly depress the brake pedal

to make sure that the brakes

are functioning properly. Wet

brake pads may prevent the

brakes from functioning prop-

erly. If the brakes on only one

side are wet and not functioning

properly, steering control may

be affected.

■ When shifting the shift lever

● Do not let the vehicle roll back-

ward while the shift lever is in a

driving position, or roll forward

while the shift lever is in R.

Doing so may cause the engine

to stall or lead to poor brake and

steering performance, resulting

in an accident or damage to the

vehicle.

● Do not shift the shift lever to P

while the vehicle is moving.

Doing so can damage the trans-

mission and may result in a loss

of vehicle control.

● Do not shift the shift lever to R

while the vehicle is moving for-

ward.

Doing so can damage the trans-

mission and may result in a loss

of vehicle control.

● Do not shift the shift lever to a

driving position while the vehicle

is moving backward.

Doing so can damage the trans-

mission and may result in a loss

of vehicle control.

● Moving the shift lever to N while

the vehicle is moving will disen-

gage the engine from the trans-

mission. Engine braking is not

available when N is selected.

● Be careful not to shift the shift

lever with the accelerator pedal

depressed.

Shifting the shift lever to a gear

other than P or N may lead to

unexpected rapid acceleration

of the vehicle that may cause an

accident and result in death or

serious injury. Doing so can

damage the transmission and

may result in a loss of vehicle

control.

■ If you hear a squealing or

scraping noise (brake pad

wear limit indicators)

Have the brake pads checked and

replaced by your Toyota dealer as

soon as possible.

Rotor damage may result if the

pads are not replaced when

needed.

It is dangerous to drive the vehicle

when the wear limits of the brake

pads and/or those of the brake

discs are exceeded.

■ When the vehicle is stopped

● Do not race the engine.

If the vehicle is in any gear other

than P or N, the vehicle may

accelerate suddenly and unex-

pectedly, causing an accident.

● In order to prevent accidents

due to the vehicle rolling away,

always keep depressing the

brake pedal while the engine is

running, and apply the parking

brake as necessary.

173

4-1. Before driving

Driving

WARNING

● If the vehicle is stopped on an

incline, in order to prevent acci-

dents caused by the vehicle roll-

ing forward or backward, always

depress the brake pedal and

securely apply the parking

brake as needed.

● Avoid revving or racing the

engine.

Running the engine at high

speed while the vehicle is

stopped may cause the exhaust

system to overheat, which could

result in a fire if combustible

material is nearby.

■ When the vehicle is parked

● Do not leave glasses, cigarette

lighters, spray cans, or soft

drink cans in the vehicle when it

is in the sun.

Doing so may result in the fol-

lowing:

• Gas may leak from a cigarette

lighter or spray can, and may

lead to a fire.

• The temperature inside the

vehicle may cause the plastic

lenses and plastic material of

glasses to deform or crack.

• Soft drink cans may fracture,

causing the contents to spray

over the interior of the vehicle,

and may also cause a short cir-

cuit in the vehicle’s electrical

components.

● Do not leave cigarette lighters in

the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter

is in a place such as the glove

box or on the floor, it may be lit

accidentally when luggage is

loaded or the seat is adjusted,

causing a fire.

● Do not attach adhesive discs to

the windshield or windows. Do

not place containers such as air

fresheners on the instrument

panel or dashboard. Adhesive

discs or containers may act as

lenses, causing a fire in the

vehicle.

● Do not leave a door or window

open if the curved glass is

coated with a metallized film

such as a silver-colored one.

Reflected sunlight may cause

the glass to act as a lens, caus-

ing a fire.

● Always apply the parking brake,

shift the shift lever to P, stop the

engine and lock the vehicle.

Do not leave the vehicle unat-

tended while the engine is run-

ning.

If the vehicle is parked with the

shift lever in P but the parking

brake is not set, the vehicle may

start to move, possibly leading

to an accident.

● Do not touch the exhaust pipes

while the engine is running or

immediately after turning the

engine off.

Doing so may cause burns.

■ When taking a nap in the vehi-

cle

Always turn the engine off. Other-

wise, if you accidentally move the

shift lever or depress the acceler-

ator pedal, this could cause an

accident or fire due to engine

overheating. Additionally, if the

vehicle is parked in a poorly venti-

lated area, exhaust gases may

collect and enter the vehicle, lead-

ing to death or a serious health

hazard.

174

4-1. Before driving

WARNING

■ When braking

● When the brakes are wet, drive

more cautiously.

Braking distance increases

when the brakes are wet, and

this may cause one side of the

vehicle to brake differently than

the other side. Also, the parking

brake may not securely hold the

vehicle.

● If the brake booster device does

not operate, do not follow other

vehicles closely and avoid hills

or sharp turns that require brak-

ing.

In this case, braking is still pos-

sible, but the brake pedal

should be depressed more

firmly than usual. Also, the brak-

ing distance will increase. Have

your brakes fixed immediately.

● Do not pump the brake pedal if

the engine stalls.

Each push on the brake pedal

uses up the reserve for the

power-assisted brakes.

● The brake system consists of 2

individual hydraulic systems; if

one of the systems fails, the

other will still operate. In this

case, the brake pedal should be

depressed more firmly than

usual and the braking distance

will increase. Have your brakes

fixed immediately.

■ If the vehicle becomes stuck

(AWD models)

Do not spin the wheels exces-

sively when any of the tires is up

in the air, or the vehicle is stuck in

sand, mud, etc. This may damage

the driveline components or pro-

pel the vehicle forward or back-

ward, causing an accident.

NOTICE

■ When driving the vehicle

● Do not depress the accelerator

and brake pedals at the same

time during driving, as this may

restrain the engine output.

● Do not use the accelerator

pedal or depress the accelera-

tor and brake pedals at the

same time to hold the vehicle on

a hill.

■ Avoiding damage to vehicle

parts

● Do not turn the steering wheel

fully in either direction and hold

it there for an extended period

of time.

Doing so may damage the

power steering motor.

● When driving over bumps in the

road, drive as slowly as possible

to avoid damaging the wheels,

underside of the vehicle, etc.

■ If you get a flat tire while driv-

ing

A flat or damaged tire may cause

the following situations.

● It may be difficult to control your

vehicle.

● The vehicle will make abnormal

sounds or vibrations.

● The vehicle will lean abnor-

mally.

Hold the steering wheel firmly and

gradually depress the brake pedal

to slow down the vehicle.

Information on what to do in case

of a flat tire (P.642)

175

4-1. Before driving

Driving

NOTICE

■ When encountering flooded

roads

Do not drive on a road that has

flooded after heavy rain, etc.

Doing so may cause the following

serious damage to the vehicle:

● Engine stalling

● Short in electrical components

● Engine damage caused by

water immersion

In the event that you drive on a

flooded road and the vehicle is

flooded, be sure to have your

Toyota dealer check the following:

● Brake function

● Changes in quantity and quality

of oil and fluid used for the

engine, transaxle, transfer

(AWD vehicles), rear differen-

tial (AWD vehicles), etc.

● Lubricant condition for the pro-

peller shaft (AWD models),

bearings and suspension joints

(where possible), and the func-

tion of all joints, bearings, etc.

■ When parking the vehicle

Always set the parking brake, and

shift the shift lever to P. Failure to

do so may cause the vehicle to

move or the vehicle may acceler-

ate suddenly if the accelerator

pedal is accidentally depressed.

Cargo and luggage

Take notice of the following

information about storage

precautions, cargo capacity

and load.

WARNING

■ Things that must not be car-

ried in the luggage compart-

ment

The following things may cause a

fire if loaded in the luggage com-

partment:

● Receptacles containing gaso-

line

● Aerosol cans

■ Storage precautions

Observe the following precau-

tions.

Failure to do so may prevent the

pedals from being depressed

properly, may block the driver’s

vision, or may result in items hit-

ting the driver or passengers, pos-

sibly causing an accident.

● Stow cargo and luggage in the

luggage compartment when-

ever possible.

● Do not stack anything in the lug-

gage compartment higher than

the seatbacks.

● Do not place cargo or luggage

in or on the following locations.

• At the feet of the driver

• On the front passenger or rear

seats (when stacking items)

• On the luggage cover (if

equipped)

• On the instrument panel

• On the dashboard

176

4-1. Before driving

Cargo capacity depends on the

total weight of the occupants.

(Cargo capacity) = (Total load

capacity) - (Total weight of occu-

pants)

Steps for Determining Cor-

rect Load Limit 

(1) Locate the statement “The

combined weight of occupants

and cargo should never exceed

XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your

vehicle’s placard.

(2) Determine the combined

weight of the driver and passen-

gers that will be riding in your

vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined

weight of the driver and passen-

gers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals

the available amount of cargo

and luggage load capacity.

For example, if the “XXX”

amount equals 1400 lbs. and

there will be five 150 lb passen-

gers in your vehicle, the amount

of available cargo and luggage

load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 -

750 (5  150) = 650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined

weight of luggage and cargo

being loaded on the vehicle.

That weight may not safely

exceed the available cargo and

luggage load capacity calcu-

lated in Step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing

a trailer, load from your trailer

will be transferred to your vehi-

cle. Consult this manual to

determine how this reduces the

available cargo and luggage

load capacity of your vehicle.

(P.178)

WARNING

● Secure all items in the occupant

compartment.

● When you fold down the rear

seats, long items should not be

placed directly behind the front

seats.

● Never allow anyone to ride in

the luggage compartment. It is

not designed for passengers.

They should ride in their seats

with their seat belts properly

fastened. Otherwise, they are

much more likely to suffer death

or serious bodily injury, in the

event of sudden braking, sud-

den swerving or an accident.

Capacity and distribution

WARNING

■ Capacity and distribution

● Do not exceed the maximum

axle weight rating or the total

vehicle weight rating.

● Even if the total load of occu-

pant’ weight and the cargo load

is less than the total load capac-

ity, do not apply the load

unevenly. Improper loading may

cause deterioration of steering

or braking control which may

cause death or serious injury.

177

4-1. Before driving

Driving

Cargo capacity

Total load capacity (vehicle

capacity weight) (P.664)

When 2 people with the com-

bined weight of A lb. (kg) are rid-

ing in your vehicle, which has a

total load capacity (vehicle

capacity weight) of B lb. (kg),

the available amount of cargo

and luggage load capacity will

be C lb. (kg) as follows:

lb. (kg) - A

lb. (kg) = C

lb.

(kg)

:A = Weight of people

:B = Total load capacity

:C = Available cargo and luggage

load

In this condition, if 3 more passen-

gers with the combined weight of D

lb. (kg) get on, the available cargo

and luggage load will be reduced E

lb. (kg) as follows:

C lb. (kg) - D

lb. (kg) = E

lb.

(kg)

:D = Additional weight of people

:E = Available cargo and luggage

load

As shown in the example above,

if the number of occupants

increases, the cargo and lug-

gage load will be reduced by an

amount that equals the

increased weight due to the

additional occupants. In other

words, if an increase in the num-

ber of occupants causes an

excess of the total load capacity

(combined weight of occupants

plus cargo and luggage load),

you must reduce the cargo and

luggage on your vehicle.

Calculation formula for

your vehicle

WARNING

■ When loading cargo on the

roof luggage carrier (if

equipped)

Observe the following precau-

tions:

● Place the cargo so that its

weight is distributed evenly

between the front and rear

axles.

● If loading long or wide cargo,

never exceed the vehicle overall

length or width. (P.664)

● Before driving, make sure the

cargo is securely fastened on

the roof luggage carrier.

● Loading cargo on the roof lug-

gage carrier will make the cen-

ter of gravity of the vehicle

higher. Avoid high speeds, sud-

den starts, sharp turns, sudden

braking or abrupt maneuvers,

otherwise it may result in loss of

control or vehicle rollover due to

failure to operate this vehicle

correctly and result in death or

serious injury.

178

4-1. Before driving

■ Total load capacity and seating

capacity

These details are also described on

the tire and loading information

label. (P.595)

WARNING

● If driving for a long distance, on

rough roads, or at high speeds,

stop the vehicle now and then

during the trip to make sure the

cargo remains in its place.

● Do not exceed 176.4 lb. (80 kg)

cargo weight on the roof lug-

gage carrier.

NOTICE

■ When loading cargo on the

roof luggage carrier (if

equipped)

Be careful not to scratch the sur-

face of the moon roof (if

equipped) or the panoramic moon

roof (if equipped).

Vehicle load limits

Vehicle load limits include

total load capacity, seating

capacity, TWR (Trailer

Weight Rating) and cargo

capacity.

 Total load capacity (vehicle

capacity weight): P.664

Total load capacity means the

combined weight of occu-

pants, cargo and luggage.

 Seating capacity: 5 occu-

pants (Front 2, Rear 3)

Seating capacity means the

maximum number of occu-

pants whose estimated aver-

age weight is 150 lb. (68 kg)

per person.

 TWR (Trailer Weight Rat-

ing): P.185, 664

TWR means the maximum

gross trailer weight (trailer

weight plus its cargo weight)

that your vehicle is able to tow.

 Cargo capacity

Cargo capacity may increase

or decrease depending on the

weight and the number of

occupants.

179

4-1. Before driving

Driving

WARNING

■ Overloading the vehicle

Do not overload the vehicle. It

may not only cause damage to

the tires, but also degrade steer-

ing and braking ability, resulting in

an accident.

Trailer towing

Your vehicle is designed pri-

marily as a passenger-and-

load-carrying vehicle. Tow-

ing a trailer can have an

adverse impact on handling,

performance, braking, dura-

bility, and fuel consumption.

For your safety and the

safety of others, you must

not overload your vehicle or

trailer. You must also

ensure that you are using

appropriate towing equip-

ment, that the towing equip-

ment has been installed

correctly and used prop-

erly, and that you employ

the requisite driving habits.

Vehicle-trailer stability and

braking performance are

affected by trailer stability,

brake performance and set-

ting, trailer brakes, the hitch

and hitch systems (if

equipped).

To tow a trailer safely, use

extreme care and drive the

vehicle in accordance with

your trailer’s characteris-

tics and operating condi-

tions.

180

4-1. Before driving

■ Before towing

Check that the following conditions

are met:

● Ensure that your vehicle’s tires

are properly inflated. (P.671)

● Trailer tires are inflated according

to the trailer manufacturer’s rec-

ommendation.

● All trailer lights work as required

by law.

● All lights work each time you con-

nect them.

● The trailer ball is set at the proper

height for the coupler on the

trailer.

● The trailer is level when it is

hitched.

Do not drive if the trailer is not

level, and check for improper

tongue weight, overloading, worn

suspension, or other possible

causes.

● The trailer cargo is securely

loaded.

● The rear view mirrors conform to

all applicable federal, state/provin-

cial or local regulations. If they do

not, install rear view mirrors

appropriate for towing purposes.

Toyota warranties do not

apply to damage or mal-

function caused by towing a

trailer for commercial pur-

poses.

Contact your Toyota dealer for

further information about addi-

tional requirements such as a

towing kit, etc.

WARNING

■ Trailer towing precautions

To tow a trailer safely, use

extreme care and drive the vehi-

cle in accordance with the trailer’s

characteristics and operating con-

ditions. Failure to do so could

cause an accident resulting in

death or serious injury. Vehicle

stability and braking performance

are affected by trailer stability,

brake setting and performance,

and the hitch. Your vehicle will

handle differently when towing a

trailer.

■ To avoid accident or injury

● Do not exceed the TWR,

unbraked TWR, GCWR, GVWR

or GAWR.

● Vehicles with towing package: If

the gross trailer weight is over

2000 lb. (907 kg), a sway con-

trol device with sufficient capac-

ity is required.

● Adjust the tongue weight within

the appropriate range. Place

heavier loads as close to the

trailer axle as possible.

● Do not exceed 65 mph (104

km/h), the posted towing speed

limit or the speed limit for your

trailer as set forth in your trailer

owner’s manual, whichever is

lowest. Slow down sufficiently

before making a turn, in cross

winds, on wet or slippery sur-

face, etc. to help avoid an acci-

dent. If you experience a

vehicle-trailer instability from

reducing a certain speed, slow

down and make sure you keep

your vehicle speed under the

speed of which you experience

the instability.

● Do not make jerky, abrupt or

sharp turns.

181

4-1. Before driving

Driving

■ GCWR (Gross Combination

Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross

combination weight. The gross

combination weight is the sum

of the total vehicle weight

(including the occupants, cargo

and any optional equipment

installed on the vehicle) and the

weight of the trailer being towed

(including the cargo in the

trailer).

WARNING

● Do not apply the brakes sud-

denly as you may skid, resulting

in jackknifing and loss of vehicle

control. This is especially true

on wet or slippery surfaces.

● Do not exceed the trailer hitch

assembly weight, gross vehicle

weight, gross axle weight and

trailer tongue weight capacities.

● Do not use dynamic radar

cruise control with full-speed

range when towing.

● Slow down and downshift

before descending steep or long

downhill grades. Do not make

sudden downshifts while

descending steep or long down-

hill grades.

● Vehicle-trailer instability is more

likely on steep long downhills.

Before descending steep or

long downhill grades, slow

down and downshift. Do not

make sudden downshifts when

descending steep or long down-

hill grades. Avoid holding the

brake pedal down too long or

applying the brakes too fre-

quently. This could cause the

brakes to overheat and result in

reduced braking efficiency.

● Do not tow a trailer when the

compact spare tire is installed

on your vehicle.

■ When towing a trailer

Toyota recommends trailers with

brakes that conform to any appli-

cable federal and state/provincial

regulations.

● If the gross trailer weight

exceeds unbraked TWR, trailer

brakes are required. Toyota rec-

ommends trailers with brakes

that conform to all applicable

federal and state/provincial reg-

ulations.

● Never tap into your vehicle’s

hydraulic system, as this will

lower the vehicle’s braking

effectiveness.

● Never tow a trailer without using

a safety chain securely attached

to both the trailer and the vehi-

cle. If damage occurs to the

coupling unit or hitch ball, there

is danger of the trailer wander-

ing into another lane.

Towing related terms

182

4-1. Before driving

 Vehicles without towing pack-

age

 Vehicles with towing package

■ GVWR (Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross

vehicle weight. The gross vehi-

cle weight is the total weight of

the vehicle. When towing a

trailer, it is the sum of the vehicle

weight (including the occu-

pants, cargo and any optional

equipment installed on the vehi-

cle) and the tongue weight.

 Vehicles without towing pack-

age

 Vehicles with towing package

■ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight

Rating)

The maximum allowable gross

axle weight. The gross axle

weight is the load placed on

each axle (front and rear).

183

4-1. Before driving

Driving

 Vehicles without towing pack-

age

Front GAWR

Rear GAWR

 Vehicles with towing package

Front GAWR

Rear GAWR

■ TWR (Trailer Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross

trailer weight. The gross trailer

weight is the sum of the trailer

weight and the weight of the

cargo in the trailer.

TWR is calculated assuming

base vehicle with one driver,

one front passenger, towing

package (if available), hitch and

hitch systems (if required).

Additional optional equipment, pas-

sengers and cargo in the vehicle

will reduce the trailer weight rating

so as not to exceed GCWR, GVWR

and GAWR.

Vehicles with towing package: If the

gross trailer weight exceeds 3000

lb. (1360 kg), it is recommended to

use a trailer with 2 or more axles.

 Vehicles without towing pack-

age

(With brakes)

 Vehicles with towing package

(With brakes)

184

4-1. Before driving

■ Unbraked TWR (Unbraked

Trailer Weight Rating)

The trailer weight rating for tow-

ing a trailer without a trailer ser-

vice brake system.

(Without brakes)

■ Tongue Weight

The load placed on the trailer

hitch ball. (P.186)

 Vehicles without towing pack-

age

 Vehicles with towing package

 The gross trailer weight must

never exceed the TWR

described below.

 Without towing package

1500 lb. (680 kg)

 With towing package

3500 lb. (1590 kg)

 The gross combination weight

must never exceed the

GCWR described below.

 Without towing package

Vehicles without Dynamic Torque

Vectoring AWD system: 6110 lb.

(2770 kg)

Vehicles with Dynamic Torque Vec-

toring AWD system: 6205 lb. (2815

kg)

 With towing package

8205 lb. (3725 kg)

 The gross vehicle weight

must never exceed the

GVWR indicated on the Certi-

fication Regulation Label.

 The gross axle weight on

each axle must never exceed

the GAWR indicated on the

Certification Regulation Label.

Weight limits

185

4-1. Before driving

Driving

 If the gross trailer weight is

over the unbraked TWR,

trailer service brakes are

required.

 Vehicles with towing package:

If the gross trailer weight is

over 2000 lb. (907 kg), a sway

control device with sufficient

capacity is required.

Confirm that the gross trailer

weight, gross combination

weight, gross vehicle weight,

gross axle weight and tongue

weight are all within the limits.

■ GCWR

 Without towing package

Vehicles without Dynamic

Torque Vectoring AWD system:

6110 lb. (2770 kg)

Vehicles with Dynamic Torque

Vectoring AWD system: 6205 lb.

(2815 kg)

 With towing package

8205 lb. (3725 kg)

: These models meet the tow-vehi-

cle trailering requirement of SAE

International per SAE J2807.

■ TWR

 Without towing package

1500 lb. (680 kg)

 With towing package

3500 lb. (1590 kg)

: These models meet the tow-vehi-

cle trailering requirement of SAE

International per SAE J2807.

■ Unbraked TWR

1000 lb. (450 kg)

: These models meet the tow-vehi-

cle trailering requirement of SAE

International per SAE J2807.

 A recommended tongue

weight varies in accordance

with the types of trailers or

towing as described below.

 To ensure the recommended

values shown below, the

trailer must be loaded by

referring to the following

instructions.

• Tongue Weight

The gross trailer weight should be

distributed so that the tongue

weight is 9% to 11%.

(Tongue weight /Gross trailer

weight x 100 = 9% to 11%)

 Vehicles without towing pack-

age

Gross trailer weight

GCWR, TWR and

Unbraked TWR

Trailer Tongue Weight

186

4-1. Before driving

Tongue weight

 Vehicles with towing package

Gross trailer weight

Tongue weight

The gross trailer weight, gross

axle weight and tongue weight

can be measured with platform

scales found at a highway

weighing station, building supply

company, trucking company,

junk yard, etc.

Trailer hitch assemblies have

different weight capacities.

Toyota recommends the use of

Toyota hitch/bracket for your

vehicle. For details, contact your

Toyota dealer.

 If you wish to install a trailer

hitch, contact your Toyota

dealer.

 Use only a hitch that con-

forms to the gross trailer

weight requirement of your

vehicle.

 Follow the directions supplied

by the hitch manufacturer.

 Lubricate the hitch ball with a

light coating of grease.

 Remove the hitch ball when-

ever you are not towing a

trailer. Remove the trailer

hitch if you do not need it.

After removing the hitch, seal

any mounting holes in the

vehicle body to prevent entry

of any substances into the

vehicle.

Use the correct trailer ball for

your application.

Hitch

WARNING

■ Hitch

Trailer hitch assemblies have dif-

ferent weight capacities estab-

lished by the hitch manufacturer.

Even though the vehicle may be

physically capable of towing a

higher weight, the operator must

determine the maximum weight

rating of the particular hitch

assembly and never exceed the

maximum weight rating specified

for the trailer-hitch. Exceeding the

maximum weight rating set by the

trailer-hitch manufacturer can

cause an accident resulting in

death or serious personal injuries.

NOTICE

■ When installing a trailer hitch

Use only the position recom-

mended by your Toyota dealer.

Do not install the trailer hitch on

the bumper; this may cause body

damage.

Selecting trailer ball (vehi-

cles with towing package)

187

4-1. Before driving

Driving

Trailer ball load rating

Matches or exceeds the gross

trailer weight rating of the trailer.

Shank length

Protrudes beyond the bottom of the

lock washer and nut by at least 2

threads.

Shank diameter

Matches the ball mount hole diame-

ter size.

Ball diameter

Matches the size of the trailer cou-

pler. Most couplers are stamped

with the required trailer ball size.

Weight carrying ball position:

43.3 in. (1100 mm)

Hitch receiver pin hole posi-

tion: 38.1 in. (969 mm)

■ Matching trailer ball height to

trailer coupler height

No matter which class of tow hitch

applies, for a more safe trailer

hookup, the trailer ball setup must

be the proper height for the coupler

on the trailer.

Coupler

Trailer ball

Trailer class

Typical trailer

ball size

IV 2 5/16 in.

II and III 2 in.

I 1 7/8 in.

Positions for towing hitch

receiver and hitch ball

188

4-1. Before driving

Please consult your dealer

when installing trailer lights, as

incorrect installation may cause

damage to the vehicle’s lights.

Please take care to comply with

your state’s laws when install-

ing trailer lights.

Your vehicle will handle differ-

ently when towing a trailer. Help

to avoid an accident, death or

serious injury, keep the following

in mind when towing:

 Speed limits for towing a

trailer vary by state or prov-

ince. Do not exceed the

posted towing speed limit.

 Toyota recommends that the

vehicle-trailer speed limit is 65

mph (104 km/h) on a flat,

straight, dry road. Do not

exceed this limit, the posted

towing speed limit or the

speed limit for your trailer as

set forth in your trailer owner’s

manual, whichever is lowest.

Instability of the towing vehi-

cle-trailer combination (trailer

sway) increases as speed

increases. Exceeding speed

limits may cause loss of con-

trol.

 Before starting out, check the

trailer lights, tires and the

vehicle-trailer connections.

Recheck after driving a short

distance.

 Practice turning, stopping and

reversing with the trailer

attached in an area away

from traffic until you become

accustomed to the feel of the

vehicle-trailer combination.

 Reversing with a trailer

attached is difficult and

requires practice. Grip the

bottom of the steering wheel

and move your hand to the

left to move the trailer to the

left. Move your hand to the

right to move the trailer to

right. (This is generally oppo-

site to reversing without a

trailer attached.) Avoid sharp

or prolonged turning. Have

someone guide you when

reversing to reduce the risk of

an accident.

 As stopping distance is

increased when towing a

trailer, vehicle-to vehicle dis-

tance should be increased.

For each 10 mph (16 km/h) of

speed, allow at least one

vehicle and trailer length.

 Avoid sudden braking as you

may skid, resulting in the

trailer jackknifing and a loss of

Connecting trailer lights

NOTICE

■ Do not directly splice trailer

lights

Do not directly splice trailer lights.

Directly splicing trailer lights may

damage your vehicle’s electrical

system and cause a malfunction.

Trailer towing tips

189

4-1. Before driving

Driving

vehicle control. This is espe-

cially true on wet or slippery

surfaces.

 Avoid jerky starts or sudden

acceleration.

 Avoid jerky steering and

sharp turns, and slow down

before making turn.

 Note that when making a turn,

the trailer wheels will be

closer than the vehicle wheels

to the inside of the turn. Com-

pensate by making a wider

than normal turning radius.

 Slow down before making a

turn, in cross winds, on wet or

slippery surfaces, etc.

Increasing vehicle speed can

destabilize the trailer.

 Take care when passing other

vehicles. Passing requires

considerable distance. After

passing a vehicle, do not for-

get the length of your trailer,

and be sure you have plenty

of room before changing

lanes.

 To maintain engine braking

efficiency and charging sys-

tem performance when using

engine braking, do not put the

transmission in D. If in the S

mode, the transmission shift

range position must be in 6 or

lower.

 Instability happens more fre-

quently when descending

steep or long downhill grades.

Before descending, slow

down and downshift. Do not

make sudden downshifts

while descending steep or

long downhill grades.

 Avoid holding the brake pedal

down too long or applying the

brakes too frequently. This

could cause the brakes to

overheat and result in

reduced braking efficiency.

 Due to the added load of the

trailer, your vehicle’s engine

may overheat on hot days (at

temperatures over 85°F

[30°C]) when driving up a long

or steep grade. If the engine

coolant temperature gauge

indicates overheating, imme-

diately turn off the air condi-

tioning (if in use), pull your

vehicle off the road and stop

in a safe spot. (P.659)

 Always place wheel blocks

under both the vehicle’s and

the trailer’s wheels when

parking. Apply the parking

brake firmly, and put the

transmission in P. Avoid park-

ing on a slope, but if unavoid-

able, do so only after

performing the following:

1 Apply the brakes and keep

them applied.

2 Have someone place wheel

blocks under both the vehi-

cle’s and trailer’s wheels.

190

4-1. Before driving

3 When the wheel blocks are in

place, release the brakes

slowly until the blocks absorb

the load.

4 Apply the parking brake

firmly.

5 Shift into P and turn off the

engine.

 When restarting after parking

on a slope:

1 With the transmission in P,

start the engine. Be sure to

keep the brake pedal

depressed.

2 Shift into a forward gear. If

reversing, shift into R.

3 If the parking brake is in man-

ual mode, release the park-

ing brake. (P.203)

4 Release the brake pedal, and

slowly pull or back away from

the wheel blocks. Stop and

apply the brakes.

5 Have someone retrieve the

blocks.

■ Break-in schedule

If your vehicle is new or equipped

with any new power train compo-

nents (such as an engine, transmis-

sion, differential or wheel bearing),

Toyota recommends that you do not

tow a trailer until the vehicle has

been driven for over 500 miles (800

km).

After the vehicle has been driven for

over 500 miles (800 km), you can

start towing. However, for the next

500 miles (800 km), drive the vehi-

cle at a speed of less than 45 mph

(72 km/h) when towing a trailer, and

avoid full throttle acceleration.

■ Maintenance

● If you tow a trailer, your vehicle

will require more frequent mainte-

nance due to the additional load.

(See “Scheduled Maintenance

Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Sup-

plement”.)

● Retighten the fixing bolts of the

towing ball and bracket after

approximately 600 miles (1000

km) of trailer towing.

■ If trailer sway occurs

One or more factors (crosswinds,

passing vehicles, rough roads, etc.)

can adversely affect handling of

your vehicle and trailer, causing

instability.

● If trailer swaying occurs:

• Firmly grip the steering wheel.

Steer straight ahead.

Do not try to control trailer sway-

ing by turning the steering wheel.

• Begin releasing the accelerator

pedal immediately but very gradu-

ally to reduce speed.

Do not increase speed. Do not

apply vehicle brakes.

If you make no extreme correction

with the steering or brakes, your

vehicle and trailer should stabilize (if

enabled, Trailer Sway Control can

also help to stabilize the vehicle and

trailer.).

● After the trailer swaying has

stopped:

• Stop in a safe place. Get all occu-

pants out of the vehicle.

• Check the tires of the vehicle and

the trailer.

• Check the load in the trailer.

Make sure the load has not

shifted.

Make sure the tongue weight is

appropriate, if possible.

• Check the load in the vehicle.

Make sure the vehicle is not over-

loaded after occupants get in.

If you cannot find any problems, the

191

4-1. Before driving

Driving

speed at which trailer swaying

occurred is beyond the limit of your

particular vehicle-trailer combina-

tion. Drive at a lower speed to pre-

vent instability. Remember that

swaying of the towing vehicle-trailer

increases as speed increases.

Dinghy towing

Your vehicle is not designed

to be dinghy towed (with 4

wheels on the ground)

behind a motor home.

NOTICE

■ To avoid serious damage to

your vehicle

Do not tow your vehicle with 4

wheels on the ground.

■ To prevent causing serious

damage to the transmission

and AWD system (AWD mod-

els)

2WD models: Never tow this vehi-

cle from the rear with the front

wheels on the ground. This may

cause serious damage to the

transmission.

192

4-1. Before driving

NOTICE

AWD models: Never tow this vehi-

cle with any of the wheels on the

ground. This may cause serious

damage to the transmission and

AWD system.

193

4-2. Driving procedures

Driving

4-2.Driving p rocedures

1 Pull the parking brake switch

to check that the parking

brake is set. (P.203)

The parking brake indicator will

come on.

2 Check that the shift lever is

set in P.

3 Firmly depress the brake

pedal.

4 Turn the engine switch to

START to start the engine.

■ If the engine does not start

The engine immobilizer system may

not have been deactivated. (P. 70 )

Contact your Toyota dealer.

■ When the steering lock cannot

be released

When starting the engine, the

engine switch may seem stuck in

OFF. To free it, turn the key while

turning the steering wheel slightly

left and right.

■ When “Check Fuel Cap” is dis-

played on the multi-information

display

P.221

OFF (“LOCK” position)

The steering wheel is locked and

the key can be removed. (The key

can be removed only when the shift

lever is in P.)

ACC (“ACC” position)

Some electrical components such

Engine (ignition)

switch (vehicles with-

out smart key system)

Starting the engine

WARNING

■ When starting the engine

Always start the engine while sit-

ting in the driver’s seat. Do not

depress the accelerator pedal

while starting the engine under

any circumstances.

Doing so may cause an accident

resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ When starting the engine

● Do not crank the engine for

more than 30 seconds at a time.

This may overheat the starter

and wiring system.

● Do not race a cold engine.

● If the engine becomes difficult to

start or stalls frequently, have

your vehicle checked by your

Toyota dealer immediately.

Changing the engine

switch positions

194

4-2. Driving procedures

as the audio system can be used.

ON (“ON” position)

All electrical components can be

used.

START (“START” position)

For starting the engine.

■ Turning the key from ACC to

OFF

1 Shift the shift lever to P.

2 Push in the key and turn it to

OFF.

■ Key reminder function

A buzzer sounds if the driver’s door

is opened while the engine switch is

in OFF or ACC to remind you to

remove the key.

1 Pull the parking brake switch

to check that the parking

brake is set. (P.203)

The parking brake indicator will

come on.

2 Check that the shift lever is

set in P.

3 Firmly depress the brake

pedal.

and a message will be dis-

played on the multi-information dis-

play.

If it is not displayed, the engine

cannot be started.

4 Press the engine switch

shortly and firmly.

When operating the engine switch,

one short, firm press is enough. It is

not necessary to press and hold the

switch.

The engine will crank until it starts

or for up to 30 seconds, whichever

is less.

Continue depressing the brake

pedal until the engine is completely

started.

The engine can be started from any

WARNING

■ Caution when driving

Do not turn the engine switch to

OFF while driving. If, in an emer-

gency and you must turn the

engine off while the vehicle is

moving, turn the engine switch

only to ACC to stop the engine.

An accident may result if the

engine is stopped while driving.

(P.618)

NOTICE

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the engine switch in

ACC or ON for long periods of

time without the engine running.

Engine (ignition)

switch (vehicles with

smart key system)

Performing the following

operations when carrying

the electronic key on your

person starts the engine or

changes engine switch

modes.

Starting the engine

195

4-2. Driving procedures

Driving

engine switch mode.

■ If the engine does not start

● The engine immobilizer system

may not have been deactivated.

(P. 70 )

Contact your Toyota dealer.

● If a message related to start-up is

shown on the multi-information

display, read the message and fol-

low the instructions.

■ If the battery is discharged

The engine cannot be started using

the smart key system. Refer to

P.655 to restart the engine.

■ Electronic key battery depletion

P.102

■ Conditions affecting operation

P.129

■ Note for the entry function

P.130

■ Steering lock function

● After turning the engine switch to

OFF and opening and closing the

doors, the steering wheel will be

locked due to the steering lock

function. Operating the engine

switch again automatically can-

cels the steering lock.

● When the steering lock cannot be

released, “Push Engine Switch

while Turning Steering Wheel in

Either Direction” will be displayed

on the multi-information display.

Check that the shift lever is set in

P. Press the engine switch shortly

and firmly while turning the steer-

ing wheel left and right.

● To prevent the steering lock motor

from overheating, the operation of

motor may be suspended if the

engine is turned on and off repeat-

edly in a short period of time. In

this case, refrain from running the

engine. After about 10 seconds,

the steering lock motor will

resume functioning.

■ If there is a malfunction in the

smart key system

If “Smart Key System Malfunction”

is displayed on the multi-information

display, the system may be malfunc-

tioning. Have the vehicle inspected

by your Toyota dealer immediately.

■ When “Check Fuel Cap” is dis-

played on the multi-information

display

P.221

■ Electronic key battery

P.604

■ Operation of the engine switch

● If the switch is not pressed shortly

and firmly, the engine switch

mode may not change or the

engine may not start.

● If attempting to restart the engine

immediately after turning the

engine switch to OFF, the engine

may not start in some cases. After

turning the engine switch to OFF,

please wait a few seconds before

restarting the engine.

■ Customization

If the smart key system has been

deactivated in a customized setting,

refer to P.654.

196

4-2. Driving procedures

1 Stop the vehicle completely.

2 If the parking brake is in man-

ual mode, set the parking

brake. (P.203)

Check the parking brake indicator

is illuminated.

3 Shift the shift lever to P.

4 Press the engine switch

shortly and firmly.

The engine will stop, and the meter

display will be extinguished.

5 Release the brake pedal and

check that “ACCESSORY” or

“IGNITION ON” is not shown

on the multi-information dis-

play.

■ Automatic engine shut off fea-

ture

● The vehicle is equipped with a

feature that automatically shuts off

the engine when the shift lever is

in P with the engine running for an

extended period.

● The engine will automatically shut

off after approximately 1 hour if it

has been left running while the

shift lever is in P.

● The timer for the automatic engine

shut off feature will reset if the

brake pedal is depressed or if the

shift lever is in a position other

than P.

● After the vehicle is parked, if the

door is locked with the door lock

switch (P.112) from the inside or

the mechanical key (P.653) from

the outside, the automatic engine

shut off feature will be disabled.

The timer for the automatic engine

shut off feature will be re-enabled

if the driver’s door is opened.

WARNING

■ When starting the engine

Always start the engine while sit-

ting in the driver’s seat. Do not

depress the accelerator pedal

while starting the engine under

any circumstances.

Doing so may cause an accident

resulting in death or serious injury.

■ Caution while driving

If engine failure occurs while the

vehicle is moving, do not lock or

open the doors until the vehicle

reaches a safe and complete

stop. Activation of the steering

lock in this circumstance may lead

to an accident, resulting in death

or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ When starting the engine

● Do not race a cold engine.

● If the engine becomes difficult to

start or stalls frequently, have

your vehicle checked by your

Toyota dealer immediately.

■ Symptoms indicating a mal-

function with the engine

switch

If the engine switch seems to be

operating somewhat differently

than usual, such as the switch

sticking slightly, there may be a

malfunction. Contact your Toyota

dealer immediately.

Stopping the engine

197

4-2. Driving procedures

Driving

Modes can be changed by

pressing the engine switch with

brake pedal released. (The

mode changes each time the

switch is pressed.)

1 OFF

The emergency flashers can be

used.

The multi-information display will

not be displayed.

2 ACC

WARNING

■ Stopping the engine in an

emergency

● If you want to stop the engine in

an emergency while driving the

vehicle, press and hold the

engine switch for more than 2

seconds, or press it briefly 3

times or more in succession.

(P.618)

However, do not touch the

engine switch while driving

except in an emergency. Turn-

ing the engine off while driving

will not cause loss of steering or

braking control, but the power

assist to these systems will be

lost. This will make it more diffi-

cult to steer and brake, so you

should pull over and stop the

vehicle as soon as it is safe to

do so.

● If the engine switch is operated

while the vehicle is running, a

warning message will be shown

on the multi-information display

and a buzzer sounds.

● When restarting the engine after

an emergency shutdown, shift

the shift lever to N and press the

engine switch shortly and firmly.

■ When parking

Exhaust gases include harmful

carbon monoxide (CO), which is

colorless and odorless. Observe

the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause

exhaust gases to enter the vehicle

and may lead to an accident

caused by light-headedness, or

may lead to death or a serious

health hazard.

● If the vehicle is in a poorly venti-

lated area or a closed area,

such as a garage, stop the

engine.

● Do not leave the vehicle with

the engine running for a long

time. If such a situation cannot

be avoided, park the vehicle in

an open space and ensure that

exhaust fumes do not enter the

vehicle interior.

● Do not leave the engine running

in an area with snow build-up,

or where it is snowing. If snow-

banks build up around the vehi-

cle while the engine is running,

exhaust gases may collect and

enter the vehicle.

Changing engine switch

modes

198

4-2. Driving procedures

Some electrical components such

as the audio system can be used.

“ACCESSORY” will be displayed

on the multi-information display.

3 ON

All electrical components can be

used.

“IGNITION ON” will be displayed on

the multi-information display.

: If the shift lever is in a position

other than P when turning off the

engine, the engine switch will be

turned to ACC, not to OFF.

■ Auto power off function

If the vehicle is left in ACC for more

than 20 minutes or ON (the engine

is not running) for more than an

hour with the shift lever in P, the

engine switch will automatically turn

to OFF. However, this function can-

not entirely prevent battery dis-

charge. Do not leave the vehicle

with the engine switch in ACC or ON

for long periods of time when the

engine is not running.

If the engine is stopped with the

shift lever in a position other

than P, the engine switch will not

be turned to OFF but instead be

turned to ACC. Perform the fol-

lowing procedure to turn the

switch to OFF:

1 Check that the parking brake

is set.

2 Shift the shift lever to P.

3 Check that “ACCESSORY” is

displayed on the multi-infor-

mation display and then

press the engine switch

shortly and firmly.

4 Check that “ACCESSORY”

or “IGNITION ON” on the

multi-information display is

off.

NOTICE

■ To prevent battery discharge

● Do not leave the engine switch

in ACC or ON for long periods of

time without the engine running.

● If “ACCESSORY” or “IGNITION

ON” is displayed on the multi-

information display, the engine

switch is not in OFF. Exit the

vehicle after turning the engine

switch to OFF.

When stopping the engine

with the shift lever in a

position other than P

NOTICE

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not stop the engine when the

shift lever is in a position other

than P. If the engine is stopped in

another shift lever position, the

engine switch will not be turned to

OFF but instead be turned to

ACC. If the vehicle is left in ACC,

battery discharge may occur.

199

4-2. Driving procedures

Driving

:Shifting to the D position allows

the system to select a gear suit-

able for the driving conditions.

Setting the shift lever to the D

position is recommended for nor-

mal driving.

:Selecting shift ranges using S

mode restricts the upper limit of

the possible gear ranges, con-

trols engine braking force, and

prevents unnecessary upshifting.

■ When driving with dynamic

radar cruise control with full-

speed range activated

Even when performing the following

actions with the intent of enabling

engine braking, engine braking will

not activate because dynamic radar

cruise control with full-speed range

will not be canceled.

● While driving in S mode, down-

shifting to 7, 6, 5, or 4. (P.201)

● When switching the driving mode

to sport mode while driving in D.

(P.351)

■ If “High Transmission Fluid

Temp See Owner’s Manual” is

displayed on the multi-informa-

tion display (AWD models)

Make sure to return to D position

driving and reduce speed by easing

off the accelerator pedal. Stop the

vehicle in a safe place, shift the shift

lever to P and let the engine idle

until the warning message goes out.

When the warning message goes

out, the vehicle can be driven again.

If the warning message does not go

out after waiting a while, have your

vehicle inspected by your Toyota

dealer.

■ Restraining sudden start (Drive-

Start Control)

P.170

■ AI-SHIFT

The AI-SHIFT automatically selects

the suitable gear according to driver

performance and driving conditions.

The AI-SHIFT automatically oper-

ates when the shift lever is in D.

(Shifting the shift lever to S cancels

the function.)

Automatic transmis-

sion

Select the shift position

depending on your purpose

and situation.

Shift position purpose

and functions

Shift

position

Objective or function

Parking the vehicle/start-

ing the engine

R Reversing

N Neutral

Normal driving

S mode driving

(P.201)

WARNING

■ When driving on slippery

road surfaces

Do not accelerate or shift gears

suddenly.

Sudden changes in engine brak-

ing may cause the vehicle to spin

or skid, resulting in an accident.

200

4-2. Driving procedures

While the engine switch

is in ON and the brake pedal

depressed

, shift the shift lever

while pushing the shift release

button on the shift knob.

Shift the shift lever while

pushing the shift release button

on the shift knob.

Shift the shift lever nor-

mally.

When shifting the shift lever

between P and D, make sure that

the vehicle is completely stopped.

: For the vehicle to be able to be

shifted from P, the brake pedal

must be depressed before the

shift release button is pushed. If

the shift release button is pushed

first, the shift lock will not be

released.

■ Shift lock system

The shift lock system is a system to

prevent accidental operation of the

shift lever in starting.

The shift lever can be shifted from P

only when the engine switch is in

ON, the brake pedal is depressed

and the shift release button is

pushed.

■ If the shift lever cannot be

shifted from P

First, check whether the brake pedal

is being depressed.

If the shift lever cannot be shifted

even though the brake pedal is

depressed and the shift release but-

ton is pushed, there may be a prob-

lem with the shift lock system. Have

the vehicle inspected by your Toyota

dealer immediately.

The following steps may be used as

an emergency measure to ensure

that the shift lever can be shifted.

Releasing the shift lock:

1 Pull the parking brake switch to

check that the parking brake is

set. (P.203)

2 Turn the engine switch to OFF.

3 Depress the brake pedal.

4 Pry the cover up with a flathead

screwdriver or equivalent tool.

To prevent damage to the cover,

cover the tip of the screwdriver

with a rag.

5 Press and hold the shift lock

override button and then push

Shifting the shift lever

201

4-2. Driving procedures

Driving

the button on the shift knob.

The shift lever can be shifted

while both buttons are pressed.

P.351, 357

When the shift lever is in the S

position, the shift lever can be

operated as follows:

1 Upshifting

2 Downshifting

The selected shift range, from S1 to

S8 will be displayed on the multi-

information display.

The initial shift range in S mode

is set automatically to 4, 5 or 6

according to vehicle speed.

However, the initial shift range

may be set to 3 if AI-SHIFT has

operated while the shift lever

was in the D position. (P.199)

■ S mode

● You can choose from 8 levels of

accelerating force and engine

braking force.

● A lower shift range will provide

greater accelerating force and

engine braking force than a higher

shift range, and the engine revolu-

tions will also increase.

● To prevent the engine from over-

revving, upshifting may automati-

cally occur.

● To protect the automatic transmis-

sion, a function is adopted that

automatically selects a higher shift

range when the fluid temperature

is high.

● When the shift range is 7 or lower,

holding the shift lever toward “+”

sets the shift range to 8.

WARNING

■ To prevent an accident when

releasing the shift lock

Before pressing the shift lock

override button, make sure to set

the parking brake and depress the

brake pedal.

If the accelerator pedal is acci-

dentally depressed instead of the

brake pedal when the shift lock

override button is pressed and the

shift lever is shifted out of P, the

vehicle may suddenly start, possi-

bly leading to an accident result-

ing in death or serious injury.

Selecting the driving

mode and snow mode (if

equipped)

Changing shift ranges in

S mode

202

4-2. Driving procedures

■ Downshifting restriction warn-

ing buzzer

To help ensure safety and driving

performance, downshifting opera-

tion may sometimes be restricted. In

some circumstances, downshifting

may not be possible even when the

shift lever is operated. (A buzzer will

sound twice.)

■ If the “S” indicator does not

come on or the “D” indicator is

displayed even after shifting the

shift lever to S

This may indicate a malfunction in

the automatic transmission system.

Have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer immediately. (In this

situation, the transmission will oper-

ate in the same manner as when the

shift lever is in D.)

1 Right turn

2 Lane change to the right

(move the lever partway and

release it)

The right hand signals will flash 3

times.

3 Lane change to the left

(move the lever partway and

release it)

The left hand signals will flash 3

times.

4 Left turn

■ Turn signals can be operated

when

The engine switch is in ON.

■ If the indicator flashes faster

than usual

Check that a light bulb in the front or

rear turn signal lights has not

Turn signal lever

Operating instructions

203

4-2. Driving procedures

Driving

burned out.

■ If the turn signals stop flashing

before a lane change has been

performed

Operate the lever again.

■ To discontinue flashing of the

turn signals during a lane

change

Operate the lever in the opposite

direction.

■ Using the manual mode

The parking brake can be set

and released manually.

Parking brake indicator light

(U.S.A.)

Parking brake indicator light

(Canada)

Parking brake switch indica-

tor

1 Pull the switch to set the

Parking brake

The parking brake can be

set or released automati-

cally or manually. In auto-

matic mode, the parking

brake can be set or released

automatically according to

shift lever operation. Also,

even in automatic mode, the

parking brake can be set or

released manually.

Operating instructions

204

4-2. Driving procedures

parking brake.

The parking brake indicator light

and parking brake switch indicator

will turn on.

Pull and hold the parking brake

switch if an emergency occurs and

it is necessary to operate the park-

ing brake while driving.

2 Push the switch to release

the parking brake.

• Operate the parking brake switch

while depressing the brake pedal.

• Parking brake automatic release

function (P.205)

Make sure that the parking brake

indicator light and parking brake

switch indicator turn off.

If the parking brake indicator

light and parking brake switch

indicator flash, operate the

switch again. (P.634)

■ Turning the automatic

mode on

While the vehicle is stopped,

pull and hold the parking brake

switch until a buzzer sounds and

a message is shown on the

multi-information display.

When the automatic mode is

turned on, the parking brake

operates as follows.

 When the shift position is

shifted from P, the parking

brake will be released, and

the parking brake indicator

light and parking brake switch

indicator will turn off.

 When the shift position is

shifted to P, the parking brake

will be set, and the parking

brake indicator light and park-

ing brake switch indicator will

turn on.

Operate the shift lever with the

vehicle stopped and the brake

pedal depressed.

■ Turning the automatic

mode off

While the vehicle is stopped and

depressing the brake pedal,

press and hold the parking

brake switch until a buzzer

sounds and a message is

shown on the multi-information

display.

■ Parking brake operation

● When the engine switch is not in

ON, the parking brake cannot be

released using the parking brake

switch.

● When the engine switch is not in

205

4-2. Driving procedures

Driving

ON, automatic mode (automatic

brake setting and releasing) is not

available.

■ Parking brake automatic

release function

The parking brake will be released

automatically when the accelerator

pedal is slowly depressed under the

following conditions:

● The driver’s door is closed

● The driver is wearing the seat belt

● The shift lever is in a forward or

reverse position.

● The malfunction indicator lamp or

brake system warning light is not

illuminated

If the automatic release function

does not operate, release the park-

ing brake manually.

■ If “Parking Brake Temporarily

Unavailable” is displayed on

the multi-information display

If the parking brake is operated

repeatedly over a short period of

time, the system may restrict opera-

tion to prevent overheating. If this

happens, refrain from operating the

parking brake. Normal operation will

return after about 1 minute.

■ If “Parking Brake Unavailable”

is displayed on the multi-infor-

mation display

Operate the parking brake switch. If

the message does not disappear

after operating the switch several

times, the system may be malfunc-

tioning. Have the vehicle inspected

by your Toyota dealer.

■ Parking brake operation sound

When the parking brake operates, a

motor sound (whirring sound) may

be heard. This does not indicate a

malfunction.

■ Parking brake indicator light

● Depending on the engine switch

position/mode, the parking brake

indicator light will turn on and stay

on as described below:

ON: Comes on until the parking

brake is released.

Not in ON: Stays on for approxi-

mately 15 seconds.

● When the engine switch is turned

off with the parking brake set, the

parking brake indicator light will

stay on for about 15 seconds. This

does not indicate a malfunction.

■ When the parking brake switch

malfunctions

Automatic mode (automatic brake

setting and releasing) will be turned

on automatically.

■ Parking the vehicle

P.169

■ Parking brake engaged warning

buzzer

A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is

driven with the parking brake

engaged. “Parking Brake ON” is dis-

played on the multi-information dis-

play (with the vehicle reaching a

speed of 5 km/h [3 mph]).

■ If the brake system warning

light comes on

P.628

■ Usage in winter time

P.367

WARNING

■ When parking the vehicle

Do not leave a child in the vehicle

alone. The parking brake may be

released unintentionally by a child

and there is the danger of the

vehicle moving that may lead to

an accident resulting in death or

serious injury.

■ Parking brake switch

Do not set any objects near the

parking brake switch. Objects

may interfere with the switch and

may lead the parking brake to

unexpectedly operate.

206

4-2. Driving procedures

Press the brake hold switch to

turn the brake hold system on

The brake hold standby indicator

(green) comes on. While the

system is holding the brake, the

brake hold operated indicator (yel-

low) comes on.

■ Brake hold system operating

conditions

The brake hold system cannot be

turned on in the following condi-

tions:

● The driver’s door is not closed.

NOTICE

■ When parking the vehicle

Before you leave the vehicle, shift

the shift position to P, set the park-

ing brake and make sure that the

vehicle does not move.

■ When the system malfunc-

tions

Stop the vehicle in a safe place

and check the warning messages.

■ When the parking brake can-

not be released due to a mal-

function

Driving the vehicle with the park-

ing brake set will lead to brake

components overheating, which

may affect braking performance

and increase brake wear. Have

the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer immediately if this

occurs.

Brake Hold

The brake hold system

keeps the brake applied

when the shift lever is in D,

S or N with the system on

and the brake pedal has

been depressed to stop the

vehicle. The system

releases the brake when the

accelerator pedal is

depressed with the shift

lever in D or S to allow

smooth start off.

Enabling the system

207

4-2. Driving procedures

Driving

● The driver is not wearing the seat

belt.

If any of the conditions above are

detected when the brake hold sys-

tem is enabled, the system will turn

off and the brake hold standby indi-

cator light will go off. In addition, if

any of the conditions are detected

while the system is holding the

brake, a warning buzzer will sound

and a message will be shown on the

multi-information display. The park-

ing brake will then be set automati-

cally.

■ Brake hold function

● If the brake pedal is left released

for a period of about 3 minutes

after the system has started hold-

ing the brake, the parking brake

will be set automatically. In this

case, a warning buzzer sounds

and a message is shown on the

multi-information display.

● To turn the system off while the

system is holding the brake, firmly

depress the brake pedal and

press the button again.

● The brake hold function may not

hold the vehicle when the vehicle

is on a steep incline. In this situa-

tion, it may be necessary for the

driver to apply the brakes. A warn-

ing buzzer will sound and the

multi-information display will

inform the driver of this situation. If

a warning message is shown on

the multi-information display, read

the message and follow the

instructions.

■ When the parking brake is set

automatically while the system

is holding the brakes

Perform any of the following opera-

tions to release the parking brake:

● Depress the accelerator pedal.

(The parking brake will not be

released automatically if the seat

belt is not fastened.)

● Operate the parking brake switch

with the brake pedal depressed.

Make sure that the parking brake

indicator light goes off. (P.203)

■ When an inspection at your

Toyota dealer is necessary

When the brake hold standby indi-

cator (green) does not illuminate

even when the brake hold switch is

pressed with the brake hold system

operating conditions met, the sys-

tem may be malfunctioning. Have

the vehicle inspected at your Toyota

dealer.

■ If “Brake Hold Malfunction

Press Brake to Deactivate Visit

Your Dealer” or “Brake Hold

Malfunction Visit Your Dealer”

is displayed on the multi-infor-

mation display

The system may be malfunctioning.

Have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

■ Warning messages and buzzers

Warning messages and buzzers are

used to indicate a system malfunc-

tion or to inform the driver of the

need for caution. If a warning mes-

sage is shown on the multi-informa-

tion display, read the message and

follow the instructions.

■ If the brake hold operated indi-

cator flashes

P.633

WARNING

■ When the vehicle is on a

steep incline

When using the brake hold sys-

tem on a steep incline, exercise

caution. The brake hold function

may not hold the vehicle in such a

situation.

208

4-2. Driving procedures

WARNING

■ When stopped on a slippery

road

The system cannot stop the vehi-

cle when the gripping ability of the

tires has been exceeded. Do not

use the system when stopped on

a slippery road.

NOTICE

■ When parking the vehicle

The brake hold system is not

designed for use when parking

the vehicle for a long period of

time. Turning the engine switch off

while the system is holding the

brake may release the brake,

which would cause the vehicle to

move. When operating the engine

switch, depress the brake pedal,

shift the shift lever to P and set

the parking brake.

209

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Driving

4-3.Operating the lights and wipe rs

Operating the switch

turns on the lights as follows:

 Type A

U.S.A.

Canada

1 The side marker, parking,

tail, license plate, instrument

panel lights, and daytime run-

ning lights (P.209) turn on.

2 The headlights and all

lights listed above (except

daytime running lights) turn

on.

3 The headlights, daytime

running lights (P.209) and

all the lights listed above turn

on and off automatically.

4 (U.S.A.) Off

(Canada) The daytime

running lights turn on.

(P.209)

 Type B

1 The side marker, parking,

tail, license plate, instrument

panel lights, and daytime run-

ning lights (P.209) turn on.

2 The headlights and all

lights listed above (except

daytime running lights) turn

on.

3 The daytime running

lights turn on. (P.209)

4 Off

■ AUTO mode can be used when

The engine switch is in ON.

■ Daytime running light system

● The daytime running lights illumi-

nate using the same lights as the

low beam headlight lights, and illu-

minate dimmer than the low beam

headlight lights.

Headlight switch

The headlights can be oper-

ated manually or automati-

cally.

Turning on the headlights

210

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

● To make your vehicle more visible

to other drivers during daytime

driving, the daytime running lights

turn on automatically when all of

the following conditions are met.

(The daytime running lights are

not designed for use at night.)

• The engine is running

• The parking brake is released

• The headlight switch is in the

(Canada only), , or

position

: When the surroundings are bright

The daytime running lights remain

on after they illuminate, even if the

parking brake is set again.

● For the U.S.A.: Daytime running

lights can be turned off by operat-

ing the switch.

● Compared to turning on the head-

lights, the daytime running light

system offers greater durability

and consumes less electricity, so

it can help improve fuel economy.

■ Headlight control sensor (if

equipped)

The sensor may not function prop-

erly if an object is placed on the sen-

sor, or anything that blocks the

sensor is affixed to the windshield.

Doing so interferes with the sensor

detecting the level of ambient light

and may cause the automatic head-

light system to malfunction.

■ Automatic light off system

● When the headlights are on: The

lights turn off 30 seconds after the

engine switch is turned to ACC or

OFF and a door is opened and

closed. (The lights turn off immedi-

ately if on the key is

pressed after all the doors are

closed.)

● When only the tail lights are on:

The tail lights turn off automati-

cally if the engine switch is turned

to ACC or OFF and the driver’s

door is opened.

To turn the lights on again, turn the

engine switch to ON, or turn the light

switch off once and then back to

or position.

■ Light reminder buzzer

 Vehicles without smart key system

A buzzer sounds when the engine

switch is turned to ACC or OFF, the

key is removed and the driver’s door

is opened while the lights are turned

on.

 Vehicles with smart key system

A buzzer sounds when the engine

switch is turned to ACC or OFF and

the driver’s door is opened while the

lights are turned on.

■ Windshield wiper linked head-

light illumination (if equipped)

When driving during daytime with

the headlight switch turned to , if

the windshield wipers are used, the

headlights will turn on automatically

after several seconds to help

enhance the visibility of your vehi-

cle.

■ Battery-saving function

In order to prevent the battery of the

vehicle from discharging, if the

headlights and/or tail lights are on

when the engine switch is turned to

OFF, the battery saving function will

operate and automatically turn off all

the lights after approximately 20

minutes.

When any of the following are per-

211

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Driving

formed, the battery-saving function

is canceled once and then reacti-

vated. All the lights will turn off auto-

matically 20 minutes after the

battery-saving function has been

reactivated:

● When the headlight switch is oper-

ated

● When a door is opened or closed

■ If “Headlight System Malfunc-

tion Visit Your Dealer” is dis-

played on the multi-information

display

The system may be malfunctioning.

Have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

■ Customization

Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitiv-

ity) can be changed.

(Customizable features: P.694)

1 With the headlights on, push

the lever away from you to

turn on the high beams.

Pull the lever toward you to the

center position to turn the high

beams off.

2 Pull the lever toward you and

release it to flash the high

beams once.

You can flash the high beams with

the headlights on or off.

NOTICE

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the lights on longer

than necessary when the engine

is not running.

Turning on the high beam

headlights

212

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

1 Press the Automatic High

Beam switch.

2 Push the lever away from

you with the headlight switch

in the or position.

The Automatic High Beam indicator

will come on when the system is

operating.

■ High beam automatic turning

on or off conditions

● When all of the following condi-

tions are fulfilled, the high beam

will be automatically turned on

(after approximately 1 second):

• Vehicle speed is above approxi-

mately 21 mph (34 km/h) or more.

• The area ahead of the vehicle is

dark.

• There are no vehicles ahead with

headlights or tail lights turned on.

• There are few streetlights on the

road ahead.

● If any of the following conditions

are fulfilled, the high beam will be

automatically turned off:

• Vehicle speed drops below

approximately 17 mph (27 km/h).

• The area ahead of the vehicle is

not dark.

• Vehicles ahead have headlights or

tail lights turned on.

• There are many streetlights on the

road ahead.

■ Camera sensor detection infor-

mation

● The high beam may not be auto-

matically turned off in the following

situations:

• When oncoming vehicles sud-

denly appear from a curve

AHB (Automatic High

Beam)

The Automatic High Beam

uses an in-vehicle camera

sensor to assess the bright-

ness of streetlights, the

lights of vehicles ahead etc.,

and automatically turns the

high beam on or off as nec-

essary.

WARNING

■ Limitations of the Automatic

High Beam

Do not overly rely on the Auto-

matic High Beam. Always drive

safely, taking care to observe your

surroundings and turning the high

beam on or off manually if neces-

sary.

■ To prevent incorrect opera-

tion of the Automatic High

Beam system

Do not overload the vehicle.

Activating the Automatic

High Beam system

213

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Driving

• When the vehicle is cut in front of

by another vehicle

• When vehicles ahead are hidden

from sight due to repeated curves,

road dividers or roadside trees

• When vehicles ahead appear from

the faraway lane on a wide road

• When vehicles ahead have no

lights

● The high beam may be turned off

if a vehicle ahead that is using fog

lights without using the headlights

is detected.

● House lights, street lights, traffic

signals, and illuminated billboards

or signs may cause the high beam

to switch to the low beams, or the

low beams to remain on.

● The following factors may affect

the amount of time taken to turn

the high beam on or off:

• The brightness of headlights, fog

lights, and tail lights of vehicles

ahead

• The movement and direction of

vehicles ahead

• When a vehicle ahead only has

operational lights on one side

• When a vehicle ahead is a two-

wheeled vehicle

• The condition of the road (gradi-

ent, curve, condition of the road

surface etc.)

• The number of passengers and

amount of luggage

● The high beam may be turned on

or off when the driver does not

expect it.

● Bicycles or similar objects may not

be detected.

● In the situations shown below, the

system may not be able to accu-

rately detect surrounding bright-

ness levels. This may cause the

low beams to remain on or the

high beams to cause problems for

pedestrians, vehicles ahead or

other parties. In these cases,

manually switch between the high

and low beams.

• In bad weather (rain, snow, fog,

sandstorms, etc.)

• The windshield is obscured by

fog, mist, ice, dirt, etc.

• The windshield is cracked or dam-

aged

• The camera sensor is deformed or

dirty

• When the temperature of the cam-

era sensor is extremely high

• Surrounding brightness levels are

equal to those of headlights, tail

lights or fog lights

• When headlights or tail lights of

vehicles ahead are turned off,

dirty, changing color, or not aimed

properly

• When the vehicle is hit by water,

snow, dust, etc. from a preceding

vehicle

• When driving through an area of

intermittently changing brightness

and darkness

• When frequently and repeatedly

driving ascending/descending

roads, or roads with rough, bumpy

or uneven surfaces (such as

stone-paved roads, gravel roads,

etc.)

• When frequently and repeatedly

taking curves or driving on a wind-

ing road

• There is a highly reflective object

ahead of the vehicle, such as a

sign or mirror

• The back of a vehicle ahead is

highly reflective, such as a con-

tainer on a truck

• The vehicle’s headlights are dam-

aged or dirty, or are not aimed

properly

• The vehicle is listing or titling due

to a flat tire, a trailer being towed,

etc.

• The high beam and low beam are

repeatedly being switched

between in an abnormal manner

• The driver believes that the high

beam may be causing problems

or distress to other drivers or

pedestrians nearby

214

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

■ If “Headlight System Malfunc-

tion Visit Your Dealer” is dis-

played on the multi-information

display

The system may be malfunctioning.

Have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

■ Temporarily lowering sensor

sensitivity

The sensitivity of the sensor can be

temporarily lowered.

1 Turn the engine switch off while

the following conditions are met.

● The headlight switch is in or

position.

● The headlight switch lever is in

high beam position.

● Automatic High Beam switch is

on.

2 Turn the engine switch to ON.

3 Within 60 seconds after step 2,

repeat pulling the headlight

switch lever to the original posi-

tion then pushing it to the high

beam position quickly 10 times,

then leave the lever in high beam

position.

4 If the sensitivity is changed, the

Automatic High Beam indicator

is turn on and off 3 times.

Automatic High Beam (headlights)

may turn on even when the vehicle

is stopped.

■ Switching to the low beam

Pull the lever to original position.

The Automatic High Beam indicator

will turn off.

Push the lever away from you to

activate the Automatic High Beam

system again.

■ Switching to the high beam

Press the Automatic High Beam

switch.

The Automatic High Beam indicator

will turn off and the high beam indi-

cator will turn on.

Press the switch to activate the

Automatic High Beam system

again.

Turning the high beam

on/off manually

215

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Driving

: If equipped

Turns the

fog lights off

2 Turns the fog lights on

:For the U.S.A.

:For Canada

■ Fog lights can be used when

The headlights are on in low beam.

Operating the lever oper-

ates the wipers or washer as fol-

lows:

 Intermittent windshield wipers

Off

Intermittent

operation

Low speed

operation

Fog light switch

The fog lights offer

improved visibility in diffi-

cult driving conditions,

such as in rain and fog.

Operating procedure

Windshield wipers and

washer

Operating the lever can

switch between automatic

operation and manual oper-

ation, or can use the

washer.

NOTICE

■ When the windshield is dry

Do not use the wipers, as they

may damage the windshield.

Operating the wiper lever

216

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

High speed

operation

Temporary

operation

:For the U.S.A.

:For Canada

If equipped, wiper intervals can

be adjusted when intermittent

operation is selected.

6 Increases the intermittent

windshield wiper frequency

7 Decreases the intermittent

windshield wiper frequency

8 Washer/wiper dual

operation

Pulling the lever operates the wip-

ers and washer.

The wipers will automatically oper-

ate a couple of times after the

washer squirts.

 Rain-sensing windshield wip-

ers

Off

2 Rain-sensing opera-

tion

Low speed

operation

High speed

operation

Temporary

operation

:For the U.S.A.

:For Canada

When “AUTO” is selected, the wip-

ers will operate automatically when

the sensor detects falling rain. The

system automatically adjusts wiper

timing in accordance with rain vol-

ume and vehicle speed.

The sensor sensitivity can be

adjusted when “AUTO” is

selected.

217

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Driving

6 Increases the sensitivity

7 Decreases the sensitivity

8 Washer/wiper dual

operation

Pulling the lever operates the wip-

ers and washer.

The wipers will automatically oper-

ate a couple of times after the

washer squirts.

■ The windshield wipers and

washer can be operated when

The engine switch is in ON.

■ Raindrop sensor (vehicles with

rain-sensing windshield wipers)

● The raindrop sensor judges the

amount of raindrops.

● If the wiper switch is turned to the

“AUTO” position while the engine

switch is in ON, the wipers will

operate once to show that “AUTO”

mode is activated.

● If the wiper sensitivity is adjusted

to higher, the wiper may operate

once to indicate the change of

sensitivity.

● If the temperature of the raindrop

sensor is 185°F (85°C) or higher,

or 5°F (-15°C) or lower, the auto-

matic operation may not occur. In

this case, operate the wipers in

any mode other than “AUTO”.

■ If no windshield washer fluid

sprays

Check that the washer nozzles are

not blocked if there is washer fluid in

the windshield washer fluid reser-

voir.

WARNING

■ Caution regarding the use of

windshield wipers in “AUTO”

mode (vehicles with rain-

sensing windshield wipers)

The windshield wipers may oper-

ate unexpectedly if the sensor is

touched or the windshield is sub-

ject to vibration in “AUTO” mode.

Take care that your fingers or any-

thing else does not become

caught in the windshield wipers.

218

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Operating the switch

operates the rear wiper as fol-

lows:

Off

Intermittent

operation

Normal oper-

ation

:For the U.S.A.

WARNING

■ Caution regarding the use of

washer fluid

When it is cold, do not use the

washer fluid until the windshield

becomes warm. The fluid may

freeze on the windshield and

cause low visibility. This may lead

to an accident, resulting in death

or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ When the washer fluid tank is

empty

Do not operate the switch continu-

ally as the washer fluid pump may

overheat.

■ When a nozzle becomes

blocked

In this case, contact your Toyota

dealer.

Do not try to clear it with a pin or

other object. The nozzle will be

damaged.

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the wipers on longer

than necessary when the engine

is off.

Rear window wiper

and washer

Operating the lever can

switch between automatic

operation and manual oper-

ation, or can use the

washer.

NOTICE

■ When the rear window is dry

Do not use the wiper, as it may

damage the rear window.

Operating the wiper lever

219

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Driving

:For Canada

4 Washer/wiper dual

operation

Pushing the lever operates the

wiper and washer.

The wiper will automatically operate

a couple of times after the washer

squirts.

■ The rear window wiper and

washer can be operated when

The engine switch is in ON.

■ If no washer fluid sprays

Check that the washer nozzle is not

blocked if there is washer fluid in the

washer fluid reservoir.

■ Back door opening linked rear

window wiper stop function

When the rear window wiper is

operating, if the back door is opened

while the vehicle is stopped, opera-

tion of the rear window wiper will be

stopped to prevent anyone near the

vehicle from being sprayed by water

from the wiper. When the back door

is closed, wiper operation will

resume.

: The setting must be customized at

your Toyota dealer.

■ Reverse-linked rear window

wiper function

When the shift lever is shifted to R

when the front wipers are operating,

the rear window wiper will operate

once.

■ Customization

Setting of the reverse-linked func-

tion can be changed. (Customizable

features: P.695)

NOTICE

■ When the washer fluid tank is

empty

Do not operate the switch continu-

ally as the washer fluid pump may

overheat.

■ When a nozzle becomes

blocked

In this case, contact your Toyota

dealer.

Do not try to clear it with a pin or

other object. The nozzle will be

damaged.

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the wiper on longer

than necessary when the engine

is off.

220

4-4. Refueling

4-4.Refueling

 Close all the doors and win-

dows, and turn the engine

switch to OFF.

 Confirm the type of fuel.

■ Fuel types

P.676

■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded

gasoline

To help prevent incorrect fueling,

your vehicle has a fuel tank opening

that only accommodates the spe-

cial nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.

■ If the malfunction indicator

lamp illuminates

The malfunction indicator lamp may

illuminate erroneously if refueling is

performed repeatedly when the fuel

tank is nearly full.

Opening the fuel tank

cap

Perform the following steps

to open the fuel tank cap:

Before refueling the vehi-

cle

WARNING

■ When refueling the vehicle

Observe the following precautions

while refueling the vehicle. Failure

to do so may result in death or

serious injury.

● After exiting the vehicle and

before opening the fuel door,

touch an unpainted metal sur-

face to discharge any static

electricity. It is important to dis-

charge static electricity before

refueling because sparks result-

ing from static electricity can

cause fuel vapors to ignite while

refueling.

● Always hold the grips on the

fuel tank cap and turn it slowly

to remove it.

A whooshing sound may be

heard when the fuel tank cap is

loosened. Wait until the sound

cannot be heard before fully

removing the cap. In hot

weather, pressurized fuel may

spray out of the filler neck and

cause injury.

● Do not allow anyone that has

not discharged static electricity

from their body to come close to

an open fuel tank.

● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.

Fuel contains substances that

are harmful if inhaled.

● Do not smoke while refueling

the vehicle.

Doing so may cause the fuel to

ignite and cause a fire.

● Do not return to the vehicle or

touch any person or object that

is statically charged. This may

cause static electricity to build

up, resulting in a possible igni-

tion hazard.

221

4-4. Refueling

Driving

1 Pull up the opener to open

the fuel filler door.

2 Turn the fuel tank cap slowly

to open it and put it into the

holder on the fuel filler door.

After refueling, turn the fuel tank

cap until you hear a click. Once

the cap is released, it will turn

slightly in the opposite direction.

■ When “Check Fuel Cap” is dis-

played on the multi-information

display

The fuel tank cap may be unfas-

tened or loose. Turn the engine

switch off, check the cap and tighten

it securely. If the message remains,

wait a few seconds and then turn

the engine switch off once again.

WARNING

■ When refueling

Observe the following precautions

to prevent fuel overflowing from

the fuel tank:

● Securely insert the fuel nozzle

into the fuel filler neck.

● Stop filling the tank after the fuel

nozzle automatically clicks off.

● Do not top off the fuel tank.

NOTICE

■ Refueling

Do not spill fuel during refueling.

Doing so may damage the vehi-

cle, such as causing the emission

control system to operate abnor-

mally or damaging fuel system

components or the vehicle’s

painted surface.

Opening the fuel tank cap

Closing the fuel tank cap

222

4-4. Refueling

WARNING

■ When replacing the fuel tank

cap

Do not use anything but a genu-

ine Toyota fuel tank cap designed

for your vehicle. Doing so may

cause a fire or other incident

which may result in death or seri-

ous injury.

223

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

4-5.Using the driving support systems

■ PCS (Pre-Collision System)

P. 2 29

■ LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)

P. 2 37

■ AHB (Automatic High

Beam)

P. 2 12

■ RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if

equipped)

P. 2 47

■ Dynamic radar cruise con-

trol with full-speed range

P. 2 50

Two types of sensors, located

behind the front grille and wind-

shield, detect information neces-

sary to operate the drive assist

systems.

Radar sensor

Front camera

Toyota Safety Sense

2.0

The Toyota Safety Sense 2.0

consists of the following

drive assist systems and

contributes to a safe and

comfortable driving experi-

ence:

Driving assist system

WARNING

■ Toyota Safety Sense 2.0

The Toyota Safety Sense 2.0 is

designed to operate under the

assumption that the driver will

drive safely, and is designed to

help reduce the impact to the

occupants and the vehicle in the

case of a collision or assist the

driver in normal driving condi-

tions.

As there is a limit to the degree of

recognition accuracy and control

performance that this system can

provide, do not overly rely on this

system. The driver is always

responsible for paying attention to

the vehicle’s surroundings and

driving safely.

Sensors

224

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING

■ To avoid malfunction of the

radar sensor

Observe the following precau-

tions.

Otherwise, the radar sensor may

not operate properly, possibly

leading to an accident resulting in

death or serious injury.

● Keep the radar sensor and the

radar sensor cover clean at all

times.

Radar sensor

Radar sensor cover

If the front of the radar sensor or

the front or back of the radar sen-

sor cover is dirty or covered with

water droplets, snow, etc., clean

it.

Clean the radar sensor and radar

sensor cover with a soft cloth to

avoid damaging them.

● Do not attach accessories,

stickers (including transparent

stickers) or other items to the

radar sensor, radar sensor

cover or surrounding area.

● Do not subject the radar sensor

or its surrounding area to a

strong impact.

If the radar sensor, front grille,

or front bumper has been sub-

jected to a strong impact, have

the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

● Do not disassemble the radar

sensor.

● Do not modify or paint the radar

sensor or radar sensor cover.

● In the following cases, the radar

sensor must be recalibrated.

Contact your Toyota dealer for

details.

• When the radar sensor or front

grille are removed and installed,

or replaced

• When the front bumper is

replaced

■ To avoid malfunction of the

front camera

Observe the following precau-

tions.

Otherwise, the front camera may

not operate properly, possibly

leading to an accident resulting in

death or serious injury.

● Keep the windshield clean at all

times.

• If the windshield is dirty or cov-

ered with an oily film, water

droplets, snow, etc., clean the

windshield.

• If a glass coating agent is

applied to the windshield, it will

still be necessary to use the

windshield wipers to remove

water droplets, etc. from the

area of the windshield in front of

the front camera.

• If the inner side of the wind-

shield where the front camera is

installed is dirty, contact your

Toyota dealer.

225

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

WARNING

● Do not attach objects, such as

stickers, transparent stickers,

etc., to the outer side of the

windshield in front of the front

camera (shaded area in the

illustration).

From the top of the windshield

to approximately 0.4 in. (1 cm)

below the bottom of the front

camera

Approximately 7.9 in. (20 cm)

(Approximately 4.0 in. [10 cm]

to the right and left from the

center of the front camera)

● If the part of the windshield in

front of the front camera is

fogged up or covered with con-

densation, or ice, use the wind-

shield defogger to remove the

fog, condensation, or ice.

(P.511, 517)

● If water droplets cannot be

properly removed from the area

of the windshield in front of the

front camera by the windshield

wipers, replace the wiper insert

or wiper blade.

● Do not attach window tint to the

windshield.

● Replace the windshield if it is

damaged or cracked.

After replacing the windshield,

the front camera must be recali-

brated. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

● Do not allow liquids to contact

the front camera.

● Do not allow bright lights to

shine into the front camera.

● Do not dirty or damage the front

camera.

When cleaning the inside of the

windshield, do not allow glass

cleaner to contact the lens of

the front camera. Also, do not

touch the lens.

If the lens is dirty or damaged,

contact your Toyota dealer.

● Do not subject the front camera

to a strong impact.

● Do not change the installation

position or direction of the front

camera or remove it.

● Do not disassemble the front

camera.

● Do not modify any components

of the vehicle around the front

camera (inside rear view mirror,

etc.) or ceiling.

● Do not attach any accessories

to the hood, front grille or front

bumper that may obstruct the

front camera. Contact your

Toyota dealer for details.

● If a surfboard or other long

object is to be mounted on the

roof, make sure that it will not

obstruct the front camera.

● Do not modify the headlights or

other lights.

226

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Certification

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, American Samoa, Guam, Saipan

and Puerto Rico

 For vehicles sold in Canada

227

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■ If a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display

A system may be temporarily unavailable or there may be a malfunction in

the system.

● In the following situations, perform the actions specified in the table. When

the normal operating conditions are detected, the message will disappear

and the system will become operational.

If the message does not disappear, contact your Toyota dealer.

Situation Actions

When the area around a sensor is

covered with dirt, moisture (fogged

up, covered with condensation, ice,

etc.), or other foreign matter

To clean the part of the windshield in

front of the front camera, use the

windshield wipers or the windshield

defogger of the air conditioning sys-

tem (P.511, 517).

228

4-5. Using the driving support systems

● In the following situations, if the situation has changed (or the vehicle has

been driven for some time) and the normal operating conditions are

detected, the message will disappear and the system will become opera-

tional.

If the message does not disappear, contact your Toyota dealer.

• When the temperature around the radar sensor is outside of the opera-

tional range, such as when the vehicle is in the sun or in an extremely cold

environment

• When the front camera cannot detect objects in front of the vehicle, such

as when driving in the dark, snow, or fog, or when bright lights are shining

into the front camera

When the temperature around the

front camera is outside of the opera-

tional range, such as when the vehi-

cle is in the sun or in an extremely

cold environment

If the front camera is hot, such as

after the vehicle had been parked in

the sun, use the air conditioning sys-

tem to decrease the temperature

around the front camera.

If a sunshade was used when the

vehicle was parked, depending on its

type, the sunlight reflected from the

surface of the sunshade may cause

the temperature of the front camera

to become excessively high.

If the front camera is cold, such as

after the vehicle is parked in an

extremely cold environment, use the

air conditioning system to increase

the temperature around the front

camera.

The area in front of the front camera

is obstructed, such as when the

hood is open or a sticker is attached

to the part of the windshield in front

of the front camera.

Close the hood, remove the sticker,

etc. to clear the obstruction.

Situation Actions

229

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

The system can detect the fol-

lowing:

 Vehicles

 Bicyclists

 Pedestrians

■ Pre-collision warning

When the system determines

that the possibility of a frontal

collision is high, a buzzer will

sound and a warning message

will be displayed on the multi-

information display to urge the

driver to take evasive action.

■ Pre-collision brake assist

When the system determines

that the possibility of a frontal

collision is high, the system

applies greater braking force in

relation to how strongly the

brake pedal is depressed.

■ Pre-collision braking

If the system determines that

the possibility of a frontal colli-

sion is extremely high, the

brakes are automatically applied

to help avoid the collision or

reduce the impact of the colli-

sion.

PCS (Pre-Collision Sys-

tem)

The pre-collision system

uses a radar sensor and

front camera to detect

objects (P.229) in front of

the vehicle. When the sys-

tem determines that the

possibility of a frontal colli-

sion with an object is high,

a warning operates to urge

the driver to take evasive

action and the potential

brake pressure is increased

to help the driver avoid the

collision. If the system

determines that the possi-

bility of a frontal collision

with an object is extremely

high, the brakes are auto-

matically applied to help

avoid the collision or help

reduce the impact of the

collision.

The pre-collision system can

be disabled/enabled and the

warning timing can be

changed. (P.231)

Detectable objects

System functions

230

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING

■ Limitations of the pre-colli-

sion system

● The driver is solely responsible

for safe driving. Always drive

safely, taking care to observe

your surroundings.

Do not use the pre-collision sys-

tem instead of normal braking

operations under any circum-

stances. This system will not

prevent collisions or lessen col-

lision damage or injury in every

situation. Do not overly rely on

this system. Failure to do so

may lead to an accident, result-

ing in death or serious injury.

● Although this system is

designed to help avoid a colli-

sion or help reduce the impact

of the collision, its effectiveness

may change according to vari-

ous conditions, therefore the

system may not always be able

to achieve the same level of

performance.

Read the following conditions

carefully. Do not overly rely on

this system and always drive

carefully.

• Conditions under which the sys-

tem may operate even if there is

no possibility of a collision:

P.2 33

• Conditions under which the sys-

tem may not operate properly:

P.2 34

● Do not attempt to test the oper-

ation of the pre-collision system

yourself.

Depending on the objects used

for testing (dummies, card-

board objects imitating detect-

able objects, etc.), the system

may not operate properly, possi-

bly leading to an accident.

■ Pre-collision braking

● When the pre-collision braking

function is operating, a large

amount of braking force will be

applied.

● If the vehicle is stopped by the

operation of the pre-collision

braking function, the pre-colli-

sion braking function operation

will be canceled after approxi-

mately 2 seconds. Depress the

brake pedal as necessary.

● The pre-collision braking func-

tion may not operate if certain

operations are performed by the

driver. If the accelerator pedal is

being depressed strongly or the

steering wheel is being turned,

the system may determine that

the driver is taking evasive

action and possibly prevent the

pre-collision braking function

from operating.

● In some situations, while the

pre-collision braking function is

operating, operation of the func-

tion may be canceled if the

accelerator pedal is depressed

strongly or the steering wheel is

turned and the system deter-

mines that the driver is taking

evasive action.

● If the brake pedal is being

depressed, the system may

determine that the driver is tak-

ing evasive action and possibly

delay the operation timing of the

pre-collision braking function.

■ When to disable the pre-colli-

sion system

In the following situations, disable

the system, as it may not operate

properly, possibly leading to an

accident resulting in death or seri-

ous injury:

● When the vehicle is being towed

231

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■ Enabling/disabling the pre-

collision system

The pre-collision system can be

enabled/disabled on the

screen (P.94) of the multi-

information display.

The system is automatically

enabled each time the engine

switch is turned to ON.

If the system is disabled, the

PCS warning light will turn on

and a message will be displayed

on the multi-information display.

■ Changing the pre-collision

warning timing

The pre-collision warning timing

can be changed on the

screen (P.94) of the multi-

information display.

The warning timing setting is

retained when the engine switch is

turned to OFF. However, if the pre-

collision system is disabled and re-

enabled, the operation timing will

return to the default setting (mid-

dle).

WARNING

● When your vehicle is towing

another vehicle

● When transporting the vehicle

via truck, boat, train or similar

means of transportation

● When the vehicle is raised on a

lift with the engine running and

the tires are allowed to rotate

freely

● When inspecting the vehicle

using a drum tester such as a

chassis dynamometer or speed-

ometer tester, or when using an

on vehicle wheel balancer

● When a strong impact is applied

to the front bumper or front

grille, due to an accident or

other reasons

● If the vehicle cannot be driven in

a stable manner, such as when

the vehicle has been in an acci-

dent or is malfunctioning

● When the vehicle is driven in a

sporty manner or off-road

● When the tires are not properly

inflated

● When the tires are very worn

● When tires of a size other than

specified are installed

● When tire chains are installed

● When a compact spare tire or

an emergency tire puncture

repair kit is used

● If equipment (snow plow, etc.)

that may obstruct the radar sen-

sor or front camera is temporar-

ily installed to the vehicle

Changing settings of the

pre-collision system

232

4-5. Using the driving support systems

1 Early

2 Middle

This is the default setting.

3 Late

■ Operational conditions

The pre-collision system is enabled and the system determines that the pos-

sibility of a frontal collision with a detected object is high.

Each function is operational at the following speed

● Pre-collision warning

● Pre-collision brake assist

Detectable objects Vehicle speed

Relative speed between

your vehicle and object

Vehicles

Approx. 7 to 110 mph

(10 to 180 km/h)

Approx. 7 to 110 mph

(10 to 180 km/h)

Bicyclists and pedestri-

ans

Approx. 7 to 50 mph (10

to 80 km/h)

Approx. 7 to 50 mph (10

to 80 km/h)

Detectable objects Vehicle speed

Relative speed between

your vehicle and object

Vehicles

Approx. 20 to 110 mph

(30 to 180 km/h)

Approx. 20 to 110 mph

(30 to 180 km/h)

Bicyclists and pedestri-

ans

Approx. 20 to 50 mph

(30 to 80 km/h)

Approx. 20 to 50 mph

(30 to 80 km/h)

233

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

● Pre-collision braking

The system may not operate in the following situations:

● If a battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected and then the

vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time

● If the shift lever is in R

● When the VSC OFF indicator is illuminated (only the pre-collision warning

function will be operational)

■ Object detection function

The system detects objects based

on their size, profile, motion, etc.

However, an object may not be

detected depending on the sur-

rounding brightness and the motion,

posture, and angle of the detected

object, preventing the system from

operating properly. (P. 23 4)

The illustration shows an image of

detectable objects.

■ Cancelation of the pre-collision

braking

If either of the following occur while

the pre-collision braking function is

operating, it will be canceled:

● The accelerator pedal is

depressed strongly.

● The steering wheel is turned

sharply or abruptly.

■ Conditions under which the

system may operate even if

there is no possibility of a colli-

sion

● In some situations such as the fol-

lowing, the system may determine

that there is a possibility of a fron-

tal collision and operate.

• When passing a detectable object,

etc.

• When changing lanes while over-

taking a detectable object, etc.

• When approaching a detectable

object in an adjacent lane or on

the roadside, such as when

changing the course of travel or

driving on a winding road

• When rapidly closing on a detect-

able object, etc.

• When approaching objects on the

roadside, such as detectable

objects, guardrails, utility poles,

trees, or walls

• When there is a detectable object

or other object by the roadside at

Detectable objects Vehicle speed

Relative speed between

your vehicle and object

Vehicles

Approx. 7 to 110 mph

(10 to 180 km/h)

Approx. 7 to 110 mph

(10 to 180 km/h)

Bicyclists and pedestri-

ans

Approx. 7 to 50 mph (10

to 80 km/h)

Approx. 7 to 50 mph (10

to 80 km/h)

234

4-5. Using the driving support systems

the entrance of a curve

• When there are patterns or paint

in front of your vehicle that may be

mistaken for a detectable object

• When the front of your vehicle is

hit by water, snow, dust, etc.

• When overtaking a detectable

object that is changing lanes or

making a right/left turn

• When passing a detectable object

in an oncoming lane that is

stopped to make a right/left turn

• When a detectable object

approaches very close and then

stops before entering the path of

your vehicle

• If the front of your vehicle is raised

or lowered, such as when on an

uneven or undulating road surface

• When driving on a road sur-

rounded by a structure, such as in

a tunnel or on an iron bridge

• When there is a metal object

(manhole cover, steel plate, etc.),

steps, or a protrusion in front of

your vehicle

• When passing under an object

(road sign, billboard, etc.)

• When approaching an electric toll

gate barrier, parking area barrier,

or other barrier that opens and

closes

• When using an automatic car

wash

• When driving through or under

objects that may contact your

vehicle, such as thick grass, tree

branches, or a banner

• When driving through steam or

smoke

• When driving near an object that

reflects radio waves, such as a

large truck or guardrail

• When driving near a TV tower,

broadcasting station, electric

power plant, or other location

where strong radio waves or elec-

trical noise may be present

■ Situations in which the system

may not operate properly

● In some situations such as the fol-

lowing, an object may not be

detected by the radar sensor and

front camera, preventing the sys-

tem from operating properly:

• When a detectable object is

approaching your vehicle

• When your vehicle or a detectable

object is wobbling

235

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

• If a detectable object makes an

abrupt maneuver (such as sudden

swerving, acceleration or deceler-

ation)

• When your vehicle approaches a

detectable object rapidly

• When a detectable object is not

directly in front of your vehicle

• When a detectable object is near

a wall, fence, guardrail, manhole

cover, vehicle, steel plate on the

road, etc.

• When a detectable object is under

a structure

• When part of a detectable object

is hidden by an object, such as

large baggage, an umbrella, or

guardrail

• When multiple detectable objects

are close together

• If the sun or other light is shining

directly on a detectable object

• When a detectable object is a

shade of white and looks

extremely bright

• When a detectable object appears

to be nearly the same color or

brightness as its surroundings

• If a detectable object cuts or sud-

denly emerges in front of your

vehicle

• When the front of your vehicle is

hit by water, snow, dust, etc.

• When a very bright light ahead,

such as the sun or the headlights

of oncoming traffic, shines directly

into the front camera

• When approaching the side or

front of a vehicle ahead

• If a vehicle ahead is a motorcycle

• If a vehicle ahead is narrow, such

as a personal mobility vehicle

• If a preceding vehicle has a small

rear end, such as an unloaded

truck

• If a preceding vehicle has a low

rear end, such as a low bed trailer

• If a vehicle ahead has extremely

high ground clearance

• If a vehicle ahead is carrying a

load which protrudes past its rear

bumper

• If a vehicle ahead is irregularly

shaped, such as a tractor or side

car

• If a vehicle ahead is a child sized

bicycle, a bicycle that is carrying a

large load, a bicycle ridden by

more than one person, or a

uniquely shaped bicycle (bicycle

with a child seat, tandem bicycle,

etc.)

• If a pedestrian/or the riding height

of a bicyclist ahead is shorter than

approximately 3.2 ft. (1 m) or taller

than approximately 6.5 ft. (2 m)

• If a pedestrian/bicyclist is wearing

oversized clothing (a rain coat,

long skirt, etc.), making their sil-

houette obscure

• If a pedestrian is bending forward

or squatting or bicyclist is bending

forward

• If a pedestrian/bicyclist is moving

fast

• If a pedestrian is pushing a

stroller, wheelchair, bicycle or

other vehicle

• When driving in inclement weather

236

4-5. Using the driving support systems

such as heavy rain, fog, snow or a

sandstorm

• When driving through steam or

smoke

• When the surrounding area is dim,

such as at dawn or dusk, or while

at night or in a tunnel, making a

detectable object appear to be

nearly the same color as its sur-

roundings

• When driving in a place where the

surrounding brightness changes

suddenly, such as at the entrance

or exit of a tunnel

• After the engine has started the

vehicle has not been driven for a

certain amount of time

• While making a left/right turn and

for a few seconds after making a

left/right turn

• While driving on a curve and for a

few seconds after driving on a

curve

• If your vehicle is skidding

• If the front of the vehicle is raised

or lowered

• If the wheels are misaligned

• If a wiper blade is blocking the

front camera

• The vehicle is being driven at

extremely high speeds

• When driving on a hill

• If the radar sensor or front camera

is misaligned

● In some situations such as the fol-

lowing, sufficient braking force

may not be obtained, preventing

the system from performing prop-

erly:

• If the braking functions cannot

operate to their full extent, such as

when the brake parts are

extremely cold, extremely hot, or

wet

• If the vehicle is not properly main-

tained (brakes or tires are exces-

sively worn, improper tire inflation

pressure, etc.)

• When the vehicle is being driven

on a gravel road or other slippery

surface

■ If VSC is disabled

● If VSC is disabled (P.362), the

pre-collision brake assist and pre-

collision braking functions are also

disabled.

● The PCS warning light will turn on

and “VSC Turned Off Pre-Collision

Brake System Unavailable” will be

displayed on the multi-information

display.

237

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

LTA (Lane Tracing

Assist)

When driving on highways

and freeways with white

(yellow) lane lines, this

function alerts the driver

when the vehicle might

depart from its lane or

course

and provides assis-

tance by operating the

steering wheel to keep the

vehicle in its lane or

course

. Furthermore, the

system provides steering

assistance when dynamic

radar cruise control with

full-speed range is operat-

ing to keep the vehicle in its

lane.

The LTA system recognizes

white (yellow) lane lines or a

course

using the front cam-

era. Additionally, it detects

preceding vehicles using

the front camera and radar.

: Boundary between asphalt and

the side of the road, such as

grass, soil, or a curb

WARNING

■ Before using LTA system

● Do not rely solely upon the LTA

system. The LTA system does

not automatically drive the vehi-

cle or reduce the amount of

attention that must be paid to

the area in front of the vehicle.

The driver must always assume

full responsibility for driving

safely by paying careful atten-

tion to the surrounding condi-

tions and operating the steering

wheel to correct the path of the

vehicle. Also, the driver must

take adequate breaks when

fatigued, such as from driving

for a long period of time.

● Failure to perform appropriate

driving operations and pay care-

ful attention may lead to an

accident, resulting in death or

serious injury.

● When not using the LTA system,

use the LTA switch to turn the

system off.

■ Situations unsuitable for LTA

system

In the following situations, use the

LTA switch to turn the system off.

Failure to do so may lead to an

accident, resulting in death or

serious injury.

● Vehicle is driven on a road sur-

face which is slippery due to

rainy weather, fallen snow,

freezing, etc.

● Vehicle is driven on a snow-cov-

ered road.

● White (yellow) lines are difficult

to see due to rain, snow, fog,

dust, etc.

● Vehicle is driven in a temporary

lane or restricted lane due to

construction work.

238

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING

● Vehicle is driven in a construc-

tion zone.

● A spare tire, tire chains, etc. are

equipped.

● When the tires have been

excessively worn, or when the

tire inflation pressure is low.

● When tires of a size other than

specified are installed.

● Vehicle is driven in traffic lanes

other than that highways and

freeways.

● When your vehicle is towing a

trailer or during emergency tow-

ing

■ Preventing LTA system mal-

functions and operations per-

formed by mistake

● Do not modify the headlights or

place stickers, etc. on the sur-

face of the lights.

● Do not modify the suspension

etc. If the suspension etc. needs

to be replaced, contact your

Toyota dealer.

● Do not install or place anything

on the hood or grille. Also, do

not install a grille guard (bull

bars, kangaroo bar, etc.).

● If your windshield needs

repairs, contact your Toyota

dealer.

■ Conditions in which functions

may not operate properly

In the following situations, the

functions may not operate prop-

erly and the vehicle may depart

from its lane. Drive safely by

always paying careful attention to

your surroundings and operate

the steering wheel to correct the

path of the vehicle without relying

solely on the functions.

● When the follow-up cruising dis-

play is displayed (P.242) and

the preceding vehicle changes

lanes. (Your vehicle may follow

the preceding vehicle and also

change lanes.)

● When the follow-up cruising dis-

play is displayed (P.242) and

the preceding vehicle is sway-

ing. (Your vehicle may sway

accordingly and depart from the

lane.)

● When the follow-up cruising dis-

play is displayed (P.242) and

the preceding vehicle departs

from its lane. (Your vehicle may

follow the preceding vehicle and

depart from the lane.)

● When the follow-up cruising dis-

play is displayed (P.242) and

the preceding vehicle is being

driven extremely close to the

left/right lane line. (Your vehicle

may follow the preceding vehi-

cle and depart from the lane.)

● Vehicle is being driven around a

sharp curve.

239

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

WARNING

● Objects or patterns that could

be mistaken for white (yellow)

lines are present on the side of

the road (guardrails, reflective

poles, etc.).

● Vehicle is driven where the road

diverges, merges, etc.

● Repair marks of asphalt, white

(yellow) lines, etc. are present

due to road repair.

● There are shadows on the road

that run parallel with, or cover,

the white (yellow) lines.

● The vehicle is driven in an area

without white (yellow) lines,

such as in front of a tollgate or

checkpoint, or at an intersec-

tion, etc.

● The white (yellow) lines are

cracked, “Botts’ dots”, “Raised

pavement marker” or stones are

present.

● The white (yellow) lines cannot

be seen or are difficult to see

due to sand, etc.

● The vehicle is driven on a road

surface that is wet due to rain,

puddles, etc.

● The traffic lines are yellow

(which may be more difficult to

recognize than lines that are

white).

● The white (yellow) lines cross

over a curb, etc.

● The vehicle is driven on a bright

surface, such as concrete.

● If the edge of the road is not

clear or straight.

● The vehicle is driven on a sur-

face that is bright due to

reflected light, etc.

● The vehicle is driven in an area

where the brightness changes

suddenly, such as at the

entrances and exits of tunnels,

etc.

● Light from the headlights of an

oncoming vehicle, the sun, etc.

enters the camera.

● The vehicle is driven on a slope.

● The vehicle is driven on a road

which tilts left or right, or a wind-

ing road.

● The vehicle is driven on an

unpaved or rough road.

240

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Lane departure alert func-

tion

When the system determines

that the vehicle might depart

from its lane or course

, a warn-

ing is displayed on the multi-

information display, and a warn-

ing buzzer will sound to alert the

driver.

When the warning buzzer sounds,

check the area around your vehicle

and carefully operate the steering

wheel to move the vehicle back to

the center of the lane.

Vehicles with Blind Spot Monitor:

When the system determines that

the vehicle might depart from its

lane and that the possibility of a col-

lision with an overtaking vehicle in

the adjacent lane is high, the lane

departure alert will operate even if

the turn signals are operating.

: Boundary between asphalt and

the side of the road, such as

grass, soil, or a curb

■ Steering assist function

When the system determines

that the vehicle might depart

from its lane or course

, the sys-

WARNING

● The traffic lane is excessively

narrow or wide.

● The vehicle is extremely tilted

due to carrying heavy luggage

or having improper tire pres-

sure.

● The distance to the preceding

vehicle is extremely short.

● The vehicle is moving up and

down a large amount due to

road conditions during driving

(poor roads or road seams).

● When driving in a tunnel or at

night with the headlights off or

when a headlight is dim due to

its lens being dirty or it being

misaligned.

● The vehicle is struck by a cross-

wind.

● The vehicle is affected by wind

from a vehicle driven in a

nearby lane.

● The vehicle has just changed

lanes or crossed an intersec-

tion.

● Tires which differ by structure,

manufacturer, brand or tread

pattern are used.

● Snow tires, etc. are equipped.

● The vehicle is being driven at

extremely high speeds.

Functions included in LTA

system

241

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

tem provides assistance as nec-

essary by operating the steering

wheel in small amounts for a

short period of time to keep the

vehicle in its lane.

If the system detects that the steer-

ing wheel has not been operated

for a fixed amount of time or the

steering wheel is not being firmly

gripped, a warning is displayed on

the multi-information display and

the function is temporarily can-

celed.

Vehicles with Blind Spot Monitor:

When the system determines that

the vehicle might depart from its

lane and that the possibility of a col-

lision with an overtaking vehicle in

the adjacent lane is high, the steer-

ing assist function will operate even

if the turn signals are operating.

: Boundary between asphalt and

the side of the road, such as

grass, soil, or a curb

■ Vehicle sway warning func-

tion

When the vehicle is swaying

within a lane, the warning

buzzer will sound and a mes-

sage will be displayed on the

multi-information display to alert

the driver.

■ Lane centering function

This function is linked with

dynamic radar cruise control

with full-speed range and pro-

vides the required assistance by

operating the steering wheel to

keep the vehicle in its current

lane.

When dynamic radar cruise control

with full-speed range is not operat-

ing, the lane centering function

does not operate.

In situations where the white (yel-

low) lane lines are difficult to see or

are not visible, such as when in a

242

4-5. Using the driving support systems

traffic jam, this function will operate

to help follow a preceding vehicle

by monitoring the position of the

preceding vehicle.

If the system detects that the steer-

ing wheel has not been operated

for a fixed amount of time or the

steering wheel is not being firmly

gripped, a warning is displayed on

the multi-information display and

the function is temporarily can-

celed.

Press the LTA switch to turn the

LTA system on.

The LTA indicator illuminates and a

message is displayed on the multi-

information display.

Press the LTA switch again to

turn the LTA system off.

When the LTA system is turned on

or off, operation of the LTA system

continues in the same condition the

next time the engine is started.

LTA indicator

The illumination condition of the

indicator informs the driver of the

system operation status.

Illuminated in white: LTA system is

operating.

Illuminated in green: Steering wheel

assistance of the steering assist

function or lane centering function

is operating.

Flashing in orange: Lane departure

alert function is operating.

Operation display of steering

wheel operation support

Displayed when the multi-informa-

tion display is switched to the driv-

ing support system information

display.

Indicates that steering wheel assis-

Turning LTA system on

Indications on multi-infor-

mation display

243

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

tance of the steering assist function

or lane centering function is operat-

ing.

Both outer sides of the lane are dis-

played: Indicates that steering

wheel assist of the lane centering

function is operating.

One outer side of the lane is dis-

played: Indicates that steering

wheel assist of the steering assist

function is operating.

Both outer sides of the lane are

flashing: Alerts the driver that their

input is necessary to stay in the

center of the lane (lane centering

function).

Follow-up cruising display

Displayed when the multi-informa-

tion display is switched to the driv-

ing support system information

display.

Indicates that steering assist of the

lane centering function is operating

by monitoring the position of a pre-

ceding vehicle.

When the follow-up cruising display

is displayed, if the preceding vehi-

cle moves, your vehicle may move

in the same way. Always pay care-

ful attention to your surroundings

and operate the steering wheel as

necessary to correct the path of the

vehicle and ensure safety.

Lane departure alert function

display

Displayed when the multi-informa-

tion display is switched to the driv-

ing support system information

display.

 Inside of displayed lines is

white

Indicates that the system is recog-

nizing white (yellow) lines or a

course

. When the vehicle departs

from its lane, the white line dis-

played on the side the vehicle

departs from flashes orange.

 Inside of displayed lines is

black

Indicates that the system is not able

to recognize white (yellow) lines or

a course

or is temporarily can-

celed.

: Boundary between asphalt and

the side of the road, such as

grass, soil, or a curb

■ Operation conditions of each

function

● Lane departure alert function

This function operates when all of

the following conditions are met.

244

4-5. Using the driving support systems

• LTA is turned on.

• Vehicle speed is approximately 32

mph (50 km/h) or more.

• System recognizes white (yellow)

lane lines or a course

. (When a

white [yellow] line or course

recognized on only one side, the

system will operate only for the

recognized side.)

• Width of traffic lane is approxi-

mately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.

• Turn signal lever is not operated.

(Vehicles with Blind Spot Monitor:

Except when another vehicle is in

the lane on the side where the

turn signal was operated)

• Vehicle is not being driven around

a sharp curve.

• No system malfunctions are

detected. (P.246)

:The function operates even if the

vehicle speed is less than

approximately 32 mph (50 km/h)

when the lane centering function

is operating.

:Boundary between asphalt and

the side of the road, such as

grass, soil, or a curb

● Steering assist function

This function operates when all of

the following conditions are met in

addition to the operation conditions

for the lane departure alert function.

• Setting for “Steering Assist” in the

screen of the multi-information

display is set to “ON”. (P. 8 9 )

• Vehicle is not accelerated or

decelerated by a fixed amount or

more.

• Steering wheel is not operated

with a steering force level suitable

for changing lanes.

• ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are

not operating.

• TRAC or VSC is not turned off.

• Hands off steering wheel warning

is not displayed. (P.245)

● Vehicle sway warning function

This function operates when all of

the following conditions are met.

• Setting for “Sway Warning” in the

screen of the multi-information

display is set to “ON”. (P. 89 )

• Vehicle speed is approximately 32

mph (50 km/h) or more.

• Width of traffic lane is approxi-

mately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.

• No system malfunctions are

detected. (P.246)

● Lane centering function

This function operates when all of

the following conditions are met.

• LTA is turned on.

• Setting for “Steering Assist” and

“Lane Center” in the screen of

the multi-information display are

set to “ON”. (P. 89 )

• This function recognizes white

(yellow) lane lines or the position

of a preceding vehicle (except

when the preceding vehicle is

small, such as a motorcycle).

• The dynamic radar cruise control

with full-speed range is operating

in vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-

trol mode.

• Width of traffic lane is approxi-

mately 10 to 13 ft. (3 to 4 m).

• Turn signal lever is not operated.

• Vehicle is not being driven around

a sharp curve.

• No system malfunctions are

detected. (P.246)

• Vehicle does not accelerate or

decelerate by a fixed amount or

more.

• Steering wheel is not operated

with a steering force level suitable

for changing lanes.

• ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are

not operating.

• TRAC or VSC is not turned off.

• Hands off steering wheel warning

is not displayed. (P.245)

• The vehicle is being driven in the

center of a lane.

• Steering assist function is not

operating.

245

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■ Temporary cancelation of func-

tions

● When operation conditions are no

longer met, a function may be

temporarily canceled. However,

when the operation conditions are

met again, operation of the func-

tion is automatically restored.

(P.243)

● If the operation conditions

(P.243) are no longer met while

the lane centering function is

operating, the buzzer may sound

to indicate that the function has

been temporarily canceled.

■ Steering assist function/lane

centering function

● Depending on the vehicle speed,

lane departure situation, road con-

ditions, etc., the driver may not

feel the function is operating or

the function may not operate at

all.

● The steering control of the func-

tion is overridden by the driver’s

steering wheel operation.

● Do not attempt to test the opera-

tion of the steering assist function.

■ Lane departure alert function

● The warning buzzer may be diffi-

cult to hear due to external noise,

audio playback, etc.

● If the edge of the course

is not

clear or straight, the lane depar-

ture alert function may not oper-

ate.

● Vehicles with Blind Spot Monitor: It

may not be possible for the sys-

tem to determine if there is a dan-

ger of a collision with a vehicle in

an adjacent lane.

● Do not attempt to test the opera-

tion of the lane departure alert

function.

: Boundary between asphalt and

the side of the road, such as

grass, soil, or a curb

■ Hands off steering wheel warn-

ing

In the following situations, a warning

message urging the driver to hold

the steering wheel and the symbol

shown in the illustration are dis-

played on the multi-information dis-

play to warn the driver. The warning

stops when the system determines

that the driver holds the steering

wheel. Always keep your hands on

the steering wheel when using this

system, regardless of warnings.

● When the system determines that

the driver is driving without hold-

ing the steering wheel while the

system is operating

If the driver continues to keep their

hands off of the steering wheel, the

buzzer sounds, the driver is warned

and the function is temporarily can-

celed. This warning also operates in

the same way when the driver con-

tinuously operates the steering

wheel only a small amount.

● When the system determines that

the vehicle may not turn and

instead depart from its lane while

driving around a curve

Depending on the vehicle condition

and road conditions, the warning

may not operate. Also, if the system

determines that the vehicle is driv-

ing around a curve, warnings will

occur earlier than during straight-

lane driving.

● When the system determines that

the driver is driving without hold-

ing the steering wheel while the

246

4-5. Using the driving support systems

steering wheel assist of the steer-

ing assist function is operating.

If the driver continues to keep their

hands off of the steering wheel and

the steering wheel assist is operat-

ing, the buzzer sounds and the

driver is warned. Each time the

buzzer sounds, the continuing time

of the buzzer becomes longer.

■ Vehicle sway warning function

When the system determines that

the vehicle is swaying while the

vehicle sway warning function is

operating, a buzzer sounds and a

warning message urging the driver

to rest and the symbol shown in the

illustration are simultaneously dis-

played on the multi-information dis-

play.

Depending on the vehicle and road

conditions, the warning may not

operate.

■ Warning message

If the following warning message is

displayed on the multi-information

display and the LTA indicator illumi-

nates in orange, follow the appropri-

ate troubleshooting procedure. Also,

if a different warning message is

displayed, follow the instructions

displayed on the screen.

● “LTA Malfunction Visit Your

Dealer”

The system may not be operating

properly. Have the vehicle inspected

by your Toyota dealer.

● “LTA Unavailable”

The system is temporarily canceled

due to a malfunction in a sensor

other than the front camera. Turn

the LTA system off, wait for a little

while, and then turn the LTA system

back on.

● “LTA Unavailable at Current

Speed”

The function cannot be used as the

vehicle speed exceeds the LTA

operation range. Drive slower.

■ Customization

Function settings can be changed.

(P. 94 )

247

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

: If equipped

When the front camera recog-

nizes a sign and/or information

of a sign is available from the

navigation system, the sign will

be displayed on the multi-infor-

mation display.

 When the driving support sys-

tem information display is

selected, a maximum of 3

signs can be displayed.

(P.8 9 )

 When a tab other than the

driving support system infor-

mation display is selected, the

following types of road signs

will be displayed. (P. 89)

• Speed limit sign

• Do Not Enter sign (when notifica-

tion is necessary)

RSA (Road Sign

Assist)

The RSA system recognizes

specific road signs using

the front camera and/or nav-

igation system (when speed

limit information is avail-

able) to provide information

to the driver via the display.

If the system judges that the

vehicle is being driven over

the speed limit, performing

prohibited actions, etc. in

relation to the recognized

road signs, it notifies the

driver using a notification

display and notification

buzzer.

WARNING

■ Before using the RSA

Do not rely solely upon the RSA

system. RSA is a system which

supports the driver by providing

information, but it is not a replace-

ment for a driver’s own vision and

awareness. Drive safely by

always paying careful attention to

the traffic rules.

Indication on the multi-

information display

248

4-5. Using the driving support systems

If signs other than speed limit

signs are recognized, they will

be displayed in an overlapping

stack under the current speed

limit sign.

The following types of road

signs, including electronic signs

and blinking signs, are recog-

nized.

A non-official or a recently intro-

duced traffic sign may not be recog-

nized.

In the following situations, the

RSA system will notify the

driver.

 When the vehicle speed

exceeds the speed notifica-

tion threshold of the speed

limit sign displayed, the sign

display will be emphasized

and a buzzer will sound.

 When the RSA system recog-

nizes a do not enter sign and

determines that your vehicle

has entered a no-entry area,

the displayed sign will flash

and a buzzer will sound.

Depending on the situation, a

notification function may not

operate properly.

■ Setting procedure

P. 9 4

■ Automatic turn-off of RSA sign

display

In the following situations, displayed

speed limit and do not enter signs

will stop being displayed automati-

cally:

● A new sign is not recognized for a

certain distance.

● The road changes due to a left or

right turn, etc.

In the following situations, stop and

yield signs will stop being displayed

automatically:

● The system determines that your

vehicle has passed the sign.

● The road changes due to a left or

right turn, etc.

■ Conditions in which the func-

tion may not operate or detect

correctly

In the following situations, RSA

does not operate normally and may

not recognize signs, display the

incorrect sign, etc. However, this

does not indicate a malfunction.

● The front camera is misaligned

due to a strong impact being

applied to the sensor, etc.

● Dirt, snow, stickers, etc. are on the

windshield near the front camera.

● In inclement weather such as

Supported types of road

signs

Speed limit

Do Not Enter

Stop

Yield

Notification function

249

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

heavy rain, fog, snow or sand

storms

● Light from an oncoming vehicle,

the sun, etc. enters the front cam-

era.

● The sign is dirty, faded, tilted or

bent, and if an electronic sign, the

contrast is poor.

● All or part of the sign is hidden by

the leaves of a tree, a pole, etc.

● The sign is only visible to the front

camera for a short amount of time.

● The driving scene (turning, lane

change, etc.) is judged incorrectly.

● Even if it is a sign not appropriate

for the currently traveled lane,

such a sign exists directly after a

freeway branches, or in an adja-

cent lane just before merging.

● Stickers are attached to the rear of

the preceding vehicle.

● A sign resembling a system com-

patible sign is recognized.

● Side road speed signs may be

detected and displayed (if posi-

tioned in sight of the front camera)

while the vehicle is traveling on

the main road.

● Roundabout exit road speed signs

may be detected and displayed (if

positioned in sight of the front

camera) while traveling on a

roundabout.

● The front of the vehicle is raised or

lowered due to the carried load.

● The surrounding brightness is not

sufficient or changes suddenly.

● When a sign intended for trucks,

etc. is recognized.

● The speed information displayed

on the meter and that displayed

on the navigation system may be

different due to the navigation sys-

tem using map data.

■ Speed limit sign display

If the engine switch was last turned

off while a speed limit sign was dis-

played on the multi-information dis-

play, the same sign displays again

when the engine switch is turned to

ON.

■ If “RSA Malfunction Visit Your

Dealer” is shown

The system may be malfunctioning.

Have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

■ Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(Customizable features: P. 94)

250

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Meter display

Multi-information display

Set speed

Indicators

■ Operation switches

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

switch

“+RES” switch

Cruise control main switch

Cancel switch

“-SET” switch

Dynamic radar cruise

control with full-speed

range

In vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance control mode, the

vehicle automatically accel-

erates, decelerates and

stops to match the speed

changes of the preceding

vehicle even if the accelera-

tor pedal is not depressed.

In constant speed control

mode, the vehicle runs at a

fixed speed.

Use the dynamic radar

cruise control with full-

speed range on freeways

and highways.

 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

control mode (P.253)

 Constant speed control

mode (P.257)

System Components

WARNING

■ Before using dynamic radar

cruise control with full-speed

range

● Driving safely is the sole

responsibility of the driver. Do

not rely solely on the system,

and drive safely by always pay-

ing careful attention to your sur-

roundings.

251

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

WARNING

● The dynamic radar cruise con-

trol with full-speed range pro-

vides driving assistance to

reduce the driver’s burden.

However, there are limitations to

the assistance provided.

Read the following conditions

carefully. Do not overly rely on this

system and always drive carefully.

• When the sensor may not be

correctly detecting the vehicle

ahead: P.2 59

• Conditions under which the

vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-

trol mode may not function cor-

rectly: P.259

● Set the speed appropriately

depending on the speed limit,

traffic flow, road conditions,

weather conditions, etc. The

driver is responsible for check-

ing the set speed.

● Even when the system is func-

tioning normally, the condition of

the preceding vehicle as

detected by the system may dif-

fer from the condition observed

by the driver. Therefore, the

driver must always remain alert,

assess the danger of each situ-

ation and drive safely. Relying

solely on this system or assum-

ing the system ensures safety

while driving can lead to an

accident, resulting in death or

serious injury.

● Switch the dynamic radar cruise

control with full-speed range

setting to off, using the cruise

control main switch when not in

use.

■ Cautions regarding the driv-

ing assist systems

Observe the following precau-

tions, as there are limitations to

the assistance provided by the

system. Failure to do so may

cause an accident resulting in

death or serious injury.

● Assisting the driver to measure

following distance

The dynamic radar cruise control

with full-speed range is only

intended to help the driver in

determining the following distance

between the driver’s own vehicle

and a designated vehicle traveling

ahead. It is not a mechanism that

allows careless or inattentive driv-

ing, and it is not a system that can

assist the driver in low-visibility

conditions.

It is still necessary for driver to

pay close attention to the vehi-

cle’s surroundings.

● Assisting the driver to judge

proper following distance

The dynamic radar cruise control

with full-speed range determines

whether the following distance

between the driver’s own vehicle

and a designated vehicle traveling

ahead is within a set range. It is

not capable of making any other

type of judgement. Therefore, it is

absolutely necessary for the

driver to remain vigilant and to

determine whether or not there is

a possibility of danger in any

given situation.

252

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING

● Assisting the driver to operate

the vehicle

The dynamic radar cruise control

with full-speed range does not

include functions which will pre-

vent or avoid collisions with vehi-

cles ahead of your vehicle.

Therefore, if there is ever any

possibility of danger, the driver

must take immediate and direct

control of the vehicle and act

appropriately in order to ensure

the safety of all involved.

■ Situations unsuitable for

dynamic radar cruise control

with full-speed range

Do not use dynamic radar cruise

control with full-speed range in

any of the following situations.

Doing so may result in inappropri-

ate speed control and could

cause an accident resulting in

death or serious injury.

● Roads where there are pedes-

trians, cyclists, etc.

● In heavy traffic

● On roads with sharp bends

● On winding roads

● On slippery roads, such as

those covered with rain, ice or

snow

● On steep downhills, or where

there are sudden changes

between sharp up and down

gradients

Vehicle speed may exceed the set

speed when driving down a steep

hill.

● At entrances to freeways and

highways

● When weather conditions are

bad enough that they may pre-

vent the sensors from detecting

correctly (fog, snow, sand-

storm, heavy rain, etc.)

● When there is rain, snow, etc.

on the front surface of the radar

or front camera

● In traffic conditions that require

frequent repeated acceleration

and deceleration

● When your vehicle is towing a

trailer or during emergency tow-

ing

● When an approach warning

buzzer is heard often

253

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

This mode employs a radar to detect the presence of vehicles up to

approximately 328 ft. (100 m) ahead, determines the current vehicle-

to-vehicle following distance, and operates to maintain a suitable fol-

lowing distance from the vehicle ahead. The desired vehicle-to-vehi-

cle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle

distance switch.

When driving on downhill slopes, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance may

become shorter.

Example of constant speed cruising

When there are no vehicles ahead

The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver.

Example of deceleration cruising and follow-up cruising

When a preceding vehicle driving slower than the set speed

appears

When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically

decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is nec-

essary, the system applies the brakes (the stop lights will come on at this

time). The system will respond to changes in the speed of the vehicle

ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver.

Approach warning warns you when the system cannot decelerate suffi-

ciently to prevent your vehicle from closing in on the vehicle ahead.

When the vehicle ahead of you stops, your vehicle will also stop (vehicle is

stopped by system control). After the vehicle ahead starts off, pressing the

“+RES” switch or depressing the accelerator pedal (start-off operation) will

resume follow-up cruising. If the start-off operation is not performed, system

Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

254

4-5. Using the driving support systems

control continues to keep your vehicle stopped.

When the turn signal lever is operated and your vehicle moves to a left lane

while driving at 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the vehicle will quickly acceler-

ate to help to overtake a passing vehicle.

Example of acceleration

When there are no longer any preceding vehicles driving slower

than the set speed

The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then

returns to constant speed cruising.

1 Press the cruise control main

switch to activate the cruise

control.

Dynamic radar cruise control indi-

cator will come on and a message

will be displayed on the multi-infor-

mation display. Press the switch

again to deactivate the cruise con-

trol.

If the cruise control main switch is

pressed and held for 1.5 seconds

or more, the system turns on in

constant speed control mode.

(P.257)

2 Accelerate or decelerate,

with accelerator pedal opera-

tion, to the desired vehicle

speed (at or above approxi-

mately 20 mph [30 km/h])

and press the “-SET” switch

to set the speed.

Cruise control “SET” indicator will

come on.

The vehicle speed at the moment

the switch is released becomes the

set speed.

To change the set speed, press

the “+RES” or “-SET” switch

until the desired set speed is

displayed.

Setting the vehicle speed

(vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance control mode)

Adjusting the set speed

255

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

1 Increases the speed (Except

when the vehicle has been

stopped by system control in

vehicle-to-vehicle distance

control mode)

2 Decreases the speed

Fine adjustment: Press the switch.

Large adjustment: Press and hold

the switch to change the speed,

and release when the desired

speed is reached.

In the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance control mode, the set

speed will be increased or

decreased as follows:

 For the U.S. mainland and

Hawaii

Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6

km/h)

or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)

each

time the switch is pressed

Large adjustment: Increases or

decreases in 1 mph (1.6 km/h)

1 km/h (0.6 mph)

increments for

as long as the switch is held

 Except for the U.S. mainland

and Hawaii

Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6

km/h)

or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)

each

time the switch is pressed

Large adjustment: Increases or

decreases in 5 mph (8 km/h)

or 5

km/h (3.1 mph)

increments for as

long as the switch is held

In the constant speed control

mode (P.257), the set speed

will be increased or decreased

as follows:

Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6

km/h)

or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)

each

time the switch is pressed

Large adjustment: The speed will

continue to change while the switch

is held.

:When the set speed is shown in

“MPH”

:When the set speed is shown in

“km/h”

Pressing the switch changes the

vehicle-to-vehicle distance as

follows:

1 Long

2 Medium

3 Short

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is

set automatically to long mode

when the engine switch is turned to

ON.

If a vehicle is running ahead of you,

the preceding vehicle mark will

also be displayed.

Changing the vehicle-to-

vehicle distance (vehicle-

to-vehicle distance con-

trol mode)

256

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Select a distance from the table

below. Note that the distances

shown correspond to a vehicle

speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

increases/decreases in accor-

dance with vehicle speed. When

the vehicle is stopped by system

control, the vehicle stops at a

certain vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance depending on the situa-

tion.

After the vehicle ahead of you

starts off, press the “+RES”

switch.

Your vehicle will also resume

follow-up cruising if the acceler-

ator pedal is depressed after the

vehicle ahead of you starts off.

1 Pressing the cancel switch

cancels the speed control.

The speed control is also canceled

when the brake pedal is depressed.

(When the vehicle has been

stopped by system control,

depressing the brake pedal does

not cancel the setting.)

2 Pressing the “+RES” switch

resumes the cruise control

and returns vehicle speed to

the set speed.

When your vehicle is too close

Vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance settings (vehicle-to-

vehicle distance control

mode)

Distance options

Vehicle-to-vehi-

cle distance

Long

Approximately

160 ft. (50 m)

Medium

Approximately

130 ft. (40 m)

Short

Approximately

100 ft. (30 m)

Resuming follow-up

cruising when the vehicle

has been stopped by sys-

tem control (vehicle-to-

vehicle distance control

mode)

Canceling and resuming

the speed control

Approach warning (vehi-

cle-to-vehicle distance

control mode)

257

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

to a vehicle ahead, and suffi-

cient automatic deceleration via

the cruise control is not possi-

ble, the display will flash and the

buzzer will sound to alert the

driver. An example of this would

be if another driver cuts in front

of you while you are following a

vehicle. Depress the brake

pedal to ensure an appropriate

vehicle-to-vehicle distance.

■ Warnings may not occur

when

In the following instances, warn-

ings may not occur even when

the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is

small.

 When the speed of the pre-

ceding vehicle matches or

exceeds your vehicle speed

 When the preceding vehicle is

traveling at an extremely slow

speed

 Immediately after the cruise

control speed was set

 When depressing the acceler-

ator pedal

When constant speed control

mode is selected, your vehicle

will maintain a set speed without

controlling the vehicle-to-vehi-

cle distance. Select this mode

only when vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance control mode does not

function correctly due to a dirty

radar, etc.

1 With the cruise control off,

press and hold the cruise

control main switch for 1.5

seconds or more.

Immediately after the switch is

pressed, the dynamic radar cruise

control indicator will come on. After-

wards, it switches to the cruise con-

trol indicator.

Switching to constant speed control

mode is only possible when operat-

ing the switch with the cruise con-

trol off.

2 Accelerate or decelerate,

with accelerator pedal opera-

tion, to the desired vehicle

speed (at or above approxi-

mately 20 mph [30 km/h])

and press the “-SET” switch

to set the speed.

Cruise control “SET” indicator will

Selecting constant speed

control mode

258

4-5. Using the driving support systems

come on.

The vehicle speed at the moment

the switch is released becomes the

set speed.

Adjusting the speed setting:

P.254

Canceling and resuming the speed

setting: P.2 5 6

■ Dynamic radar cruise control

with full-speed range can be set

when

● The shift lever is in D.

● The desired set speed can be set

when the vehicle speed is approx-

imately 20 mph (30 km/h) or more.

(However, when the vehicle speed

is set while driving at below

approximately 20 mph [30 km/h],

the set speed will be set to

approximately 20 mph [30 km/h].)

■ Accelerating after setting the

vehicle speed

The vehicle can accelerate by oper-

ating the accelerator pedal. After

accelerating, the set speed

resumes. However, during vehicle-

to-vehicle distance control mode,

the vehicle speed may decrease

below the set speed in order to

maintain the distance to the preced-

ing vehicle.

■ When the vehicle stops while

follow-up cruising

● Pressing the “+RES” switch while

the vehicle ahead stops will

resume follow-up cruising if the

vehicle ahead starts off within

approximately 3 seconds after the

switch is pressed.

● If the vehicle ahead starts off

within 3 seconds after your vehicle

stops, follow-up cruising will be

resumed.

■ Automatic cancelation of vehi-

cle-to-vehicle distance control

mode

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode is automatically canceled in

the following situations.

● VSC is activated.

● TRAC is activated for a period of

time.

● When the VSC or TRAC system is

turned off.

● The sensor cannot detect cor-

rectly because it is covered in

some way.

● Pre-collision braking is activated.

● The parking brake is operated.

● The vehicle is stopped by system

control on a steep incline.

● The following are detected when

the vehicle has been stopped by

system control:

• The driver is not wearing a seat

belt.

• The driver’s door is opened.

• The vehicle has been stopped for

about 3 minutes

If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode is automatically canceled for

any reasons other than the above,

there may be a malfunction in the

system. Contact your Toyota dealer.

■ Automatic cancelation of con-

stant speed control mode

Constant speed control mode is

automatically canceled in the follow-

ing situations:

● Actual vehicle speed is more than

approximately 10 mph (16 km/h)

below the set vehicle speed.

● Actual vehicle speed falls below

259

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

● VSC is activated.

● TRAC is activated for a period of

time.

● When the VSC or TRAC system is

turned off.

● Pre-collision braking is activated.

If constant speed control mode is

automatically canceled for any rea-

sons other than the above, there

may be a malfunction in the system.

Contact your Toyota dealer.

■ Brake operation

A brake operation sound may be

heard and the brake pedal response

may change, but these are not mal-

functions.

■ Warning messages and buzzers

for dynamic radar cruise con-

trol with full-speed range

Warning messages and buzzers are

used to indicate a system malfunc-

tion or to inform the driver of the

need for caution while driving. If a

warning message is shown on the

multi-information display, read the

message and follow the instructions.

(P.227, 639)

■ When the sensor may not be

correctly detecting the vehicle

ahead

In the case of the following and

depending on the conditions, oper-

ate the brake pedal when decelera-

tion of the system is insufficient or

operate the accelerator pedal when

acceleration is required.

As the sensor may not be able to

correctly detect these types of vehi-

cles, the approach warning

(P.256) may not be activated.

● Vehicles that cut in suddenly

● Vehicles traveling at low speeds

● Vehicles that are not moving in the

same lane

● Vehicles with small rear ends

(trailers with no load on board,

etc.)

● Motorcycles traveling in the same

lane

● When water or snow thrown up by

the surrounding vehicles hinders

the detecting of the sensor

● When your vehicle is pointing

upwards (caused by a heavy load

in the luggage compartment, etc.)

● Preceding vehicle has an

extremely high ground clearance

■ Conditions under which the

vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-

trol mode may not function cor-

rectly

In the case of the following condi-

tions, operate the brake pedal (or

accelerator pedal, depending on the

situation) as necessary.

As the sensor may not be able to

correctly detect vehicles ahead, the

system may not operate properly.

260

4-5. Using the driving support systems

● When the road curves or when the

lanes are narrow

● When steering wheel operation or

your position in the lane is unsta-

ble

● When the vehicle ahead of you

decelerates suddenly

● When driving on a road sur-

rounded by a structure, such as in

a tunnel or on a bridge

● While the vehicle speed is

decreasing to the set speed after

the vehicle accelerates by

depressing the accelerator pedal

: If equipped

BSM (Blind Spot Moni-

tor)

The Blind Spot Monitor is a

system that has 2 functions:

 The BSM (Blind Spot Moni-

tor) function

Assists the driver in making a

decision when changing lanes

 The RCTA (Rear Cross

Traffic Alert) function

Assists the driver when back-

ing up

These functions use the

same sensors.

WARNING

■ Cautions regarding the use of

the BSM function

The driver is solely responsible for

safe driving. Always drive safely,

taking care to observe your sur-

roundings.

The BSM function is a supple-

mentary function which alerts the

driver that a vehicle is in a blind

spot of the outside rear view mir-

rors or is approaching rapidly from

behind into a blind spot. Do not

overly rely on the BSM function.

As the function cannot judge if it is

safe to change lanes, over reli-

ance could lead to an accident

resulting in death or serious injury.

As the system may not function

correctly under certain condi-

tions, the driver’s own visual con-

firmation of safety is necessary.

261

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

Multi-information display

Turning the BSM function/RCTA

function on/off.

Outside rear view mirror indi-

cators

BSM function:

When a vehicle is detected in a

blind spot of the outside rear view

mirrors or approaching rapidly from

behind into a blind spot, the outside

rear view mirror indicator on the

detected side will illuminate. If the

turn signal lever is operated toward

the detected side, the outside rear

view mirror indicator will flash.

RCTA function:

When a vehicle approaching from

the right or left at the rear of the

vehicle is detected, both outside

rear view mirror indicators will flash.

BSM indicator/RCTA OFF

indicator

When the Blind Spot Monitor is

enabled, the BSM indicator illumi-

nates.

When the RCTA function is dis-

abled, the RCTA OFF indicator illu-

minates.

Monitor screen display

(RCTA function only)

If a vehicle approaching from the

right or left at the rear of the vehicle

is detected, the RCTA icon

(P.267) for the detected side will

be displayed.

RCTA buzzer (RCTA function

only)

If a vehicle approaching from the

right or left at the rear of the vehicle

is detected, a buzzer will sound

from behind the rear seat.

WARNING

■ Cautions regarding the use of

the RCTA function

The driver is solely responsible for

safe driving. Always drive safely,

taking care to observe your sur-

roundings.

The RCTA function is only a sup-

plementary function which alerts

the driver that a vehicle is

approaching from the right or left

at the rear of the vehicle. As the

RCTA function may not function

correctly under certain condi-

tions, the driver’s own visual con-

firmation of safety is necessary.

Over reliance on this function may

lead to an accident resulting

death or serious injury.

System components

262

4-5. Using the driving support systems

The BSM function and the

RCTA function can be

enabled/disabled on the

screen of the multi-information

display. (P. 94 )

■ Outside rear view mirror indica-

tors visibility

In strong sunlight, the outside rear

view mirror indicator may be difficult

to see.

■ Hearing the RCTA buzzer

The RCTA buzzer may be difficult to

hear over loud noises such as high

audio volume.

■ When “Blind Spot Monitor

Unavailable” or “Rear Cross

Traffic Alert Unavailable” is

shown on the multi-information

display

The sensor voltage has become

abnormal, or water, snow, mud, etc.,

may be built up in the vicinity of the

sensor area of the rear bumper.

(P.263)

Removing the water, snow, mud,

etc., from the vicinity of the sensor

area should return it to normal.

Also, the sensor may not function

normally when used in extremely

hot or cold weather.

■ When “Blind Spot Monitor Sys-

tem Malfunction Visit Your

Dealer” or “Rear Cross Traffic

Alert Malfunction Visit Your

Dealer” is shown on the multi-

information display

There may be a sensor malfunction

or misaligned. Have the vehicle

inspected at a Toyota dealer.

■ Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(P. 94 )

■ Certification for the Blind Spot Monitor

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, American Samoa, Guam, Saipan

and Puerto Rico

Turning the BSM func-

tion/RCTA function on/off

263

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

 For vehicles sold in Canada

WARNING

■ Handling the radar sensor

Blind Spot Monitor sensors are

installed inside the left and right

sides of the rear bumper respec-

tively. Observe the following to

ensure the Blind Spot Monitor can

function correctly.

● Keep the sensors and the sur-

rounding areas on the rear

bumper clean at all times.

If a sensor or its surrounding

area on the rear bumper is dirty

or covered with snow, the Blind

Spot Monitor may not operate

and a warning message

(P.262) will be displayed. In

this situation, clear off the dirt or

snow and drive the vehicle with

the operation conditions of the

BSM function (P.265) satis-

fied for approximately 10 min-

utes. If the warning message

does not disappear, have the

vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

● Do not subject a sensor or its

surrounding area on the rear

bumper to a strong impact.

If a sensor is moved even

slightly off position, the system

may malfunction and vehicles

may not be detected correctly.

In the following situations, have

your vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

• A sensor or its surrounding area

is subject to a strong impact.

264

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Vehicles that can be detected by the Blind Spot Monitor

The BSM function uses radar sensors to detect the following vehi-

cles traveling in adjacent lanes and advises the driver of the pres-

ence of such vehicles via the indicators on the outside rear view

mirrors.

Vehicles that are traveling in areas that are not visible using the

outside rear view mirrors (the blind spots)

Vehicles that are approaching rapidly from behind in areas that

WARNING

• If the surrounding area of a sen-

sor is scratched or dented, or

part of them has become dis-

connected.

● Do not disassemble the sensor.

● Do not attach accessories,

stickers (including transparent

stickers), aluminum tape, etc. to

a sensor or its surrounding area

on the rear bumper.

● Do not modify the sensor or sur-

rounding area on the rear

bumper.

● If a sensor or the rear bumper

needs to be removed/installed

or replaced, contact your Toyota

dealer.

● Do not paint the rear bumper

any color other than an official

Toyota color.

The Blind Spot Monitor function

265

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

are not visible using the outside rear view mirrors (the blind spots)

■ The BSM function detection areas

The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.

The range of each detection area is:

Approximately 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) to 11.5 ft. (3.5 m) from either side of

the vehicle

The area between the side of the vehicle and 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the side of

the vehicle cannot be detected.

Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) forward of the rear bumper

Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) from the rear bumper

Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) to 197 ft. (60 m) from the rear bumper

The greater the difference in speed between your vehicle and the detected

vehicle is, the farther away the vehicle will be detected, causing the outside

rear view mirror indicator to illuminate or flash.

■ The BSM function is operational

when

The BSM function is operational

when all of the following conditions

are met:

● The BSM function is on.

● The shift lever is in a position

other than R.

● The vehicle speed is greater than

approximately 10 mph (16 km/h).

■ The BSM function will detect a

vehicle when

The BSM function will detect a vehi-

cle present in the detection area in

the following situations:

● A vehicle in an adjacent lane over-

takes your vehicle.

● You overtake a vehicle in an adja-

cent lane slowly.

● Another vehicle enters the detec-

tion area when it changes lanes.

■ Conditions under which the

BSM function will not detect a

vehicle

The BSM function is not designed to

detect the following types of vehi-

cles and/or objects:

● Small motorcycles, bicycles,

pedestrians, etc.

● Vehicles traveling in the opposite

direction

● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked

vehicles and similar stationary

266

4-5. Using the driving support systems

objects

● Following vehicles that are in the

same lane

● Vehicles traveling 2 lanes away

from your vehicle

● Vehicles which are being over-

taken rapidly by your vehicle

: Depending on the conditions,

detection of a vehicle and/or

object may occur.

■ Conditions under which the

BSM function may not function

correctly

● The BSM function may not detect

vehicles correctly in the following

situations:

• When the sensor is misaligned

due to a strong impact to the sen-

sor or its surrounding area

• When mud, snow, ice, a sticker,

etc. is covering the sensor or sur-

rounding area on the rear bumper

• When driving on a road surface

that is wet with standing water

during bad weather, such as

heavy rain, snow, or fog

• When multiple vehicles are

approaching with only a small gap

between each vehicle

• When the distance between your

vehicle and a following vehicle is

short

• When there is a significant differ-

ence in speed between your vehi-

cle and the vehicle that enters the

detection area

• When the difference in speed

between your vehicle and another

vehicle is changing

• When a vehicle enters a detection

area traveling at about the same

speed as your vehicle

• As your vehicle starts from a stop,

a vehicle remains in the detection

area

• When driving up and down con-

secutive steep inclines, such as

hills, dips in the road, etc.

• When driving on roads with sharp

bends, consecutive curves, or

uneven surfaces

• When vehicle lanes are wide, or

when driving on the edge of a

lane, and the vehicle in an adja-

cent lane is far away from your

vehicle

• When an accessory (such as a

bicycle carrier) is installed to the

rear of the vehicle

• When there is a significant differ-

ence in height between your vehi-

cle and the vehicle that enters the

detection area

• Immediately after the BSM func-

tion/RCTA function are turned on

• When towing a trailer

● Instances of the BSM function

unnecessarily detecting a vehicle

and/or object may increase in the

following situations:

• When the sensor is misaligned

due to a strong impact to the sen-

sor or its surrounding area

• When the distance between your

vehicle and a guardrail, wall, etc.

that enters the detection area is

short

• When driving up and down con-

secutive steep inclines, such as

hills, dips in the road, etc.

• When vehicle lanes are narrow, or

when driving on the edge of a

lane, and a vehicle traveling in a

lane other than the adjacent lanes

enters the detection area

• When driving on roads with sharp

bends, consecutive curves, or

uneven surfaces

• When the tires are slipping or

spinning

• When the distance between your

vehicle and a following vehicle is

short

• When an accessory (such as a

bicycle carrier) is installed to the

rear of the vehicle

• When the vehicle throws up water

or snow behind.

267

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■ Operation of the RCTA

function

The RCTA function uses radar

sensors to detect vehicles

approaching from the right or left

at the rear of the vehicle and

alerts the driver of the presence

of such vehicles by flashing the

outside rear view mirror indica-

tors and sounding a buzzer.

Approaching vehicles

Detection areas

■ RCTA icon display (if

equipped)

When a vehicle approaching

from the right or left at the rear

of the vehicle is detected, the

following will be displayed on

the navigation system (if

equipped) or multimedia sys-

tem (if equipped) screen.

 When the Toyota parking

assist monitor (if equipped) is

displayed

 When the panoramic view

monitor (if equipped) is dis-

played

: The RCTA function is mal-

functioning (P.262)

■ The RCTA function detec-

tion areas

The areas that vehicles can be

detected in are outlined below.

The buzzer can alert the driver of

faster vehicles approaching from

farther away.

The Rear Cross Traffic

Alert function (if

equipped)

268

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Example:

■ The RCTA function is opera-

tional when

The RCTA function operates when

all of the following conditions are

met:

● The RCTA function is on.

● The shift lever is in R.

● The vehicle speed is less than

approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).

● The approaching vehicle speed is

between approximately 5 mph (8

km/h) and 17 mph (28 km/h).

■ Setting the buzzer volume

The buzzer volume can be adjusted

on the multi-information display.

(P. 9 4 )

■ Conditions under which the

RCTA function will not detect a

vehicle

The RCTA function is not designed

to detect the following types of vehi-

cles and/or objects.

● Vehicles approaching from directly

behind

● Vehicles backing up in a parking

space next to your vehicle

● Vehicles that the sensors cannot

detect due to obstructions

● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked

vehicles and similar stationary

objects

● Small motorcycles, bicycles,

pedestrians, etc.

● Vehicles moving away from your

vehicle

● Vehicles approaching from the

parking spaces next to your vehi-

cle

: Depending on conditions, detec-

tion of a vehicle and/or object may

occur.

■ Conditions under which the

RCTA function may not function

correctly

● The RCTA function may not detect

vehicles correctly in the following

situations:

• When the sensor is misaligned

due to a strong impact to the sen-

sor or its surrounding area

• When mud, snow, ice, a sticker,

etc. is covering the sensor or sur-

rounding area on the rear bumper

• When driving on a road surface

that is wet with standing water

during bad weather, such as

heavy rain, snow, or fog

• When multiple vehicles are

approaching with only a small gap

between each vehicle

• When a vehicle is approaching at

high speed

• When parking on a steep incline,

such as hills, a dip in the road, etc.

• When an accessory (such as a

bicycle carrier) is installed to the

rear of the vehicle

• When backing up on a slope with

a sharp change in grade

Approach-

ing vehicle

Speed

Approxi-

mate

alert dis-

tance

Fast

18 mph

(28 km/h)

65 ft. (20

Slow

5 mph (8

km/h)

18 ft. (5.5

269

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

• When backing out of a shallow

angle parking spot

• Immediately after the RCTA func-

tion is turned on

• Immediately after the engine is

started with the RCTA function on

• When towing a trailer

• When the sensors cannot detect a

vehicle due to obstructions

● Instances of the RCTA function

unnecessary detecting a vehicle

and/or object may increase in the

following situations:

• When a vehicle passes by the

side of your vehicle

• When the parking space faces a

street and vehicles are being

driven on the street

• When the distance between your

vehicle and metal objects, such as

a guardrail, wall, sign, or parked

vehicle, which may reflect electri-

cal waves toward the rear of the

vehicle, is short

• When an accessory (such as a

bicycle carrier) is installed to the

rear of the vehicle

270

4-5. Using the driving support systems

: If equipped

■ Location and types of sen-

sors

Front corner sensors

Front center sensors

Rear corner sensors

Rear center sensors

■ Display (Multi-information

display)

When the sensors detect an

object, such as a wall, a graphic

is shown on the multi-informa-

tion display depending on the

position and distance to the

object.

Front corner sensor detection

Front center sensor detec-

tion

Rear corner sensor detec-

tion

Rear center sensor detec-

tion

:Displayed when the shift lever is

in a driving position

:Displayed when the shift lever is

in R

■ Display (Audio system

screen)

When the sensors detect an

object, such as a wall, a graphic

is shown on the navigation sys-

tem (if equipped) or multimedia

system (if equipped) screen

depending on the positionand

distance to the object.

 When the Toyota parking

assist monitor (if equipped) is

displayed

Intuitive parking

assist

The distance from your

vehicle to objects, such as a

wall, when parallel parking

or maneuvering into a

garage is measured by the

sensors and communicated

via the multi-information

display, navigation system

or multimedia system

screen and a buzzer. Always

check the surrounding area

when using this system.

System components

271

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

A simplified image is displayed on

the upper corner of the screen

when an obstacle is detected.

 When the panoramic view

monitor (if equipped) is dis-

played

 Panoramic view

A graphic is shown when the

panoramic view monitor is dis-

played.

: A simplified image is displayed on

the upper corner of the screen

when an obstacle is detected

while magnified display is shown.

 Except panoramic view

A simplified image is displayed

on the upper corner of the

screen when an obstacle is

detected.

The Intuitive parking assist can

be enabled/disabled on the

screen of the multi-information

display. (P.9 4)

When the intuitive parking assist

function is disabled, the intuitive

parking assist OFF indicator

(P.79) illuminates on the multi-

information display.

To re-enable the system, select

on the multi-information display,

select and turn it on.

If the system is disabled, it will

remain off even if the engine switch

is turned to ON after the engine

switch has been turned off.

Turning intuitive parking

assist on/off

272

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING

■ Intuitive parking assist pre-

cautions

Observe the following precau-

tions.

Failing to do so may result in the

vehicle being unable to be driven

safely and possibly cause an acci-

dent.

● Do not use the sensor at

speeds in excess of 6 mph (10

km/h).

● The sensors’ detection areas

and reaction times are limited.

When moving forward or revers-

ing, check the areas surround-

ing the vehicle (especially the

sides of the vehicle) for safety,

and drive slowly, using the

brake to control the vehicle’s

speed.

● Do not install accessories near

the bumpers as those areas are

within the sensors’ detection

areas.

● The area directly under the

bumpers is not detected.

Thin posts or objects lower than

the sensor may not be detected

when approached, even if they

have been detected once.

■ When to disable the function

In the following situations, disable

the function as it may operate

even though there is no possibility

of a collision.

● The vehicle is equipped with a

commercial fender pole, wire-

less antenna or fog lights.

● The front or rear bumper or a

sensor receives a strong

impact.

● A non-genuine Toyota suspen-

sion (lowered suspension, etc.)

is installed.

● Towing eyelets (if equipped) are

installed.

● A backlit license plate is

installed.

■ When using the intuitive park-

ing assist

In the following situations, the

system may not function correctly

due to a sensor malfunction, etc.

Have the vehicle checked by your

Toyota dealer.

● The intuitive parking assist

operation display flashes or

shows continuously, and a

buzzer sounds when no objects

are detected.

● If the area around a sensor col-

lides with something, or is sub-

jected to strong impact.

● If the bumper or grille collides

with something.

● If the display flashes or is dis-

played continuously and a

buzzer does not sound, except

when the mute function has

been turned on.

273

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■ The system can be operated

when

● The engine switch is in ON.

● Intuitive parking assist function is

on.

● The vehicle speed is less than

about 6 mph (10 km/h).

● The shift lever is in a position

other than P.

■ If “Parking Assist Unavailable

Clean Parking Assist Sensor” is

displayed on the multi-informa-

tion display

A sensor may be covered with ice,

snow, dirt, etc. Remove the ice,

snow, dirt, etc., from the sensor to

return the system to normal.

Also, due to ice forming on a sensor

at low temperatures, a warning

message may be displayed or the

sensor may not be able to detect an

object. Once the ice melts, the sys-

tem will return to normal.

If a warning message is displayed

even if the sensor is clean, there

may be a sensor malfunction. Have

the vehicle inspected by your Toyota

dealer.

■ If “Parking Assist Unavailable”

is displayed on the multi-infor-

mation display

● Water may be continuously flow-

ing over the sensor surface, such

as in a heavy rain. When the sys-

tem determines that it is normal,

the system will return to normal.

● Initialization may not have been

performed after a battery terminal

was disconnected and recon-

nected. Initialize the system.

(P.273)

If this message continues to be

displayed even after initialization,

have the vehicle inspected by

your Toyota dealer.

■ If a battery terminal has been

disconnected and reconnected

The system needs to be initialized.

To initialize the system, drive the

vehicle straight ahead for 5 seconds

or more at a speed of approximately

22 mph (35 km/h) or more.

■ Sensor detection information

● The sensor’s detection areas are

limited to the areas around the

vehicle’s front and rear bumpers.

● The following situations may occur

during use.

• Depending on the shape of the

object and other factors, the

detection distance may shorten, or

detection may be impossible.

• Detection may be impossible if

static objects draw too close to the

sensor.

• There will be a short delay

between static object detection

and display (warning buzzer

sounds). Even at low speeds,

there is a possibility that the object

will come within 11.9 in. (30 cm)

before the display is shown and

the warning buzzer sounds.

• It might be difficult to hear the

buzzer due to the volume of the

audio system or air flow noise of

the air conditioning system.

WARNING

■ Notes when washing the vehi-

cle

Do not apply intensive bursts of

water or steam to the sensor

area.

Doing so may result in the sensor

malfunctioning.

● When using a high pressure

washer to wash the vehicle, do

not spray the sensors directly,

as doing so may cause a sensor

to malfunction.

● When using steam to clean the

vehicle, do not direct steam too

close to the sensors as doing so

may cause a sensor to malfunc-

tion.

274

4-5. Using the driving support systems

• It may be difficult to hear the

sound of this system due to the

buzzers of other systems.

■ Conditions under which the

function may not function cor-

rectly

Certain vehicle conditions and the

surrounding environment may affect

the ability of a sensor to correctly

detect objects. Particular instances

where this may occur are listed

below.

● There is dirt, snow or ice on a sen-

sor. (Cleaning the sensors will

resolve this problem.)

● A sensor is frozen. (Thawing the

area will resolve this problem.)

In especially cold weather, if a

sensor is frozen the sensor dis-

play may be displayed abnormally,

or objects, such as a wall, may not

be detected.

● A sensor is covered in any way.

● When a sensor or the area around

a sensor is extremely hot or cold.

● On an extremely bumpy road, on

an incline, on gravel, or on grass.

● The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy

due to vehicle horns, motorcycle

engines, air brakes of large vehi-

cles, or other loud noises produc-

ing ultrasonic waves.

● There is another vehicle equipped

with parking assist sensors in the

vicinity.

● A sensor is coated with a sheet of

spray or heavy rain.

● If a sensor is hit by a large amount

of water, such as when driving on

a flooded road.

● If the vehicle is significantly tilted.

● The vehicle is approaching a tall

or curved curb.

● If objects draw too close to the

sensor.

■ Objects which may not be prop-

erly detected

The shape of the object may pre-

vent the sensor from detecting it.

Pay particular attention to the follow-

ing objects:

● Wires, fences, ropes, etc.

● Cotton, snow and other materials

that absorb sound waves

● Sharply-angled objects

● Low objects

● Tall objects with upper sections

projecting outwards in the direc-

tion of your vehicle

People may not be detected if they

are wearing certain types of cloth-

ing.

■ Certification (Canada only)

This ISM device complies with

Canadian ICES-001.

■ Detection range of the sen-

sors

Approximately 3.3 ft. (100

cm)

Approximately 4.9 ft. (150

Sensor detection display,

object distance

275

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

cm)

Approximately 2.1 ft. (63 cm)

The diagram shows the detection

range of the sensors. Note that the

sensors cannot detect objects that

are extremely close to the vehicle.

The range of the sensors may

change depending on the shape of

the object, etc.

■ Distance display

When an object is detected by a sensor, the approximate distance to

the object will be displayed on the multi-information display, naviga-

tion system (if equipped) or multimedia system (if equipped) screen.

(As the distance to the object becomes short, the distance segments

may blink.)

The images may differ from that shown in the illustrations.

 Approximate distance to object

• Front center sensor: 3.3 ft. (100 cm) to 2.1 ft. (63 cm)

• Rear center sensor: 4.9 ft. (150 cm) to 2.1 ft. (63 cm)

 Approximate distance to object: 2.1 ft. (63 cm) to 1.6 ft. (48 cm)

 Approximate distance to object: 1.6 ft. (48 cm) to 1.1 ft. (34 cm)

Multi-information display Navigation or multimedia system screen

276

4-5. Using the driving support systems

 Approximate distance to object: 1.1 ft. (34 cm) to 0.5 ft. (15 cm)

: The distance segments will blink slowly.

 Approximate distance to object: Less than 0.5 ft. (15 cm)

: The distance segments will blink rapidly.

■ Buzzer operation and dis-

tance to an object

A buzzer sounds when the sen-

sors are operating.

 The buzzer beeps faster as

the vehicle approaches an

object.

When the vehicle comes

within approximately 1.1 ft.

(34 cm) of the object, the

buzzer sounds continuously.

 When 2 or more sensors

simultaneously detect a static

object, the buzzer sounds for

the nearest object.

 Even when the sensors are

operating, the buzzer will be

muted in some situations.

(automatic buzzer mute func-

tion)

■ Muting the buzzer sound

● Automatic buzzer mute function

Even when the sensors are operat-

ing, the buzzer will be muted in the

following situations:

• The distance between the vehicle

and the detected object does not

become shorter (except when the

distance between the vehicle and

object is 1.1 ft. [34 cm] or less).

• Your vehicle is moving away from

the object.

• There are no detectable objects

entering the path of your vehicle.

However, if another object is

detected or the situation changes

while the buzzer is muted, the

buzzer begins sounding again.

● To mute the buzzer sound

The buzzer can be temporarily

muted by pressing of the meter

control switches while a suggestion

that says mute is available is shown

on the multi-information display.

● When the mute is canceled

Multi-information display

Navigation or multimedia system screen

Multi-information display

Navigation or multimedia system screen

277

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

Mute will be automatically canceled

in the following situations.

• When the shift position is changed

• When the vehicle speed has

reached or exceeded a certain

speed

• When the Intuitive parking assist

is turned off once and turned on

again

• When the engine switch is turned

off once and turned to ON again

■ Customization

The buzzer volume can be adjusted

on the multi-information display.

(P. 9 4 )

: If equipped

■ Parking Support Brake

function (static objects)

P.282

■ Parking Support Brake

function (rear-crossing

vehicles) (if equipped)

P.288

PKSB (Parking Sup-

port Brake)

The Parking Support Brake

system consists of the fol-

lowing functions that oper-

ate when driving at a low

speed or backing up, such

as when parking. When the

system determines that the

possibility of a collision

with a detected object is

high, a warning operates to

urge the driver to take eva-

sive action. If the system

determines that the possi-

bility of a collision with a

detected object is extremely

high, the brakes are auto-

matically applied to help

avoid the collision or help

reduce the impact of the col-

lision.

PKSB (Parking Support

Brake) system

278

4-5. Using the driving support systems

The Parking Support Brake can

be enabled/disabled on the

screen of the multi-information

display. All of the Parking Sup-

port Brake functions (static

objects and rear-crossing vehi-

cles) are enabled/disabled

simultaneously. (P. 94 )

When the Parking Support Brake is

disabled, the PKSB OFF indicator

(P.79) illuminates on the multi-

information display.

To re-enable the system, select

on the multi-information display,

select and turn it on.

If the system is disabled, it will

remain off even if the engine switch

is turned to ON after the engine

switch has been turned off.

WARNING

■ Limitations of the Parking

Support Brake system

Do not overly rely on the system,

as doing so may lead to an acci-

dent.

Always drive while checking the

safety of the surroundings of the

vehicle.

Depending on the vehicle and

road conditions, weather, etc., the

system may not operate.

The detection capabilities of sen-

sors and radars are limited.

Always drive while checking the

safety of the surroundings of the

vehicle.

● The driver is solely responsible

for safe driving. Always drive

carefully, taking care to observe

your surroundings. The Parking

Support Brake system is

designed to provide support to

lessen the severity of collisions.

However, it may not operate in

some situations.

● The Parking Support Brake sys-

tem is not designed to stop the

vehicle completely. Additionally,

even if the system has stopped

the vehicle, it is necessary to

depress the brake pedal imme-

diately as brake control will be

canceled after approximately 2

seconds.

NOTICE

■ If “Parking Support Brake

Unavailable” is displayed on

the multi-information display

and the PKSB OFF indicator

is flashing

If this message is displayed

immediately after the engine

switch is changed to ON, operate

the vehicle carefully, paying atten-

tion to your surroundings. It may

be necessary to drive the vehicle

for a certain amount of time

before the system returns to nor-

mal. (If the system does not return

to normal after driving for a while,

clean the sensors and their sur-

rounding area on the bumpers.)

Enabling/Disabling the

Parking Support Brake

279

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

If the engine output restriction

control or brake control oper-

ates, a buzzer will sound and a

message will be displayed on

the multi-information display,

navigation system (if equipped)

or multimedia system (if

equipped) screen, to alert the

driver.

Depending on the situation, engine

output restriction control will oper-

ate to either limit acceleration or

restrict output as much as possible.

 Engine output restriction con-

trol is operating (acceleration

restriction)

Acceleration greater than a certain

amount is restricted by the system.

Navigation system (if equipped) or

multimedia system (if equipped)

screen: No warning displayed

Multi-information display: “Object

Detected Acceleration Reduced”

PKSB OFF indicator: Not illumi-

nated

Buzzer: Does not sound

 Engine output restriction con-

trol is operating (output

restricted as much as possi-

ble)

The system has determined that

stronger-than-normal brake opera-

tion is necessary.

Navigation system (if equipped) or

multimedia system (if equipped)

screen: “BRAKE!”

Multi-information display: “BRAKE!”

PKSB OFF indicator: Not illumi-

nated

Buzzer: Short beep

 Brake control is operating

The system determined that emer-

gency braking is necessary.

Navigation system (if equipped) or

multimedia system (if equipped)

screen: “BRAKE!”

Multi-information display: “BRAKE!”

PKSB OFF indicator: Not illumi-

nated

Buzzer: Short beep

 Vehicle stopped by system

operation

The vehicle has been stopped by

brake control operation.

Navigation system (if equipped) or

multimedia system (if equipped)

screen: “Press Brake Pedal”

Multi-information display: “Switch to

Brake” (If the accelerator pedal is

not depressed, “Brake” will be dis-

played.)

PKSB OFF indicator: Illuminated

Buzzer: Short beep

If the Parking Support Brake

determines that a collision with a

detected object is possible, the

engine output will be restricted

to restrain any increase in the

vehicle speed. (Engine output

restriction control: See figure 2.)

Display and buzzer for

engine output restriction

control and brake control

System overview

280

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Additionally, if the accelerator

pedal continues to be

depressed, the brakes will be

applied automatically to reduce

the vehicle speed. (Brake con-

trol: See figure 3.)

 Figure 1: When the PKSB

(Parking Support Brake) is not

operating

Engine output

Braking force

Time

 Figure 2: When engine out-

put restriction control oper-

ates

Engine output

Braking force

Time

Engine output restriction con-

trol begins operating (System

determines that possibility of

collision with detected object

is high)

 Figure 3: When engine out-

put restriction control and

brake control operates

Engine output

Braking force

Time

Engine output restriction con-

trol begins operating (System

determines that possibility of

collision with detected object

is high)

Brake control begins operat-

ing (System determines that

possibility of collision with

detected object is extremely

high)

■ If the Parking Support Brake

has operated

If the vehicle is stopped due to oper-

ation of the Parking Support Brake,

the Parking Support Brake will be

disabled and the PKSB OFF indica-

tor will illuminate. If the Parking Sup-

port Brake operates unnecessarily,

brake control can be canceled by

depressing the brake pedal or wait-

281

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

ing for approximately 2 seconds for

it to automatically be canceled.

Then, the vehicle can be operated

by depressing the accelerator pedal.

■ Re-enabling the Parking Sup-

port Brake

To re-enable the Parking Support

Brake when it is disabled due to

operation of the Parking Support

Brake, either enable the system

again (P.278), or turn the engine

switch off and then back to ON.

Additionally, if the object becomes

no longer in the traveling direction of

the vehicle or if the traveling direc-

tion of the vehicle changes (such as

changing from moving forward to

backing up, or from backing up to

moving forward), the system will be

re-enabled automatically.

■ If “Parking Support Brake

Unavailable” is displayed on

the multi-information display

and the PKSB OFF indicator is

flashing

● If this message is displayed, a

sensor on the front or rear bumper

may be dirty. Clean the sensors

and their surrounding area on the

bumpers.

● Initialization may not have been

performed after a battery terminal

was disconnected and recon-

nected. Initialize the system.

(P.281)

If this message continues to be

displayed even after initialization,

have the vehicle inspected by

your Toyota dealer.

■ If “Parking Support Brake

Unavailable” and “Parking

Assist Unavailable Clean Park-

ing Assist Sensor” are dis-

played on the multi-information

display and the PKSB OFF indi-

cator is flashing

● A sensor may be covered with ice,

snow, dirt, etc. In this case,

remove the ice, snow, dirt, etc.,

from the sensor to return the sys-

tem to normal. If this message is

shown even after removing dirt

from the sensor, or shown when

the sensor was not dirty to begin

with, have the vehicle inspected at

your Toyota dealer.

● A sensor may be frozen. Once the

ice melts, the system will return to

normal.

● Water may be continuously flow-

ing over the sensor surface, such

as in a heavy rain. When the sys-

tem determines that it is normal,

the system will return to normal.

■ If a battery terminal has been

disconnected and reconnected

The system needs to be initialized.

To initialize the system, drive the

vehicle straight ahead for 5 seconds

or more at a speed of approximately

22 mph (35 km/h) or more.

282

4-5. Using the driving support systems

: If equipped

This function will operate in situations such as the following if an

object is detected in the traveling direction of the vehicle.

■ When traveling at a low speed and the brake pedal is not

depressed, or is depressed late

Parking Support Brake function (static objects)

If the sensors detect a static object, such as a wall, in the trav-

eling direction of the vehicle and the system determines that a

collision may occur due to the vehicle suddenly moving for-

ward due to an accidental accelerator pedal operation, the

vehicle moving the unintended direction due to the wrong

shift position being selected, or while parking or traveling at

low speeds, the system will operate to lessen the impact with

the detected static object and reduce the resulting damage.

Examples of function operation

283

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■ When the accelerator pedal is depressed excessively

■ When the vehicle moves in the unintended direction due to

the wrong shift position being selected

P. 2 70

Types of sensors

WARNING

■ To ensure the Parking Sup-

port Brake can operate prop-

erly

Observe the following precautions

regarding the sensors (P.270).

Failure to do so may cause a sen-

sor to not operate properly, and

may cause an accident.

● Do not modify, disassemble or

paint the sensors.

284

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING

● Do not replace a sensor with a

part other than a genuine part.

● Do not subject a sensor or its

surrounding area to a strong

impact.

● Do not damage the sensors,

and always keep them clean.

● If the area around a radar sen-

sor is subjected to an impact,

the system may not operate

properly due to a sensor mal-

function. Have the vehicle

inspected by your Toyota

dealer.

■ Handling the suspension

Do not modify the suspension, as

changes to the height or inclina-

tion of the vehicle may prevent

the sensors from detecting

objects correctly or cause the sys-

tem to not operate or operate

unnecessarily.

■ If the Parking Support Brake

function (static objects) oper-

ates unnecessarily, such as

at a railroad crossing

In the event that the Parking Sup-

port Brake function (static objects)

operates unnecessarily, such as

at a railroad crossing, brake con-

trol will be canceled after approxi-

mately 2 seconds, allowing you to

proceed forward and leave the

area, brake control can also be

canceled by depressing the brake

pedal. Depressing the accelera-

tor pedal after brake control is

canceled will allow you to proceed

forward and leave the area.

■ Notes when washing the vehi-

cle

Do not apply intensive bursts of

water or steam to the sensor

area.

Doing so may result in the sensor

malfunctioning.

● When using a high pressure

washer to wash the vehicle, do

not spray the sensors directly,

as doing so may cause a sensor

to malfunction.

● When using steam to clean the

vehicle, do not direct steam too

close to the sensors as doing so

may cause a sensor to malfunc-

tion.

■ When to disable the Parking

Support Brake

In the following situations, disable

the Parking Support Brake as the

system may operate even though

there is no possibility of a colli-

sion.

● When inspecting the vehicle

using a chassis roller, chassis

dynamo or free roller

● When loading the vehicle onto a

boat, truck or other transport

vessel

● If the suspension has been

modified or tires of a size other

than specified are installed

● If the front of the vehicle is

raised or lowered due to the

carried load

● When equipment that may

obstruct a sensor is installed,

such as a towing eyelet, bumper

protector (an additional trim

strip, etc.), bicycle carrier, or

snow plow

● When using an automatic car

wash

285

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■ The Parking Support Brake

function (static object) will

operate when

The function will operate when the

PKSB OFF indicator is not illumi-

nated or flashing (P.77, 79) and all

of the following conditions are met:

● Engine output restriction control

• The Parking Support Brake is

enabled.

• The vehicle speed is 9 mph (15

km/h) or less.

• There is a static object in the trav-

eling direction of the vehicle and 6

to 13 ft. (2 to 4 m) away.

• The Parking Support Brake deter-

mines that a stronger-than-nor-

mal brake operation is necessary

to avoid a collision.

● Brake control

• Engine output restriction control is

operating

• The Parking Support Brake deter-

mines that an immediate brake

operation is necessary to avoid a

collision.

■ The Parking Support Brake

function (static objects) will

stop operating when

The function will stop operating if

any of the following conditions are

met:

● Engine output restriction control

• The Parking Support Brake is dis-

abled.

• The system determines that the

collision has become avoidable

with normal brake operation.

• The static object is no longer 6 to

13 ft. (2 to 4 m) away from the

vehicle or in the traveling direction

of the vehicle.

● Brake control

• The Parking Support Brake is dis-

abled.

• Approximately 2 seconds have

elapsed since the vehicle was

stopped by brake control.

• The brake pedal is depressed

after the vehicle is stopped by

brake control.

• The static object is no longer 6 to

13 ft. (2 to 4 m) away from the

vehicle or in the traveling direction

of the vehicle.

■ Detection range of the Parking

Support Brake function (static

objects)

The detection range of the Parking

Support Brake function (static

objects) differs from the detection

range of the intuitive parking assist.

(P.274) Therefore, even if the intu-

itive parking assist detects an object

and provides a warning, the Parking

Support Brake function (static

objects) may not start operating.

■ Objects that the Parking Sup-

port Brake function (static

objects) may not detect

The sensors may not be able to

detect certain objects, such as the

following:

● Pedestrian

● Cotton, snow, and other materials

that are poor reflectors of sonic

waves

● Objects which are not perpendicu-

lar to the ground, are not perpen-

dicular to the traveling direction of

the vehicle, are uneven or are

waving

● Low objects

● Thin objects such as wires,

fences, ropes and signposts

● Objects that are extremely close

to the bumper

● Sharply-angled objects

● Tall objects with upper sections

projecting outwards in the direc-

tion of your vehicle

■ Situations in which the Parking

Support Brake function (static

objects) may not operate

When the shift lever is in N

■ Intuitive parking assist buzzer

Regardless of whether the intuitive

286

4-5. Using the driving support systems

parking assist system is enabled or

not (P.271), if the Parking Support

Brake function (static objects) is

enabled (P.278), the front or rear

sensors detect an object and brake

control and engine output restric-

tion control are performed, the intui-

tive parking assist buzzer will sound

to notify the driver of the approxi-

mate distance to the object.

■ Situations in which the Parking

Support Brake function (static

objects) may operate even if

there is no possibility of a colli-

sion

In some situations, such as the fol-

lowing, the Parking Support Brake

function (static objects) may operate

even though there is no possibility of

a collision.

● Vehicle surroundings

• When driving on a narrow road

• When driving on a gravel road or

in an area with tall grass

• When driving toward a banner,

flag, low-hanging branch or boom

barrier (such as those used at rail-

road crossings, toll gates and

parking lots)

• When there is a structure on the

roadside (such as when driving in

a narrow tunnel, on a narrow

bridge or on a narrow road)

• When parallel parking

• When there is a rut or hole in the

surface of the road

• When driving on a metal cover

(grating), such as those used for

drainage ditches

• When driving up or down a steep

slope

• If a sensor is hit by a large amount

of water, such as when driving on

a flooded road

• When loaded on ships or trucks

• Moving type automatic car wash

• Lift type parking area or multi-

story parking lot

• Underground parking area

• Structures on the ground (speed

bumps, cat’s eyes, etc.)

• Differences in height

• When moving straight ahead or

turning right

• Snow-melting pipes

• Devices for detecting vehicles,

such as traffic lights, devices for

detecting traffic congestion, or

devices for detecting empty

spaces in parking areas

• Railroad tracks

• H-shaped steel

• When there are vehicles on both

sides, or there is a vehicle that

resembles this vehicle

● Weather

• If a sensor is covered with ice,

snow, dirt, etc. (when cleared, the

system will return to normal)

• If heavy rain or water strikes a

sensor

• When driving in inclement weather

such as fog, snow or a sandstorm

• Strong wind is blowing

● Other sonic wave sources

• When vehicle horns, vehicle

detectors, motorcycle engines, air

brakes of large vehicles, the clear-

ance sonar of other vehicles or

other devices which produce ultra-

sonic waves are near the vehicle

• If a sticker or an electronic compo-

nent, such as a backlit license

plate (especially fluorescent type),

fog lights, fender pole or wireless

antenna is installed near a sensor

287

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

● Changes in the vehicle posture

• If the vehicle is significantly tilted

• If the front of the vehicle is raised

or lowered due to the carried load

• If the orientation of a sensor has

been changed due to a collision or

other impact

■ Situations in which the Parking

Support Brake function (static

objects) may not operate prop-

erly

In some situations, such as the fol-

lowing, this function may not oper-

ate properly.

● Weather

• When a sensor or the area around

a sensor is extremely hot or cold

• When strong winds are blowing

• If a sensor is covered with ice,

snow, dirt, etc. (when cleared, the

system will return to normal)

• If heavy rain or water strikes a

sensor

• When driving in inclement weather

such as fog, snow or a sandstorm

• A sensor is frozen. (Thawing the

area will resolve this problem.)

● Vehicle surroundings

• When an object that cannot be

detected is between the vehicle

and a detected object

• If an object such as a vehicle,

motorcycle, bicycle or pedestrian

cuts in front of the vehicle or runs

out from the side of the vehicle

• The vehicle is approaching a tall

or curved curb.

• On an extremely bumpy road, on

an incline, on gravel, or on grass.

• The objects draw too close to the

sensor.

● Other sonic waves sources

• When vehicle horns, vehicle

detectors, motorcycle engines, air

brakes of large vehicles, the clear-

ance sonar of other vehicles or

other devices which produce ultra-

sonic waves are near the vehicle

• If a sticker or an electronic compo-

nent, such as a backlit license

plate (especially fluorescent type),

fog lights, fender pole or wireless

antenna is installed near a sensor

● Changes in the vehicle

• If the vehicle is significantly tilted

• If the front of the vehicle is raised

or lowered due to the carried load

• If the orientation of a sensor has

been changed due to a collision or

other impact

• When equipment that may

obstruct a sensor is installed, such

as a towing eyelet, bumper pro-

tector (an additional trim strip,

etc.), bicycle carrier, or snow plow

• If the suspension has been modi-

fied or tires of a size other than

specified are installed

• If paint or a sticker is applied to

the sensor

288

4-5. Using the driving support systems

: If equipped

This function will operate in situations such as the following if a vehi-

cle is detected in the traveling direction of the vehicle.

■ When reversing, a vehicle is approaching and the brake pedal

is not depressed, or is depressed late

P. 2 63

Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing

vehicles)

If a rear radar sensor detects a vehicle approaching from the

right or left at the rear of the vehicle and the system deter-

mines that the possibility of a collision is high, this function

will perform brake control to reduce the likelihood of an

impact with the approaching vehicle.

Examples of function operation

Types of sensors

WARNING

■ To ensure the Parking Sup-

port Brake (rear-crossing

vehicles) can operate prop-

erly

Observe the following precautions

regarding the rear radar sensors

(P.263). Failure to do so may

cause a sensor to not operate

properly, and may cause an acci-

dent.

289

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■ The Parking Support Brake

function (rear-crossing vehi-

cles) will operate when

The function will operate when the

PKSB OFF indicator is not illumi-

nated or flashing (P.77, 79) and all

of the following conditions are met:

● Engine output restriction control

• The Parking Support Brake is

enabled.

• The vehicle speed is 9 mph (15

km/h) or less.

• Vehicles are approaching from the

right or left at the rear of the vehi-

cle at a traveling speed of less

than approximately 5 mph (8

km/h)

• The shift lever is in R.

• The Parking Support Brake deter-

mines that a stronger than normal

brake operation is necessary to

avoid a collision with an approach-

ing vehicle.

● Brake control

• Engine output restriction control is

operating

• The Parking Support Brake deter-

mines that an emergency brake

operation is necessary to avoid a

collision with an approaching vehi-

cle.

■ The Parking Support Brake

function (rear-crossing vehi-

cles) will stop operating when

The function will stop operating if

any of the following conditions are

met:

● Engine output restriction control

• The Parking Support Brake is dis-

abled.

• The collision becomes avoidable

with normal brake operation.

• A vehicle is no longer approaching

from the right or left at the rear of

the vehicle.

● Brake control

• The Parking Support Brake is dis-

abled.

• Approximately 2 seconds have

elapsed since the vehicle was

stopped by brake control.

• The brake pedal is depressed

after the vehicle is stopped by

brake control.

• A vehicle is no longer approaching

from the right or left at the rear of

the vehicle.

■ Detection area of the Parking

Support Brake function (rear-

crossing vehicles)

The detection area of the Parking

Support Brake function (rear-cross-

ing vehicles) differs from the detec-

tion area of the RCTA function

(P.267). Therefore, even if the

RCTA function detects a vehicle and

provides an alert, the Parking Sup-

port Brake function (rear-crossing

vehicles) may not start operating.

■ Conditions under which the

Parking Support Brake func-

tion (rear-crossing vehicles)

will not detect a vehicle

The Parking Support Brake function

(rear-crossing vehicles) is not

designed to detect the following

WARNING

● Do not modify, disassemble or

paint the sensors.

● Do not replace a rear radar sen-

sor with a part other than a gen-

uine part.

● Do not damage the rear radar

sensors, and always keep the

radar sensors and their sur-

rounding area on the bumper

clean.

● If the area around a rear radar

sensor is subjected to an

impact, the system may not

operate properly due to a sen-

sor malfunction. Have the vehi-

cle inspected by your Toyota

dealer.

● Observe the rear radar sensor

handling precautions. (P.263)

290

4-5. Using the driving support systems

types of vehicles and/or objects:

● Vehicles approaching from directly

behind

● Vehicles backing up in a parking

space next to your vehicle

● Vehicles that the sensors cannot

detect due to obstructions

● Vehicles which suddenly acceler-

ate or decelerate near your vehi-

cle

● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked

vehicles and similar stationary

objects

● Small motorcycles, bicycles,

pedestrians, etc.

● Vehicles moving away from your

vehicle

● Vehicles approaching from the

parking spaces next to your vehi-

cle

● Objects which are extremely close

to a radar sensor

● Vehicles which are approaching

from the right or left at the rear of

the vehicle at a traveling speed of

less than approximately 5 mph (8

km/h)

● Vehicles which are approaching

from the right or left at the rear of

the vehicle at a traveling speed of

more than approximately 15 mph

(24 km/h)

: Depending on the conditions,

detection of a vehicle and/or

object may occur.

■ Situations in which the system

may operate even though there

is no possibility of a collision

In some situations such as the fol-

lowing, the Parking Support Brake

function (rear-crossing vehicles)

may operate even though there is

no possibility of a collision.

● When the parking space faces a

street and vehicles are being

driven on the street

● When a detected vehicle turns

while approaching the vehicle

● When a vehicle passes by the

side of your vehicle

● When the distance between your

vehicle and metal objects, such as

a guardrail, wall, sign, or parked

vehicle, which may reflect electri-

cal waves toward the rear of the

vehicle, is short

291

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

● When there are spinning objects

near your vehicle such as the fan

of an air conditioning unit

● When water is splashed or

sprayed toward the rear bumper,

such as from a sprinkler

■ Situations in which the Parking

Support Brake function (rear-

crossing vehicles) may not

operate properly

In some situations, such as the fol-

lowing, the radar sensors may not

detect an object and this function

may not operate properly

● Stationary objects

● When a sensor or the area around

a sensor is extremely hot or cold

● If the rear bumper is covered with

ice, snow, dirt, etc.

● When it is raining heavily or water

strikes the vehicle

● When the detection area of a

radar sensor is obstructed by an

adjacent vehicle

● If the vehicle is significantly tilted

● When equipment that may

obstruct a sensor is installed, such

as a towing eyelet, bumper pro-

tector (an additional trim strip,

etc.), bicycle carrier, or snow plow

● If the suspension has been modi-

fied or tires of a size other than

specified are installed

● If the front of the vehicle is raised

or lowered due to the carried load

● If a sticker or an electronic compo-

nent, such as a backlit license

plate (especially fluorescent type),

fog lights, fender pole or wireless

antenna is installed near a radar

sensor

● If the orientation of a radar sensor

has been changed

● When multiple vehicles are

approaching with only a small gap

between each vehicle

● If a vehicle is approaching the rear

of your vehicle rapidly

● Situations in which the radar sen-

sor may not detect a vehicle

• When a vehicle approaches from

the right or left at the rear of the

vehicle while you are turning while

backing up

• When turning while backing up

• When backing out of a shallow

angle parking spot

• When backing up on a slope with

a sharp change in grade

292

4-5. Using the driving support systems

• When a vehicle turns into the

detection area

: If equipped

● The screen illustrations used in

this text are intended as exam-

ples, and may differ from the

image that is actually displayed on

the screen.

The rear view monitor system is

a supplemental device intended

to assist the driver when back-

ing up. When backing up, be

sure to visually check all around

the vehicle both directly and

using the mirrors before pro-

ceeding. If you do not, you may

hit another vehicle, and could

possibly cause an accident.

Pay attention to the following

precautions when using the rear

view monitor system.

Rear view monitor sys-

tem

The rear view monitor sys-

tem assists the driver by

displaying an image of the

view behind the vehicle with

fixed guide lines on the

screen while backing up, for

example while parking.

Driving precautions

293

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

The rear view monitor system

screen will be displayed if the

shift lever is shifted to the “R”

position while the engine switch

is in ON.

Vehicle width guide line

Displays a guide path when the

vehicle is being backed straight up.

• The displayed width is wider than

the actual vehicle width.

Vehicle center guide line

WARNING

● Never depend on the rear view

monitor system entirely when

backing up. The image and the

position of the guide lines dis-

played on the screen may differ

from the actual state.

Use caution, just as you would

when backing up any vehicle.

● Be sure to back up slowly,

depressing the brake pedal to

control vehicle speed.

● The instructions given are only

guide lines. When and how

much to turn the steering wheel

will vary according to traffic con-

ditions, road surface condi-

tions, vehicle condition, etc.

when parking. It is necessary to

be fully aware of this before

using the rear view monitor sys-

tem.

● When parking, be sure to check

that the parking space will

accommodate your vehicle

before maneuvering into it.

● Do not use the rear view moni-

tor system in the following

cases:

• On icy or slick road surfaces, or

in snow

• When using tire chains or emer-

gency tires

• When the back door is not

closed completely

• On roads that are not flat or

straight, such as curves or

slopes

● In low temperatures, the screen

may darken or the image may

become faint. The image could

distort when the vehicle is mov-

ing, or you may become unable

to see the image on the screen.

Be sure to visually check all

around the vehicle both directly

and using the mirrors before

proceeding.

● If the tire sizes are changed, the

position of the fixed guide lines

displayed on the screen may

change.

● The camera uses a special lens.

The distances between objects

and pedestrians that appear in

the image displayed on the

screen will differ from the actual

distances. (P.295)

Screen description

294

4-5. Using the driving support systems

This line indicates the estimated

vehicle center on the ground.

Distance guide line

Shows distance behind the vehicle.

• Displays a point approximately

1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) from the edge

of the bumper.

Distance guide line

Shows distance behind the vehicle.

• Displays a point approximately 3

ft. (1 m) (blue) from the edge of

the bumper.

The rear view monitor system is

canceled when the shift lever is

shifted into any position other

than the “R” position.

The rear view monitor system

displays an image of the view

from the bumper of the rear area

of the vehicle.

Corners of bumper

 The area around both corners

of the bumper will not be dis-

played.

● The image adjustment procedure

for the rear view monitor system

screen is the same as the proce-

dure for adjusting the screen.

(P.388)

● The area displayed on the screen

may vary according to vehicle ori-

entation conditions.

● Objects which are close to either

corner of the bumper or under the

bumper cannot be displayed.

● The camera uses a special lens.

The distance of the image that

appears on the screen differs from

the actual distance.

● Items which are located higher

than the camera may not be dis-

played on the monitor.

The camera for the rear view

Canceling rear view moni-

tor system

Rear view monitor system

precautions

Area displayed on screen

The camera

295

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

monitor system is located as

shown in the illustration.

■ Using the camera

If dirt or foreign matter (such as

water droplets, snow, mud, etc.)

is adhering to the camera, it

cannot transmit a clear image.

In this case, flush it with a large

quantity of water and wipe the

camera lens clean with a soft

and wet cloth.

 The distance guide lines and

the vehicle width guide lines

NOTICE

● The rear view monitor system

may not operate properly in the

following cases.

• If the back of the vehicle is hit,

the position and mounting angle

of the camera may change.

• As the camera has a water

proof construction, do not

detach, disassemble or modify

it. This may cause incorrect

operation.

• When cleaning the camera lens,

flush the camera with a large

quantity of water and wipe it

with a soft and wet cloth.

Strongly rubbing the camera

lens may cause the camera lens

to be scratched and unable to

transmit a clear image.

• Do not allow organic solvent,

car wax, window cleaner or a

glass coating to adhere to the

camera. If this happens, wipe it

off as soon as possible.

• If the temperature changes rap-

idly, such as when hot water is

poured on the vehicle in cold

weather, the system may not

operate normally.

• When washing the vehicle, do

not apply intensive bursts of

water to the camera or camera

area. Doing so may result in the

camera malfunctioning.

● Do not expose the camera to

strong impact as this could

cause a malfunction. If this hap-

pens, have the vehicle

inspected by your Toyota dealer

as soon as possible.

Differences between the

screen and the actual road

296

4-5. Using the driving support systems

may not actually be parallel

with the dividing lines of the

parking space, even when

they appear to be so. Be sure

to check visually.

 The distances between the

vehicle width guide lines and

the left and right dividing lines

of the parking space may not

be equal, even when they

appear to be so. Be sure to

check visually.

 The distance guide lines give

a distance guide for flat road

surfaces. In any of the follow-

ing situations, there is a mar-

gin of error between the guide

lines on the screen and the

actual distance/course on the

road.

■ When the ground behind

the vehicle slopes up

sharply

The distance guide lines will

appear to be closer to the vehi-

cle than the actual distance.

Because of this, objects will

appear to be farther away than

they actually are. In the same

way, there will be a margin of

error between the fixed guide

lines and the actual dis-

tance/course on the road.

■ When the ground behind

the vehicle slopes down

sharply

The distance guide lines will

appear to be farther from the

vehicle than the actual distance.

Because of this, objects will

appear to be closer than they

actually are. In the same way,

there will be a margin of error

between the guide lines and the

actual distance/course on the

road.

297

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■ When any part of the vehi-

cle sags

When any part of the vehicle

sags due to the number of pas-

sengers or the distribution of the

load, there is a margin of error

between the fixed guide lines on

the screen and the actual dis-

tance/course on the road.

A margin of error

The distance guide lines are dis-

played according to flat surfaced

objects (such as the road). It is

not possible to determine the

position of three-dimensional

objects (such as vehicles) using

the vehicle width guide lines and

distance guide lines. When

approaching a three-dimen-

sional object that extends out-

ward (such as the flatbed of a

truck), be careful of the follow-

ing.

■ Vehicle width guide lines

Visually check the surroundings

and the area behind the vehicle.

In the case shown below, the

truck appears to be outside of

the vehicle width guide lines and

the vehicle does not look as if it

hits the truck. However, the rear

body of the truck may actually

cross over the vehicle width

guide lines. In reality if you back

up as guided by the vehicle

width guide lines, the vehicle

may hit the truck.

When approaching three-

dimensional objects

298

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Vehicle width guide lines

■ Distance guide lines

Visually check the surroundings

and the area behind the vehicle.

On the screen, it appears that a

truck is parking at point .

However, in reality if you back

up to point , you will hit the

truck. On the screen, it appears

that is closest and is far-

thest away. However, in reality,

the distance to and is the

same, and is farther than

and .

If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause

and the solution, and re-check.

If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle

inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Things you should know

If you notice any symptoms

299

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

Symptom Likely cause Solution

The image is difficult to

see

 The vehicle is in a dark

area

 The temperature

around the lens is

either high or low

 The outside tempera-

ture is low

 There are water drop-

lets on the camera

 It is raining or humid

 Foreign matter (mud

etc.) is adhering to the

camera

 Sunlight or headlights

are shining directly

into the camera

 The vehicle is under

fluorescent lights,

sodium lights, mer-

cury lights etc.

Back up while visually

checking the vehicle’s

surroundings. (Use the

monitor again once con-

ditions have been

improved.)

The procedure for

adjusting the picture

quality of the rear view

monitor system is the

same as the procedure

for adjusting the screen.

(P.388)

The image is blurry

Dirt or foreign matter

(such as water droplets,

snow, mud etc.) is

adhering to the camera.

Flush the camera with a

large quantity of water

and wipe the camera

lens clean with a soft

and wet cloth.

The image is out of

alignment

The camera or sur-

rounding area has

received a strong

impact.

Have the vehicle

inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

The fixed guide lines

are very far out of

alignment

The camera position is

out of alignment.

Have the vehicle

inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

 The vehicle is tilted

(there is a heavy load

on the vehicle, tire

pressure is low due to

a tire puncture, etc.)

 The vehicle is used on

an incline.

If this happens due to

these causes, it does

not indicate a malfunc-

tion.

Back up while visually

checking the vehicle’s

surroundings.

300

4-5. Using the driving support systems

: If equipped

● The screen illustrations used in

this text are intended as exam-

ples, and may differ from the

image that is actually displayed on

the screen.

The parking assist monitor is a

supplemental device intended to

assist the driver when backing

up. When backing up, be sure to

visually check all around the

vehicle both directly and using

the mirrors before proceeding. If

you do not, you may hit another

vehicle, and could possibly

cause an accident.

Pay attention to the following

precautions when using the

parking assist monitor.

Toyota parking assist

monitor

The parking assist monitor

assists the driver by dis-

playing an image of the view

behind the vehicle while

backing up, for example

while parking.

When the display is

changed to the wide rear

view mode, a wider lateral

view behind the vehicle will

be displayed.

Driving precautions

WARNING

● Never depend on the parking

assist monitor entirely when

backing up. The image and the

position of the guide lines dis-

played on the screen may differ

from the actual state.

Use caution, just as you would

when backing up any vehicle.

● Be sure to back up slowly,

depressing the brake pedal to

control vehicle speed.

● If you seem likely to hit nearby

vehicles, obstacles, people or

mount the shoulder, depress the

brake pedal to stop the vehicle.

● The instructions given are only

guidelines. When and how

much to turn the steering wheel

will vary according to traffic con-

ditions, road surface condi-

tions, vehicle condition, etc.

when parking. It is necessary to

be fully aware of this before

using the parking assist system.

● When parking, be sure to check

that the parking space will

accommodate your vehicle

before maneuvering into it.

● Do not use the parking assist

monitor in the following cases:

• On icy or slick road surfaces, or

in snow

• When using tire chains or emer-

gency tires

• When the back door is not

closed completely

• On roads that are not flat or

straight, such as curves or

slopes

• If the suspension has been

modified or tires of a size other

than specified are installed

301

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

The parking assist monitor

screen will be displayed if the

shift lever is shifted to the “R”

while the engine switch is in ON.

Each time the display mode

switching button is selected, the

mode will change as follows:

 Rear view

Displays the rear view of the vehi-

cle.

Display mode switching but-

ton

Each time the button is selected,

the rear view mode and the wide

rear view mode are switched.

Guide line switching button

Select to switch the guide line

mode. (P.302)

• Each time the button is selected,

the display mode changes in the

following order:

Estimated course line display mode

 Parking assist guide line display

mode  Distance guide line display

mode.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert

When a sensor detects a vehicle

approaching from the rear, the

direction of the vehicle approaching

from the rear is displayed and the

buzzer sounds.

Intuitive parking assist

When a sensor detects a stationary

object, the direction of and the

approximate distance to the a sta-

tionary object are displayed and the

buzzer sounds.

: If equipped

 Wide rear view

Displays a near 180° image from

the rear view camera.

WARNING

● In low temperatures, the screen

may darken or the image may

become faint. The image could

distort when the vehicle is mov-

ing, or you may become unable

to see the image on the screen.

Be sure to visually check all

around the vehicle both directly

and using the mirrors before

proceeding.

● If the tire sizes are changed, the

position of the guide lines dis-

played on the screen may

change.

● The camera uses a special lens.

The distances between objects

and pedestrians that appear in

the image displayed on the

screen will differ from the actual

distances. (P.307)

Screen display

302

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Display mode switching but-

ton

Each time the button is selected,

the rear view mode and the wide

rear view mode are switched.

Guide line switching button

Select to switch the guide line

mode. (P.302)

• Each time the button is selected,

the display mode changes in the

following order:

Estimated course line display mode

 Parking assist guide line display

mode  Distance guide line display

mode.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert

When a sensor detects a stationary

object, the direction of stationary

object is displayed and the buzzer

sounds.

Intuitive parking assist

When a sensor detects an obstacle,

the direction of and the approxi-

mate distance to the obstacle are

displayed and the buzzer sounds.

: If equipped

● For details about the Rear Cross

Traffic Alert function (P.267) and

intuitive parking assist. (P.270)

The parking assist monitor is

canceled when the shift lever is

shifted into any position other

than the “R”.

Use any of the following modes.

 Estimated course line display

mode (P.303)

Estimated course lines are dis-

played which move in accor-

dance with the operation of the

steering wheel.

 Parking assist guide line dis-

play mode (P.304)

The steering wheel return points

(parking assist guide lines) are

displayed.

This mode is recommended for

WARNING

● As the Rear Cross Traffic Alert

display is displayed over the

camera view, it may be difficult

to see the Rear Cross Traffic

Alert display depending on the

color and brightness of the sur-

rounding area.

Canceling Toyota parking

assist monitor

Using the system

303

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

those who are comfortable with

parking the vehicle without the

aid of the estimated course

lines.

 Distance guide line display

mode (P.305)

Distance guide lines only are

displayed.

This mode is recommended for

those who are comfortable with

parking the vehicle without the

aid of the guide lines.

 Rear view

Vehicle width guide line

Displays a guide path when the

vehicle is being backed straight up.

Estimated course lines

Show an estimated course when

the steering wheel is turned.

Distance guide lines

Show distance behind the vehicle

when the steering wheel is turned.

• The guide lines move in conjunc-

tion with the estimated course

lines.

• The guide lines display points

approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red)

and approximately 3 ft. (1 m) (yel-

low) from the center of the edge

of the bumper.

Distance guide line

Shows distance behind the vehicle.

• Displays a point approximately

1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (blue) from the

edge of the bumper.

Vehicle center guide line

Indicates the estimated vehicle

center on the ground.

Estimated course line dis-

play mode

Screen description

304

4-5. Using the driving support systems

 Wide rear view

Vehicle width guide line

Displays a guide path when the

vehicle is being backed straight up.

Estimated course lines

Show an estimated course when

the steering wheel is turned.

Distance guide lines

Show distance behind the vehicle

when the steering wheel is turned.

• The guide lines move in conjunc-

tion with the estimated course

lines.

• The guide lines display points

approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red)

and approximately 3 ft. (1 m) (yel-

low) from the center of the edge

of the bumper.

Distance guide line

Shows distance behind the vehicle.

• Displays a point approximately

1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (blue) from the

edge of the bumper.

Vehicle center guide line

Indicates the estimated vehicle

center on the ground.

 Rear view

Vehicle width guide line

Displays a guide path when the

vehicle is being backed straight up.

• The displayed width is wider than

the actual vehicle width.

Parking assist guide lines

Show the path of the smallest turn

possible behind the vehicle.

Distance guide line

Shows distance behind the vehicle.

• Displays points approximately 1.5

ft. (0.5 m) (red) from the edge of

the bumper.

Vehicle center guide line

Indicates the estimated vehicle

center on the ground.

WARNING

● If the steering wheel is straight

and the vehicle width guide

lines and the estimated course

lines are not in alignment, have

the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

Parking assist guide line

display mode

Screen description

305

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

 Wide rear view

Vehicle width guide line

Displays a guide path when the

vehicle is being backed straight up.

• The displayed width is wider than

the actual vehicle width.

Parking assist guide lines

Show the path of the smallest turn

possible behind the vehicle.

Distance guide line

Shows distance behind the vehicle.

• Displays points approximately 1.5

ft. (0.5 m) (red) from the edge of

the bumper.

Vehicle center guide line

Indicates the estimated vehicle

center on the ground.

 Rear view

Distance guide lines

Shows distance behind the vehicle.

• Displays points approximately 1.5

ft. (0.5 m) (red) from the edge of

the bumper.

 Wide rear view

Distance guide lines

Shows distance behind the vehicle.

Distance guide line dis-

play mode

Screen description

306

4-5. Using the driving support systems

• Displays points approximately 1.5

ft. (0.5 m) (red) from the edge of

the bumper.

The parking assist monitor dis-

plays an image of the view from

the bumper of the rear area of

the vehicle.

 Rear view

Corners of bumper

• The area around both corners of

the bumper will not be displayed.

 Wide rear view

Corners of bumper

• The area around both corners of

the bumper will not be displayed.

● The image adjustment procedure

for the parking assist monitor

screen is the same as the proce-

dure for adjusting the screen dis-

play. (P.388)

● The area displayed on the screen

may vary according to vehicle ori-

entation conditions.

● Objects which are close to either

corner of the bumper or under the

bumper cannot be displayed.

● The camera uses a special lens.

The distance of the image that

appears on the screen differs from

the actual distance.

● Items which are located higher

than the camera may not be dis-

played on the monitor.

Toyota parking assist

monitor precautions

Area displayed on screen

307

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

The camera for the parking

assist monitor is located as

shown in the illustration.

■ Using the camera

If dirt or foreign matter (such as

water droplets, snow, mud, etc.)

is adhering to the camera, it

cannot transmit a clear image.

In this case, flush it with a large

quantity of water and wipe the

camera lens clean with a soft

and wet cloth.

 The distance guide lines and

the vehicle width guide lines

The camera

NOTICE

● The parking assist monitor may

not operate properly in the fol-

lowing cases.

• If the back of the vehicle is hit,

the position and mounting angle

of the camera may change.

• As the camera has a water

proof construction, do not

detach, disassemble or modify

it. This may cause incorrect

operation.

• When cleaning the camera lens,

flush the camera with a large

quantity of water and wipe it

with a soft and wet cloth.

Strongly rubbing the camera

lens may cause the camera lens

to be scratched and unable to

transmit a clear image.

• Do not allow organic solvent,

car wax, window cleaner or a

glass coating to adhere to the

camera. If this happens, wipe it

off as soon as possible.

• If the temperature changes rap-

idly, such as when hot water is

poured on the vehicle in cold

weather, the system may not

operate normally.

• When washing the vehicle, do

not apply intensive bursts of

water to the camera or camera

area. Doing so may result in the

camera malfunctioning.

● Do not expose the camera to

strong impact as this could

cause a malfunction. If this hap-

pens, have the vehicle

inspected by your Toyota dealer

as soon as possible.

Differences between the

screen and the actual road

308

4-5. Using the driving support systems

may not actually be parallel

with the dividing lines of the

parking space, even when

they appear to be so. Be sure

to check visually.

 The distances between the

vehicle width guide lines and

the left and right dividing lines

of the parking space may not

be equal, even when they

appear to be so. Be sure to

check visually.

 The distance guide lines give

a distance guide for flat road

surfaces. In any of the follow-

ing situations, there is a mar-

gin of error between the guide

lines on the screen and the

actual distance/course on the

road.

■ When the ground behind

the vehicle slopes up

sharply

The distance guide lines will

appear to be closer to the vehi-

cle than the actual distance.

Because of this, objects will

appear to be farther away than

they actually are. In the same

way, there will be a margin of

error between the guidelines

and the actual distance/course

on the road.

■ When the ground behind

the vehicle slopes down

sharply

The distance guide lines will

appear to be farther from the

vehicle than the actual distance.

Because of this, objects will

appear to be closer than they

actually are. In the same way,

there will be a margin of error

between the guidelines and the

actual distance/course on the

road.

309

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■ When any part of the vehi-

cle sags

When any part of the vehicle

sags due to the number of pas-

sengers or the distribution of the

load, there is a margin of error

between the guide lines on the

screen and the actual dis-

tance/course on the road.

A margin of error

The estimated course lines tar-

get flat surfaced objects (such

as the road). It is not possible to

determine the position of three-

dimensional objects (such as

vehicles) using the estimated

course lines and distance guide

lines. When approaching a

three-dimensional object that

extends outward (such as the

flatbed of a truck), be careful of

the following.

■ Estimated course lines

Visually check the surroundings

and the area behind the vehicle.

In the case shown below, the

truck appears to be outside of

the estimated course lines and

the vehicle does not look as if it

hits the truck. However, the rear

body of the truck may actually

cross over the estimated course

lines. In reality if you back up as

guided by the estimated course

lines, the vehicle may hit the

truck.

When approaching three-

dimensional objects

310

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Estimated course lines

■ Distance guide lines

Visually check the surroundings

and the area behind the vehicle.

On the screen, it appears that a

truck is parking at point .

However, in reality if you back

up to point , you will hit the

truck. On the screen, it appears

that is closest and is far-

thest away. However, in reality,

the distance to and is the

same, and is farther than

and .

If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause

and the solution, and re-check.

If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle

inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Things you should know

If you notice any symptoms

311

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

Symptom Likely cause Solution

The image is difficult to

see

 The vehicle is in a dark

area

 The temperature

around the lens is

either high or low

 The outside tempera-

ture is low

 There are water drop-

lets on the camera

 It is raining or humid

 Foreign matter (mud

etc.) is adhering to the

camera

 Sunlight or headlights

are shining directly

into the camera

 The vehicle is under

fluorescent lights,

sodium lights, mer-

cury lights etc.

Back up while visually

checking the vehicle’s

surroundings. (Use the

monitor again once con-

ditions have been

improved.)

The procedure for

adjusting the picture

quality of the parking

assist monitor is the

same as the procedure

for adjusting the screen

display. (P.388)

The image is blurry

Dirt or foreign matter

(such as water droplets,

snow, mud etc.) is

adhering to the camera.

Flush the camera with a

large quantity of water

and wipe the camera

lens clean with a soft

and wet cloth.

The image is out of

alignment

The camera or sur-

rounding area has

received a strong

impact.

Have the vehicle

inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

The guide lines are

very far out of align-

ment

The camera position is

out of alignment.

Have the vehicle

inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

 The vehicle is tilted

(there is a heavy load

on the vehicle, tire

pressure is low due to

a tire puncture, etc.)

 The vehicle is used on

an incline.

If this happens due to

these causes, it does

not indicate a malfunc-

tion.

Back up while visually

checking the vehicle’s

surroundings.

312

4-5. Using the driving support systems

The estimated course

lines move even

though the steering

wheel is straight

There is a malfunction in

the signals being output

by the steering sensor.

Have the vehicle

inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

Guide lines are not dis-

played

The back door is open.

Close the back door.

If this does not resolve

the symptom, have the

vehicle inspected by

your Toyota dealer.

The estimated course

lines are not displayed

 Battery has been rein-

stalled.

 The steering wheel

has been moved while

the battery was being

reinstalled.

 Battery power is low.

 The steering sensor

has been reinstalled.

 There is a malfunction

in the signals being

output by the steering

sensor.

Stop the vehicle, and

turn the steering wheel

as far as it will go to the

left and right.

If this does not resolve

the symptom, have the

vehicle inspected by

your Toyota dealer.

Symptom Likely cause Solution

313

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

: If equipped

● The screen illustrations used in

this text are intended as exam-

ples, and may differ from the

image that is actually displayed on

the screen.

The panoramic view monitor is a

supplemental device intended to

assist the driver when checking

around the vehicle. When using,

be sure to visually check all

around the vehicle both directly

and using the mirrors before

proceeding. If you do not, you

may hit another vehicle or possi-

bly cause an accident.

Pay attention to the following

precautions when using the

panoramic view monitor.

Panoramic view moni-

tor

Panoramic view monitor

assists the driver in viewing

the surroundings, when

operating at low speeds, by

combining the front, side

and rear cameras and dis-

playing a complete vehicle

overhead image on the

screen.

When you press the camera

switch or shift the shift lever

to the “R” position while the

engine switch is in ON, the

panoramic view monitor

operates.

The monitor displays vari-

ous views of the position

and surroundings of the

vehicle.

Driving precautions

WARNING

● Never depend on the panoramic

view monitor entirely. The

image and the position of the

guide lines displayed on the

screen may differ from the

actual state. Use caution just as

you would when driving any

other vehicle.

● Always make sure to check all

around the vehicle with your

own eyes when driving.

● Never drive while looking only at

the screen as the image on the

screen is different from actual

conditions. If you are driving

while looking only at the screen,

you may hit a person or an

object, resulting in an accident.

When driving, be sure to check

the vehicle’s surroundings with

your own eyes and the vehicle’s

mirrors.

● Depending on the circum-

stances of the vehicle (number

of passengers, amount of lug-

gage, etc.), the position of the

guide lines displayed on the

screen may change. Be sure to

check visually around the vehi-

cle before proceeding.

314

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING

● Do not use the panoramic view

monitor system in the following

cases:

• On icy or slick road surfaces, or

in snow

• When using tire chains or emer-

gency tires

• When the front door or the back

door is not closed completely

• On roads that are not flat or

straight, such as curves or

slopes

• If the suspension has been

modified or tires of a size other

than specified are installed

● In low temperatures, the screen

may darken or the image may

become faint. The image could

distort when the vehicle is mov-

ing, or you may become unable

to see the image on the screen.

Be sure to visually check all

around the vehicle both directly

and using the mirrors before

proceeding.

● If the tire sizes are changed, the

position of the guide lines dis-

played on the screen may

change.

● The camera uses a special lens.

The distances between objects

and pedestrians that appear in

the image displayed on the

screen will differ from the actual

distances. (P.337)

● When an aftermarket part is

installed in the display area of

the screen.

NOTICE

● In panoramic view/moving

view/see-through view, the sys-

tem combines images taken

from the front, back, left and

right side cameras into a single

image. There are limits to the

range and content that can be

displayed. Familiarize yourself

with the characteristics of the

panoramic view monitor system

before using it.

● Image clarity may decline at the

four corners of the panoramic

view/moving view/see-through

view. However, this is not a mal-

function, as these are the

regions along the border of

each camera image where the

images are combined.

● Depending on lighting condi-

tions near each of the cameras,

bright and dark patches may

appear on the panoramic

view/moving view/see-through

view.

● The panoramic view/moving

view/see-through view display

does not extend higher than the

installation position and image

capture range of each camera.

● There are blind spots around

the vehicle. Accordingly, there

are regions not displayed in

panoramic view.

● Three-dimensional objects dis-

played in wide front view, rear

view, wide rear view or side

view may not be displayed in

panoramic view/moving

view/see-through view.

315

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

The camera switch is located as

shown in the illustration.

 Moving view

 See-through view

NOTICE

● People and other three-dimen-

sional obstacles may appear

differently when displayed on

the panoramic view monitor.

(These differences include,

among others, cases in which

displayed objects appear to

have fallen over, disappear near

image processing areas, appear

from image processing areas,

or when the actual distance to

an object differs from the dis-

played position.)

● When the back door, which is

equipped with the back camera,

or front doors, which are

equipped with door mirrors that

have built-in side cameras, are

open, images will not be dis-

played properly on the pan-

oramic view monitor.

● The vehicle icon displayed in

panoramic view/moving

view/see-through view is a com-

puter generated image. Accord-

ingly, properties such as the

color, shape and size will differ

from the actual vehicle. For this

reason, nearby three-dimen-

sional objects may appear to be

touching the vehicle, and actual

distances to three-dimensional

objects may differ from those

displayed.

Camera switch

Display

Checking around the vehi-

cle

316

4-5. Using the driving support systems

 Wide front view & panoramic

view

 Rear view & panoramic view

 Wide front view & side views

 Side views

 Rear view & side views

When you press the camera switch or shift the shift lever to the “R”

position while the engine switch is in ON, the panoramic view moni-

tor operates.

The monitor displays various views of the position of the vehicle.

(The following is an example)

Checking the front and

around the vehicle

Checking the rear and

around the vehicle

When folding the outside

rear view mirrors

How to switch the display

317

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

Map screen, audio screen, etc.

Moving view

See-through view

Map screen, audio screen, etc.

Wide front view & panoramic view

Side views

When the shift lever is in the “P” position

When the shift lever is in the “D” or “N” position

318

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Rear view & panoramic view

Wide rear view

Rear view

The moving view screen and the

see-through view screen pro-

vide support when checking the

areas of around the vehicle

while parking. These screens

display an image of the vicinity

of the vehicle combined from the

4 cameras. The screen will dis-

play a 360° view around the

vehicle from either inside the

vehicle or from a birds-eye view

at an angle.

To display the moving view/see-

through view screen, press the

camera switch when the shift

lever is in the “P” position and

the intuitive parking assist is

enabled.

 Moving view

Display mode switching but-

ton

Select to change the display mode

between the moving view and the

see-through view.

Rotation pause switch

Select to pause the rotation of the

When the shift lever is in the “R” position

Checking around the

vehicle

Screen display

319

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

screen.

To resume rotation, select .

Body color setting switch

Select to display the body color set-

ting screen and change the color of

the vehicle displayed on the pan-

oramic view monitor. (P.332)

 See-through view

Display mode switching but-

ton

Select to change the display mode

between the moving view and the

see-through view.

Rotation pause switch

Select to pause the rotation of the

screen.

To resume rotation, select .

Body color setting switch

Select to display the body color set-

ting screen and change the color of

the vehicle displayed on the pan-

oramic view monitor. (P.332)

● Pressing the camera switch again

changes the screen back to the

previously displayed screen, such

as the navigation screen.

The wide front view & panoramic view screen provides support when

checking the areas in front of the vehicle and around the vehicle

when taking-off at T-intersections or other intersections during poor

visibility.

To display the screen, press the camera switch when the shift lever

is in the “N” or “D” position with the vehicle moving approximately 7

mph (12 km/h) or less.

This screen will be displayed if the intuitive parking assist detects an

object in front of your vehicle (intuitive parking assist linked display).

Checking the front and around the vehicle

320

4-5. Using the driving support systems

 Wide front view & panoramic view

Distance guide lines

Shows distance in front of the vehicle.

• Display points approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the edge of the bumper.

Intuitive parking assist

When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate

distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.

Estimated course lines

Shows an estimated course when the steering wheel is turned.

• This line will be displayed when the steering wheel is turned by 90° or

more from the center (straight-line) position.

Guide line switching button

Select to change the guide line mode between the distance guide line mode

and the estimated course line mode. (P.321)

Automatic display button

Select to turn automatic display mode on/off. The indicator on the button

illuminates during automatic display mode. (P.321)

Parking Support Brake

When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a

detected object is high, a warning message is displayed.

: If equipped

● Pressing the camera switch changes the screen to the side views screen

or previously displayed screen, such as the navigation screen.

● For details about the intuitive parking assist (P.270) and Parking Sup-

port Brake

function. (P.277)

● The display position of the intuitive parking assist and the position of

obstacles displayed in the camera image do not match.

Screen display

321

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

: If equipped

Each time the guide line switch-

ing button is selected, the mode

will change as follows:

 Distance guide line

 Only the distance guide lines

are displayed.

 Estimated course line

 Estimated course lines will be

added to the distance guide

lines.

In addition to screen switching

by operating the camera switch,

automatic display mode is avail-

able. In this mode, the screen is

switched automatically in

response to vehicle speed.

In automatic display mode, the

monitor will automatically dis-

play images in the following situ-

ations:

 When the shift lever is shifted

to “N” or “D” position.

 When vehicle speed is

reduced to approximately 6

mph (10 km/h) or less.

The side view screen displays images from the cameras installed on

WARNING

● When a sensor indicator on the intuitive parking assist display illumi-

nates in red or a buzzer sounds continuously, be sure to check the area

around the vehicle immediately and do not proceed any further until

safety has been ensured, otherwise an unexpected accident may occur.

● As the intuitive parking assist display is displayed over the camera view,

it may be difficult to see the intuitive parking assist display depending on

the color and brightness of the surrounding area.

Switching the guide line

mode

Automatic display mode

Checking the sides of the vehicle

322

4-5. Using the driving support systems

each outside rear view mirror. This screen is designed to support the

driver in safe driving in situations such as when driving on a narrow

road, by allowing them to check the areas around the sides of the

vehicle.

To display the screen, press the camera switch when the shift lever

is in the “D”, or “N” position with the vehicle moving approximately 7

mph (12 km/h) or less.

 Side view

Distance guide lines

Show distance in front of the vehicle.

• Display points approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the edge of the bumper.

Vehicle width guide lines

Shows guide lines of the vehicle’s width including the outside rear view mir-

rors.

Front tire guide lines

Shows guide lines of where the front tire touches the ground.

Automatic display button

Select to turn automatic display mode on/off. The indicator on the button

illuminates during automatic display mode. (P.323)

Intuitive parking assist

When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate

distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.

● Pressing the camera switch changes the screen to the wide front view &

panoramic view screen or previously displayed screen, such as the navi-

gation screen.

● For details about the intuitive parking assist. (P.270)

Screen display

323

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

● The side views can be displayed even when the outside rear view mirrors

are retracted.

In addition to screen switching

by operating the camera switch,

automatic display mode is avail-

able. In this mode, the screen is

switched automatically in

response to vehicle speed.

In automatic display mode, the

monitor will automatically dis-

play images in the following situ-

ations:

 When the shift lever is shifted

to “N” or “D” position.

 When vehicle speed is

reduced to approximately 6

mph (12 km/h) or less.

 Side View

 Check the positions and dis-

tance between the vehicle

width guide line and a target

object such as the obstacle or

curb of the road.

WARNING

● When a sensor indicator on the intuitive parking assist display illumi-

nates in red or a buzzer sounds continuously, be sure to check the area

around the vehicle immediately and do not proceed any further until

safety has been ensured, otherwise an unexpected accident may occur.

● As the intuitive parking assist display is displayed over the camera view,

it may be difficult to see the intuitive parking assist display depending on

the color and brightness of the surrounding area.

Automatic display mode Using the vehicle width

guide line

324

4-5. Using the driving support systems

 Pull over to the curb as shown

in the illustration above, tak-

ing care not to let the vehicle

width guide line overlap the

target object.

 Ensure that the vehicle width

guide line is parallel to the tar-

get object.

The rear view & panoramic view screen, the wide rear view screen

and the rear view screen provide support when checking the areas

of behind the vehicle and around the vehicle while backing up, for

example while parking.

The screens will be displayed when the shift lever is in the “R” posi-

tion.

Each time the display mode switching button is selected, the mode

will change as follows:

Checking the rear and around the vehicle

Screen display

325

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

 Rear view & panoramic view

Intuitive parking assist

When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate

distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert

When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of obstacle is displayed

and the buzzer sounds.

Guide line switching button

Select to switch the guide line mode. (P.327)

Display mode switching button

Each time the display mode switching button is selected, the mode will

change between the rear view & panoramic view mode and the wide rear

view & panoramic view mode.

Parking Support Brake

When the system determines that the possibility of a collision with a

detected object is high, a warning message is displayed.

: If equipped

 Wide rear view

Intuitive parking assist

When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate

326

4-5. Using the driving support systems

distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert

When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of obstacle is displayed

and the buzzer sounds.

Guide line switching button

Select to switch the guide line mode. (P.327)

Display mode switching button

Each time the display mode switching button is selected, the mode will

change between the rear view & panoramic view mode and the wide rear

view & panoramic view mode.

Parking Support Brake

When the system determines that the possibility of a collision with a

detected object is high, a warning message is displayed.

: If equipped

 Rear view

Intuitive parking assist

When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate

distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert

When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of obstacle is displayed

and the buzzer sounds.

Guide line switching button

Select to switch the guide line mode. (P.327)

Display mode switching button

Each time the display mode switching button is selected, the mode will

change between the rear view & panoramic view mode and the wide rear

view & panoramic view mode.

Parking Support Brake

327

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

When the system determines that the possibility of a collision with a

detected object is high, a warning message is displayed.

: If equipped

● The monitor is cancelled when the shift lever is shifted into any position

other than the “R” position.

● For details about the intuitive parking assist (P.270), Rear Cross Traffic

Alert function (P.267) and Parking Support Brake

function. (P.277)

● The display position of the intuitive parking assist and the position of

obstacles displayed in the camera image do not match.

: If equipped

Each time the guide line switching button is selected, the mode will

change as follows:

 Estimated course line

Estimated course lines are displayed which move in accordance with

the operation of the steering wheel.

Distance guide lines

Shows distance in front of the vehicle.

• Display points approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the edge of the bumper.

WARNING

● When a sensor indicator on the intuitive parking assist display illumi-

nates in red or a buzzer sounds continuously, be sure to check the area

around the vehicle immediately and do not proceed any further until

safety has been ensured, otherwise an unexpected accident may occur.

● As the intuitive parking assist display and Rear Cross Traffic Alert dis-

play are displayed over the camera view, it may be difficult to see the

intuitive parking assist display and Rear Cross Traffic Alert display

depending on the color and brightness of the surrounding area.

Guide lines displayed on the screen

328

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Estimated course lines

Shows an estimated course when the steering wheel is turned.

Distance guide lines

Shows the distance behind the vehicle when the steering wheel is turned.

• The guide lines move in conjunction with the estimated course lines.

• The guide lines display points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) and

approximately 3 ft. (1 m) (yellow) from the center of the edge of the

bumper.

Distance guide line

Shows the distance behind the vehicle.

• Displays a point approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (blue) from the edge of the

bumper.

Vehicle width guide lines

Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight up.

Vehicle center guide line

Indicates the estimated vehicle center on the ground.

 Parking assist guide line

The steering wheel return points (parking assist guide lines) are dis-

played.

This mode is recommended for those who are comfortable with park-

ing the vehicle without the aid of the estimated course lines.

Distance guide lines

Shows distance in front of the vehicle.

• Display points approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the edge of the bumper.

Distance guide line

Shows the distance behind the vehicle.

• Displays a point approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) from the edge of the

bumper.

329

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

Vehicle center guide line

Indicates the estimated vehicle center on the ground.

Vehicle width guide lines

Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight up.

Parking assist guide lines

Shows the path of the smallest turn possible behind the vehicle.

 Distance guide line

Only distance guide line is displayed.

This mode is recommended for those who are comfortable with park-

ing the vehicle without the aid of the guide lines.

Distance guide lines

Shows distance in front of the vehicle.

• Display points approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the edge of the bumper.

Distance guide line

Shows the distance behind the vehicle.

• Displays a point approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) from the edge of the

bumper.

● The display position of the intuitive parking assist and the position of

obstacles displayed in the camera image do not match.

WARNING

● Depending on the circumstances of the vehicle (number of passengers,

amount of luggage, etc.), the position of the guide lines displayed on the

screen may change. Be sure to check visually around the vehicle before

proceeding.

● If the steering wheel is straight and the vehicle width guide lines and the

estimated course lines are not in alignment, have the vehicle inspected

by your Toyota dealer.

330

4-5. Using the driving support systems

When parking in a space which

is in the reverse direction to the

space described in the proce-

dure below, the steering direc-

tions will be reversed.

1 Shift the shift lever to the “R”

position.

2 Turn the steering wheel so

that the estimated course

lines are within the parking

space, and back up slowly.

Parking space

Estimated course lines

3 When the rear position of the

vehicle has entered the park-

ing space, turn the steering

wheel so that the vehicle

width guide lines are within

the left and right dividing lines

of the parking space.

Vehicle width guide line

4 Once the vehicle width guide

lines and the parking space

lines are parallel, straighten

the steering wheel and back

up slowly until the vehicle

has completely entered the

parking space.

WARNING

● Do not use the system if the display is incorrect due to an uneven (hilly)

road or a non-straight (curvy) road.

Parking

Using the estimated course

line

331

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

5 Stop the vehicle in an appro-

priate place, and finish park-

ing.

When parking in a space which

is in the reverse direction to the

space described in the proce-

dure below, the steering direc-

tions will be reversed.

1 Shift the shift lever to the “R”

position.

2 Back up until the parking

assist guide line meets the

edge of the dividing line of

the parking space.

Parking assist guide line

Parking space dividing line

3 Turn the steering wheel all

the way to the left, and back

up slowly.

4 Once the vehicle is parallel

with the parking space,

straighten the steering wheel

and back up slowly until the

vehicle has completely

entered the parking space.

5 Stop the vehicle in an appro-

priate place, and finish park-

ing.

Even when outside rear view

mirrors are stored, the monitor

can display various images of

the vicinity of the vehicle and

assist the operation in the con-

firming safe conditions in a nar-

row places, parking, etc.

 Wide front view & side views

Using parking assist guide

line

When folding the outside

rear view mirrors

Screen display

332

4-5. Using the driving support systems

 Rear view & side views

Intuitive parking assist

When a sensor detects an obstacle,

the direction of and the approxi-

mate distance to the obstacle are

displayed and the buzzer sounds.

● For details about the front view

and the rear view: P.319, 324

If displayed objects are too

small to see clearly when the

panoramic view is displayed, the

area around any of the 4 cor-

ners of the vehicle can be mag-

nified.

1 Turn the intuitive parking

assist on.

2 Select the area on the pan-

oramic view display you wish

to magnify.

 Touching one of the 4 areas

within the dotted lines will

magnify that area. (Dotted

lines are not displayed on the

actual display.)

 To return to the normal view,

touch the panoramic view dis-

play again.

● The magnifying function is

enabled when all of the following

conditions are met:

• The wide front view & panoramic

view or the rear view & panoramic

view is displayed.

• The vehicle speed is below

approximately 7 mph (12 km/h).

• The intuitive parking assist is

available.

● In the following situations, the

magnified display will be can-

celed automatically:

• The vehicle speed is approxi-

mately 7 mph (12 km/h) or higher.

• The intuitive parking assist is

unavailable.

● When the display is magnified, the

guide lines will not be displayed.

The color of the vehicle dis-

WARNING

● When a sensor indicator on the

intuitive parking assist display

illuminates in red or a buzzer

sounds continuously, be sure to

check the area around the vehi-

cle immediately and do not pro-

ceed any further until safety has

been ensured, otherwise an

unexpected accident may occur.

Magnifying function

Magnifying the display

Customizing the pan-

oramic view monitor

333

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

played on the panoramic view

monitor can be changed.

1 Display the moving view/see-

through view screen.

(P.318)

2 Select .

3 Select the desired color.

Displays the next page

The panoramic view monitor displays an image of the surrounding

view of the vehicle.

Since the panoramic view processes and displays images based on

flat road surfaces, it cannot depict the position of three-dimension

objects (such as vehicle bumpers, etc.) that are in positions higher

than the surface of the road. Even if there is room between the bum-

pers of the vehicles and it seems not likely to collide in the image, in

reality, the both vehicles are on a collision course.

Check the safety of the surroundings directly.

Objects located in the shaded areas will not be displayed on the

screen.

Changing the body color

displayed in the pan-

oramic view monitor

Panoramic view monitor precautions

Area displayed on screen

Area of image of panoramic view

334

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Parts of objects which extend above a certain height cannot be

displayed on the screen.

● As the images obtained from four cameras are processed and displayed

on the standard of a flat road surface; the panoramic view/moving

view/see through view may be displayed as follows.

• Objects may look collapsed; thinner or bigger than usual.

• An object with a higher position than the road surface may look farther

away than it actually is or may not appear at all.

• Tall objects may appear protruding from the non-displayed areas of the

image.

● Variations in the brightness of the image may appear for every camera.

● The displayed image may be shifted by inclination of the vehicle body,

change in vehicle height, etc., depending on the number of passengers,

amount of luggage, fuel quantity, etc.

● If the front doors or back door are not completely closed; neither the

image nor the guide lines are displayed.

● The position relations of the vehicle icon and the road surface or obstacle

may differ from the actual positions.

● The black areas of the vicinity of the vehicle icon are areas that are not

captured by the camera.

● Images like the following are combined, thus some areas may be difficult

to view.

335

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

 Wide front view

 Side view

WARNING

● When a sensor indicator on the intuitive parking assist display illumi-

nates in red or a buzzer sounds continuously, be sure to check the area

around the vehicle immediately and do not proceed any further until

safety has been ensured, otherwise an unexpected accident may occur.

Area of the image captured

by the camera

336

4-5. Using the driving support systems

 Rear view

The area around both cor-

ners of the bumper will not be

displayed.

 Wide rear view

The area around both cor-

ners of the bumper will not be

displayed.

● Black masking is done for dis-

tance detection differences to the

front of the vehicle.

● The area covered by the camera

is limited. Objects which are close

to either corner of the bumper or

under the bumper cannot be seen

on the screen.

● The area displayed on the screen

may vary depending on vehicle

orientation or road conditions.

● The camera uses a special lens.

The distance in the image dis-

played on the screen will differ

from the actual distance.

The cameras for the panoramic

view monitor are located as

shown in the illustrations.

 Front camera

 Side cameras

The camera

337

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

 Rear camera

If dirt or foreign matter (such as

water droplets, snow, mud, etc.)

is adhering to the camera, it

cannot transmit a clear image.

In this case, flush it with a large

quantity of water and wipe the

camera lens clean with a soft

and wet cloth.

 The distance guide lines and

the vehicle width guide lines

Using the camera

NOTICE

● The panoramic view monitor

may not operate properly in the

following cases.

• If the camera is hit, the position

and mounting angle of the cam-

era may change.

• As the camera has a water

proof construction, do not

detach, disassemble or modify

it. This may cause incorrect

operation.

• When cleaning the camera lens,

flush the camera with a large

quantity of water and wipe it

with a soft and wet cloth.

Strongly rubbing the camera

lens may cause the camera lens

to be scratched and unable to

transmit a clear image.

• Do not allow an organic solvent,

car wax, window cleaner or a

glass coating to adhere to the

camera. If this happens, wipe it

off as soon as possible.

• If the temperature changes rap-

idly, such as when hot water is

poured on the vehicle in cold

weather, the system may not

operate normally.

• When washing the vehicle, do

not apply intensive bursts of

water to the camera or camera

area. Doing so may result in the

camera malfunctioning.

● Do not expose the camera to

strong impacts as this could

cause a malfunction. If this hap-

pens, have the vehicle

inspected by your Toyota dealer

as soon as possible.

Difference between the

screen and the actual road

338

4-5. Using the driving support systems

may not actually be parallel

with the dividing lines of the

parking space, even when

they appear to be so. Be sure

to check visually.

 The distances between the

vehicle width guide lines and

the left and right dividing lines

of the parking space may not

be equal, even when they

appear to be so. Be sure to

check visually.

 The distance guide lines give

a distance guide for flat road

surfaces. In any of the follow-

ing situations, there is a mar-

gin of error between the guide

lines on the screen and the

actual distance/course on the

road.

The distance guide lines will

appear to be closer to the vehi-

cle than the actual distance.

Because of this, objects will

appear to be farther away than

they actually are. In the same

way, there will be a margin of

error between the guidelines

and the actual distance/course

on the road.

The distance guide lines will

appear to be farther from the

vehicle than the actual distance.

Because of this, objects will

appear to be closer than they

actually are. In the same way,

there will be a margin of error

between the guidelines and the

actual distance/course on the

road.

When the ground behind the

vehicle slopes up sharply

When the ground behind the

vehicle slopes down sharply

339

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

When any part of the vehicle

sags due to the number of pas-

sengers or the distribution of the

load, there is a margin of error

between the guide lines on the

screen and the actual dis-

tance/course on the road.

A margin of error

When there are three-dimensional objects (such as vehicle bum-

pers, etc.) nearby in positions higher than the surface of the road,

take extra care when using the following.

Since the panoramic view processes and displays images based on

flat road surfaces, it cannot depict the position of three-dimension

objects (such as vehicle bumpers, etc.) that are in positions higher

than the surface of the road. For example, even though it appears

that there is space between the bumpers of the two vehicles in the

illustration below and they are not likely to collide, in reality, a colli-

sion is about to occur.

When any part of the vehicle

sags

Distortion of three-dimensional objects on the screen

Panoramic view display (including magnified display)

340

4-5. Using the driving support systems

The estimated course lines target flat surfaced objects (such as the

road). It is not possible to determine the position of three-dimen-

sional objects (such as vehicles) using the estimated course lines

and distance guide lines. When approaching a three-dimensional

object that extends outward (such as the flatbed of a truck), be care-

ful of the following.

Since the estimated course line

is displayed for a flat road sur-

face, it cannot depict the posi-

tion of three-dimensional objects

(such as vehicle bumpers, etc.)

that are in positions higher than

the surface of the road. Even if

the bumpers of the vehicle is on

the outside of the estimated

course line in the image, in real-

ity, the vehicles are on a colli-

sion course.

WARNING

● When a sensor indicator on the intuitive parking assist display illumi-

nates in red or a buzzer sounds continuously, be sure to check the area

around the vehicle immediately and do not proceed any further until

safety has been ensured, otherwise an unexpected accident may occur.

When approaching three-dimensional objects

WARNING

● When a sensor indicator on the intuitive parking assist display illumi-

nates in red or a buzzer sounds continuously, be sure to check the area

around the vehicle immediately and do not proceed any further until

safety has been ensured, otherwise an unexpected accident may occur.

Estimated course lines

341

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

Estimated course line

Three-dimensional objects

(such as the overhang of a wall

or loading platform of a truck) in

high positions may not be pro-

jected on the screen. Check the

safety of the surroundings

directly.

Visually check the surroundings

and the area behind the vehicle.

In the case shown below, the

truck appears to be outside of

the estimated course lines and

the vehicle does not look as if it

hits the truck. However, the rear

body of the truck may actually

cross over the estimated course

lines. In reality if you back up as

guided by the estimated course

lines, the vehicle may hit the

truck.

342

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Estimated course lines

Visually check the surroundings

and the area behind the vehicle.

On the screen, it appears that a

truck is parking at point .

However, in reality if you back

up to point , you will hit the

truck. On the screen, it appears

that is closest and is far-

thest away. However, in reality,

the distance to and is the

same, and is farther than

and .

If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause

and the solution, and re-check.

If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle

inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Distance guide lines

Things you should know

If you notice any symptoms

343

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

Symptom Likely cause Solution

The image is difficult to

see

 The vehicle is in a

dark area

 The temperature

around the lens is

either high or low

 The outside tempera-

ture is low

 There are water drop-

lets on the camera

 It is raining or humid

 Foreign matter (mud,

etc.) is adhering to the

camera

 Sunlight or headlights

are shining directly

into the camera

 The vehicle is under

fluorescent lights,

sodium lights, mer-

cury lights, etc.

Back up while visually

checking the vehicle’s

surroundings. (Use the

monitor again once con-

ditions have been

improved.)

The procedure for

adjusting the picture

quality of the pan-

oramic view monitor

system is the same as

the procedure for

adjusting the screen dis-

play. (P.388)

The image is blurry

Dirt or foreign matter

(such as water drop-

lets, snow, mud, etc.) is

adhering to the camera.

Flush the camera with a

large quantity of water

and wipe the camera

lens clean with a soft

and wet cloth.

The image is out of

alignment

The camera or sur-

rounding area has

received a strong

impact.

Have the vehicle

inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

The guide lines are very

far out of alignment

The camera position is

out of alignment.

Have the vehicle

inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

 The vehicle is tilted.

(There is a heavy load

on the vehicle, tire

pressure is low due to

a tire puncture, etc.)

 The vehicle is used on

an incline.

If this happens due to

these causes, it does

not indicate a malfunc-

tion.

Back up while visually

checking the vehicle’s

surroundings.

344

4-5. Using the driving support systems

The estimated course

lines move even though

the steering wheel is

straight

There is a malfunction

in the signals being out-

put by the steering sen-

sor.

Have the vehicle

inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

Guide lines are not dis-

played

The back door is open.

Close the back door.

If this does not resolve

the symptom, have the

vehicle inspected by

your Toyota dealer.

The estimated course

lines are not displayed

 Battery has been rein-

stalled.

 The steering wheel

has been moved while

the battery was being

reinstalled.

 Battery power is low.

 The steering sensor

has been reinstalled.

 There is a malfunction

in the signals being

output by the steering

sensor.

Have the vehicle

inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

The panoramic view dis-

play cannot be magni-

fied

The intuitive parking

assist may be malfunc-

tioning or dirty.

Follow the correction

procedures for malfunc-

tions of the intuitive

parking assist. (P.270)

The see-through

view/moving view can-

not be displayed

Product license

Symptom Likely cause Solution

345

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

: If equipped

■ Stopping the engine

While driving with the D shift

position selected, depress the

brake pedal and stop the vehi-

cle. The engine will stop auto-

matically.

When the engine stops, the Stop &

Start indicator will illuminate.

■ Restarting the engine

Release the brake pedal. The

engine will start automatically.

When the engine starts, the Stop &

Start indicator will turn off.

■ When the brake hold sys-

tem is operating

 When the engine is stopped

by the Stop & Start system, if

the brake pedal is released

the engine will remain

stopped.

 If the accelerator pedal is

depressed while the engine is

stopped by the Stop & Start

system, the engine will

restart.

 While the engine is stopped

by the Stop & Start system, if

the engine is restarted, the

brake hold system will con-

tinue to apply the brakes,

unless the operation condi-

tions of the brake hold system

are no longer met. (P.206)

■ When the dynamic radar

cruise control with full-

speed range is operating

 When the vehicle is stopped

by the dynamic radar cruise

control with full-speed range,

the engine will stop automati-

cally even though the brake

pedal is not depressed.

 When the preceding vehicle

starts off, the engine will

restart automatically.

 If the engine is restarted by

the Stop & Start system while

the vehicle is stopped by the

dynamic radar cruise control

with full-speed range, the

vehicle will remain stopped.

Stop & Start system

The Stop & Start system

stops and starts the engine

according to brake pedal or

shift lever operation when

the vehicle is stopped, such

as at a stoplight, intersec-

tion, etc., in order to

improve fuel economy and

reduce noise pollution

caused by the engine idling.

Stop & Start system oper-

ation

346

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Press the Stop & Start cancel

switch to disable the Stop &

Start system.

The Stop & Start cancel indica-

tor will illuminate.

Pressing the switch again will

enable the Stop & Start system and

the Stop & Start cancel indicator will

turn off.

■ Automatic enabling of the Stop

& Start system

If the Stop & Start system is dis-

abled using the Stop & Start cancel

switch, it will be automatically re-

enabled once the engine switch is

turned off and then the engine is

started.

When the engine is stopped by

the Stop & Start system when

the vehicle is on an incline,

when the brake pedal is

released, brake force is tempo-

rarily maintained to prevent the

vehicle from rolling backwards

before the engine is restarted

and drive force is generated.

When drive force is generated,

the maintained brake force is

automatically canceled.

 This function operates on flat

surfaces as well as steep

inclines.

 Sound may be generated

from the brake system, but

this does not indicate a mal-

function.

 Brake pedal response may

change and vibration may

occur, but this does not indi-

cate a malfunction.

■ Points for use

● If the engine switch is pressed

when the engine is stopped by the

Stop & Start system, the engine

will not be able to be restarted by

the automatic engine start func-

tion. In this case, restart the

engine using the normal engine

starting procedure. (P.193, 194)

● When the engine is being

restarted by the Stop & Start sys-

tem, the power outlets may be

temporarily unusable, but this

does not indicate a malfunction.

● Installation and removal of electri-

cal components and wireless

devices may affect the Stop &

Start system. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

● When stopping the vehicle for a

longer period of time, turn the

engine switch off to stop the

engine completely.

● When the engine is restarted by

the Stop & Start system, the steer-

ing wheel may temporarily feel

heavy.

■ Operating conditions

● The Stop & Start system is opera-

tional when all of the following

conditions are met:

Disabling the Stop & Start

system

Hill-start assist control

347

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

• The vehicle has been driven a cer-

tain amount of time.

• The brake pedal is being

depressed firmly. (except when

the vehicle is stopped by the

dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range when in vehicle-

to-vehicle distance control mode)

• The D shift position is selected.

• The driver’s seat belt is fastened.

• The driver’s door is closed.

• The selected driving mode is nor-

mal or Eco drive mode.

• The selected driving mode is not

snow mode (AWD models).

• Mud & Sand or Rock & Dirt mode

is not selected for Multi-terrain

Select (AWD models).

• The windshield defogger is off.

(vehicles without a manual air

conditioning system)

• The accelerator pedal is not being

depressed.

• The engine is adequately warmed

up.

• The outside temperature is 23°F (-

5°C) or higher.

• The hood is closed. (P.348)

● In the following situations, the

engine may not be stopped by the

Stop & Start system. This is not a

malfunction of the Stop & Start

system.

• When the air conditioning system

is being used.

• When the battery is undergoing a

periodic recharge.

• When the battery is not sufficiently

charged, such as if the vehicle

has been parked for a long time

and the battery charge has

decreased, the electric load is

large, the battery fluid tempera-

ture is excessively low or the bat-

tery has deteriorated.

• When the brake booster vacuum

is low.

• When the elapsed time since the

engine was restarted is short.

• When the vehicle is stopped fre-

quently, such as when in a traffic

jam.

• When the engine coolant tem-

perature or transmission fluid tem-

perature is extremely low or high.

• When the vehicle is stopped on a

steep incline.

• When the steering wheel is being

operated.

• When the vehicle is being driven

in a high altitude area.

• When the battery fluid tempera-

ture is extremely low or high.

• For a while after the battery termi-

nals have been disconnected and

reconnected.

● When the engine is stopped by

the Stop & Start system, the

engine will be restarted automati-

cally if any of the following condi-

tions are met:

(To enable the engine to be

stopped by the Stop & Start sys-

tem again, drive the vehicle.)

• The air conditioning system is

turned on. (vehicles without a

manual air conditioning system)

• The windshield defogger is turned

on. (vehicles without a manual air

conditioning system)

• The shift lever is shifted from D.

• The driver’s seat belt is unfas-

tened.

• The driver’s door is opened.

• The driving mode is changed from

normal or Eco drive mode to

another mode.

• The driving mode is changed to

snow mode (AWD models).

• Mud & Sand or Rock & Dirt mode

is selected for Multi-terrain Select

(AWD models).

• The Stop & Start cancel switch is

pressed.

• The steering wheel is operated.

• The accelerator pedal is

depressed.

• The vehicle starts to roll on an

incline.

● When the engine is stopped by

the Stop & Start system, the

engine may restart automatically

in the following situations: (To

enable the engine to be stopped

by the Stop & Start system again,

drive the vehicle.)

• When the brake pedal is pumped

348

4-5. Using the driving support systems

or strongly depressed.

• When the air conditioning system

is being used.

• When a switch of the air condition-

ing system is operated (windshield

defogger switch, etc.).

• If the battery charge becomes low.

■ When the hood is opened

● If the hood is opened while the

engine is stopped by the Stop &

Start system, the engine will stall

and will not be able to be restarted

by the automatic engine start

function. In this case, restart the

engine using the normal engine

starting procedure. (P.193, 194)

● If the hood is closed after the

engine is started with the hood

open, the Stop & Start system will

not operate. Close the hood, turn

the engine switch off, wait 30 sec-

onds or more, and then start the

engine.

■ Air conditioning system opera-

tion while the engine is stopped

by the Stop & Start system

Vehicles with an automatic air con-

ditioning system: When the air con-

ditioning is in automatic mode and

the engine is stopped by the Stop &

Start system, the fan may operate at

a low speed in order to prevent the

temperature in the cabin from

increasing or decreasing or may be

stopped.

To prioritize air conditioning system

performance when the vehicle is

stopped, disable the Stop & Start

system by pressing the Stop & Start

cancel switch.

● If the windshield is fogged up

Turn the windshield defogger on.

(P.511, 517)

If the windshield fogs up frequently,

press the Stop & Start cancel switch

to disable the Stop & Start system.

● If an odor is emitted from the air

conditioning system

• Vehicles with a manual air condi-

tioning system:

If the idling stop time setting is set

to “Extended”, change it to “Stan-

dard”. If an odor is emitted when

the idling stop time setting is set to

“Standard”, press the Stop & Start

cancel switch to deactivate the

Stop & Start system.

• Vehicles with an automatic air

conditioning system:

Press the Stop & Start cancel

switch to deactivate the Stop &

Start system.

■ Changing the idling stop time

with the air conditioning system

The length of time the Stop & Start

system will operate when the air

conditioning system is on can be

changed in of the multi-informa-

tion display (P.94). (The length of

time the Stop & Start system will

operate when the air conditioning

system is off cannot be changed.)

■ Displaying the Stop & Start sys-

tem status

After Start:

Displays the cumulative time that

the engine is stopped by the Stop &

Start system from when the engine

is started until the engine is

stopped.

This item is reset each time the

engine stops.

■ Multi-information display mes-

sages

If the following situations,

and a message may be displayed

on the multi-information display.

● When the engine cannot be

stopped by the Stop & Start sys-

tem

“Press Brake More to Acti-

vate”

349

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

• The brake pedal is not sufficiently

depressed.

 If the brake pedal is depressed

further, the system will operate.

“Non-Dedicated Battery”

• A battery not designed for use

with a Stop & Start system may

have been installed.

 Have the vehicle inspected by

your Toyota dealer.

“Battery Charging”

• The battery charge may be low.

 Stopping of the engine is tempo-

rarily prohibited to prioritize charging

of the battery. After the engine runs

for a certain amount of time, the sys-

tem will be enabled.

• A refresh charge may be occur-

ring (Examples: For a while after

the battery terminals have been

disconnected and reconnected.

For a while after the battery has

been replaced. etc.)

 After a refresh charge for up to

an hour completes, the system can

be operated.

• If displayed continuously for a

long time (more than an hour)

 The battery may be deteriorated.

Contact your Toyota dealer for

details.

“Stop & Start System

Unavailable”

• The Stop & Start system is tempo-

rarily disabled.

 Allow the engine to run for some

time.

• The engine may have been

started with the hood open.

 Close the hood, turn the engine

switch off, wait for 30 seconds or

more, and then start the engine.

“In Preparation”

• The vehicle is being driven in a

high altitude area.

• The brake booster vacuum is low.

 When the brake booster vacuum

reaches a predetermined level, the

system will be enabled.

“For Climate Control”

• The air conditioning system is

being used when the ambient

temperature is high or low.

If the difference between the set

temperature and cabin temperature

becomes small, the system will be

enabled.

• The windshield defogger is on.

● When the engine automatically

restarts while stopped by the Stop

& Start system

“In Preparation”

• The brake pedal has been

depressed further or pumped.

 The system will be enabled after

the engine runs and the brake

booster vacuum reaches a predeter-

mined level.

“For Climate Control”

• The air conditioning system has

been turned on or is being used.

• The windshield defogger has

been turned on.

“Battery Charging”

• The battery charge may be low.

The system will be enabled after

the engine runs to sufficiently

350

4-5. Using the driving support systems

charge the battery.

■ When the buzzer sounds

If the driver’s door is opened when

the engine is stopped by the Stop &

Start system and the shift lever is in

D, a buzzer will sound and the Stop

& Start system indicator will flash. To

stop the buzzer, close the driver’s

door.

■ The Stop & Start system protec-

tion function

● When the volume of the audio

system is excessively high, sound

output from the audio system may

suddenly be cut off in order to

reduce battery consumption. To

prevent the audio system from

being cut off, keep the volume of

audio system at a moderate level.

If the audio system has been cut

off, turn the engine switch off, wait

for 3 seconds or more and then

turn it to ACC or ON to re-enable

the audio system.

● The audio system may not be acti-

vated if the battery terminals are

disconnected and then recon-

nected. If this occurs, turn the

engine switch off and then repeat

the following operation twice to

activate the audio system nor-

mally.

• Turn the engine switch to ON and

then to off.

■ Replacing the battery

P.657

■ If the Stop & Start cancel indica-

tor flashes continuously

The system may be malfunctioning.

Have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

■ If “Stop & Start System Mal-

function Visit Your Dealer” is

displayed on the multi-informa-

tion display

The system may be malfunctioning.

Have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

WARNING

■ When the Stop & Start system

is operating

Make sure to disable the Stop &

Start system while the vehicle is in

a poorly ventilated area.

If not disabled, the engine may be

automatically restarted unexpect-

edly, causing exhaust gases to

collect and enter the vehicle, pos-

sibly resulting in death or a seri-

ous health hazard.

● Do not leave the vehicle while

the engine is stopped by the

Stop & Start system (while the

Stop & Start indicator is on). An

accident may occur due to the

automatic engine start function.

● Depress the brake pedal and

apply the parking brake when

necessary while the engine is

stopped by the Stop & Start sys-

tem (while the Stop & Start indi-

cator is on).

NOTICE

■ To ensure the system oper-

ates correctly

If any of the following situations

occur, the Stop & Start system

may not operate correctly. Have

your vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

● While the driver’s seat belt is

fastened, the driver’s and front

passenger’s seat belt reminder

light flashes.

● Even though the driver’s seat

belt is not fastened, the driver’s

and front passenger’s seat belt

reminder light does not illumi-

nate.

351

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■ FF vehicles/Dynamic

Torque Control AWD vehi-

cles

1 Eco drive mode

Suitable for driving to improve fuel

economy by more smoothly gener-

ating torque in response to acceler-

ator pedal operations compared to

normal mode and restraining air

conditioning system operations

(heating/cooling).

When the switch is pressed while

not in Eco drive mode, the system

switches to Eco drive mode and the

NOTICE

● Even though the driver’s door is

closed, the open door warning

light is illuminated or the interior

light is illuminated when the

interior light switch is in the door

position.

● Even though the driver’s door is

open, the open door warning

light does not illuminate or the

interior light does not illuminate

when the interior light switch is

in the door position.

Driving mode select

switch

The driving modes can be

selected to suit the driving

and usage conditions.

Selecting a driving mode

352

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Eco drive mode indicator illumi-

nates on the multi-information dis-

play.

2 Normal mode

Suitable for normal driving.

The driving mode returns to normal

mode if the switch is pressed while

in Eco drive mode or sport mode.

3 Sport mode

Controls the steering feeling and

engine to create an acceleration

response that is suitable for sporty

driving. Suitable for when crisp

handling is desired, such as when

driving on mountainous roads.

When the switch is pressed while

not in sport mode, the system

switches to sport mode and the

sport mode indicator illuminates on

the multi-information display.

■ Dynamic Torque Vectoring

AWD vehicles

1 Eco drive mode

Suitable for driving to improve fuel

economy by more smoothly gener-

ating torque in response to acceler-

ator pedal operations compared to

normal mode and restraining air

conditioning system operations

(heating/cooling).

When the switch is pressed while

not in Eco drive mode, the system

switches to Eco drive mode and the

Eco drive mode indicator illumi-

nates on the multi-information dis-

play.

2 Normal mode

Suitable for normal driving.

The driving mode returns to normal

mode if the switch is pressed while

in Eco drive mode or sport mode.

3 Sport mode

Controls the steering feeling and

engine to create an acceleration

response that is suitable for sporty

driving. Suitable for when crisp

handling is desired, such as when

driving on mountainous roads.

When the switch is pressed while

not in sport mode, the system

switches to sport mode and the

sport mode indicator illuminates on

the multi-information display.

■ When changing to a driving

mode other than normal mode

● The background color of the multi-

information display changes

according to the selected driving

mode.

● When the speedometer is set to

analog display, the speedometer

display color also changes. (For

vehicles with the 7-inch multi-

information display only)

● Switches to AWD control suitable

for the selected mode. (For

Dynamic Torque Vectoring AWD

vehicles only)

353

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■ Air conditioning system opera-

tion in Eco drive mode

In Eco drive mode, heating/cooling

operations and the fan speed is con-

trolled to improve fuel efficiency.

Perform the following procedures to

increase the air conditioning perfor-

mance.

● Vehicles with automatic air condi-

tioning system: Turn eco air condi-

tioning mode off (P.516)

● Adjust the fan speed (P. 51 0,

516)

● Cancel Eco drive mode

■ Canceling a driving mode

● Sport mode is automatically can-

celed and the driving mode

returns to normal mode when the

engine switch is turned off.

● Normal mode and Eco drive mode

are not canceled until another

driving mode is selected. (Even if

the engine switch is turned off,

normal mode and Eco drive mode

will not be automatically can-

celed.)

Multi-terrain Select

(AWD vehicles)

When driving over muddy,

sandy or rough road sur-

faces, Multi-terrain Select

selects a suitable driving

mode to switch AWD, brake

and drive force control to

perform control suitable for

the road condition.

WARNING

■ Before using Multi-terrain

Select

Make sure to observe the follow-

ing precautions. Failure to

observe these precautions may

result in an unexpected accident.

● Check that the Mud & Sand and

Rock & Dirt indicators are illumi-

nated before driving. Multi-ter-

rain Select will not operate

when the indicators are off.

● Do not rely solely upon the

Multi-terrain Select. This func-

tion is not intended to expand

the limits of the vehicle. If the

system is continuously used for

a long period of time, the load

on related parts increases and

the system may be unable to

operate normally, which may

lead to an accident. Thoroughly

check the road conditions and

driving route before driving, and

drive with caution.

354

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Control that is suitable for the

following road conditions can be

performed by switching to either

of the two modes. Select a

mode that is appropriate for the

road condition.

■ Mud & Sand mode

Suitable for driving on roads

with increased driving resis-

tance such as sandy roads,

muddy roads, etc.

■ Rock & Dirt mode

Suitable for driving in bumpy

road conditions, such as on

unpaved forest roads.

■ Dynamic Torque Control

AWD vehicles

1 Mud & Sand mode

When the switch is pressed while

not in Mud & Sand mode, the sys-

tem switches to Mud & Sand mode

and the Mud & Sand mode indica-

tor, VSC OFF indicator (P.79) and

PCS warning light (P.77) illumi-

nate on the multi-information dis-

play or the instrument cluster.

2 Normal mode

Mode that performs AWD, brake

and drive force control suitable for

driving on general roads. Use nor-

mal mode when not driving off-

road.

The driving mode returns to normal

mode if the switch is pressed while

in Mud & Sand mode or Rock & Dirt

mode.

3 Rock & Dirt mode

WARNING

● The road conditions listed in

“Guidelines for selecting each

mode” are for reference only.

There is a chance that the func-

tion may not be the most appro-

priate in terms of road

conditions such as pitch, slip-

periness, undulation, etc. Thor-

oughly check the road

conditions before driving.

Guidelines for selecting

each mode

Changing the mode

355

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

When the switch is pressed while

not in Rock & Dirt mode, the sys-

tem switches to Rock & Dirt mode

and the Rock & Dirt mode indicator

illuminates on the multi-information

display.

■ Dynamic Torque Vectoring

AWD vehicles

1 Mud & Sand mode

When the switch is turned to the left

while not in Mud & Sand mode, the

system switches to Mud & Sand

mode and the Mud & Sand mode

indicator, VSC OFF indicator

(P.79) and PCS warning light

(P.77) illuminate on the multi-

information display or the instru-

ment cluster.

2 Normal mode

Mode that performs AWD, brake

and drive force control suitable for

driving on general roads. Use nor-

mal mode when not driving off-

road.

The driving mode returns to normal

mode if the switch is pressed while

in Mud & Sand mode or Rock & Dirt

mode.

3 Rock & Dirt mode

When the switch is turned to the

right while not in Rock & Dirt mode,

the system switches to Rock & Dirt

mode and the Rock & Dirt mode

indicator illuminates on the multi-

information display.

■ Multi-terrain Select

● Multi-terrain Select is intended for

use when driving on rough roads.

Drive in normal mode during nor-

mal driving.

● The Mud & Sand and Rock & Dirt

modes control the vehicle so that

it can maximize the drive force

and improve drivability on rough

roads. As a result, fuel efficiency

may diminish when compared to

driving in normal mode.

■ If Mud & Sand or Rock & Dirt

mode is selected

● The background of the multi-infor-

mation display will change follow-

ing the Multi-terrain Select mode.

● The AWD operation status display

will automatically switch on the

multi-information display.

● The color of the switch will change

following the Multi-terrain Select

mode. (For Dynamic Torque Vec-

toring AWD vehicles only)

■ AWD control for Mud & Sand

and Rock & Dirt modes

If the vehicle speed exceeds the

speeds listed below, 4WD control is

performed similar to that performed

in Normal mode, even if Mud &

Sand or Rock & Dirt mode is

selected.

● Mud & Sand mode: Vehicle speed

is approximately 40 km/h (25

mph) or more

● Rock & Dirt mode: Vehicle speed

356

4-5. Using the driving support systems

is approximately 25 km/h (16

mph) or more

If the vehicle speed drops below the

above speeds, the system automati-

cally switches to the 4WD control

suitable for each mode.

■ When Multi-terrain Select brake

control temporarily stops oper-

ating

If Mud & Sand or Rock & Dirt mode

is continuously used for a long

period of time, the brakes may over-

heat, and Multi-terrain Select brake

control may temporarily stop operat-

ing.

● At this time, the buzzer sounds

intermittently and “Traction Con-

trol Turned OFF” is displayed on

the multi-information display.

● If Multi-terrain Select brake control

stops operating, stop the vehicle

in a safe location as soon as pos-

sible

and wait until the system

temperature decreases. Once the

display message on the multi-

information display turns off, the

brake control returns to normal.

Note that normal driving is still

possible even when Multi-terrain

Select brake control is not operat-

ing.

: After stopping the vehicle, do not

stop the engine until the display

message has turned off.

■ When Mud & Sand or Rock &

Dirt mode is canceled

In the following situations, Mud &

Sand mode or Rock & Dirt mode are

automatically canceled even if they

are selected.

● When the driving mode is

changed (P.351)

● When the engine switch is turned

off

■ Driving in Mud & Sand or Rock

& Dirt mode

The following types of situations

may occur, but they are not malfunc-

tions.

● Vibrations may be felt throughout

the vehicle or steering wheel

● Operating noise may be heard

from the engine compartment

■ When an inspection at your

Toyota dealer is necessary

In the following situations, the sys-

tem may be malfunctioning. Have

the vehicle inspected by your Toyota

dealer immediately.

● When the slip indicator light illumi-

nates while Mud & Sand or Rock

& Dirt mode is selected

● When the indicator for each mode

does not illuminate even though

Mud & Sand or Rock & Dirt mode

is selected

357

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■ Dynamic Torque Control

AWD vehicles

Press the snow mode switch.

When the switch is pressed, the

system switches to snow mode and

the snow mode indicator illuminates

on the multi-information display.

When the switch is pressed again,

the snow mode indicator turns off.

■ Dynamic Torque Vectoring

AWD vehicles

Press the snow mode switch.

When the switch is pressed, the

system switches to snow mode and

the snow mode indicator illuminates

on the multi-information display.

When the switch is pressed again,

the snow mode indicator turns off.

■ When changing to snow mode

The background of the multi-infor-

mation display changes.

■ Canceling the snow mode

Snow mode is automatically can-

celed when the engine switch is

turned off or Mud & Sand or Rock &

Dirt mode is selected for Multi-ter-

rain Select.

Snow mode switch

(AWD vehicles)

Snow mode can be selected

to suit the conditions when

driving on slippery road sur-

faces, such as on snow.

System operation

358

4-5. Using the driving support systems

: If equipped

Press the “DAC” switch.

The downhill assist control system

indicator will come on and the sys-

tem will operate.

When the system is in operation,

the slip indicator light will flash, and

the stop lights/high mounted stop

lights will be lit. A sound may also

occur during the operation. This

does not indicate a malfunction.

Press the “DAC” switch while

the system is in operation.

The downhill assist control system

indicator will flash as the system

gradually ceases operation, and will

turn off when the system is fully off.

Press the “DAC” switch while the

downhill assist control system indi-

cator is flashing to start the system

again.

■ Operating tips

The system will operate when the

shift lever is in D or 1 range of S

mode or R.

■ If the downhill assist control

system indicator flashes

● In the following situations, the indi-

cator flashes and the system will

not operate:

• The shift lever is in a position

other than D or 1 range of S mode

or R.

• The accelerator or brake pedal is

depressed.

• The vehicle speed exceeds

approximately 15 mph (25 km/h).

• The brake system overheats.

● In the following situation, the indi-

cator flashes to alert the driver,

but the system will operate:

• The “DAC” switch is turned off

while the system is operating.

The system will gradually ceases

Downhill assist con-

trol system

The downhill assist control

system helps to prevent

excessive speed on steep

downhill slopes.

The system will operate

when the vehicle is traveling

under 25 km/h (15 mph) with

the accelerator and brake

pedals released.

WARNING

■ When using downhill assist

control system

Do not rely overmuch on the

downhill assist control system.

This function does not extend the

vehicle’s performance limitations.

Always thoroughly check the road

conditions, and drive safely.

System operation

Turning off the system

359

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

operation. The indicator will flash

during operation, and then go off

when the system is fully off.

■ When the downhill assist con-

trol system is operated continu-

ously

This may cause the brake actuator

to overheat. In this case, the down-

hill assist control system will stop

operating, a buzzer will sound and

the downhill assist control system

indicator will start flashing. Refrain

from using the system until the

downhill assist control system indi-

cator stays on. (The vehicle can be

driven normally during this time.)

■ Sounds and vibrations caused

by the downhill assist control

system

● A sound may be heard from the

engine compartment when the

engine is started or just after the

vehicle begins to move. This

sound does not indicate that a

malfunction has occurred in down-

hill assist control system.

● Either of the following conditions

may occur when the downhill

assist control system is operating.

None of these are indicators that a

malfunction has occurred.

• Vibrations may be felt through the

vehicle body and steering.

• A motor sound may be heard after

the vehicle comes to a stop.

■ System malfunction

In the following cases, have your

vehicle checked by your Toyota

dealer.

● The downhill assist control system

indicator does not come on when

the engine switch is turned to ON.

● The downhill assist control system

indicator does not come on when

the “DAC” switch is pressed.

● The slip indicator light comes on.

WARNING

■ The system may not operate

on the following surfaces,

which may lead to an acci-

dent causing death or serious

injury

● Slippery surfaces such as wet

or muddy roads

● Icy surface

● Unpaved roads

360

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys-

tem)

Helps to prevent wheel lock

when the brakes are applied

suddenly, or if the brakes are

applied while driving on a slip-

pery road surface

■ Brake assist

Generates an increased level of

braking force after the brake

pedal is depressed when the

system detects a panic stop sit-

uation

■ VSC (Vehicle Stability Con-

trol)

Helps the driver to control skid-

ding when swerving suddenly or

turning on slippery road sur-

faces.

■ Enhanced VSC (Enhanced

Vehicle Stability Control)

Provides cooperative control of

the ABS, TRAC, VSC and EPS.

Helps to maintain directional

stability when swerving on slip-

pery road surfaces by con-

trolling steering performance.

■ Trailer Sway Control

Helps the driver to control trailer

sway by selectively applying

brake pressure for individual

wheels and reducing driving

torque when trailer sway is

detected.

■ TRAC (Traction Control)

Helps to maintain drive power

and prevent the drive wheels

from spinning when starting the

vehicle or accelerating on slip-

pery roads

■ Active Cornering Assist

(ACA)

Helps to prevent the vehicle

from drifting to the outer side by

performing inner wheel brake

control when attempting to

accelerate while turning

■ Hill-start assist control

Helps to reduce the backward

movement of the vehicle when

starting on an uphill

■ EPS (Electric Power Steer-

ing)

Employs an electric motor to

reduce the amount of effort

Driving assist systems

To keep driving safety and

performance, the following

systems operate automati-

cally in response to various

driving situations. Be

aware, however, that these

systems are supplementary

and should not be relied

upon too heavily when oper-

ating the vehicle.

Summary of the driving

assist systems

361

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

needed to turn the steering

wheel

■ Dynamic Torque Control

AWD system (if equipped)

Automatically switches from

front-wheel drive to all-wheel

drive (AWD) according to the

driving conditions, helping to

ensure reliable handling and

stability. Examples of conditions

where the system will switch to

AWD are when cornering, going

uphill, starting off or accelerat-

ing, and when the road surface

is slippery due to snow, rain, etc.

■ Dynamic Torque Vectoring

AWD system (if equipped)

Automatically switches from

front wheel drive to all-wheel

drive (AWD) according to the

driving conditions, helping to

ensure reliable handling and

stability. Examples of conditions

where the system will switch to

AWD are when cornering, going

uphill, starting off or accelerat-

ing, and when the road surface

is slippery due to snow, rain, etc.

Also, when the vehicle is corner-

ing, the drive torque distribution

between the front and rear

wheels and between the rear left

and right wheels is precisely

controlled to improve drivability

and stability.

■ The Secondary Collision

Brake

When the SRS airbag sensor

detects a collision and the sys-

tem operates, the brakes and

brake lights are automatically

controlled to reduce the vehicle

speed and help reduce the pos-

sibility of further damage due to

a secondary collision.

■ When the TRAC/VSC/Trailer

Sway Control systems are oper-

ating

The slip indicator light will flash

while the TRAC/VSC/Trailer Sway

Control systems are operating.

■ Disabling the TRAC system

If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt

or snow, the TRAC system may

reduce power from the engine to the

wheels.

Pressing to turn the system off

may make it easier for you to rock

the vehicle in order to free it.

To turn the TRAC system off, quickly

press and release .

“Traction Control Turned OFF” will

be shown on the multi-information

display.

Press again to turn the system

362

4-5. Using the driving support systems

back on.

■ Turning off the

TRAC/VSC/Trailer Sway Con-

trol systems

To turn the TRAC/VSC/Trailer Sway

Control systems off, press and hold

for more than 3 seconds while

the vehicle is stopped.

The VSC OFF indicator light will

come on and the “Traction Control

Turned OFF” will be shown on the

multi-information display.

Press again to turn the systems

back on.

: PCS will also be disabled (only

Pre-Collision warning is avail-

able). The PCS warning light will

come on and a message will be

displayed on the multi-information

display. (P.236)

■ When the message is dis-

played on the multi-information

display showing that TRAC has

been disabled even if has

not been pressed

TRAC is temporary deactivated. If

the information continues to show,

contact your Toyota dealer.

■ Operating conditions of hill-

start assist control

When the following four conditions

are met, the hill-start assist control

will operate:

● The shift lever is in a position

other than P or N (when starting

off forward/backward on an

upward incline).

● The vehicle is stopped.

● The accelerator pedal is not

depressed.

● The parking brake is not engaged.

■ Automatic system cancelation

of hill-start assist control

The hill-start assist control will turn

off in any of the following situations:

● The shift lever is shifted to P or N.

● The accelerator pedal is

depressed.

● The parking brake is engaged.

● No more than 2 seconds have

elapsed after the brake pedal is

released.

■ Sounds and vibrations caused

by the ABS, brake assist, VSC,

Trailer Sway Control, TRAC and

hill-start assist control systems

● A sound may be heard from the

engine compartment when the

brake pedal is depressed repeat-

edly, when the engine is started or

just after the vehicle begins to

move. This sound does not indi-

cate that a malfunction has

occurred in any of these systems.

● Any of the following conditions

may occur when the above sys-

tems are operating. None of these

indicates that a malfunction has

occurred.

• Vibrations may be felt through the

vehicle body and steering.

• A motor sound may be heard also

after the vehicle comes to a stop.

• The brake pedal may pulsate

slightly after the ABS is activated.

• The brake pedal may move down

slightly after the ABS is activated.

■ Active Cornering Assist opera-

tion sounds and vibrations

When the Active Cornering Assist is

operated, operation sounds and

vibrations may be generated from

the brake system, but this is not a

malfunction.

■ AWD system operation sounds

and vibrations when switching

between AWD and front wheel

drive

When the vehicle switches from

AWD to front wheel drive and vice

versa, operation sounds and vibra-

tions may be generated, but this is

not a malfunction.

363

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■ EPS operation sound

When the steering wheel is oper-

ated, a motor sound (whirring

sound) may be heard. This does not

indicate a malfunction.

■ Automatic reactivation of

TRAC, Trailer Sway Control and

VSC systems

After turning the TRAC, Trailer

Sway Control and VSC systems off,

the systems will be automatically re-

enabled in the following situations:

● When the engine switch is turned

off.

● If only the TRAC system is turned

off, the TRAC will turn on when

vehicle speed increases.

If both the TRAC and VSC sys-

tems are turned off, automatic re-

enabling will not occur when vehi-

cle speed increases.

■ Operating conditions of Active

Cornering Assist

The system operates when the fol-

lowing occurs.

● TRAC/VSC can operate

● The driver is attempting to accel-

erate while turning

● The system detects that the vehi-

cle is drifting to the outer side

● The brake pedal is released

■ Reduced effectiveness of the

EPS system

The effectiveness of the EPS sys-

tem is reduced to prevent the sys-

tem from overheating when there is

frequent steering input over an

extended period of time. The steer-

ing wheel may feel heavy as a

result. Should this occur, refrain

from excessive steering input or

stop the vehicle and turn the engine

off. The EPS system should return

to normal within 10 minutes.

■ Secondary Collision Brake

operating conditions

The system operates when the SRS

airbag sensor detects a collision

while the vehicle is in motion. How-

ever, the system does not operate in

any of the following situations.

● The vehicle speed is below 6 mph

(10 km/h)

● Components are damaged

■ Secondary Collision Brake

automatic cancellation

The system is automatically can-

celed in any of the following situa-

tions.

● The vehicle speed drops below

approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)

● A certain amount of time elapses

during operation

● The accelerator pedal is

depressed a large amount

364

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ If a message about AWD is shown on the multi-information display

(AWD models)

Perform the following actions.

: After stopping the vehicle, do not stop the engine until the display mes-

sage has turned off.

Message Details/Actions

“AWD System Over-

heated Switching to

2WD Mode”

AWD system is overheating.

 Perform the following actions.

• Reduce the vehicle speed until the message

disappears.

• Stop the vehicle in a safe place and let the

engine idle.

Once the display message on the multi-informa-

tion display turns off, there is no problem continu-

ing to drive.

If the message does not disappear, have your

vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer immedi-

ately.

“AWD System Over-

heated 2WD Mode

Engaged”

The vehicle switched from all-wheel drive (AWD)

to front wheel drive due to overheating.

 Perform the following actions.

• Reduce the vehicle speed until the message

disappears.

• Stop the vehicle in a safe place and let the

engine idle.

Once the display message on the multi-informa-

tion display turns off, the AWD system returns to

normal.

If the message does not disappear, have your

vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer immedi-

ately.

“AWD System Malfunc-

tion 2WD Mode

Engaged Visit Your

Dealer”

A malfunction occurred in the AWD system.

 Have your vehicle checked by your Toyota

dealer immediately.

365

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

WARNING

■ The ABS does not operate

effectively when

● The limits of tire gripping perfor-

mance have been exceeded

(such as excessively worn tires

on a snow covered road).

● The vehicle hydroplanes while

driving at high speed on wet or

slick roads.

■ Stopping distance when the

ABS is operating may exceed

that of normal conditions

The ABS is not designed to

shorten the vehicle’s stopping dis-

tance. Always maintain a safe dis-

tance from the vehicle in front of

you, especially in the following sit-

uations:

● When driving on dirt, gravel or

snow-covered roads

● When driving with tire chains

● When driving over bumps in the

road

● When driving over roads with

potholes or uneven surfaces

■ TRAC/VSC may not operate

effectively when

Directional control and power may

not be achievable while driving on

slippery road surfaces, even if the

TRAC/VSC system is operating.

Drive the vehicle carefully in con-

ditions where stability and power

may be lost.

■ Active Cornering Assist does

not operate effectively when

● Do not overly rely on Active

Cornering Assist. Active Corner-

ing Assist may not operate

effectively when accelerating

down slopes or driving on slip-

pery road surfaces.

● When Active Cornering Assist

frequently operates, Active Cor-

nering Assist may temporarily

stop operating to ensure proper

operation of the brakes, TRAC

and VSC.

■ Hill-start assist control does

not operate effectively when

● Do not overly rely on hill-start

assist control. Hill-start assist

control may not operate effec-

tively on steep inclines and

roads covered with ice.

● Unlike the parking brake, hill-

start assist control is not

intended to hold the vehicle sta-

tionary for an extended period

of time. Do not attempt to use

hill-start assist control to hold

the vehicle on an incline, as

doing so may lead to an acci-

dent.

■ When the TRAC/VSC/Trailer

Sway Control is activated

The slip indicator light flashes.

Always drive carefully. Reckless

driving may cause an accident.

Exercise particular care when the

indicator light flashes.

■ When the TRAC/VSC/Trailer

Sway Control systems are

turned off

Be especially careful and drive at

a speed appropriate to the road

conditions. As these are the sys-

tems to help ensure vehicle stabil-

ity and driving force, do not turn

the TRAC/VSC/Trailer Sway Con-

trol systems off unless necessary.

Trailer Sway Control is part of the

VSC system and will not operate

if VSC is turned off or experiences

a malfunction.

366

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING

■ Dynamic Torque Vectoring

AWD system (if equipped)

The cornering performance of the

newly developed AWD system

has been improved. However, do

not overly rely on the system and

drive with caution.

■ Replacing tires

Make sure that all tires are of the

specified size, brand, tread pat-

tern and total load capacity. In

addition, make sure that the tires

are inflated to the recommended

tire inflation pressure level.

The ABS, TRAC and VSC/Trailer

Sway Control systems will not

function correctly if different tires

are installed on the vehicle.

Contact your Toyota dealer for fur-

ther information when replacing

tires or wheels.

■ Handling of tires and the sus-

pension

Using tires with any kind of prob-

lem or modifying the suspension

will affect the driving assist sys-

tems, and may cause a system to

malfunction.

■ Trailer Sway Control precau-

tion

The Trailer Sway Control system

is not able to reduce trailer sway

in all situations. Depending on

many factors such as the condi-

tions of the vehicle, trailer, road

surface and driving environment,

the Trailer Sway Control system

may not be effective. Refer to

your trailer owner’s manual for

information on how to tow your

trailer properly.

■ If trailer sway occurs

Observe the following precau-

tions.

Failing to do so may cause death

or serious injury.

● Firmly grip the steering wheel.

Steer straight ahead. Do not try

to control trailer swaying by

turning the steering wheel.

● Begin releasing the accelerator

pedal immediately but very

gradually to reduce speed.

Do not increase speed. Do not

apply vehicle brakes.

If you make no extreme correction

with the steering or brakes, your

vehicle and trailer should stabi-

lize. (P.179)

■ Secondary Collision Brake

Do not rely solely upon the Sec-

ondary Collision Brake. This sys-

tem is designed to help reduce

the possibility of further damage

due to a secondary collision, how-

ever, that effect changes accord-

ing to various conditions. Overly

relying on the system may result

in death or serious injury.

367

4-6. Driving tips

Driving

4-6 .Driv ing t ips

 Use fluids that are appropriate

to the prevailing outside tem-

peratures.

• Engine oil

• Engine coolant

• Washer fluid

 Have a service technician

inspect the condition of the

battery.

 Have the vehicle fitted with

four snow tires or purchase a

set of tire chains for the front

tires.

Ensure that all tires are the same

size and brand, and that chains

match the size of the tires.

: Tire chains cannot be mounted

on vehicles with 235/55R19 tires.

Winter driving tips

Carry out the necessary

preparations and inspec-

tions before driving the

vehicle in winter. Always

drive the vehicle in a man-

ner appropriate to the pre-

vailing weather conditions.

Pre-winter preparations

WARNING

■ Driving with snow tires

Observe the following precautions

to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failure to do so may result in a

loss of vehicle control and cause

death or serious injury.

● Use tires of the specified size.

● Maintain the recommended

level of air pressure.

● Do not drive in excess of 75

mph (120 km/h), regardless of

the type of snow tires being

used.

● Use snow tires on all, not just

some wheels.

■ Driving with tire chains

(except 235/55R19 tires)

Observe the following precautions

to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failure to do so may result in the

vehicle being unable to be driven

safely, and may cause death or

serious injury.

● Do not drive in excess of the

speed limit specified for the tire

chains being used, or 30 mph

(50 km/h), whichever is lower.

● Avoid driving on bumpy road

surfaces or over potholes.

● Avoid sudden acceleration,

abrupt steering, sudden brak-

ing and shifting operations that

cause sudden engine braking.

● Slow down sufficiently before

entering a curve to ensure that

vehicle control is maintained.

● Do not use LTA (Lane Tracing

Assist) system.

NOTICE

■ Repairing or replacing snow

tires (vehicles with tire pres-

sure warning system)

Request repairs or replacement of

snow tires from your Toyota

dealer or legitimate tire retailers.

This is because the removal and

attachment of snow tires affects

the operation of the tire pressure

warning valves and transmitters.

368

4-6. Driving tips

Perform the following according

to the driving conditions:

 Do not try to forcibly open a

window or move a wiper that

is frozen. Pour warm water

over the frozen area to melt

the ice. Wipe away the water

immediately to prevent it from

freezing.

 To ensure proper operation of

the climate control system

fan, remove any snow that

has accumulated on the air

inlet vents in front of the wind-

shield.

 Check for and remove any

excess ice or snow that may

have accumulated on the

exterior lights, vehicle’s roof,

chassis, around the tires or on

the brakes.

 Remove any snow or mud

from the bottom of your shoes

before getting in the vehicle.

Accelerate the vehicle slowly,

keep a safe distance between

you and the vehicle ahead, and

drive at a reduced speed suit-

able to road conditions.

 Park the vehicle and move

the shift lever to P without set-

ting the parking brake. The

parking brake may freeze up,

preventing it from being

released. If the vehicle is

parked without setting the

parking brake, make sure to

block the wheels.

Failure to do so may be dan-

gerous because it may cause

the vehicle to move unexpect-

edly, possibly leading to an

accident.

When the parking brake is in

automatic mode, release the

parking brake after shifting

the shift lever to P. (P.203)

 If the vehicle is left parked

with the brakes damp in cold

temperatures, there is a pos-

sibility of the brakes freezing.

 If the vehicle is parked without

setting the parking brake,

confirm that the shift lever

cannot be moved out of P

: The shift lever will be locked if it is

attempted to be shifted from P to

any other position without

depressing the brake pedal. If the

shift lever can be shifted from P,

there may be a problem with the

shift lock system. Have the vehi-

cle inspected by your Toyota

dealer immediately.

Before driving the vehicle

When driving the vehicle

When parking the vehicle

369

4-6. Driving tips

Driving

 Vehicles without 235/55R19

tires

Use the correct tire chain size

when mounting the tire chains.

Chain size is regulated for each

tire size.

Side chain:

0.12 in. (3 mm) in diameter

0.39 in. (10 mm) in width

1.18 in. (30 mm) in length

Cross chain:

0.16 in. (4 mm) in diameter

0.55 in. (14 mm) in width

0.98 in. (25 mm) in length

 Vehicles with 235/55R19 tires

Tire chains cannot be mounted.

Snow tires should be used

instead.

Regulations regarding the use

of tire chains vary depending on

location and type of road.

Always check local regulations

before installing chains.

■ Tire chain installation

Observe the following precautions

when installing and removing

chains:

● Install and remove tire chains in a

safe location.

● Install tire chains on the front tires

only. Do not install tire chains on

the rear tires.

● Install tire chains on front tires as

tightly as possible. Retighten

chains after driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile

(0.5 - 1.0 km).

● Install tire chains following the

instructions provided with the tire

chains.

WARNING

■ When parking the vehicle

When parking the vehicle without

applying the parking brake, make

sure to chock the wheels. If you

do not chock the wheels, the vehi-

cle may move unexpectedly, pos-

sibly resulting in an accident.

Selecting tire chains

Regulations on the use of

tire chains (except

235/55R19 tires)

NOTICE

■ Fitting tire chains (vehicles

with tire pressure warning

system)

The tire pressure warning valves

and transmitters may not function

correctly when tire chains are fit-

ted.

370

4-6. Driving tips

 Specific design characteris-

tics give it a higher center of

gravity than ordinary passen-

ger cars. This vehicle design

feature causes this type of

vehicle to be more likely to

rollover. And, utility vehicles

have a significantly higher

rollover rate than other types

of vehicles.

 An advantage of the higher

ground clearance is a better

view of the road allowing you

to anticipate problems.

 It is not designed for corner-

ing at the same speeds as

ordinary passenger cars any

more than low-slung sports

cars are designed to perform

satisfactorily under off-road

conditions. Therefore, sharp

turns at excessive speeds

may cause the vehicle to roll-

over.

When driving your vehicle off-

Utility vehicle precau-

tions

This vehicle belongs to the

utility vehicle class, which

has higher ground clear-

ance and narrower tread in

relation to the height of its

center of gravity to make it

capable of performing in a

wide variety of off-road

applications.

Utility vehicle feature

WARNING

■ Utility vehicle precautions

Always observe the following pre-

cautions to minimize the risk of

death, serious injury or damage to

your vehicle:

● In a rollover crash, an unbelted

person is significantly more

likely to die than a person wear-

ing a seat belt. Therefore, the

driver and all passengers

should always fasten their seat

belts.

● Avoid sharp turns or abrupt

maneuvers, if at all possible.

Failure to operate this vehicle

correctly may result in loss of

control or vehicle rollover caus-

ing death or serious injury.

● Loading cargo on the roof lug-

gage carrier (if equipped) will

make the center of the vehicle

gravity higher. Avoid high

speeds, sudden starts, sharp

turns, sudden braking or abrupt

maneuvers, otherwise it may

result in loss of control or vehi-

cle rollover due to failure to

operate this vehicle correctly.

● Always slow down in gusty

crosswinds. Because of its pro-

file and higher center of gravity,

your vehicle is more sensitive to

side winds than an ordinary

passenger car. Slowing down

will allow you to have better

control.

● Do not drive horizontally across

steep slopes. Driving straight up

or straight down is preferred.

Your vehicle (or any similar off-

road vehicle) can tip over side-

ways much more easily than

forward or backward.

Off-road driving

371

4-6. Driving tips

Driving

road, please observe the follow-

ing precautions to ensure your

driving enjoyment and to help

prevent the closure of areas to

off-road vehicles:

 Drive your vehicle only in

areas where off-road vehicles

are permitted to travel.

 Respect private property. Get

owner’s permission before

entering private property.

 Do not enter areas that are

closed. Honor gates, barriers

and signs that restrict travel.

 Stay on established roads.

When conditions are wet,

driving techniques should be

changed or travel delayed to

prevent damage to roads.

■ Additional information for off-

road driving

 For owners in U.S. mainland,

Hawaii and Puerto Rico:

To obtain additional information per-

taining to driving your vehicle off-

road, consult the following organiza-

tions:

• State and Local Parks and Recre-

ation Departments

• State Motor Vehicle Bureau

• Recreational Vehicle Clubs

• U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of

Land Management

WARNING

■ Off-road driving precautions

Always observe the following pre-

cautions to minimize the risk of

death, serious injury or damage to

your vehicle:

● Drive carefully when off the

road. Do not take unnecessary

risks by driving in dangerous

places.

● Do not grip the steering wheel

spokes when driving off-road. A

bad bump could jerk the wheel

and injure your hands. Keep

both hands and especially your

thumbs on the outside of the

rim.

● Always check your brakes for

effectiveness immediately after

driving in sand, mud, water or

snow.

● After driving through tall grass,

mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc.,

check that there is no grass,

bush, paper, rags, stone, sand,

etc. adhering or trapped on the

underbody. Clear off any such

matter from the underbody. If

the vehicle is used with these

materials trapped or adhering to

the underbody, a breakdown or

fire could occur.

372

4-6. Driving tips

WARNING

● When driving off-road or in rug-

ged terrain, do not drive at

excessive speeds, jump, make

sharp turns, strike objects, etc.

This may cause loss of control

or vehicle rollover causing

death or serious injury. You are

also risking expensive damage

to your vehicle’s suspension

and chassis.

NOTICE

■ To prevent the water damage

Take all necessary safety mea-

sures to ensure that water dam-

age to the engine or other

components does not occur.

● Water entering the engine air

intake will cause severe engine

damage.

● Water entering the automatic

transmission will cause deterio-

ration in shift quality, locking up

of your transmission accompa-

nied by vibration, and ultimately

damage.

● Water can wash the grease

from wheel bearings, causing

rusting and premature failure,

and may also enter the differen-

tials, transmission and transfer

case (AWD models), reducing

the gear oil’s lubricating quali-

ties.

■ When you drive through

water

If driving through water, such as

when crossing shallow streams,

first check the depth of the water

and the bottom of the riverbed for

firmness. Drive slowly and avoid

deep water.

■ Inspection after off-road driv-

ing

● Sand and mud that has accu-

mulated around brake discs

may affect braking efficiency

and may damage brake system

components.

● Always perform a maintenance

inspection after each day of off-

road driving that has taken you

through rough terrain, sand,

mud, or water. For scheduled

maintenance information, refer

to the “Scheduled Maintenance

Guide” or “Owner’s Manual

Supplement”.

373

Audio

5-1. Basic function

Buttons overview......... 375

Menu screen ............... 377

Status icon .................. 378

“Setup” screen ............ 380

5-2. Basic information before

operation

Initial screen................ 381

Touch screen............... 382

Home screen............... 384

Entering letters and num-

bers/list screen operation

.................................. 385

Screen adjustment...... 388

Linking multi-information

display and the system

.................................. 389

5-3. Connectivity settings

Registering/Connecting a

Bluetooth

device ..... 390

Setting Bluetooth

details

.................................. 394

Wi-Fi

Hotspot............ 402

5-4. Apple CarPlay/Android

Auto

Apple CarPlay

/Android

Auto........................... 407

5-5. Other settings

General settings.......... 414

Voice settings.............. 418

Vehicle settings........... 419

5-6. Using the audio/visual

system

Quick reference........... 420

Some basics................421

5-7. Radio operation

AM/FM/SiriusXM (SXM)

radio .......................... 425

5-8. Media operation

USB memory...............432

iPod/iPhone (Apple

CarPlay) .................... 434

Android Auto................ 437

Bluetooth

audio......... 438

5-9. Audio/visual remote con-

trols

Steering switches........ 442

5-10.Audio settings

Setup...........................444

5-11.Tips for operating the

audio/visual system

Operating information..446

5-12.Voice command system

operation

Voice command system

.................................. 458

Command list.............. 461

5-13.Phone operation (Hands-

free system for cellular

phones)

Quick reference........... 465

Some basics................466

374

Placing a call using the

Bluetooth

hands-free sys-

tem............................ 470

Receiving a call using the

Bluetooth

hands-free sys-

tem............................ 473

Talking on the Bluetooth

hands-free system..... 474

Bluetooth

phone message

function...................... 476

5-14.Phone settings

Setup........................... 481

5-15.What to do if...

(Bluetooth

)

Troubleshooting .......... 491

5-16.Connected Services over-

view

Connected Services.... 495

Type A: Function achieved

by using a smartphone or

DCM.......................... 496

Type B: Function achieved

by using DCM and the sys-

tem............................ 498

Type C: Function achieved

by using DCM............ 499

Type D: Function achieved

by using DCM and a

smartphone............... 502

5-17.Connected Services oper-

ation

Toyota Apps ................ 504

5-18.Setup

Toyota Apps settings ... 508

375

5-1. Basic function

Audio

5-1.Basic f unction

: Vehicles with Audio only

For details about Audio Plus or Premium Audio, refer to “Navigation and

Multimedia System Owner’s Manual”.

By touching the screen with your finger, you can control the

selected functions. (P.382, 383)

Press to seek up or down for a radio station or to access a

desired track/file. (P.425, 432, 434, 438)

Press to access the Bluetooth

hands-free system. (P.465)

• When an Apple CarPlay connection is established, press to display the

Phone application screen.

Press to display the Toyota Apps screen.

*1, 2

(P.504)

Turn to change the radio station or skip to the next or previous

track/file. (P.425, 432, 434, 438)

Press to turn the audio/visual system on and off, and turn it to

adjust the volume. Press and hold to restart the system. (P.381,

421)

Buttons overview

Operations of each part

376

5-1. Basic function

When an Apple CarPlay/Android Auto connection is established,

press to display the Maps application screen.

Press to display the audio/visual system screen. (420, 421)

Press to display the “Menu” screen. (P.377)

Press to display the home screen. (P.384)

:This function is not made available in some countries or areas.

:When an Apple CarPlay/Android Auto connection is established, this

function will be unavailable.

● The screen shots in this document

and the actual screens of the sys-

tem differ depending on whether

the functions and/or a contract

existed.

WARNING

● For safety, the driver should not

operate the system while

he/she is driving. Insufficient

attention to the road and traffic

may cause an accident.

377

5-1. Basic function

Audio

Press the “MENU” button to display the “Menu” screen.

Displays the clock. Select to display the clock settings screen.

(P.415)

Select to display the audio control screen. (P.420)

Select to display the hands-free operation screen. (P.465)

• When an Apple CarPlay connection is established, select to display the

Phone application screen.

Select to display the Toyota Apps screen.

*1, 2

(P.504)

When an Apple CarPlay/Android Auto connection is established

and this button displays “Apple CarPlay”/“Android Auto”, select to

display the home screen of Apple CarPlay/Android Auto.

(P.407)

Select to display the fuel consumption screen. (P.9 9 )

Select to display the “Setup” screen. (P.380)

Select to adjust the contrast, brightness, etc. of the display.

(P.388)

:This function is not made available in some countries or areas.

:When an Apple CarPlay/Android Auto connection is established, this

function will be unavailable.

Menu screen

Menu screen operation

378

5-1. Basic function

Indicate during data commu-

nication performed via Data

Communication Module

(DCM)

The reception level of Data

Communication Module

(DCM) display

(P.378)

The reception level of the

connected phone display

(P.378)

Remaining battery charge

display (P.379)

Bluetooth

phone connection

condition display (P. 37 9 )

Wi-Fi

connection condition

display

*1, 2

(P.402)

:Vehicles equipped with DCM

:This function is not made avail-

able in some countries or areas.

● The number of status icons that

can be displayed differs depend-

ing on the displayed screen.

The level of reception does not

always correspond with the level

displayed on the cellular phone.

The level of reception may not

be displayed depending on the

phone you have.

When the cellular phone is out

of the service area or in a place

inaccessible by radio waves,

/ is displayed.

“Rm” is displayed when receiv-

ing in a roaming area. While

roaming, display “Rm” top-left

on the icon.

The receiving area may not be

displayed depending on the type

of Bluetooth

phone you have.

 While connected with cellular

phone

Status icon

Status icons are displayed

at the top of the screen.

Status icon explanation

Reception level display

Reception Level Indicators

Poor

Excellent

379

5-1. Basic function

Audio

 While using Data Communi-

cation Module (DCM)

 While using Wi-Fi

Hotspot

● When Wi-Fi

Hotspot is off, no

item is displayed.

The amount displayed does not

always correspond with the

amount displayed on the

Bluetooth

device.

The amount of battery charge

left may not be displayed

depending on the type of the

Bluetooth

device connected.

This system does not have a

charging function.

An antenna for the Bluetooth

connection is built into the

instrument panel.

The condition of the Bluetooth

connection may deteriorate and

the system may not function

when a Bluetooth

phone is

used in the following conditions

and/or places:

The cellular phone is obstructed

by certain objects (such as

when it is behind the seat or in

the glove box or console box).

The cellular phone is touching or

is covered with metal materials.

Leave the Bluetooth

phone in a

place where the condition of the

Bluetooth

connection is good.

Reception Level Indicators

Poor

Excellent

Reception Level Indicators

No connection

Connected

Remaining battery charge

display

Remaining

charge

Indicators

Empty

Full

Bluetooth

connection

condition display

Indicators Conditions

(Blue)

Indicates that the con-

dition of the

Bluetooth

connection

is good.

(Gray)

While in this condition,

sound quality during

phone calls may dete-

riorate.

Indicates that the cel-

lular phone is not con-

nected via Bluetooth

380

5-1. Basic function

Press the “MENU” button, then

select “Setup” to display the

“Setup” screen. The items

shown on the “Setup” screen

can be set.

Select to change the selected

language, operation sound

settings, etc. (P.414)

Select to set Bluetooth

device and Bluetooth

sys-

tem settings. (P.394)

Select to set audio settings.

(P.444)

Select to set the phone

sound, contacts, message

settings, etc. (P.481)

Select to set the voice set-

tings. (P.41 8 )

Select to set vehicle informa-

tion. (P.419)

Select to set Wi-Fi

connec-

tion settings.

*1, 2

(P.403)

Select to set Toyota Apps

settings.

(P.508)

:Vehicles equipped with DCM

:This function is not made avail-

able in some countries or areas.

“Setup” screen

381

5-2. Basic information before operation

Audio

5-2.Basic inf ormation before opera tion

After a few seconds, the caution

screen will be displayed.

After about 5 seconds or select-

ing “Continue”, the caution

screen automatically switches to

the next screen.

When system response is

extremely slow, the system can

be restarted.

1 Press and hold the “POWER

VOLUME” knob for 3 sec-

onds or more.

Initial screen

When the engine switch is

turned to ACC or ON, the

initial screen will be dis-

played and the system will

begin operating.

Caution screen

WARNING

● When the vehicle is stopped

with the engine running, always

apply the parking brake for

safety.

Restarting the system

382

5-2. Basic information before operation

Operations are performed by touching the touch screen directly with

your finger.

:The above operations may not be performed on all screens.

:The Apple CarPlay Maps application is not compatible with pinch multi-

touch gestures.

Touch screen

Touch screen gestures

Operation method Outline Main use

 Touch

Quickly touch and

release once.

 Selecting an item

on the screen

 Drag

Touch the screen

with your finger,

and move the

screen to the

desired position.

 Scrolling the lists

 Flick

Quickly move the

screen by flicking

with your finger.

 Scrolling the main

screen page

 Pinch in/Pinch

out

Slide fingers toward

each other or apart

on the screen.

 Changing the

scale of the

map

383

5-2. Basic information before operation

Audio

● Flick operations may not be performed smoothly at high altitudes.

● If the system does not respond to

touching a screen button, move

your finger away from the screen

and then touch it again.

● Dimmed screen buttons cannot be

operated.

● The displayed image may become

darker and moving images may

be slightly distorted when the

screen is cold.

● In extremely cold conditions, the

screen may not be displayed and

the data input by a user may be

deleted. Also, the screen buttons

may be harder than usual to

depress.

● When you look at the screen

through polarized material such as

polarized sunglasses, the screen

may be dark and hard to see. If

so, look at the screen from differ-

ent angles, adjust the screen set-

tings on the display settings

screen or take off your sun-

glasses.

● When is displayed on the

screen, select to return to the

previous screen.

The operable areas of the

capacitive touch screen buttons

use capacitive touch sensors

and may not operate properly in

the following situations:

 If the screen is dirty or wet

 If a source of strong electro-

magnetic waves is brought

near the screen

 If a glove is worn during oper-

ation

 If the screen is touched by a

fingernail

 If a stylus is used to operate

the buttons

 If your palm touches the oper-

able area of another button

during operation

 If a button is touched quickly

 If the operable part of a

capacitive touch screen but-

ton is touched by or covered

Touch screen operation

This system is operated

mainly by the buttons on

the screen. (Referred to as

screen buttons in this man-

ual.)

When a screen button is

touched, a beep sounds. (To

set the beep sound: P.414)

NOTICE

● To prevent damaging the

screen, lightly touch the screen

buttons with your finger.

● Do not use objects other than

your finger to touch the screen.

● Wipe off fingerprints using a

glass cleaning cloth. Do not use

chemical cleaners to clean the

screen, as they may damage

the touch screen.

Capacitive touch screen

buttons

384

5-2. Basic information before operation

with a metal object, such as

the following, it may not oper-

ate properly:

• Magnetic isolation cards

• Metallic foil, such as the inner

packaging of a cigarette box

• Metallic wallets or bags

•Coins

• Discs, such as a CD or DVD

 If the operable part of a

capacitive touch screen but-

ton is wiped, it may operate

unintentionally.

 If the capacitive touch screen

button is being touched when

the engine switch is changed

to ACC or ON, the button may

not operate properly. In this

case, remove anything touch-

ing the button, turn the engine

switch off and then turn it to

ACC or ON, or restart the sys-

tem by press and hold the

“POWER VOLUME” knob for

3 seconds or more.

● Capacitive touch screen button

sensor sensitivity can be adjusted.

(P.414)

1 Press the “HOME” button.

2 Check that the home screen

is displayed.

 Selecting a screen will display

it full screen.

● The display information and area

on the home screen can be cus-

tomized.

● The home screen can be set to

several types of split layouts

Home screen

On the home screen, multi-

ple screens, such as the

audio/visual system screen,

hands-free screen and clock

screen, can be displayed

simultaneously.

Home screen operation

385

5-2. Basic information before operation

Audio

The display information/area on

the home screen and the home

screen layout can be changed.

1 Press the “MENU” button.

2 Select “Setup”.

 If the general settings screen

is not displayed, select “Gen-

eral”.

3 Select “Customize Home

Screen”.

4 Select the items to be set.

Select to change the display

information and area on the

home screen.

Select to change the home

screen layout.

When searching by a name or

entering data, letters and num-

bers can be entered via the

screen.

Text field. Entered charac-

ter(s) will be displayed.

Select to erase one charac-

ter.

Select and hold to continue

erasing characters.

Select to move the cursor.

Select to choose predictive

text candidate for entered

text. (P.386)

Select to display a list of pre-

dictive text candidates when

there is more than one.

(P.386)

Select to enter desired char-

acters.

Select to enter characters in

lower case or in upper case.

Customizing the home

screen

Entering letters and

numbers/list screen

operation

Entering letters and num-

bers

386

5-2. Basic information before operation

Select to change character

types. (P.386)

Select to make a space on

cursor.

● Keyboard layout can be changed.

(P.414)

1 Select “Change Type”.

2 Select the desired character.

● Depending on the screen being

displayed, it may not be possible

to change keyboard characters.

When text is input, the system

predicts the text that may com-

plete the currently unconfirmed

text and displays predictive

replacement candidates that

match the beginning of the text.

1 Input text.

2 Select the desired candidate.

 To select a candidate that is

not displayed, select , and

then select the desired predic-

tive replacement candidate.

The list screen may be dis-

played after entering characters.

When a list is displayed, use the

appropriate screen button to

scroll through the list.

Changing character type

Displaying predictive text

candidates

List screen

Scrolling list screen

387

5-2. Basic information before operation

Audio

To scroll up/down the list,

flick the list up/down.

Select to skip to the next or

previous page. Select and

hold or to scroll

through the displayed list.

Indicates the position of the

displayed entries in the entire

list.

To scroll up/down pages,

drag the bar.

● If appears to the right of an

item name, the complete name is

too long to display.

• Select to scroll to the end of

the name.

• Select to move to the begin-

ning of the name.

Items are displayed in the list

with the most similar results of

the search at the top.

1 Select .

2 Input text.

3 Select “Search”.

4 The list is displayed.

Searching a list

388

5-2. Basic information before operation

1 Press the “MENU” button.

2 Select “Display”.

3 Select the desired items to

be set.

Select to turn the screen off.

To turn it on, press any but-

ton.

Select to turn day mode

on/off. (P.388)

Select to adjust the screen

display. (P.388)

Select to adjust the camera

display.

● When the screen is viewed

through polarized sunglasses, a

rainbow pattern may appear on

the screen due to optical charac-

teristics of the screen. If this is dis-

turbing, please operate the screen

without polarized sunglasses.

Depending on the position of the

headlight switch, the screen

changes to day or night mode.

This feature is available when

the headlight is switched on.

1 Select “Day Mode”.

● If the screen is set to day mode

with the headlight switch turned

on, this condition is memorized

even with the engine turned off.

The contrast and brightness of

the screen can be adjusted

according to the brightness of

your surroundings.

1 Select “General” or “Cam-

era”.

2 Select the desired item.

Screen adjustment

The contrast and brightness

of the screen display and

the image of the camera dis-

play can be adjusted. The

screen can also be turned

off, and/or changed to either

day or night mode.

(For information regarding

audio/visual screen adjust-

ment: P.423)

Displaying the screen

adjustment screen

Changing between day

and night mode

Adjusting the con-

trast/brightness

389

5-2. Basic information before operation

Audio

 “Display (General)” screen

only: Select “<” or “>” to select

the desired display.

•“Contrast”

“+”: Select to strengthen the con-

trast of the screen.

“-”: Select to weaken the contrast of

the screen.

• “Brightness”

“+”: Select to brighten the screen.

“-”: Select to darken the screen.

Linking multi-informa-

tion display and the

system

The following functions of

the system are linked with

the multi-information dis-

play in the instrument clus-

ter:

 Audio

 Phone

etc.

These functions can be

operated using multi-infor-

mation display control

switches on the steering

wheel. (P.89)

: When an Apple CarPlay con-

nection is established, this

function will be unavailable.

390

5-3. Connectivity settings

5-3.Connectivity settings

■ Registering from the sys-

tem

1 Turn the Bluetooth

connec-

tion setting of your cellular

phone on.

 This function is not available

when Bluetooth

connection

setting of your cellular phone

is set to off.

2 Press the “MENU” button.

3 Select “Phone”.

 Operations up to this point

can also be performed by

pressing the “PHONE” button

on the instrument panel.

4 Select “Yes” to register a

phone.

Registering/Connect-

ing a Bluetooth

device

To use the hands-free sys-

tem, it is necessary to regis-

ter a Bluetooth

phone with

the system.

Once the phone has been

registered, it is possible to

use the hands-free system.

This operation cannot be

performed while driving.

When an Apple CarPlay

connection is established,

Bluetooth

functions of the

system will become unavail-

able and any connected

Bluetooth

devices will be

disconnected.

When connecting to

Android Auto, a Bluetooth

connection will be made

automatically.

When an Android Auto con-

nection is established,

some Bluetooth

functions

other than hands-free sys-

tem cannot be used.

Registering a Bluetooth

phone for the first time

391

5-3. Connectivity settings

Audio

5 Select the desired Bluetooth

device.

 If the desired Bluetooth

phone is not on the list, select

“If you cannot find...” and fol-

low the guidance on the

screen. (P.392)

6 Register the Bluetooth

device using your Bluetooth

device.

 For details about operating

the Bluetooth

device, see

the manual that comes with it.

 A PIN code is not required for

SSP (Secure Simple Pairing)

compatible Bluetooth

devices. Depending on the

type of Bluetooth

device

being connected, a message

confirming registration may

be displayed on the

Bluetooth

device’s screen.

Respond and operate the

Bluetooth

device according

to the confirmation message.

7 Check that the following

screen is displayed, indicat-

ing pairing was successful (a

Bluetooth

link has been

established but registration is

not yet complete).

 The system is connecting to

the registered device.

 At this stage, the Bluetooth

functions are not yet avail-

able.

8 Check that “Connected” is

displayed and registration is

complete.

 If an error message is dis-

played, follow the guidance

on the screen to try again.

● If a cellular phone does not oper-

ate properly after being con-

392

5-3. Connectivity settings

nected, turn the cellular phone off

and on and then connect it again.

■ Registering from phone

1 Select “If you cannot find...”.

2 Select “Register from

Phone”.

3 Check that the following

screen is displayed, and reg-

ister the Bluetooth

device

using your Bluetooth

device.

 For details about operating

the Bluetooth

device, see

the manual that comes with it.

 A PIN code is not required for

SSP (Secure Simple Pairing)

compatible Bluetooth

devices. Depending on the

type of Bluetooth

device

being connected, a message

confirming registration may

be displayed on the

Bluetooth

device’s screen.

Respond and operate the

Bluetooth

device according

to the confirmation message.

4 Follow the steps in “Register-

ing a Bluetooth

phone for

the first time” from step 7.

(P.390)

To use the Bluetooth

audio, it is

necessary to register an audio

player with the system.

Once the player has been regis-

tered, it is possible to use the

Bluetooth

audio.

This operation cannot be per-

formed while driving.

For details about registering a

Bluetooth

device: P.397

1 Turn the Bluetooth

connec-

tion setting of your audio

player on.

 This function is not available

when the Bluetooth

connec-

tion setting of your audio

Registering a Bluetooth

audio player for the first

time

393

5-3. Connectivity settings

Audio

player is set to off.

2 Press the “AUDIO” button.

3 Select “Source” on the audio

screen or press “AUDIO” but-

ton again.

4 Select “Bluetooth”.

5 Select “Yes” to register an

audio player.

6 Follow the steps in “Register-

ing a Bluetooth

phone for

the first time” from step 5.

(P.390)

This system supports the follow-

ing services.

■ Bluetooth

Core Specifica-

tion

 Ver. 2.0 (Recommended: Ver.

4.2)

■ Profiles

 HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver.

1.0 (Recommended: Ver. 1.7)

• This is a profile to allow hands-

free phone calls using a cellular

phone. It has outgoing and

incoming call functions.

 OPP (Object Push Profile)

Ver. 1.1 (Recommended: Ver.

1.2)

• This is a profile to transfer con-

tacts data.

 PBAP (Phone Book Access

Profile) Ver. 1.0 (Recom-

mended: Ver. 1.2)

• This is a profile to transfer phone-

book data.

 MAP (Message Access Pro-

file) Ver. 1.0 (Recommended:

Ver. 1.2)

• This is a profile to use phone

message functions.

 SPP (Serial Port Profile) Rec-

ommended: Ver. 1.2

• This is a profile to use the Toyota

audio multimedia function.

 A2DP (Advanced Audio Dis-

tribution Profile) Ver. 1.0 (Rec-

ommended: Ver. 1.3)

• This is a profile to transmit stereo

audio or high quality sound to the

audio/visual system.

 AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote

Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 (Rec-

ommended: Ver. 1.6)

• This is a profile to allow remote

control the A/V equipment.

● This system is not guaranteed to

operate with all Bluetooth

devices.

● If your cellular phone does not

support HFP, registering the

Bluetooth

phone or using OPP,

PBAP, MAP or SPP profiles indi-

vidually will not be possible.

Profiles

394

5-3. Connectivity settings

● If the connected Bluetooth

device version is older than rec-

ommended or incompatible, the

Bluetooth

device function may

not work properly.

● Refer to http://www.

toyota.com/audio-multimedia in

the United States,

http://www.toyota.ca/connected

Canada, and

http://www.toyotapr.com/

audio-multimedia in Puerto Rico,

to find approved Bluetooth

phones for this system.

● Certification

Bluetooth is a registered trademark

of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

: This function is not made avail-

able in some countries or areas.

1 Press the “MENU” button.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Bluetooth”.

Setting Bluetooth

details

When an Apple CarPlay

connection is established,

this function will be unavail-

able.

When an Android Auto con-

nection is established,

some functions will be

unavailable.

Displaying the Bluetooth

setup screen

395

5-3. Connectivity settings

Audio

4 Select the desired item to be

set.

Connecting a Bluetooth

device and editing the

Bluetooth

device informa-

tion (P.395, 398)

Registering a Bluetooth

device (P.397)

Deleting a Bluetooth

device

(P.397)

Setting the Bluetooth

sys-

tem (P.399)

Up to 5 Bluetooth

devices

(Phones (HFP) and audio play-

ers (AVP)) can be registered.

If more than 1 Bluetooth

device

has been registered, select

which device to connect to.

1 Display the Bluetooth

set-

tings screen. (P.394)

2 Select “Registered Device”.

3 Select the device to be con-

nected.

“Add”: Registering a Bluetooth

device. (P.397)

“Preferred Device Settings”: Select

to change the automatic connection

priority of the registered Bluetooth

devices. (P.400)

“Remove”: Deleting a Bluetooth

device. (P.397)

: Phone

: Audio player

: Phone/Toyota Apps Services

 The profile icon for a currently

connected device will be dis-

played in color.

 Selecting a profile icon which

is not currently connected will

switch the connection to the

function.

 If the desired Bluetooth

device is not on the list, select

“Add New Device” to register

Bluetooth

setup screen

Connecting a Bluetooth

device

396

5-3. Connectivity settings

the device. (P.397)

4 Select the desired connec-

tion.

 “Device Info”: Select to con-

firm and change the

Bluetooth

device informa-

tion. (P.398)

 When another Bluetooth

device is connected

 To disconnect the Bluetooth

device, select “Yes”.

5 Check that a confirmation

screen is displayed when the

connection is complete.

 If an error message is dis-

played, follow the guidance

on the screen to try again.

● It may take time if the device con-

nection is carried out during

Bluetooth

audio playback.

● Depending on the type of

Bluetooth

device being con-

nected, it may be necessary to

perform additional steps on the

device.

● When disconnecting a Bluetooth

device, it is recommended to dis-

connect using the system.

■ Connecting a Bluetooth

device in a different way

(from phone top screen)

P.467

■ Connecting a Bluetooth

device in a different way

(from phone setup screen)

P.481

■ Connecting a Bluetooth

device in a different way

(from Bluetooth

audio

screen)

P.440

■ Auto connection mode

To turn auto connection mode

on, set “Bluetooth Power” to on.

(P.399) Leave the Bluetooth

device in a location where the

connection can be established.

 When the engine switch is in

ACC or ON, the system

searches for a nearby regis-

tered device.

 The system will connect with

the registered device that was

last connected, if it is nearby.

When automatic connection

priority is set to on and there

is more than one registered

Bluetooth

phone available,

the system will automatically

connect to the Bluetooth

phone with the highest prior-

ity. (P.399)

397

5-3. Connectivity settings

Audio

■ Connecting manually

When the auto connection has

failed or “Bluetooth Power” is

turned off, it is necessary to con-

nect the Bluetooth

device man-

ually.

1 Display the Bluetooth

set-

tings screen. (P.394)

2 Follow the steps in “Connect-

ing a Bluetooth

device” from

step 2. (P.395)

■ Reconnecting the

Bluetooth

phone

If a Bluetooth

phone is discon-

nected due to poor reception

from the Bluetooth

network

when the engine switch is in

ACC or ON, the system auto-

matically reconnects the

Bluetooth

phone.

Up to 5 Bluetooth

devices can

be registered.

Bluetooth

compatible phones

(HFP) and audio players (AVP)

can be registered simultane-

ously.

This operation cannot be per-

formed while driving.

1 Display the Bluetooth

set-

tings screen. (P.394)

2 Select “Add New Device”.

 When another Bluetooth

device is connected

 To disconnect the Bluetooth

device, select “Yes”.

 When 5 Bluetooth

devices

have already been registered

 A registered device needs to

be replaced. Select “Yes”, and

select the device to be

replaced.

3 Follow the steps in “Register-

ing a Bluetooth

phone for

the first time” from step 5.

(P.390)

This operation cannot be per-

formed while driving.

1 Display the Bluetooth

set-

tings screen. (P.394)

2 Select “Remove Device”.

3 Select the desired device.

4 Select “Yes” when the confir-

mation screen appears.

5 Check that a confirmation

screen is displayed when the

operation is complete.

Registering a Bluetooth

device

Deleting a Bluetooth

device

398

5-3. Connectivity settings

● When deleting a Bluetooth

phone, the contact data will be

deleted at the same time.

The Bluetooth

device’s infor-

mation can be displayed on the

screen. The displayed informa-

tion can be edited.

This operation cannot be per-

formed while driving.

1 Display the Bluetooth

set-

tings screen. (P.394)

2 Select “Registered Device”.

3 Select the desired device to

be edited.

4 Select “Device Info”.

5 Confirm and change the

Bluetooth

device informa-

tion.

The name of the Bluetooth

device is displayed. It can be

changed to a desired name.

(P.399)

Select to set the Bluetooth

audio player connection

method. (P.399)

Device address is unique to

the device and cannot be

changed.

Phone number is unique to

the Bluetooth

phone and

cannot be changed.

Compatibility profile is unique

to the Bluetooth

device and

cannot be changed.

Select to reset all setup

items.

Editing the Bluetooth

device information

399

5-3. Connectivity settings

Audio

● If 2 Bluetooth

devices have been

registered with the same device

name, the devices can be distin-

guished referring to the device’s

address.

● Depending on the type of

Bluetooth

phone, some informa-

tion may not be displayed.

1 Select “Device Name”.

2 Enter the name and select

“OK”.

● Even if the device name is

changed, the name registered in

your Bluetooth

device does not

change.

1 Select “Connect Audio Player

From”.

2 Select the desired connec-

tion method.

“Vehicle”: Select to connect the

audio player from the vehicle’s

audio/visual system.

“Device”: Select to connect the

vehicle’s audio/visual system from

the audio player.

 Depending on the audio

player, the “Vehicle” or

“Device” connection method

may be best. As such, refer to

the manual that comes with

the audio player.

The Bluetooth

settings can be

confirmed and changed.

1 Display the Bluetooth

set-

tings screen. (P.394)

2 Select “Detailed Settings”.

3 Select the desired item to be

set.

Select to set Bluetooth

con-

nection on/off. (P.400)

Select to change the auto-

matic connection priority of

the registered Bluetooth

devices. (P.400)

Select to edit the system

information. (P.400)

Select to reset all setup

items.

Changing a device name

Setting audio player con-

nection method

“Detailed Settings”

screen

400

5-3. Connectivity settings

1 Select “Bluetooth Power”.

When “Bluetooth Power” is on:

The Bluetooth

device is auto-

matically connected when the

engine switch is in ACC or ON.

When “Bluetooth Power” is off:

The Bluetooth

device is dis-

connected, and the system will

not connect to it next time.

● While driving, the auto connection

state can be changed from off to

on, but cannot be changed from

on to off.

The automatic connection prior-

ity of the registered Bluetooth

devices can be changed.

1 Select “Preferred Device Set-

tings”.

2 Select the desired item to be

set.

Select to set automatic con-

nection priority on/off.

Select to change the auto-

matic connection priority of

the registered Bluetooth

phones. (P.400)

Select to change the auto-

matic connection priority of

the registered Bluetooth

audio players. (P.400)

Select to reset all setup

items.

■ Changing Bluetooth

device automatic connec-

tion priority

1 Select “Preferred Phones” or

“Preferred Audio Players”.

2 Select the desired Bluetooth

device and select “Move Up”

or “Move Down” to change

the preferred order.

● A newly registered Bluetooth

device will automatically be given

the highest automatic connection

priority.

1 Select “System Information”.

Changing “Bluetooth

Power”

Setting automatic connec-

tion priority

Editing the system infor-

mation

401

5-3. Connectivity settings

Audio

2 Select the desired item to be

set.

Displays system name. Can

be changed to a desired

name. (P.401)

PIN code used when the

Bluetooth

device was regis-

tered. Can be changed to a

desired code. (P.401)

Device address is unique to

the device and cannot be

changed.

Select to set the connection

status display of the phone

on/off.

Select to set the connection

status display of the audio

player on/off.

Compatibility profile of the

system

Select to reset all setup

items.

■ Editing the system name

1 Select “System Name”.

2 Enter a name and select

“OK”.

■ Editing the PIN code

1 Select “System PIN Code”.

2 Enter a PIN code and select

“OK”.

402

5-3. Connectivity settings

: Vehicles equipped with DCM

only. This function is not made

available in some countries or

areas.

1 Enable the Wi-Fi

Hotspot

function. (P.403)

2 Disable the “Hide Access

Point” function. (P.403)

3 Search for the vehicle access

point using the device you

wish to connect.

 For details about operating

the device, refer to the docu-

mentation which came with it.

4 Operate the device to con-

nect it to the vehicle access

point.

 To check the vehicle access

point password, check “Pass-

word”. (P.403)

● Hints for connecting to the vehicle

via Wi-Fi

can be displayed.

(P.403)

1 Enable the Wi-Fi

Hotspot

function. (P.403)

2 Enable the “Hide Access

Point” function. (P.403)

3 Enter the access point name

(SSID) into the device you

wish to connect and connect

it.

 To check the vehicle access

point password, check “Pass-

word”. (P.403)

 The security settings on the

device must be the same as

that displayed for “Security”.

(P.403)

 For details about operating

the device, refer to the docu-

mentation which came with it.

Wi-Fi

Hotspot

By connecting a device to

the vehicle via Wi-Fi

, it can

access the internet through

the DCM.

 To use this function, a

W-Fi

Hotspot service sub-

scription from AT&T is

required. Connect your

device to the in-vehicle

access point (see instruc-

tions below), or contact your

Toyota dealer for details.

Connecting a device to

the in-vehicle access

point

Searching for and con-

necting a device to the

vehicle access point

Connecting a device to the

in-vehicle access point

using the access point

name (SSID)

403

5-3. Connectivity settings

Audio

1 Press the “MENU” button.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Wi-Fi

”.

:Wi-Fi

is a registered trademark

of Wi-Fi Alliance

4 Select the desired item to be

set.

Select to enable/disable the

Wi-Fi

Hotspot function.

(P.403)

Select to check/change the

access point password.

(P.404)

Select to display hints for

connecting to the vehicle via

Wi-Fi

Select to make the access

point searchable/unsearch-

able.

Select to check/change the

security protocol of the

access point (for authentica-

tion and encryption).

(P.404)

Select to change the access

point name (SSID). (P.404)

Select to change the Wi-Fi

connection channel (within

the 2.4GHz frequency band).

(P.404)

● If any settings have been

changed, it will be necessary to

reset the Wi-Fi

system to com-

plete the changes. To reset the

Wi-Fi

system, select “Yes” on the

pop-up displayed after changing

the settings.

When the Wi-Fi

Hotspot func-

tion is enabled, the system

checks for a valid Hotspot ser-

vice subscription.

If a Hotspot service subscription

has not been started, connect

your device to the in-vehicle

Changing the Wi-Fi

set-

tings

Enabling/disabling the

W-Fi

Hotspot function

404

5-3. Connectivity settings

access point to start your sub-

scription. A trial subscription

may be available.

Contact your Toyota dealer for

details about the Toyota mobile

application.

1 Select “Password”.

2 Check that the following

screen is displayed.

Displays the password

Select to display/hide the

entered password.

Select to change the pass-

word.

1 Select “Change Password”.

2 Enter the desired password

and select “OK”.

 When setting/changing a

password, observe the follow-

ing guidelines to help prevent

the password from being

cracked by a third party:

• Use an 8-character or longer

password consisting of letters

and numbers. (Non-ASCII char-

acters will not be recognized by

the system.)

• Change the password regularly.

• If you write the password down,

do not leave it somewhere where

it would be visible.

• Do not use the same password

for vehicle Wi-Fi

Hotspot as

other accounts already protected

by a password.

• Avoid using easy to identify

words, such as your vehicle’s

model name or license plate

number, simple dictionary words,

or words with simple obfuscation,

such as c@t (for cat), as your

password.

1 Select “Security”.

2 Select the desired security

protocol.

1 Select “Access Point Name”.

2 Enter the desired access

point name (SSID) and select

“OK”.

1 Select “Channel”.

Checking/changing the

password

Changing the password

Changing the security pro-

tocol

Changing the access point

name (SSID)

Selecting a Wi-Fi

connec-

tion channel

405

5-3. Connectivity settings

Audio

2 Check that the following

screen is displayed.

Select to change the chan-

nel selection to auto-

matic/manual.

When “Manual” is selected,

select to change the channel.

1 Set “Select Channel” to

“Manual”.

2 Select “Channel Number”.

3 Enter the desired channel

number and select “OK”.

 Channels 1 through 11 can be

selected.

● If a connected device is taken out

of the Wi-Fi

connection area, the

connection will be severed.

● If the vehicle is driven out of the

cellular communication coverage

area, connecting to the internet

via the Wi-Fi

Hotspot will not be

possible.

● If a Bluetooth

device is used

while a device is connected using

the Wi-Fi

Hotspot function, the

communication speed may

decrease.

● If the vehicle is near a radio

antenna, radio station or other

source of strong radio waves and

electrical noise, communication

may be slow or impossible.

The condition of Wi-Fi

connec-

tion appears on the right upper

side of the screen. (P.3 78 )

Changing the channel

Wi-Fi

function operating

hints

WARNING

● Use Wi-Fi

devices only when

safe and legal to do so.

● Your audio unit is fitted with

W-Fi

antennas. People with

implantable cardiac pacemak-

ers, cardiac resynchronization

therapy-pacemakers or implan-

table cardioverter defibrillators

should maintain a reasonable

distance between themselves

and the Wi-Fi

antennas.

The radio waves may affect the

operation of such devices.

● Before using Wi-Fi

devices,

users of any electrical medical

device other than implantable

cardiac pacemakers, cardiac

resynchronization therapy-

pacemakers or implantable car-

dioverter defibrillators should

consult the manufacturer of the

device for information about its

operation under the influence of

radio waves.

Radio waves could have unex-

pected effects on the operation

of such medical devices.

Conditions displayed with

Wi-Fi

icon

406

5-3. Connectivity settings

 Communication standards

IEEE 802.11b

IEEE 802.11g

IEEE 802.11n (2.4GHz)

 Security

WPA™

WPA2™

• WPA™ and WPA2™ are trade-

marks of Wi-Fi Alliance

Specifications

407

5-4. Apple CarPlay/Android Auto

Audio

5-4.Apple C arPlay/Android Auto

: This function is not made avail-

able in some countries or areas.

1 Enable Siri on the device to

be connected.

2 Connect the device to the

USB port. (P.422)

3 Select “Always Enable” or

“Enable Once”.

 “Do Not Enable”: Select to not

enable Apple CarPlay. Apple

CarPlay will remain off until

“Apple CarPlay” of “Projection

Settings” on the general set-

tings screen is turned on.

 Depending on the device con-

nected,it may take approxi-

mately 3 to 6 seconds before

the system returns to previous

screen.

 The screen may change to

step 6 depending on the sys-

tem.

4 Press the “MENU” button.

Apple

CarPlay

/Android

Auto

Apple CarPlay/Android Auto

allows some applications,

such as Map, Phone, and

Music, to be used on the

system.

When an Apple

CarPlay/Android Auto con-

nection is established,

Apple CarPlay/Android Auto

compatible applications will

be displayed on the system

display.

 Compatible device

Apple iPhone (iOS Ver. 9.3 or

later) that supports Apple

CarPlay. For details, refer to

https://www.apple.com/ios/car

play/.

Android devices with Android

OS ver 5.0 or higher which

support Android Auto and

have the Android Auto appli-

cation installed. For details,

refer to

https://www.android.com/auto/

Establishing an Apple

CarPlay connection

408

5-4. Apple CarPlay/Android Auto

5 Select the “Apple CarPlay”.

6 Check that home screen of

Apple CarPlay is displayed.

Select to display the home

screen of Apple CarPlay.

Select and hold to activate

Siri.

Select to start the application.

User can use any iPhone

application supported by

Apple CarPlay.

Select to display the system

screen.

1 Check that the Android Auto

application is installed to the

device to be connected.

2 Connect the device to the

USB port. (P.422)

3 Select “On” to enable the

function.

 “Off”: Select to not enable

Android Auto. Android Auto

will remain off until “Android

Auto” of “Projection Settings”

on the general settings screen

is turned on.

 Depending on the device con-

nected,it may take approxi-

mately 3 to 6 seconds before

the system returns to previous

screen.

 The screen may change to

step 6 depending on the sys-

tem.

4 Press the “MENU” button.

Establishing an Android

Auto connection

409

5-4. Apple CarPlay/Android Auto

Audio

5 Select the “Android Auto”.

6 Check that home screen of

Android Auto is displayed.

Select to display the home

screen of Android Auto.

Select to start the application.

User can use any Android

application supported by

Android Auto.

Select to display the system

screen.

● When an Apple CarPlay/Android

Auto connection is established,

the function of some system but-

tons will change.

● When an Apple CarPlay/Android

Auto connection is established,

some system functions, such as

the following, will be replaced by

similar Apple CarPlay/Android

Auto functions or will become

unavailable:

• iPod (Audio Playback)

• USB audio/USB video

• Bluetooth

audio

• Bluetooth

phone (Apple CarPlay

only)

• Toyota Apps

● When an Apple CarPlay/Android

Auto connection is established,

voice command system (Siri/Goo-

gle Assistant) and map application

voice guidance volume can be

changed by selecting “Voice Vol-

ume” on the voice settings screen.

It cannot be changed by “POWER

VOLUME” knob on Audio control

panel. (P.418)

● Apple CarPlay/Android Auto is an

application developed by Apple

Inc/Google LLC. Its functions and

services may be terminated or

changed without notice depending

on the connected device’s opera-

tion system, hardware and soft-

ware, or due to changes in Apple

CarPlay/Android Auto specifica-

tions.

● For a list of the apps supported by

Apple CarPlay or Android Auto,

refer to their respective website.

● While using these functions, vehi-

cle and user information, such as

location and vehicle speed, will be

shared with the respective appli-

cation publisher and the cellular

service provider.

● By downloading and using each

application, you agree to their

● Data for these functions is trans-

mitted using the internet and may

incur charges. For information

about data transmission fees, con-

tact your cellular service provider.

● Depending on the application, cer-

tain functions, such as music play-

back, may be restricted.

● As the applications for each func-

tion are provided by a third-party,

they may be subject to change or

discontinuation without notice. For

details, refer to the website of the

function.

● If the vehicle’s navigation system

410

5-4. Apple CarPlay/Android Auto

is being used for route guidance

and a route is set using the Apple

CarPlay/Android Auto Maps app,

route guidance will be performed

through Apple CarPlay/Android

Auto. If the Apple CarPlay/Android

Auto Maps app is being used for

route guidance and a route is set

using the vehicle’s navigation sys-

tem, route guidance will be per-

formed by the vehicle’s navigation

system.

● If the USB cable is disconnected,

operation of Apple

CarPlay/Android Auto will end. At

this time, sound output will stop

and change to the system screen.

■ Certification

● Use of the Apple CarPlay logo

means that a vehicle user inter-

face meets Apple performance

standards. Apple is not responsi-

ble for the operation of this vehicle

or its compliance with safety and

regulatory standards. Please note

that the use of this product with

iPhone or iPod may affect wire-

less performance.

● Apple CarPlay is a trademark of

Apple Inc.

● Android and Android Auto are

trademarks of Google LLC.

If you are experiencing difficulties with Apple CarPlay/Android Auto,

check the following table.

WARNING

● Do not connect iPhone or oper-

ate the controls while driving.

NOTICE

● Do not leave your smartphone

in the vehicle. In particular, high

temperatures inside the vehicle

may damage the smartphone.

● Do not push down on or apply

unnecessary pressure to the

smartphone while it is con-

nected as this may damage the

smartphone or its terminal.

● Do not insert foreign objects into

the port as this may damage the

smartphone or its terminal.

Troubleshooting

411

5-4. Apple CarPlay/Android Auto

Audio

Symptom Solution

An Apple CarPlay/Android

Auto connection cannot

be established.

Check if the device supports Apple

CarPlay/Android Auto.

Check if Apple CarPlay/Android Auto is

enabled on the connected device.

Check that the Android Auto application is

installed to the device to be connected.

For details, refer to

https://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/

https://www.android.com/auto/

Check if “Apple CarPlay”/“Android Auto” of

“Projection Settings” on the general settings

screen is set to on. (P.414)

Check if the USB cable being used is securely

connected to the device and USB port.

Try connecting the smartphone directly to the

USB port in the vehicle, without using the hub.

For Apple CarPlay: Check if the Lightning cable

being used is certified by Apple and check if Siri

is enabled.

After checking all of the above, try to establish

an Apple CarPlay/Android Auto connection.

(P.407)

When an Apple

CarPlay/Android Auto

connection is established

and a video is being

played, the video is not

displayed, but audio is

output through the sys-

tem.

As the system is not designed to play video

through Apple CarPlay/Android Auto, this is not

a malfunction.

Although an Apple

CarPlay/Android Auto

connection is established,

audio is not output

through the system.

The system may muted or the volume may be

low. Increase the system volume.

412

5-4. Apple CarPlay/Android Auto

The Apple

CarPlay/Android Auto

screen has artifacts

and/or audio from Apple

CarPlay/Android Auto has

noise.

Check if the USB cable being used to connect

the device to the system is damaged.

To check if the USB cable is damaged inter-

nally, connect the device to another system,

such as a PC, and check if the device is recog-

nized by the connected system. (The device

should begin charging when connected.)

After checking all of the above, try to establish

an Apple CarPlay/Android Auto connection.

(P.407)

The map display of the

Apple CarPlay Maps app

cannot be enlarged or

contracted with pinch

multi-touch gestures.

As the Apple CarPlay Maps app is not compati-

ble with pinch multi-touch gestures, this is not a

malfunction.

During Apple CarPlay

music application (Apple

Music, Spotify, etc.) play-

back, if the iPhone is

operated to start and play

audio from an application

that is not compatible with

Apple CarPlay

and the

onboard device volume is

changed, the audio of the

incompatible application

stops and the system

resumes playback of the

original music application.

This operation is performed according to the

specification of the onboard device, this is not a

malfunction.

After interrupt audio (such

as navigation route guid-

ance) is played from an

application that is not

compatible with Apple

CarPlay while the onboard

device is playing audio

(FM/AM, CD, etc.), the

system does not resume

playback of the original

audio (FM/AM, CD, etc.).

This operation is performed according to the

specification of the onboard device, this is not a

malfunction. Manually change the audio source

by yourself. Or, do not use applications that are

not compatible with Apple CarPlay.

Due to

some navigation applications are compatible

from iOS 12, update to the latest iOS and appli-

cation versions.

Symptom Solution

413

5-4. Apple CarPlay/Android Auto

Audio

: Applications not compatible with Apple CarPlay are applications installed

on the iPhone that are not displayed on the Apple CarPlay screen appli-

cation list. (such as visual voicemail)

When using Apple

CarPlay, route guidance

arrows and turn by turn

navigation are not dis-

played on the multi-infor-

mation display and

system display. When

using Android Auto, turn

by turn navigation is not

displayed on the multiin-

formation display and sys-

tem display.

This is not a malfunction as display of these

items is not possible with this function.

When using Android Auto,

hands-free call audio can-

not be heard from the

vehicle’s speakers.

Disconnect the phone from the USB cable and

check if hands-free call audio can be heard

using the hands-free system.

Connect the phone to the system using Android

Auto, turn up the volume on the system and

check if hands-free call audio can be heard.

Check if other sounds can be heard from the

vehicle’s speakers.

Symptom Solution

414

5-5. Other settings

5-5.Other s ettings

1 Press the “MENU” button.

2 Select “Setup”.

 If the general settings screen

is not displayed, select “Gen-

eral”.

3 Select the desired items to

be set.

 “Clock”

Select to change the time zone and

select “On” or “Off” for daylight sav-

ing time, automatic adjustment of

the clock, etc. (P.415)

 “Language”

Select to change the language. The

language setting of Apple

CarPlay/Android Auto can only be

changed on the connected device.

 “Customize Home Screen”

Select to change the display infor-

mation/area on the home screen

and the home screen layout.

(P.384)

 “Projection Settings”

Select to set automatic Apple

CarPlay/Android Auto connection

establishment on/off. (P.416)

 “Beep”

Select to turn the beep sound

on/off.

 “Theme Setting”

Select to change the screen theme

setting.

 “Units of Measurement”

Select to change the unit of mea-

sure for distance/fuel consumption.

 “Keyboard Layout”

Select to change the keyboard lay-

out.

 “Delete Keyboard History”

Select to delete the keyboard his-

tory.

 “Memorize Keyboard History”

Select to set the memorize key-

board history on/off.

 “Animation”

Select to turn the animations on/off.

 “Driver Setting”

General settings

Settings are available for

clock, operation sounds,

etc.

Displaying the general

settings screen

General settings screen

415

5-5. Other settings

Audio

Select to change the driver set-

tings. (P.416)

 “Delete Personal Data”

Select to delete personal data.

(P.417)

 “Software Update”

Select to update software versions.

For details, contact your Toyota

dealer.

 “Software Update Setting”

Select to set software update set-

ting. (P.417)

 “Gracenote Database

Update”

Select to update Gracenote

data-

base versions. For details, contact

your Toyota dealer.

 “Software Information”

Select to display the software infor-

mation. Notices related to third

party software used in this product

are enlisted. (This includes instruc-

tions for obtaining such software,

where applicable.)

 “SW Sensitivity Level”

Select to change the capacitive

touch screen button sensitivity to 1

(low), 2 (medium), or 3 (high).

:This function is not made avail-

able in some countries or areas.

:Vehicles equipped with DCM

1 Display the general settings

screen. (P.414)

2 Select “Clock”.

3 Select the desired items to

be set.

Select to change the time

zone. (P.415)

Select to set daylight saving

time on/off.

Select to set automatic

adjustment of the clock by

GPS on/off.

When set to off, the clock can

be manually adjusted.

(P.415)

Select to set the 24 hour time

format on/off.

When set to off, the clock is

displayed in 12 hour time for-

mat.

1 Select “Time Zone”.

2 Select the desired time zone.

When “Auto Adjust by GPS” is

turned off, the clock can be

manually adjusted.

1 Select “Auto Adjust by GPS”

to set to off.

Clock settings

Setting the time zone

Manual clock setting

416

5-5. Other settings

2 Adjust the clock manually.

Select “+” to set the time for-

ward one hour and “-” to set

the time back one hour.

Select “+” to set the time for-

ward one minute and “-” to

set the time back one minute.

Select to round to the nearest

hour.

e.g.

1:00 to 1:29  1:00

1:30 to 1:59  2:00

: This function is not made avail-

able in some countries or areas.

1 Display the general settings

screen. (P.414)

2 Select “Projection Settings”.

3 Select the desired items to

be set.

Select to turn Apple CarPlay

connection establishment

on/off.

Select to turn Android Auto

connection establishment

on/off.

● When the settings are changed

with a device connected to the

system via USB, disconnect the

device and connect it again to

enable the settings.

The driver settings feature will

allow the system to link some

preferences (such as audio pre-

sets, screen theme, language,

etc.) to a paired Bluetooth

phone.

1 Display the general settings

screen. (P.414)

2 Select “Driver Setting”.

3 Select “Enable This Feature”.

1 Select “Manually Select

Linked Settings”.

Projection settings

Driver settings

Manually select linked set-

tings

417

5-5. Other settings

Audio

1 Select the desired phone.

 After a few seconds, loaded

screen automatically switches

to the home screen.

Registered or changed per-

sonal settings will be deleted or

returned to their default condi-

tions.

1 Display the general settings

screen. (P.414)

2 Select “Delete Personal

Data”.

3 Select “Delete”.

4 Select “Yes” when the confir-

mation screen appears.

Examples of settings that can be

returned to their default conditions:

 Audio settings

 Phone settings

etc.

: Vehicles equipped with DCM

only. This function is not made

available in some countries or

areas.

When the automatic update

check function is enabled, if a

software update is available

from the Cloud, a message will

be displayed.

1 Display the general settings

screen. (P.414)

2 Select “Software Update Set-

ting”.

3 Select “Automatic Update

Check” to enable/disable the

automatic update check func-

tion.

● When software update information

is displayed, contact your Toyota

dealer.

Deleting personal data

Software update settings

418

5-5. Other settings

1 Press the “MENU” button.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Voice”.

4 Select the desired items to

be set.

Select to adjust the volume of

voice guidance.

Select to set the voice recog-

nition prompts.

Select to train voice recogni-

tion.

The voice command system

adapts the user accent.

Select to start the voice rec-

ognition tutorial.

Select to set the voice

prompt interrupt on/off.

Select to reset all setup

items.

: When an Apple CarPlay/Android

Auto connection is established,

voice command system

(Siri/Google Assistant) and map

application voice guidance vol-

ume can be changed.

Voice settings

Voice volume, etc. can be

set.

Displaying the voice set-

tings screen

Voice settings screen

419

5-5. Other settings

Audio

1 Press the “MENU” button.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Vehicle”.

4 Select the desired items to

be set.

Select to set vehicle customi-

zation. (P.688)

Select to set valet mode.

(P.419)

The security system can be set

to on by entering a security code

(4-digit number).

When set to on, the system will

become inoperative once the

electrical power source is dis-

connected until the security

code is entered.

1 Display the vehicle settings

screen. (P.419)

2 Select “Valet Mode”.

3 Enter the 4-digit personal

code and select “OK”.

4 Enter the same 4-digit per-

sonal code again and select

“OK”.

 The system will request that

you input the security code

again to confirm that you

remember it correctly.

 When valet mode activates,

the system stops and a secu-

rity code (4-digit number)

standby screen is displayed.

● If the 4-digit personal code is for-

gotten, please contact your Toyota

dealer.

1 Enter the 4-digit personal

code and select “OK”.

● If an incorrect security code (4-

digit number) is entered 6 times,

the system will not accept another

security code (4-digit number) for

10 minutes.

Vehicle settings

Settings are available for

vehicle customization, etc.

Displaying the vehicle

settings screen

Vehicle settings screen

Setting the valet mode

If the valet mode has been

activated

420

5-6. Using the audio/visual system

5-6.Using the audio/visual system

The audio control screen can be reached by the following methods:

 From the “AUDIO” button

1 Press the “AUDIO” button.

 From the “MENU” button

1 Press the “MENU” button, then select “Audio”.

• Using the radio (P.425)

• Playing a USB memory (P.432)

• Playing an iPod/iPhone (Apple CarPlay

) (P.434)

• Using the Android Auto

(P.437)

• Playing a Bluetooth

device (P.438)

• Using the steering wheel audio switches (P.442)

• Audio system settings (P.444)

: This function is not made available in some countries or areas.

Quick reference

Functional overview

421

5-6. Using the audio/visual system

Audio

“POWER VOLUME” knob:

Press to turn the audio/visual

system on and off. The system

turns on in the last mode used.

Turn this knob to adjust the vol-

ume.

1 Press the “AUDIO” button.

2 Select “Source” or press

“AUDIO” button again.

3 Select the desired source.

● Dimmed screen buttons cannot be

operated.

● When there are two pages, select

or to change the page.

● When an Apple CarPlay/Android

Auto connection is established,

some system functions, such as

the following, will be replaced by

similar Apple CarPlay/Android

Auto function or will become

unavailable

• iPod (Audio Playback)

• USB audio/USB video

• Bluetooth

audio

• Toyota Apps

: This function is not made avail-

able in some countries or areas.

Some basics

This section describes

some of the basic features

of the audio/visual system.

Some information may not

pertain to your system.

Your audio/visual system

works when the engine

switch is in ACC or ON.

NOTICE

● To prevent the battery from

being discharged, do not leave

the audio/visual system on lon-

ger than necessary when the

engine is not running.

Turning the system on

and off

Selecting an audio source

422

5-6. Using the audio/visual system

1 Display the audio source

selection screen. (P.421)

2 Select “Reorder”.

3 Select the desired audio

source then or to reor-

der.

4 Select “OK”.

1 Connect a device.

 Turn on the power of the

device if it is not turned on.

● If a USB hub is plugged-in, two

devices can be connected at a

time.

● Even if a USB hub is used to con-

nect more than two USB devices,

only the first two connected

devices will be recognized.

● If a USB hub that has more than

two ports is connected to the USB

port, devices connected to the

USB hub may not charge or be

inoperable, as the supply of cur-

rent may be insufficient.

● When an Apple CarPlay/Android

Auto connection is established,

the other USB port can be used

only for device battery charger.

1 Display the audio control

screen. (P.421)

2 Select “Sound”.

3 Select the desired item to be

set.

Select to set the tre-

ble/mid/bass. (P.422)

Select to set the fader/bal-

ance. (P.423)

Select to set the automatic

sound leveliser. (P. 42 3 )

■ Treble/Mid/Bass

How good an audio program

sounds is largely determined by

the mix of the treble, mid and

bass levels. In fact, different

kinds of music and vocal pro-

grams usually sound better with

different mixes of treble, mid

and bass.

1 Select “Treble/Mid/Bass”.

Reordering the audio

source

USB port

Sound settings

423

5-6. Using the audio/visual system

Audio

2 Select the desired screen

button.

Select “+” or “-” to adjust

high-pitched tones.

Select “+” or “-” to adjust mid-

pitched tones.

Select “+” or “-” to adjust low-

pitched tones.

■ Fader/Balance

A good balance of the left and

right stereo channels and of the

front and rear sound levels is

also important.

Keep in mind that when listening

to a stereo recording or broad-

cast, changing the right/left bal-

ance will increase the volume of

1 group of sounds while

decreasing the volume of

another.

1 Select “Fader/Balance”.

2 Select the desired screen

button.

Select to adjust the sound

balance between the front

and rear speakers.

Select to adjust the sound

balance between the left and

right speakers.

■ Automatic sound levelizer

(ASL)

The system adjusts to the opti-

mum volume and tone quality

according to vehicle speed to

compensate for increased road

noise, wind noise, or other

noises while driving.

1 Select “Automatic Sound

Levelizer”.

2 Select “High”, “Mid”, “Low” or

“Off”.

■ Screen format settings

The screen format can be

selected for USB video.

1 Press the “MENU” button.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Audio”.

Audio screen adjustment

424

5-6. Using the audio/visual system

4 Select “Common”.

5 Select “Screen Format”.

6 Select the desired item to be

adjusted.

Select to display a 4 : 3

screen, with either side in

black.

Select to enlarge the image

horizontally and vertically to

full screen.

Select to enlarge the image

by the same ratio horizontally

and vertically.

■ Contrast and brightness

adjustment

The contrast and brightness of

the screen can be adjusted.

1 Press the “MENU” button.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Audio”.

4 Select “Common”.

5 Select “Display”.

6 Select the desired item to be

adjusted.

 “Contrast”

“+”: Select to strengthen the con-

trast of the screen.

“-”: Select to weaken the contrast of

the screen.

 “Brightness”

“+”: Select to brighten the screen.

“-”: Select to darken the screen.

● Depending on the audio source,

some functions may not be avail-

able.

1 Press this switch to operate

the voice command system.

 The voice command system

and its list of commands can

be operated. (P.458)

Voice command system

425

5-7. Radio operation

Audio

5-7.Radio op eration

: This function is not made avail-

able in some countries or areas.

The radio operation screen can

be reached by the following

methods:

P. 4 21

Select to display the audio

source selection screen.

Select to display the preset

stations screen. (P.426)

Select to display the cache

radio operation screen.

(P.426)

Select to display a list of

receivable stations. (P.427)

Select to display the radio

options screen. (P.427)

Select to display the sound

setting screen. (P.422)

Select to tune to preset sta-

tions/channels. (P.426)

Displays items on the chan-

nels registered to smart

favorites

(P.430, 445)

Displays the artist info and

song title or album

Select to change the dis-

played information.

Displays messages when

available

Displays cover art, station

logo, etc.

Displays information about

the song/track currently

being played

: This function is not made avail-

able in some countries or areas.

Press to seek for stations in

the relevant program

type/channel category.

Press and hold for continu-

ous seek.

Turn to step up/down fre-

quencies/channels.

Turn to move up/down the

station list. Also, the knob

can be used to enter selec-

AM/FM/SiriusXM (SXM)

radio

Overview

Control screen

Control panel

426

5-7. Radio operation

tions on the list screens by

pressing it.

● The radio automatically changes

to stereo reception when a stereo

broadcast is received.

Radio mode has a mix preset

function, which can store up to

36 stations (6 stations per page

x 6 pages) from any of the AM,

FM or SXM

bands.

1 Tune in the desired station.

2 Select and hold “(Hold Edit)”.

 When “(Hold Edit)” is

selected, a confirmation mes-

sage appears. Select “Yes”

and select “OK”.

 To change the preset station

to a different one, select and

hold the preset station.

: This function is not made avail-

able in some countries or areas.

● The number of preset radio sta-

tions displayed on the screen can

be changed. (P.444)

: This function is not made avail-

able in some countries or areas.

AM/FM and SXM radio program

can be cached and played back

in a time-shifted manner.

■ Automatic playback of the

cache

If the radio broadcast is inter-

rupted by another audio output,

such as an incoming phone call,

the system will automatically

cache the interrupted portion

and perform time-shift playback

when the interruption ends. This

function is available when “Auto

Pause” is set to on. (P.427)

■ Playing back the cache

manually

The broadcast cached in the

program cache can be played

back manually.

1 Select “SXM Replay”.

2 Select the desired cache

radio operation button.

Returns to the live radio

broadcast

Displays the replay offset

from the current time

Skips backward 2 minutes

(AM/FM)

Presetting a station

Caching a radio program

427

5-7. Radio operation

Audio

Select to select current/previ-

ous track (SXM)

Fast rewinds continuously

Pauses the playback (To

restart, select )

Fast forwards continuously

Skips forward 2 minutes

(AM/FM)

Select to change the track

(SXM)

● The system can store up to 20

minutes of AM/FM and less than

60 minutes of SXM. Cached data

will be erased when the radio

mode or station is changed or

when the audio system is turned

off.

● AM/FM: If noise or silence occurs

during the caching process, cache

writing will continue, with the noise

or silence recorded as is. In this

case, the cached broadcast will

contain the noise or silence when

played back.

1 Select “Station List”.

2 Select “AM”, “FM” or “SXM

”.

 Select the desired program

genre when the genre selec-

tion screen is displayed.

3 Select the desired station.

: This function is not made avail-

able in some countries or areas.

■ Refreshing the station list

(AM/FM)

1 Select “Station List”.

“Cancel Refresh”: Select to can-

cel the refresh.

“Source”: Select to change to

another audio source while

refreshing.

● The audio/visual system sound is

muted during refresh operation.

● In some situations, it may take

some time to update the station

list.

1 Select “Options”.

2 Select the desired item to be

set.

Select to turn automatic play-

back of the cache on/off.

When “SXM Tune Start” is

turned on, the current song is

played from the beginning

when you select the chan-

nel.

Analog FM only: Select to

display RBDS text mes-

sages.

Select to scan for receivable

stations. (Type scan in case

SXM

is current program

type/channel category.)

Selecting a station from

the list

Radio options

428

5-7. Radio operation

: This function is not made avail-

able in some countries or areas.

This audio/visual system is

equipped with Radio Broadcast

Data Systems (RBDS). RBDS

mode allows text messages to

be received from radio stations

that utilize RBDS transmitters.

When RBDS is on, the radio can

do the following functions.

• Only selecting stations of a

particular program type

• Displaying messages from

radio stations

• Searching for a stronger sig-

nal station

RBDS features are available

only when listening to an FM

station that broadcasts RBDS

information and the “FM Info”

function is on. (P. 42 7 )

: This function is not made avail-

able in some countries or areas.

All SiriusXM services, including

satellite radio and data services,

plus streaming services, require

a subscription, sold separately

or as a package by Sirius XM

Radio Inc. (or, in Canada, Sirius

XM Canada Inc.), after any trial

subscription which may be

included with your vehicle pur-

chase or lease. To subscribe

after your trial subscription, call

1-877-447-0011 (U.S.A.) or 1-

877-438-9677 (Canada).

■ Important information

about your subscription

Your SiriusXM services will

automatically stop at the end of

your trial unless you decide to

subscribe. If you decide to con-

tinue service, the paid subscrip-

tion plan you choose will

automatically renew and you will

be charged the rate in effect at

that time and according to your

chosen payment method. Fees

and taxes apply. You may can-

cel at any time by calling 1-866-

635-2349. See SiriusXM Cus-

tomer Agreement for complete

terms at www.siriusxm.com

(U.S.A.) or www.siriusxm.ca

(Canada). All fees and program-

ming subject to change. Traffic

information not available in all

markets.

Radio broadcast data sys-

tem

How to subscribe to

SiriusXM Radio Services

429

5-7. Radio operation

Audio

● ABOUT SiriusXM Services

• Most in-car trials today include

SiriusXM’s best package  All

Access. It includes every channel

available on your radio, plus

streaming.

● SiriusXM All Access Subscription

• Listen everywhere with All

Access. You get every channel

available in your ride, plus you can

listen on the app and online  so

you can enjoy the best SiriusXM

has to offer, anywhere life takes

you. It’s the only package that

gives you all of our premium pro-

gramming, including Howard

Stern, every NFL, MLB

and NBA

game, every NASCAR

race,

NHL

games, 24/7 talk channels

dedicated to the biggest leagues,

and more. You get all kinds of

commercial-free music, including

artist-dedicated channels and

more, plus sports, news, talk and

entertainment.

Did you know? SiriusXM also

delivers a wide variety of services

to certain vehicles’ entertainment

and navigation systems such as

Traffic, Weather, Sports Scores,

Movie Listings, Fuel Prices, Stock

Prices and more. For a list of

available features in your vehicle,

visit siriusxm.com/infotainment

and get the most out of your driv-

ing experience.

● RADIO OPERATION

• Look for the Sirius, XM, SiriusXM,

Band, SAT, AUX, Radio or Source

button and you’re in. If you can’t

hear us, it’s easy to get started:

Locate your Radio ID by turning to

Channel 0. If you don’t see your

number there, go to

siriusxm.com/activationhelp

to find

it.

Visit siriusxm.com/refresh

or call

1-855-MYREFRESH (697-3373)

to send a refresh signal to your

radio.

Canadian Customers:

Locate your Radio ID by turning to

Channel 0.

Visit siriusxm.ca/refresh

to send a

refresh signal to your radio or call

1-888-539-7474 for service.

: This function is not made avail-

able in some countries or areas.

Each SiriusXM tuner is identified

with a unique radio ID. The radio

ID is required when activating

an SiriusXM Satellite service or

when reporting a problem.

 If “Ch 000” is selected using

the “TUNE SCROLL” knob,

the ID code, which is 8 alpha-

numeric characters, will be

displayed. If another channel

is selected, the ID code will no

NOTICE

● It is prohibited to copy, decom-

pile, disassemble, reverse engi-

neer, hack, manipulate, or

otherwise make available any

technology or software incorpo-

rated in receivers compatible

with the SiriusXM Satellite

Radio System or that support

the SiriusXM website, the

streaming service or any of its

content. Furthermore, the

AMBE

voice compression soft-

ware included in this product is

protected by intellectual prop-

erty rights including patent

rights, copyrights, and trade

secrets of Digital Voice Sys-

tems, Inc.

● Note: this applies to SiriusXM

Satellite Radio receivers only

and not SiriusXM Ready

devices.

Displaying the radio ID

430

5-7. Radio operation

longer be displayed. The

channel (000) alternates

between displaying the radio

ID and the specific radio

code.

: This function is not made avail-

able in some countries or areas.

Up to 20 channels can be regis-

tered as presets in the cache.

For channel registration, refer to

(P.444).

1 Select channels registered to

smart favorites.

2 Select “SXM Replay”.

● Caches up to 30 minutes for each

Smart Favorite preset.

● The radio plays the track from

start when that track has not previ-

ously been heard by the user and

the station is registered as a smart

favorite.

● When “SXM Tune Start” is turned

on (P.427), the current song is

played from the beginning when

you select the channel.

● Displays icons on the channels

registered to smart favorites.

(P.425)

When problems occur with the SiriusXM tuner, a message will

appear on the screen. Referring to the table below to identify the

problem, take the suggested corrective action

: This function is not made available in some countries or areas.

Smart favorites

Refer to the table below to identify the problem and take

the suggested corrective action

Message Explanation

“Check

Antenna”

The SiriusXM antenna is not connected. Check whether the

SiriusXM antenna cable is attached securely. Contact your

Toyota dealer for assistance.

A short circuit occurs in the antenna or the surrounding

antenna cable. Contact your Toyota dealer for assistance.

“No Signal”

The SiriusXM signal is too weak at the current location. Wait

until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal.

“Chan

Unavailable”

The channel you selected is not broadcasting any program-

ming. Select another channel.

431

5-7. Radio operation

Audio

● Contact the SiriusXM Listener Care Center at 1-877-447-0011 (U.S.A.) or

1-877-438-9677 (Canada).

“Ch Unsub-

scribed”

The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for

about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous chan-

nel or “Ch 001”. If it does not change automatically, select

another channel.

“Subscription

Updated”

Subscription is updated. Select “OK” to clear this message.

Message Explanation

432

5-8. Media operation

5-8.Media operation

The USB memory operation

screen can be reached by the

following methods: P.421

 Connecting a USB memory

(P.422)

 When an Apple

CarPlay/Android Auto con-

nection is established, this

function will be unavailable.

 USB audio

Select to display the audio

source selection screen.

Select to return to the top

screen.

Select to display a song list

screen.

Select to display the play

mode selection screen.

Select to display the sound

setting screen. (P.422)

Select to set repeat playback.

(P.433)

Select to change the

file/track.

Select and hold to fast

rewind.

Select to play/pause.

Select to change the

file/track.

Select and hold to fast for-

ward.

Select to set random play-

back. (P.433)

Select to change the

folder/album.

Displays cover art

Select to change the artist.

 USB video

1 Select “Browse”.

2 Select “Videos”.

3 Select the desired folder and

file.

Select to display the audio

source selection screen.

Select to return to the top

screen.

Select to display a song list

screen.

Select to display the play

USB memory

Overview

Control screen

433

5-8. Media operation

Audio

mode selection screen.

Select to display the sound

setting screen. (P.422)

Select to change the file.

Select and hold to fast

rewind.

Select to play/pause.

Select to change the file.

Select and hold to fast for-

ward.

Select to display a full screen

image.

Select to change the folder.

Press to change the

file/track.

Press and hold to fast for-

ward/rewind.

Turn to change the file/track.

Turn to move up/down the

list. Also, the knob can be

used to enter selections on

the list screens by pressing it.

● While the vehicle is being driven,

this function can only output

sound.

● If tag information exists, the

file/folder names will be changed

to track/album names.

The file/track or folder/album

currently being listened to can

be repeated.

1 Select .

● Each time is selected, the

mode changes as follows:

 When random playback is off

• file/track repeat  folder/album

repeat  off

 When random playback is on

• file/track repeat  off

Files/tracks or folders/albums

can be automatically and ran-

domly selected.

1 Select .

● Each time is selected, the

mode changes as follows:

• random (1 folder/album random)

 folder/album random (all

folder/album random)  off

Control panel

Repeating

Random order

WARNING

● Do not operate the player’s con-

trols or connect the USB mem-

ory while driving.

NOTICE

● Do not leave your portable

player in the car. In particular,

high temperatures inside the

vehicle may damage the porta-

ble player.

434

5-8. Media operation

: This function is not made avail-

able in some countries or areas.

The iPod/iPhone operation

screen can be reached by the

following methods: P.421

 Connecting an iPod/iPhone

(P.422)

 When an Android Auto con-

nection is established, this

function will be unavailable.

 An Apple CarPlay connection

is not established

 An Apple CarPlay connection

is established

NOTICE

● Do not push down on or apply

unnecessary pressure to the

portable player while it is con-

nected as this may damage the

portable player or its terminal.

● Do not insert foreign objects into

the port as this may damage the

portable player or its terminal.

iPod/iPhone (Apple

CarPlay

)

Overview

Control screen

435

5-8. Media operation

Audio

Select to display the audio

source selection screen.

Select to return to the top

screen.

Select to display a song list

screen.

Select to display the play

mode selection screen.

Select to display the sound

setting screen. (P.422)

Select to set repeat playback.

(P.436)

Select to change the track.

Select and hold to fast

rewind.

Select to play/pause.

Select to change the track.

Select and hold to fast for-

ward.

Select to set random play-

back. (P. 43 6 )

Displays cover art

Select to change the album.

Select to change the artist.

Select to change the playlist.

Select to display the Apple

CarPlay screen.

Press to change the track.

Press and hold to fast for-

ward/rewind.

Turn to change the track.

Turn to move up/down the

list. Also, the knob can be

used to enter selections on

the list screens by pressing it.

● Some functions may not be avail-

able depending on the type of

model.

● When an iPod/iPhone is con-

nected using a genuine

iPod/iPhone cable, the

iPod/iPhone starts charging its

battery.

● Depending on the iPod/iPhone,

the video sound may not be able

to be heard.

● Depending on the iPod/iPhone

and the songs in the iPod/iPhone,

a cover art may be displayed. This

function can be changed to “On”

or “Off”. (P.444) It may take time

to display the cover art, and the

iPod/iPhone may not be operated

while the cover art display is in

process.

● When an iPod/iPhone is con-

nected and the audio source is

changed to iPod/iPhone mode,

the iPod/iPhone will resume play-

ing from the same point it was last

Control panel

436

5-8. Media operation

used.

● Depending on the iPod/iPhone

that is connected to the system,

certain functions may not be avail-

able.

● If an iPhone is connected via

Bluetooth

and USB at the same

time, system operation may

become unstable. For known

phone compatibility information,

refer to

http://www.toyota.com/

audio-multimedia.

● Tracks selected by operating a

connected iPod/iPhone may not

be recognized or displayed prop-

erly.

● The system may not function

properly if a conversion adapter is

used to connect a device.

The track currently being lis-

tened to can be repeated.

1 Select .

● Each time is selected, the

mode changes as follows:

 When shuffle is off (iPhone 5 or

later)

• track repeat  album repeat  off

 When shuffle is off (iPhone 4s or

earlier)

• track repeat  off

 When shuffle is on

• track repeat  off

Tracks or albums can be auto-

matically and randomly

selected.

1 Select .

● Each time is selected, the

mode changes as follows:

• shuffle (1 album shuffle)  album

shuffle (all album shuffle)  off

Repeating

Random order

WARNING

● Do not operate the player’s con-

trols or connect the iPod/iPhone

while driving.

NOTICE

● Do not leave your portable

player in the car. In particular,

high temperatures inside the

vehicle may damage the porta-

ble player.

● Do not push down on or apply

unnecessary pressure to the

portable player while it is con-

nected as this may damage the

portable player or its terminal.

● Do not insert foreign objects into

the port as this may damage the

portable player or its terminal.

437

5-8. Media operation

Audio

: This function is not made avail-

able in some countries or areas.

The Android Auto operation

screen can be reached by the

following methods: P.421

 Connecting an Android Auto

(P.422)

 When an Apple CarPlay con-

nection is established, this

function will be unavailable.

Select to display the audio

source selection screen.

Select to return to the top

screen.

Select to display the sound

setting screen. (P.422)

Select to display the audio

control screen of Android

Auto.

Select to change the track.

Select to play/pause.

Select to change the track.

Displays cover art

Press to change the track.

Turn to change the track.

Android Auto

Overview

Control screen

Control panel

WARNING

● Do not connect smartphone or

operate the controls while driv-

ing.

NOTICE

● Do not leave your smartphone

in the vehicle. In particular, high

temperatures inside the vehicle

may damage the smartphone.

● Do not push down on or apply

unnecessary pressure to the

smartphone while it is con-

nected as this may damage the

smartphone or its terminal.

● Do not insert foreign objects into

the port as this may damage the

smartphone or its terminal.

438

5-8. Media operation

The Bluetooth

audio operation

screen can be reached by the

following methods: P.421

 Connecting a Bluetooth

audio device (P.440)

 Depending on the type of por-

table player connected, some

functions may not be avail-

able and/or the screen may

look differently than shown in

this manual.

 When an Apple

CarPlay/Android Auto con-

nection is established,

Bluetooth

audio will be sus-

pended and become unavail-

able.

: This function is not made avail-

able in some countries or areas.

Select to display the audio

source selection screen.

Select to return to the top

screen.

Select to display a song list

screen.

Select to display the play

mode selection screen.

Select to display the portable

device connection screen.

(P.440)

Select to display the sound

setting screen. (P.422)

Select to set repeat playback.

(P.439)

Select to change the track.

Select and hold to fast

rewind.

Select to play/pause.

Select to change the track.

Select and hold to fast for-

ward.

Bluetooth

audio

The Bluetooth

audio sys-

tem enables users to enjoy

listening to music that is

played on a portable player

on the vehicle speakers via

wireless communication.

This audio/visual system

supports Bluetooth

, a wire-

less data system capable of

playing portable audio

music without cables. If

your device does not sup-

port Bluetooth

, the

Bluetooth

audio system

will not function.

Overview

Control screen

439

5-8. Media operation

Audio

Select to set random play-

back. (P. 43 9 )

Select to change the album.

Displays cover art

Press to change the track.

Press and hold to fast for-

ward/rewind.

Turn to change the track.

Turn to move up/down the

list. Also, the knob can be

used to enter selections on

the list screens by pressing it.

The track or album currently

being listened to can be

repeated.

1 Select .

● Each time is selected, the

mode changes as follows:

 When random playback is off

• track repeat  album repeat  off

 When random playback is on

• track repeat  off

Tracks or albums can be auto-

matically and randomly

selected.

1 Select .

● Each time is selected, the

mode changes as follows:

• random (1 album random) 

album random (all album random)

 off

● Depending on the Bluetooth

device that is connected to the

system, the music may start play-

ing when selecting while it is

paused. Conversely, the music

may pause when selecting

while it is playing.

● In the following conditions, the

system may not function:

• The Bluetooth

device is turned

off.

• The Bluetooth

device is not con-

nected.

• The Bluetooth

device has a low

battery.

● When using the Bluetooth

audio

and Wi-Fi

Hotspot functions at

the same time, the following prob-

lems may occur:

• It may take longer than normal to

connect to the Bluetooth

device.

• The sound may cut out.

● It may take time to connect the

phone when Bluetooth

audio is

being played.

● For operating the portable player,

see the instruction manual that

comes with it.

● If the Bluetooth

device is discon-

nected due to poor reception from

Control panel

Repeating

Random order

440

5-8. Media operation

the Bluetooth

network when the

engine switch is in ACC or ON,

the system automatically recon-

nects the portable player.

● If the Bluetooth

device is discon-

nected on purpose, such as it was

turned off, this does not happen.

Reconnect the portable player

manually.

● Bluetooth

device information is

registered when the Bluetooth

device is connected to the

Bluetooth

audio system. When

selling or disposing of the vehicle,

remove the Bluetooth

audio

information from the system.

(P.417)

● In some situations, sound output

via the Bluetooth

audio system

may be out of sync with the con-

nected device or output intermit-

tently.

To use the Bluetooth

audio

system, it is necessary to regis-

ter a Bluetooth

device with the

system.

 Registering an additional

device

1 Display the Bluetooth

audio

control screen. (P.438)

2 Select “Connect”.

3 Select “Add Device”.

 When another Bluetooth

device is connected, a confir-

mation screen will be dis-

played. To disconnect the

Bluetooth

device, select

“Yes”.

WARNING

● Do not operate the player’s con-

trols or connect to the

Bluetooth

audio system while

driving.

● Your audio unit is fitted with

Bluetooth

antennas. People

with implantable cardiac pace-

makers, cardiac resynchroniza-

tion therapy-pacemakers or

implantable cardioverter defi-

brillators should maintain a rea-

sonable distance between

themselves and the Bluetooth

antennas. The radio waves may

affect the operation of such

devices.

● Before using Bluetooth

devices, users of any electrical

medical device other than

implantable cardiac pacemak-

ers, cardiac resynchronization

therapy-pacemakers or implan-

table cardioverter defibrillators

should consult the manufacturer

of the device for information

about its operation under the

influence of radio waves. Radio

waves could have unexpected

effects on the operation of such

medical devices.

NOTICE

● Do not leave your portable

player in the vehicle. In particu-

lar, high temperatures inside the

vehicle may damage the porta-

ble player.

Registering/Connecting a

Bluetooth

device

441

5-8. Media operation

Audio

4 Follow the steps in “Register-

ing a Bluetooth

phone for

the first time” from step 5.

(P.390)

 Selecting a registered device

1 Display the Bluetooth

audio

control screen. (P.438)

2 Select “Connect”.

3 Select the desired device to

be connected.

4 Check that a confirmation

screen is displayed when the

connection is complete.

 If an error message is dis-

played, follow the guidance

on the screen to try again.

442

5-9. Audio/visual remote controls

5-9.Audio/visual remote controls

Some parts of the audio/visual

system can be adjusted using

the switches on the steering

wheel.

Volume control switch

“MODE” switch

switch

■ Volume control switch

• Press: Volume up/down

• Press and hold (0.8 sec. or

more): Volume up/down con-

tinuously

■ “MODE” switch

 AM/FM/SXM

• Press: Change audio modes

• Press and hold (0.8 sec. or

more): Mute/pause

(Press

and hold again to resume)

 USB

*3, 4

, iPod/iPhone

Bluetooth

audio

*3, 4

, Android

Auto

, Toyota Apps

*3, 4

• Press: Change audio modes

• Press and hold (0.8 sec. or

more): Pause (Press and hold

again to resume the play

mode.)

:This function is not made avail-

able in some countries or areas.

:If cached radio is enabled, press-

ing and holding the “MODE”

switch pauses the broadcast.

(Press and hold again to play

back the cached radio program.)

:When an Apple CarPlay connec-

tion is established, this function

will be unavailable.

:When an Android Auto connec-

tion is established, this function

will be unavailable.

■ switch

 AM/FM

• Press: Preset channel

up/down

• Press and hold (0.8 sec. or

more): Seek up/down

• Press and hold (1.5 sec. or

more): Seek up/down continu-

ously while the switch is being

pressed

• Press and hold (1.5 sec. or

more): Fast channel up/down

 SXM

• Press: Preset channel

up/down

• Press and hold (0.8 sec. or

more): Seek for stations in the

relevant program type/chan-

nel category

• Press and hold (1.5 sec. or

more): Fast channel up/down

Steering switches

Steering switch operation

443

5-9. Audio/visual remote controls

Audio

 USB

*2, 3

, iPod/iPhone

Bluetooth

audio

*2, 3

• Press: Track/file up/down

• Press and hold (0.8 sec. or

more): Fast forward/rewind

 Android Auto

• Press: Track up/down

:This function is not made avail-

able in some countries or areas.

:When an Apple CarPlay connec-

tion is established, this function

will be unavailable.

:When an Android Auto connec-

tion is established, this function

will be unavailable.

444

5-10. Audio settings

5-10.Audio settings

1 Press the “MENU” button.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Audio”.

4 Select the desired items to

be set.

Select to set the common

settings. (P.444)

Select to set the radio set-

tings. (P.44 4 )

1 Display the audio settings

screen.

P.444

2 Select “Common”.

3 Select the desired items to

be set.

Select to set the cover art

display on/off.

Select to prioritize the display

of information from the

Gracenote database.

Select to change the screen

size.

(P.423)

Select to display the image

quality adjustment screen.

(P.424)

: Only in USB video mode

1 Display the audio settings

screen

P.444

2 Select “Radio”.

3 Select the desired number of

preset radio stations dis-

played on the screen.

Setup

Detailed audio settings can

be programmed.

Displaying the audio set-

tings screen

Audio settings screen

Common settings

Radio settings

445

5-10. Audio settings

Audio

1 Select “Manage Smart

Favorites”.

2 Select the desired channel to

be set.

● Displays the registered preset

channels.

● Up to 20 channels can be regis-

tered.

1 Select “Number of Radio Pre-

sets”.

2 Select the button with the

desired number to be dis-

played.

Manage smart favorites

Setting the number of radio

presets

446

5-11. Tips for operating the audio/visual system

5-11.Tips for operating the audio/visual system

● The use of a cellular phone inside

or near the vehicle may cause a

noise from the speakers of the

audio/visual system which you are

listening to. However, this does

not indicate a malfunction.

Usually, a problem with radio

reception does not mean there

is a problem with the radio  it

is just the normal result of condi-

tions outside the vehicle.

For example, nearby buildings

and terrain can interfere with FM

reception. Power lines or phone

wires can interfere with AM sig-

nals. And of course, radio sig-

nals have a limited range. The

farther the vehicle is from a sta-

tion, the weaker its signal will

be. In addition, reception condi-

tions change constantly as the

vehicle moves.

Here are some common recep-

tion problems that may not indi-

cate a problem with the radio as

described.

■ FM

Fading and drifting stations:

Generally, the effective range of

FM is about 25 miles (40 km).

Once outside this range, you

may notice fading and drifting,

which increase with the distance

from the radio transmitter. They

are often accompanied by dis-

tortion.

Multi-path: FM signals are

reflective, making it possible for

2 signals to reach the vehicle’s

antenna at the same time. If this

happens, the signals will cancel

each other out, causing a

momentary flutter or loss of

reception.

Static and fluttering: These

occur when signals are blocked

by buildings, trees or other large

objects. Increasing the bass

level may reduce static and flut-

tering.

Station swapping: If the FM sig-

nal being listened to is inter-

rupted or weakened, and there

is another strong station nearby

on the FM band, the radio may

tune in the second station until

the original signal can be picked

up again.

■ AM

Fading: AM broadcasts are

reflected by the upper atmo-

sphere  especially at night.

These reflected signals can

interfere with those received

directly from the radio station,

causing the radio station to

sound alternately strong and

weak.

Operating information

NOTICE

● To avoid damage to the

audio/visual system:

• Be careful not to spill beverages

over the audio/visual system.

Radio

447

5-11. Tips for operating the audio/visual system

Audio

Station interference: When a

reflected signal and a signal

received directly from a radio

station are very nearly the same

frequency, they can interfere

with each other, making it diffi-

cult to hear the broadcast.

Static: AM is easily affected by

external sources of electrical

noise, such as high tension

power lines, lightening or electri-

cal motors. This results in static.

■ SiriusXM

 Cargo loaded on the roof lug-

gage carrier, especially metal

objects, may adversely affect

the reception of SiriusXM Sat-

ellite Radio.

 Alternation or modifications

carried out without appropri-

ate authorization may invali-

date the user’s right to

operate the equipment.

: This function is not made avail-

able in some countries or areas.

■ Certification

 Use of the Made for Apple

badge means that an acces-

sory has been designed to

connect specifically to the

Apple product(s) identified in

the badge, and has been cer-

tified by the developer to meet

Apple performance stan-

dards. Apple is not responsi-

ble for the operation of this

device or its compliance with

safety and regulatory stan-

dards. Please note that the

use of this accessory with an

Apple product may affect

wireless performance.

 iPhone, iPod, iPod classic,

iPod nano, iPod touch, and

Lightning are trademarks of

Apple Inc., registered in the

U.S. and other countries.

■ Compatible models

The following iPod touch

and

iPhone

devices can be used

with this system.

Made for

• iPhone X

• iPhone 8

• iPhone 8 Plus

• iPhone 7

• iPhone 7 Plus

• iPhone SE

iPod/iPhone

448

5-11. Tips for operating the audio/visual system

• iPhone 6s

• iPhone 6s Plus

• iPhone 6

• iPhone 6 Plus

• iPhone 5s

• iPhone 5c

• iPhone 5

• iPod touch (6th generation)

• iPod touch (5th generation)

● This system only supports audio

playback.

● Depending on difference between

models or software versions etc.,

some models might be incompati-

ble with this system.

This device supports high-reso-

lution sound sources.

The definition of high-resolution

is based on the standards of

groups such as the CTA (Con-

sumer Technology Association).

Supported formats and play-

able media are as follows.

■ Supported formats

WAV, FLAC, ALAC, OGG Vorbis

■ Playable media

USB

: USB video only

High-resolution sound

source

File information

Compatible USB devices

USB communi-

cation formats

USB 2.0 HS (480

Mbps)

File formats FAT 16/32

Correspon-

dence class

Mass storage

class

Compatible audio format

Compatible compressed files

Item USB

Compatible file

format

MP3/WMA/AAC

WAV(LPCM)/FL

AC/ALAC/OGG

Vorbis

MP4/AVI/WMV

Compatible file

format (video)

MP4/AVI/WMV

Folders in the

device

Maximum

3000

Files in the

device

Maximum

9999

Files per folder

Maximum

255

449

5-11. Tips for operating the audio/visual system

Audio

:Only compatible with Windows

Media Audio Standard

:Sound source of 48kHz or more

is down-converted to

48kHz/24bit.

:Variable Bit Rate (VBR) compati-

ble

:Only compatible with Windows

Media Audio Standard

Corresponding sampling fre-

quency

File type Frequency (kHz)

MP3 files:

MPEG 1 LAYER

32/44.1/48

MP3 files:

MPEG 2 LSF

LAYER 3

16/22.05/24

WMA files:

Ver. 7, 8, 9

(9.1/9.2)

32/44.1/48

AAC files:

MPEG4/AAC-LC

11.025/12/16/

22.05/24/32/

44.1/48

WAV (LPCM)

files

8/11.025/12/16/

22.05/24/32/

44.1/48/88.2/

96/176.4/192

FLAC

8/11.025/12/16/

22.05/24/32/

44.1/48/88.2/

96/176.4/192

ALAC

8/11.025/12/16/

22.05/24/32/

44.1/48/64/

88.2/96

OGG Vorbis

8/11.025/16/

22.05/32/44.1/

Corresponding bit rates

File type Bit rate (kbps)

MP3 files:

MPEG 1 LAYER

32 - 320

MP3 files:

MPEG 2 LSF

LAYER 3

8 - 160

WMA files: Ver.

7, 8

CBR 48 - 192

WMA files:

Ver. 9

(9.1/9.2)

CBR 48 - 320

AAC files:

MPEG4/AAC-LC

8 - 320

OGG Vorbis 32-500

File type

Quantization bit

rate (bit)

WAV (LPCM)

files

16/24

FLAC

ALAC

Compatible channel modes

File type Channel mode

MP3 files

Stereo, joint ste-

reo, dual chan-

nel and

monaural

WMA files 2ch

450

5-11. Tips for operating the audio/visual system

 MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3),

WMA (Windows Media Audio)

and AAC (Advanced Audio

Coding) are audio compres-

sion standards.

 This system can play

MP3/WMA/AAC files on USB

memory.

 MP4, WMV and AVI files can

use the following resolutions:

128x96, 160x120, 176x144

(QCIF), 320x240 (QVGA),

352x240 (SIF), 352x288

(CIF), 640x480 (VGA),

720x480 (NTSC), 720x576

(PAL)

 When naming an

MP3/WMA/AAC file, add an

appropriate file extension

(.mp3/.wma/.m4a).

 This system plays back files

with .mp3/.wma/.m4a file

extensions as

MP3/WMA/AAC files respec-

tively. To prevent noise and

playback errors, use the

appropriate file extension.

 MP3 files are compatible with

the ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1,

Ver. 2.2 and Ver. 2.3 formats.

This system cannot display

disc title, track title and artist

name in other formats.

 WMA/AAC files can contain a

WMA/AAC tag that is used in

the same way as an ID3 tag.

WMA/AAC tags carry infor-

mation such as track title and

artist name.

 The emphasis function is

available only when playing

MP3 files.

 This system can play back

AAC files encoded by iTunes.

 The sound quality of

MP3/WMA files generally

improves with higher bit rates.

 m3u playlists are not compati-

ble with the audio player.

 MP3i (MP3 interactive) and

MP3PRO formats are not

compatible with the audio

player.

 The player is compatible with

VBR (Variable Bit Rate).

 When playing back files

recorded as VBR (Variable Bit

Rate) files, the play time will

not be correctly displayed if

the fast forward or reverse

operations are used.

 It is not possible to check fold-

ers that do not include

MP3/WMA/AAC files.

 MP3/WMA/AAC files in fold-

ers up to 8 levels deep can be

played. However, the start of

playback may be delayed

AAC files

1ch, 2ch (Dual

channel is not

supported)

WAV (LPCM)/

FLAC/ALAC/

OGG Vorbis

2ch

File type Channel mode

451

5-11. Tips for operating the audio/visual system

Audio

when using USB memory

containing numerous levels of

folders. For this reason, we

recommend creating USB

memory with no more than 2

levels of folders.

 The play order of the USB

memory with the structure

shown above is as follows:

 The order changes depending

on the personal computer and

MP3/WMA/AAC encoding

software you use.

Compatible video format

Format Codec

MPEG-4

Video codec:

 H.264/MPEG-

4 AVC

 MPEG4

Audio codec:

 AAC

 MP3

Corresponding

screen size:

 MAX 1920 

1080

Corresponding

frame rate:

 MAX 60i/30p

452

5-11. Tips for operating the audio/visual system

■ ID3 tag

 This is a method of embed-

ding track-related information

in an MP3 file. This embed-

ded information can include

the track number, track title,

the artist’s name, the album

title, the music genre, the year

of production, comments,

cover art and other data. The

contents can be freely edited

using software with ID3 tag

editing functions. Although

the tags are restricted to a

number of characters, the

information can be viewed

when the track is played back.

■ WMA tag

 WMA files can contain a

WMA tag that is used in the

same way as an ID3 tag.

WMA tags carry information

such as track title and artist

name.

■ MP3

 MP3 is an audio compression

standard determined by a

working group (MPEG) of the

ISO (International Standard

Organization). MP3 com-

presses audio data to about

1/10 the size of that on con-

ventional discs.

■ WMA

 WMA (Windows Media Audio)

is an audio compression for-

mat developed by Microsoft

It compresses files into a size

smaller than that of MP3 files.

The decoding formats for

AVI Container

Video codec:

 H.264/MPEG-

4 AVC

 MPEG4

 WMV9

Advanced pro-

file

Audio codec:

 AAC

 MP3

 WMA9.2 (7, 8,

9.1, 9.2)

Corresponding

screen size:

 MAX 1920 

1080

Corresponding

frame rate:

 MAX 60i/30p

Windows Media

Video

Video codec:

 WMV9

Advanced pro-

file

Audio codec:

 WMA9.2 (7, 8,

9.1, 9.2)

Corresponding

screen size:

 MAX 1920 

1080

Corresponding

frame rate:

 MAX 60i/30p

Terms

Format Codec

453

5-11. Tips for operating the audio/visual system

Audio

WMA files are Ver. 7, 8 and 9.

 Windows Media is either a

registered trademark or trade-

mark of Microsoft Corpora-

tion in the United States

and/or other countries.

This product includes technol-

ogy owned by Microsoft Cor-

poration and cannot be used

or distributed without a

license from Microsoft Licens-

ing, Inc.

■ AAC

 AAC is short for Advanced

Audio Coding and refers to an

audio compression technol-

ogy standard used with

MPEG2 and MPEG4.

■ USB

■ iPod

■ Bluetooth

audio

● If the malfunction is not rectified:

Take your vehicle to your Toyota

dealer.

Error messages

Message Explanation

“USB Error”

This indicates a

problem in the

USB memory or

its connection.

“No music files

found.”

This indicates

that no

MP3/WMA/AAC

files are included

in the USB mem-

ory.

“No video files

found.”

This indicates

that no video

files are included

in the USB mem-

ory.

Message Explanation

“iPod Error”

This indicates a

problem in the

iPod or its con-

nection.

“No music files

found.”

This indicates

that there is no

music data in the

iPod.

“Please check

the iPod firm-

ware version.”

This indicates

that the software

version is not

compatible. Per-

form the iPod

firmware

updates and try

again.

“Unable to

authorize the

iPod.”

This indicates

that it failed to

authorize the

iPod.

Please check

your iPod.

Message Explanation

“Music tracks not

supported.

Please check

your portable

player.”

This indicates a

problem in the

Bluetooth

device.

454

5-11. Tips for operating the audio/visual system

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam, Saipan, American

Samoa and Puerto Rico

Certification

455

5-11. Tips for operating the audio/visual system

Audio

 For vehicles sold in Canada

456

5-11. Tips for operating the audio/visual system

 Gracenote

457

5-11. Tips for operating the audio/visual system

Audio

 For U.S. owners

458

5-12. Voice command system operation

5-12.Voice command system operation

■ Steering switch

Talk switch

 Voice command system

 Press the talk switch to start

the voice command system.

To cancel voice command,

press and hold the talk switch.

 When an Apple

CarPlay/Android Auto con-

nection is established

 Press and hold the talk switch

to start Siri/Google Assistant.

To cancel Siri/Google Assis-

tant, press the talk switch.

 Press the talk switch to start

the voice command system.

■ Microphone

 It is unnecessary to speak

directly into the microphone

when giving a command.

● Voice commands may not be rec-

ognized if:

• Spoken too quickly.

• Spoken at a low or high volume.

• The roof or windows are open.

• Passengers are talking while

voice commands are spoken.

• The fan speed of the air condition-

ing system is set at high.

• The air conditioning vents are

turned towards the microphone.

● In the following conditions, the

system may not recognize the

command properly and using

voice commands may not be pos-

sible:

• The command is incorrect or

unclear. Note that certain words,

accents or speech patterns may

be difficult for the system to recog-

nize.

• There is excessive background

noise, such as wind noise.

● Normally, it is necessary to wait

for a beep before saying a com-

mand. To enable the ability to talk

over prompts and say commands

before the beep, enable the voice

prompt interrupt function.

(P.418)

● This system may not operate

immediately after the engine

Voice command sys-

tem

The voice command sys-

tem enables the radio,

phone dialing, etc. to be

operated using voice com-

mands. Refer to the com-

mand list for samples of

voice commands. (P.461)

Using the voice command

system

459

5-12. Voice command system operation

Audio

switch is in ACC or ON.

The voice command system is

operated by saying commands

which correspond to a sup-

ported function. To display

examples of commands for sup-

ported functions, select a func-

tion button on the screen after

starting the voice command sys-

tem.

1 Press the talk switch.

 Voice guidance for the voice

command system can be

skipped by pressing the talk

switch.

2 If “Getting Started with Voice”

screen is displayed, select

“OK” or press the talk switch.

(P.460)

3 After hearing a beep, say a

supported command.

 To display sample commands

of the desired function, say

the desired function or select

the desired function button. To

display more commands,

select “More Commands”.

 Selecting “Help” or saying

“Help” prompts the voice com-

mand system to offer exam-

ples of commands and

operation methods.

 Registered POIs, registered

names in the contacts list etc.,

can be said in the place of the

“<>” next to the commands.

(P.461)

For example: Say “Find a restau-

rant”, “Call John Smith” etc.

 If a desired outcome is not

shown, or if no selections are

available, perform one of the

following to return to the pre-

vious screen:

• Say “Go back”.

• Select .

 To cancel voice recognition,

select , say “Cancel”, or

press and hold the talk switch.

 To perform the voice com-

mand operation again, select

“Start Over” or say “Start

over”.

 To suspend voice command

operation, select “Pause” or

say “Pause”. To resume the

NOTICE

● Do not touch and put a sharp

object to the microphone. It may

cause failure.

Voice command system

operation

Operation from the main

460

5-12. Voice command system operation

voice command operation,

select “Resume” or press the

talk switch.

● If the system does not respond or

the confirmation screen does not

disappear, press the talk switch

and try again.

● If a voice command cannot be rec-

ognized 3 consecutive times,

voice recognition will be canceled.

● Voice recognition prompts can be

changed on the voice settings

screen. (P.418)

This function can be used to cancel

voice guidance by turning the voice

prompts off. When you press the

talk switch while using this setting, a

beep sounds, and then you can

immediately say a command.

● Some voice guidance can be can-

celed by setting voice prompts to

off. Use this setting when it is

desirable to say a command

immediately after pressing the talk

switch and hearing a beep.

To increase voice recognition

performance, use the “Tutori-

als” and “Voice Training” func-

tions on the “Getting Started

with Voice” screen. These func-

tions are only available when

the vehicle is not moving.

The “Tutorials” and “Voice Train-

ing” functions can also be

started on the voice settings

screen. (P.418)

1 Press the talk switch.

2 Select the desired item to be

set.

Select to display the voice

command tutorials.

Select to train the voice com-

mand system.

The user will be asked to say 10

sample phrases. This will help the

voice command system adapt to

the user’s accent.

Select to prevent the screen

from being displayed again.

Select to proceed to the

voice command screen.

Increasing the voice rec-

ognition performance

461

5-12. Voice command system operation

Audio

Recognizable voice commands

and their actions are shown

below.

 Frequently used commands

are listed in the following

tables.

 For devices that are not

installed to the vehicle, com-

mands relating to that device

may not be displayed on the

screen. Also, depending on

other conditions, such as

compatibility, some com-

mands may not be displayed

on the screen.

 The functions available may

vary according to the system

installed.

 Voice recognition language

can be changed. (P.414)

 When an Apple

CarPlay/Android Auto con-

nection is established, some

commands will become

unavailable.

■ Common

■ Top menu

: Vehicle must be parked

Command list

Command list overview

Command list

Command Action

“Help”

Displays exam-

ples of some of

the available

commands

“Go back”

Returns to the

previous screen

“Cancel”

Cancels the

voice command

system

“Start over”

Returns to top

menu screen

“Pause”

Temporarily

pauses a voice

session until it is

resumed by

pressing the talk

switch again.

Command Action

“Show com-

mand examples

for <menu>”

Displays the

command list of

the selected

“More com-

mands”

Displays more

commonly used

commands

“Voice settings”

Displays Voice

Setting screen

“Train my voice”

Displays Train

Voice Recogni-

tion screen

462

5-12. Voice command system operation

■ Phone

: If the system does not recognize

the name of a contact, create a

voice tag. (P.483) The name of

a contact can also be recognized

by adding a voice tag.

■ While in a phone call

■ While incoming message

notification is displayed

: Full screen message notification

must be turned on within the

phone settings (P.481)

Command Action

“Call <contact>”

Places a call to

the specified

contact from the

phone book

“Call <contact>

<phone type>”

Places a call to

the specified

phone type of

the contact from

the phone book

“Dial <phone

number>”

Places a call to

the specified

phone number

“Redial”

Places a call to

the phone num-

ber of the latest

outgoing call

“Call back”

Places a call to

the phone num-

ber of latest

incoming call

“Show recent

calls”

Displays the call

history screen

“Send a mes-

sage to <con-

tact>”

Sends a text

message to

specified con-

tact from the

phone book

Command Action

“Send <digits>”

Sends DTMF

tones has speci-

fied

“Mute”

Mutes the micro-

phone (far side

cannot hear the

conversation)

“Unmute”

Unmutes the

microphone

Command Action

“Read message”

Reads the

incoming mes-

sage over the

vehicle speakers

“Ignore”

Ignores the

incoming mes-

sage notification

“Reply”

Initiates sending

a reply to the

incoming mes-

sage

“Call”

Places a call to

the phone num-

ber of incoming

message

463

5-12. Voice command system operation

Audio

■ Radio

:A station list must be built first

using the radio screen (P.425)

:Requires a satellite radio sub-

scription

■ Audio

: The audio device must be con-

nected via a USB cable to use the

Command Action

“Tune to <fre-

quency> AM”

Changes the

radio to the

specified AM fre-

quency

“Tune to <fre-

quency> FM”

Changes the

radio to the

specified FM fre-

quency

“Play a <genre>

station”

Changes the

radio to an FM

station of the

specified genre

“Tune to preset

<1-36>”

Changes the

radio to the

specified preset

radio station

“Tune to a

<genre> satel-

lite station”

Changes the

radio to a satel-

lite radio channel

of the specified

genre

“Tune to <satel-

lite channel

name>”

Changes the

radio to the sat-

ellite radio chan-

nel with the

specified name

“Tune to chan-

nel <number> on

XM”

Changes the

radio to a satel-

lite radio channel

of the specified

number

Command Action

“Play Playlist

<name>”

Plays tracks

from the

selected playlist

“Play Artist

<name>”

Plays tracks

from the

selected artist

“Play Song

<name>”

Plays the

selected track

“Play Album

<name>”

Plays tracks

from the

selected album

“Play Genre

<name>”

Plays tracks

from the

selected genre

“Play Composer

<name>”

Plays tracks

from the

selected com-

poser

“Play Podcast

<name>”

Plays tracks

from the

selected podcast

“Play Audiobook

<name>”

Plays tracks

from the

selected audio-

book

“Audio On”

Turns the

audio/visual sys-

tem on

“Audio Off”

Turns the

audio/visual sys-

tem off

“Change the

audio source to

<source name>”

Sets the source

to the specified

audio mode

464

5-12. Voice command system operation

functionality in this section

■ Toyota Apps

: When an application is opened

and is in full screen mode, press-

ing the talk switch will start the

voice command system and com-

mands for the currently displayed

application will be available

● Commands relating to operation

of the audio/visual system can

only be performed when the

audio/visual system is turned on.

Command Action

“Launch <appli-

cation name>”

Activates the

Toyota Apps

465

5-13. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones)

Audio

5-13.Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones)

The phone screen can be

reached by the following meth-

ods:

 From the “PHONE” button

1 Press the “PHONE” button.

 From the “MENU” button

1 Press the “MENU” button,

then select “Phone”.

The following functions can be

used on phone operation:

 Registering/connecting a

Bluetooth

device (P.390)

 Placing a call using the

Bluetooth

hands-free system

(P.470)

 Receiving a call using the

Bluetooth

hands-free system

(P.473)

 Talking on the Bluetooth

hands-free system (P.474)

The following function can be

used on message function:

 Using the Bluetooth

phone

message function (P.476)

The following functions can be

made in the system:

 Phone settings (P. 48 1 )

 Bluetooth

settings (P.394)

Quick reference

Phone screen operation

Bluetooth

hands-free

system operation

Message function

Setting up a phone

466

5-13. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones)

● This system is not guaranteed to

operate with all Bluetooth

devices.

● If your cellular phone does not

support Bluetooth

, this system

cannot function.

● In the following conditions, the

system may not function:

• The cellular phone is turned off.

• The current position is outside the

communication area.

• The cellular phone is not con-

nected.

• The cellular phone has a low bat-

tery.

● Depending on the type of

Bluetooth

phone, some function

is not available.

● When using the hands-free sys-

tem or Bluetooth

audio and

W-Fi

Hotspot functions at the

same time, the following problems

may occur:

• The Bluetooth

connection may

be cut.

• Noise may be heard on the

Bluetooth

audio playback.

• A noise may be heard during

phone calls.

● Bluetooth

uses the 2.4 GHz fre-

quency band. If both a Wi-Fi

con-

nection and Bluetooth

connection are being used simul-

taneously, each connection may

be affected.

● If a Bluetooth

device is attempt-

ing to connect to the vehicle while

another device is connected as a

Bluetooth

audio device or con-

nected using the hands-free sys-

tem or Wi-Fi

Hotspot function,

the communication speed may

decrease or malfunctions may

occur, such as image distortion or

audio skipping. If a Bluetooth

device is connected to the system,

the interference it may cause will

be reduced. When carrying a

device with its Bluetooth

connec-

tion enabled, make sure to regis-

ter it to the system and connect it

or disable its Bluetooth

function.

● When a device is connected via

Bluetooth

, the Bluetooth

icon

on the status bar will be displayed

in blue. (P.378)

Some basics

The hands-free system

enables calls to be made

and received without having

to take your hands off the

steering wheel.

This system supports

Bluetooth

. Bluetooth

is a

wireless data system that

enables cellular phones to

be used without being con-

nected by a cable or placed

in a cradle.

The operating procedure of

the phone is explained here.

When an Apple CarPlay

connection is established,

phone functions will be per-

formed by Apple CarPlay

instead of the hands-free

system.

WARNING

● While driving, do not operate a

cellular phone.

467

5-13. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones)

Audio

To use the hands-free system

for cellular phones, it is neces-

sary to register a cellular phone

with the system. (P.390)

■ Connecting a Bluetooth

device

 Registering an additional

device

1 Display the phone top

screen. (P.465)

2 Select “Select Device”.

3 Select “Add Device”.

 When another Bluetooth

device is connected, a confir-

mation screen will be dis-

played. To disconnect the

Bluetooth

device, select

“Yes”.

4 Follow the steps in “Register-

ing a Bluetooth

phone for

the first time” from step 5.

(P.390)

 Selecting a registered device

1 Display the phone top

screen. (P.465)

2 Select “Select Device”.

3 Select the desired device to

be connected.

4 Check that a confirmation

screen is displayed when the

connection is complete.

 If an error message is dis-

played, follow the guidance

on the screen to try again.

■ Bluetooth

phone condition

display

The condition of the Bluetooth

phone appears on the upper

right side of the screen.

WARNING

● Your audio unit is fitted with

Bluetooth

antennas. People

with implantable cardiac pace-

makers, cardiac resynchroniza-

tion therapy-pacemakers or

implantable cardioverter defi-

brillators should maintain a rea-

sonable distance between

themselves and the Bluetooth

antennas. The radio waves may

affect the operation of such

devices.

● Before using Bluetooth

devices, users of any electrical

medical device other than

implantable cardiac pacemak-

ers, cardiac resynchronization

therapy-pacemakers or implan-

table cardioverter defibrillators

should consult the manufacturer

of the device for information

about its operation under the

influence of radio waves. Radio

waves could have unexpected

effects on the operation of such

medical devices.

NOTICE

● Do not leave your cellular phone

in the vehicle. The temperature

inside may rise to a level that

could damage the phone.

Registering/Connecting a

Bluetooth

phone

468

5-13. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones)

(P.378)

■ Steering switch

By pressing the phone switch, a

call can be received or ended

without taking your hands off the

steering wheel.

Phone switch

• If the switch is pressed during a

call, the call will end.

• If the switch is pressed when an

incoming call is received, the call

will be answered.

• If the switch is pressed during a

call when a separate incoming

call is waiting, the waiting call will

be answered.

• If the switch is pressed when an

Apple CarPlay/Android Auto con-

nection is established, the Apple

CarPlay/Android Auto phone

application will be displayed on

the system screen.

Volume control switch

• Press the “+” side to increase the

volume.

• Press the “-” side to decrease the

volume.

■ Microphone

The microphone is used when

talking on the phone.

● The other party’s voice will be

heard from the front speakers.

The audio/visual system will be

muted during phone calls or when

hands-free voice commands are

used.

● Talk alternately with the other

party on the phone. If both parties

speak at the same time, the other

party may not hear what has been

said. (This is not a malfunction.)

● Keep call volume down. Other-

wise, the other party’s voice may

be audible outside the vehicle and

voice echo may increase. When

talking on the phone, speak

clearly towards the microphone.

● The other party may not hear you

clearly when:

• Driving on an unpaved road.

(Making excessive traffic noise.)

• Driving at high speeds.

• The roof or windows are open.

• The air conditioning vents are

pointed towards the microphone.

• The sound of the air conditioning

fan is loud.

• There is a negative effect on

sound quality due to the phone

and/or network being used.

Using the phone

switch/microphone

469

5-13. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones)

Audio

Press the talk switch to operate

the voice command system.

 The voice command system

and its list of commands can

be operated. (P.458)

 The following data is stored

for every registered phone.

When another phone is con-

nected, the following regis-

tered data cannot be read:

• Contact data

• Call history data

• Favorites data

• Image data

• All phone settings

• Message settings

● When a phone’s registration is

deleted, the above-mentioned

data is also deleted.

A lot of personal data is regis-

tered when the hands-free sys-

tem is used. When selling or

disposing of the vehicle, initial-

ize the data. (P.417)

 The following data in the sys-

tem can be initialized:

• Contact data

• Call history data

• Favorites data

• Image data

• All phone settings

• Message settings

● Once initialized, the data and set-

tings will be erased. Pay addi-

tional attention when initializing

the data.

NOTICE

● Do not touch and put a sharp

object to the microphone. It may

cause failure.

Voice command system

About the contacts in the

contact list

When selling or disposing

of the vehicle

470

5-13. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones)

1 Display the phone top

screen. (P.465)

2 Select the desired method to

call from.

■ Calling methods from

phone screen

 By call history (P.470)

 By favorites (P.471)

 By contacts (P.471)

 By keypad (P.472)

 By message (P.479)

■ Also the following lists are

available from each func-

tion’s screen

 By voice command system

(P.459)

 By home screen (P.473)

Up to 30 of the latest call history

items (missed, incoming and

outgoing) can be selected.

1 Display the phone top

screen. (P.465)

2 Select “History” and select

the desired contact.

 If the contact which is not reg-

istered on the contact list is

selected, the name is dis-

played as “Unknown Con-

tact”. In this case, select the

number to make a call prop-

erly.

3 Check that the dialing screen

is displayed.

● The icons of call type are dis-

played.

: Missed call

: Incoming call

: Outgoing call

● When making a call to the same

number continuously, only the

most recent call is listed in call his-

tory.

● When a phone number registered

in the contact list is received, the

name is displayed.

● Number-withheld calls are also

Placing a call using

the Bluetooth

hands-

free system

After a Bluetooth

phone

has been registered, a call

can be made using the

hands-free system. There

are several methods by

which a call can be made, as

described below.

Calling methods on the

Bluetooth

phone

By call history

471

5-13. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones)

Audio

memorized in the system.

● International phone calls may not

be made depending on the type of

Bluetooth

phone you have.

● The list should group together

consecutive entries with the same

phone number and same call

type. For example, two calls from

John’s mobile would be displayed

as follows: John (2)

Calls can be made using regis-

tered contacts which can be

selected from a contact list.

(P.471)

1 Display the phone top

screen. (P.465)

2 Select “Favorites” and select

the desired contact.

3 Select the desired number.

4 Check that the dialing screen

is displayed.

Calls can be made by using

contact data which is transferred

from a registered cellular phone.

(P.483)

Up to 5000 contacts (maximum

of 4 phone numbers, e-mail

addresses and addresses per

contact) can be registered in the

contact list.

1 Display the phone top

screen. (P.465)

2 Select “Contacts” and select

the desired contact.

3 Select the desired number.

“Add Favorite”/“Remove Favorite”:

Select to register/remove the con-

tact in the favorites list. (P.488)

“E-mail Addresses”: Select to dis-

play all registered e-mail addresses

for the contact.

“Addresses”: Select to display all

registered addresses for the con-

tact.

4 Check that the dialing screen

is displayed.

■ For PBAP compatible

Bluetooth

phones when

“Automatic Transfer” is set

to on (P.483)

 Contacts are transferred auto-

matically.

By favorites list

By contacts list

When the contact list is

empty

472

5-13. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones)

■ For PBAP compatible

Bluetooth

phones when

“Automatic Transfer” is set

to off (P.483)

1 Select the desired item.

Select to always transfer all

the contacts from a con-

nected cellular phone auto-

matically.

Select to transfer all the con-

tacts from a connected cellu-

lar phone only once.

Select to cancel transferring.

2 Check that a confirmation

screen is displayed when the

operation is complete.

■ For PBAP incompatible but

OPP compatible Bluetooth

phones

1 Select the desired item.

Select to transfer the con-

tacts from the connected cel-

lular phone.

Transfer the contact data to

the system using a

Bluetooth

phone.

Select to add a new contact

manually.

Follow the steps in “Register-

ing a new contact to the con-

tacts list” from step 2.

(P.486)

Select to cancel transferring.

● If your cellular phone is neither

PBAP nor OPP compatible, the

contacts cannot be transferred

using Bluetooth

. But the contacts

can be transferred from USB

device. (P.486)

● Depending on the type of

Bluetooth

phone:

• It may be necessary to perform

additional steps on the phone

when transferring contact data.

• The registered image in the con-

tact list may not transfer depend-

ing on the type of Bluetooth

phone connected.

1 Display the phone top

screen. (P.465)

2 Select “Keypad” and enter

the phone number.

3 Select or press the

switch on the steering wheel.

4 Check that the dialing screen

is displayed.

● Depending on the type of

By keypad

473

5-13. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones)

Audio

Bluetooth

phone being con-

nected, it may be necessary to

perform additional steps on the

phone.

1 Display the home screen.

(P.384)

2 Select the desired contact.

3 Check that the dialing screen

is displayed.

■ Registering a new contact

1 Select and hold the screen

button to add a contact.

2 Select the desired contact.

3 Select the desired number.

● If there is no contact in the con-

tacts list, the contacts cannot be

registered at the home screen.

● The contact cannot be registered

at the home screen while driving.

1 Select “Answer” or press the

switch on the steering

wheel to talk on the phone.

“Decline”: Select to refuse to

receive the call.

To adjust the volume of a received

call: Turn the “POWER VOLUME”

knob, or use the volume control

switch on the steering wheel.

● The contact image picture can be

displayed only when the vehicle is

not moving.

● During international phone calls,

the other party’s name or number

may not be displayed correctly

depending on the type of

Bluetooth

phone you have.

● The incoming call display mode

can be set. (P.482)

● The ringtone that has been set in

the sound settings screen can be

heard when there is an incoming

call. Depending on the type of

By home screen

Receiving a call using

the Bluetooth

hands-

free system

When a call is received, the

following screen is dis-

played with a sound.

Incoming calls

474

5-13. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones)

Bluetooth

phone, both the sys-

tem and Bluetooth

phone may

ring simultaneously when there is

an incoming call. (P.481)

Select to display the keypad

to send tones. (P.475)

Select to send tones. This

button only appears when a

number that contains a (w) is

dialed in hands-free mode.

(P.475)

Select to adjust your voice

volume that the other party

hears from their speaker.

(P.475)

Select to mute your voice to

the other party.

Select to change handset

modes between hands-free

and cellular phone.

Select to put a call on hold.

Talking on the

Bluetooth

hands-free

system

While talking on the phone,

the following screen is dis-

played. The operations out-

lined below can be

performed on this screen.

Call screen operation

475

5-13. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones)

Audio

To cancel this function, select

“Activate”.

Select to hang up the phone.

● Changing from hands-free call to

cellular phone call is not possible

while driving.

● Only when the vehicle is not mov-

ing, the contact image can be dis-

played.

● When cellular phone call is

changed to hands-free call, the

hands-free screen will be dis-

played and its functions can be

operated on the screen.

● Changing between cellular phone

call and hands-free call can be

performed by operating the cellu-

lar phone directly.

● Transferring methods and opera-

tions will be different depending

on the type of cellular phone you

have.

● For the operation of the cellular

phone, see the manual that

comes with it.

■ By keypad

This operation cannot be per-

formed while driving.

1 Select “0-9”.

2 Enter the desired number.

■ By selecting “Release

Tones”

“Release Tones” appear when a

continuous tone signal(s) con-

taining a (w) is registered in the

contact list.

This operation can be per-

formed while driving.

1 Select “Release Tones”.

● A continuous tone signal is a char-

acter string that consists of num-

bers and the characters “p” or “w”.

(e.g. 056133w0123p#1)

● When the “p” pause tone is used,

the tone data up until the next

pause tone will be automatically

sent after 2 seconds have

elapsed. When the “w” pause tone

is used, the tone data up until the

next pause tone will be automati-

cally sent after a user operation is

performed.

● Release tones can be used when

automated operation of a phone

based service such as an answer-

ing machine or bank phone ser-

vice is desired. A phone number

with continuous tone signals can

be registered in the contact list.

● Tone data after a “w” pause tone

can be operated by voice com-

mand during a call.

1 Select “Transmit Volume”.

2 Select the desired level for

the transmit volume.

3 Select to display previ-

ous screen.

● The sound quality of the voice

heard from the other party’s

speaker may be negatively

impacted.

● “Transmit Volume” is dimmed

when mute is on.

 When there are no calls on

hold during a call: “Hold” is

displayed. When selected, the

Sending tones

Transmit volume setting

Switching calls while a

call is in progress

476

5-13. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones)

current call is placed on hold.

 When there is no current call,

but there is a call on hold:

“Activate” is displayed. When

selected, the system switches

to the call that was on hold.

 When there is another call on

hold during a call: “Swap

Calls” is displayed. When

selected, the current call is

placed on hold, and the sys-

tem switches to the call that

was on hold.

● This function may not be available

depending on the type of cellular

phone.

When a call is interrupted by a

third party while talking, the

incoming screen is displayed.

1 Select “Answer” or press the

switch on the steering

wheel to start talking with the

other party.

 To refuse to receive the call:

Select “Decline”.

 Each time “Swap Calls” is

selected, the party who is on

hold will be switched.

● This function may not be available

depending on the type of

Bluetooth

phone.

1 Display the phone top

screen. (P.465)

2 Select “Message”.

 A confirmation message

appears when the “Automatic

Message Transfer” function is

set to off (P.489), select

“Yes”.

3 Check that the message

screen is displayed.

“Phone”: Select to change to phone

mode.

 The account name is dis-

played on the left side of

Incoming call waiting

Bluetooth

phone

message function

Received messages can be

forwarded from the con-

nected Bluetooth

phone,

enabling checking and

replying using the system.

Depending on the type of

Bluetooth

phone con-

nected, received messages

may not be transferred to

the system.

If the phone does not sup-

port the message function,

this function cannot be

used. Even when the sup-

ported phone is used, reply

function may not be used.

Displaying the message

screen

477

5-13. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones)

Audio

screen.

 Account names are the

names of the accounts that

exist on the currently con-

nected phone.

 The following functions can

be used on message function:

• Receiving a message

(P.477)

• Checking messages

(P.477)

• Replying to a message (dicta-

tion reply) (P.478)

• Replying to a message (quick

reply) (P.479)

• Calling the message sender

(P.479)

• Message settings (P. 48 9 )

When an e-mail/SMS/MMS is

received, the incoming message

screen pops up with sound and

is ready to be operated on the

screen.

Select to check the message.

Select to not open the mes-

sage.

Select to call the message

sender.

● Depending on the type of

Bluetooth

phone used for receiv-

ing messages, or its registration

status with the system, some

information may not be displayed.

● The pop-up screen is separately

available for incoming e-mail and

SMS/MMS messages under the

following conditions:

E-mail:

• “Incoming E-mail Display” is set to

“Full Screen”. (P.482)

• “E-mail Notification Pop-up” is set

to on. (P.482)

SMS/MMS:

• “Incoming SMS/MMS Display” is

set to “Full Screen”. (P.482)

• “SMS/MMS Notification Pop-up” is

set to on. (P.482)

● Depending on the type of

Bluetooth

phone being con-

nected, E-Mail function cannot be

used via Bluetooth

1 Display the message screen.

(P.476)

2 Select a desired account

name.

3 Select the desired message

from the list.

4 Check that the message is

displayed.

Receiving a message

Checking received mes-

sages

478

5-13. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones)

Select to call the message

sender.

Select to have messages

read out.

To cancel this function, select

“Stop”.

When “Automatic Message

Readout” is set to on, mes-

sages will be automatically

read out. (P.489)

Select to display the previous

or next message.

This function can be chosen

the method to reply mes-

sage with “Dictation” or

“Quick Message”.

● Reading a text message is not

available while driving.

● Depending on the type of

Bluetooth

phone being con-

nected, this function cannot be

used.

● Depending on the type of

Bluetooth

phone being con-

nected, it may be necessary to

perform additional steps on the

phone.

● Messages are displayed in the

appropriate connected Bluetooth

phone’s registered mail address

folder. Select the desired folder to

be displayed.

● Only received messages on the

connected Bluetooth

phone can

be displayed.

● The text of the message is not dis-

played while driving.

● Turn the “POWER VOLUME”

knob, or use the volume control

switch on the steering wheel to

adjust the message read out vol-

ume.

● “Subject:” field is not shown on

SMS case.

● E-mail only: Select “Mark Unread”

or “Mark Read” to mark mail

unread or read on the message

screen.

This function is available when

“Update Message Read Status on

Phone” is set to on. (P.489)

: If equipped

1 Display the message screen.

(P.476)

2 Select the desired message

from the list.

3 Select “Reply”.

4 Select “Dictation”.

5 When the “Say Your Mes-

sage” screen is displayed,

speak message that you

want to send.

6 Select “Send” to send mes-

sage.

“Cancel”: Select to cancel sending

the message.

“Retry”: Select to retry speaking

message that you want to send.

 While the message is being

sent, a sending message

screen is displayed.

7 Check that a confirmation

screen is displayed when the

operation is complete.

 If an error message is dis-

played, follow the guidance

on the screen to try again.

Replying to a message

(dictation reply)

479

5-13. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones)

Audio

15 messages have already

been stored.

1 Display the message screen.

(P.476)

2 Select the desired message

from the list.

3 Select “Reply”.

4 Select “Quick Message”.

5 Select the desired message.

: Select to edit the message.

(P.479)

6 Select “Send”.

“Cancel”: Select to cancel sending

the message.

 While the message is being

sent, a sending message

screen is displayed.

7 Check that a confirmation

screen is displayed when the

operation is complete.

 If an error message is dis-

played, follow the guidance

on the screen to try again.

● Depending on the type of

Bluetooth

phone, reply function

is not available.

■ Editing quick reply mes-

sages

This operation cannot be per-

formed while driving.

1 Select corresponding to

the desired message to edit.

2 Select “OK” when editing is

completed.

● To reset the edited quick reply

messages, select “Default”.

Calls can be made to an e-

mail/SMS/MMS message

sender’s phone number.

This operation can be per-

formed while driving.

■ Calling from e-

mail/SMS/MMS message

display

1 Display the message screen.

(P.476)

2 Select the desired message.

3 Select , or press the

switch on the steering wheel.

 If there are 2 or more phone

numbers, select the desired

number.

4 Check that the dialing screen

is displayed.

■ Calling from a number

within a message

Calls can be made to a number

identified in a message’s text

area.

This operation cannot be per-

formed while driving.

1 Display the message screen.

(P.476)

2 Select the desired message.

Replying to a message

(quick reply)

Calling the message

sender

480

5-13. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones)

3 Select the text area.

 Identified phone numbers

contained in the message are

displayed in blue text.

4 Select the desired number.

5 Check that the dialing screen

is displayed.

● A series of numbers may be rec-

ognized as a phone number. Addi-

tionally, some phone numbers

may not be recognized, such as

those for other countries.

■ Calling from the incoming

message screen

For detail, refer to “Receiving a

message”. (P.477)

481

5-14. Phone settings

Audio

5-14.Phone settings

1 Press the “MENU” button.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Phone”.

4 Select the desired item to be

set.

Connecting a Bluetooth

device and editing the

Bluetooth

device informa-

tion (P.395, 398)

Sound settings

(P.481)

Notifications/display set-

tings

(P.482)

Contact/call history settings

(P.483)

Message settings

(P.489)

: This operation cannot be per-

formed while driving.

The call and ringtone volume

can be adjusted. A ringtone can

be selected.

1 Display the phone settings

screen. (P.481)

2 Select “Sounds”.

3 Select the desired item to be

set.

Select to set the desired

ringtone.

Select “-” or “+” to adjust the

ringtone volume.

Select “-” or “+” to adjust the

default volume of the other

party’s voice.

Setup

Displaying the phone set-

tings screen

Phone settings screen

Sounds settings screen

482

5-14. Phone settings

Select to set the desired

incoming e-mail tone.

Select to set the desired

incoming SMS/MMS tone.

Select “-” or “+” to adjust the

incoming SMS/MMS tone

volume.

Select “-” or “+” to adjust the

incoming e-mail tone volume.

Select “-” or “+” to adjust the

message readout volume.

Select to reset all setup

items.

● Depending on the type of

Bluetooth

phone, certain func-

tions may not be available.

1 Display the phone settings

screen. (P.481)

2 Select “Notifications/Display”.

3 Select the desired item to be

set.

Select to change the incom-

ing call display.

“Full Screen”: When a call is

received, the incoming call screen

is displayed and can be operated

on the screen.

“Drop-down”: A message is dis-

played at the top of the screen.

Select to set the SMS/MMS

notification pop-up on/off.

Select to change the incom-

ing SMS/MMS display.

“Full Screen”: When an

SMS/MMS message is

received, the incoming

SMS/MMS display screen is

displayed and can be oper-

ated on the screen.

“Drop-down”: When an

SMS/MMS message is

received, a message is dis-

played at the top of the

Notifications/display set-

tings screen

483

5-14. Phone settings

Audio

screen.

Select to set the e-mail notifi-

cation pop-up on/off.

Select to change the incom-

ing e-mail display.

“Full Screen”: When an e-

mail is received, the incoming

e-mail display screen is dis-

played and can be operated

on the screen.

“Drop-down”: When an e-

mail is received, a message

is displayed at the top of the

screen.

Select to set display of the

contact/history transfer com-

pletion message on/off.

The phone top screen can be

set to be displayed on the

multi-information display or

system screen.

: If equipped

Select to reset all setup

items.

● Depending on the type of

Bluetooth

phone, these functions

may not be available.

Contacts can be transferred

from a Bluetooth

phone to this

system. Contacts and favorites

can be added, edited and

deleted. Also, the call history

can be deleted.

1 Display the phone settings

screen. (P.481)

2 Select “Contacts/Call His-

tory”.

3 Select the desired item to be

set.

For PBAP compatible

Bluetooth

phones: Select to

change the contact/history

transfer settings. (P.484)

Select to update contacts

from the connected device.

(P.485)

Select to sort contacts by the

first name or last name field.

Select to add contacts to the

favorites list. (P.487)

Select to delete contacts

from the favorites list.

(P.488)

Select to clear the call his-

Contacts/Call history set-

tings screen

484

5-14. Phone settings

tory.

Select to add new contacts to

the contact list.

(P.486)

Select to edit contacts in the

contact list.

(P.487)

Select to delete contacts

from the contact list.

(P.487)

Select to set the voice tags.

(P.488)

Select to reset all setup

items.

: For PBAP compatible Bluetooth

phones, this function is available

when “Automatic Transfer” is set

to off. (P.484)

● Depending on the type of

Bluetooth

phone, certain func-

tions may not be available.

● Contact data is managed inde-

pendently for every registered

phone. When one phone is con-

nected, another phone’s regis-

tered data cannot be read.

The automatic contact/history

function is available for PBAP

compatible Bluetooth

phones

only.

1 Select “Automatic Transfer”.

2 Select the desired item to be

set.

Select to set automatic con-

tact/history transfer on/off.

When set to on, the phone’s

contact data and history are

automatically transferred.

Select to update contacts

from the connected phone.

(P.484)

Select to set the transferred

contact image display on/off.

Only when the vehicle is not

moving, the contact image

can be displayed.

Select to reset all setup

items.

■ Updating contacts from

phone

1 Select “Update Now”.

 Contacts are transferred auto-

matically.

2 Check that a confirmation

screen is displayed when the

operation is complete.

 This operation may be unnec-

essary depending on the type

of Bluetooth

phone.

 If another Bluetooth

device

Setting automatic con-

tact/history transfer

485

5-14. Phone settings

Audio

is connected when transfer-

ring contact data, depending

on the phone, the connected

Bluetooth

device may need

to be disconnected.

 Depending on the type of

Bluetooth

phone being con-

nected, it may be necessary

to perform additional steps on

the phone.

■ Updating the contacts in a

different way (from the call

history screen)

1 Display the phone top

screen. (P.465)

2 Select “History” and select a

contact not yet registered in

the contact list.

3 Select “Update Contact”.

4 Select the desired contact.

5 Select a phone type for the

phone number.

: For PBAP compatible Bluetooth

phones, this function is available

when “Automatic Transfer” is set

to off. (P.484)

When an Android Auto connection

is established, this function will be

unavailable.

: This function is not made avail-

able in some countries or areas.

 When the contact is not regis-

tered

1 Select “Transfer Contacts

from Device”.

2 Select “From Phone

(Bluetooth)”.

3 Transfer the contact data to

the system using a

Bluetooth

phone.

 This operation may be unnec-

essary depending on the type

of Bluetooth

phone.

 To cancel this function, select

“Cancel”.

4 Check that a confirmation

screen is displayed when the

operation is complete.

 When the contact is regis-

tered

1 Select “Transfer Contacts

from Device”.

2 Select “From Phone

(Bluetooth)”.

3 Select “Replace Contacts” or

“Add Contact”.

“Replace Contacts”: Select to trans-

fer the contact from the connected

cellular phone and replace the cur-

rent one.

“Add Contact”: Select to transfer

the desired contact data from the

connected cellular phone to add to

the current one.

Transfer contacts from

device

From phone (OPP compati-

ble Bluetooth

phones only)

486

5-14. Phone settings

4 Transfer the contact data to

the system using a

Bluetooth

phone.

 This operation may be unnec-

essary depending on the type

of Bluetooth

phone.

 To cancel this function, select

“Cancel”.

5 Check that a confirmation

screen is displayed when the

operation is complete.

Backed-up contact data

(“vCard” formatted) can be

transferred from USB device or

Bluetooth

phone to this sys-

tem.

1 Connect a USB device.

(P.422)

2 Select “Transfer Contacts

from Device”.

3 Select “From USB”.

4 Select “USB 1” or “USB 2”

when the multiple USB

devices are connected. If a

USB device is connected,

skip this procedure.

5 Select “Replace Contacts” or

“Add Contact”. If the contact

is already registered, skip

this procedure.

“Replace Contacts”: Select to trans-

fer the contact from the connected

USB device or Bluetooth

phone

and replace the current one.

“Add Contact”: Select to transfer

the desired contact data from the

connected USB device or

Bluetooth

phone to add to the cur-

rent one.

6 Select a desired file from

vCard file list.

7 Check that a confirmation

screen is displayed when the

operation is complete.

● Depending on the type of

Bluetooth

phone used and num-

ber of files, it may take time to dis-

play vCard file lists and download

contacts.

● Downloading may not complete

correctly in the following cases:

• If the engine switch is turned off

during downloading.

• If the USB device or Bluetooth

phone is removed before down-

loading is complete.

New contact data can be regis-

tered.

Up to 4 numbers per person can

be registered. For PBAP com-

patible Bluetooth

phones, this

function is available when “Auto-

matic Transfer” is set to off.

(P.483)

1 Select “New Contact”.

2 Enter the name and select

“OK”.

3 Enter the phone number and

select “OK”.

4 Select the phone type for the

phone number.

From USB device

Registering a new contact

to the contacts list

487

5-14. Phone settings

Audio

5 To add another number to

this contact, select “Yes”.

■ Registering a new contact

in a different way (from the

call history screen)

1 Display the phone top

screen. (P.465)

2 Select “History” and select a

contact not yet registered in

the contact list.

3 Select “Add to Contacts”.

4 Follow the steps in “Register-

ing a new contact to the con-

tacts list” from step 2.

(P.486)

For PBAP compatible

Bluetooth

phones, this function

is available when “Automatic

Transfer” is set to off. (P.483)

1 Select “Edit Contact”.

2 Select the desired contact.

3 Select next to the name

or desired number.

4 Enter the name or the phone

number and select “OK”.

For PBAP compatible

Bluetooth

phones, this function

is available when “Automatic

Transfer” is set to off. (P.483)

1 Select “Delete Contacts”.

2 Select the desired contact

and select “Delete”.

3 Select “Yes” when the confir-

mation screen appears.

● Multiple data can be selected and

deleted at the same time.

● When a Bluetooth

phone is

deleted, the contact data will be

deleted at the same time.

Up to 15 contacts (maximum of

4 numbers per contact) can be

registered in the favorites list.

■ Registering the contacts in

the favorites list

1 Select “Add Favorite”.

2 Select the desired contact to

add to the favorites list.

 Dimmed contacts are already

stored as a favorite.

3 Check that a confirmation

screen is displayed when the

operation is complete.

 When 15 contacts have

already been registered to the

favorites list

1 When 15 contacts have

already been registered to

the favorites list, a registered

contact needs to be replaced.

Select “Yes” when the confir-

mation screen appears to

replace a contact.

2 Select the contact to be

replaced.

Editing the contact data

Deleting the contact data

Favorites list setting

488

5-14. Phone settings

3 Check that a confirmation

screen is displayed when the

operation is complete.

■ Registering contacts in the

favorites list in a different

way (from the contact

details screen)

1 Display the phone top

screen. (P.465)

2 Select “Contacts” and select

the desired contact.

3 Select “Add Favorite”.

4 Check that a confirmation

screen is displayed when the

operation is complete.

■ Deleting the contacts in the

favorites list

1 Select “Remove Favorite”.

2 Select the desired contacts

and select “Remove”.

3 Select “Yes” when the confir-

mation screen appears.

4 Check that a confirmation

screen is displayed when the

operation is complete.

■ Deleting contacts in the

favorites list in a different

way (from the contact

details screen)

1 Display the phone top

screen. (P.465)

2 Select “Favorites” or “Con-

tacts” and select the desired

contact to delete.

3 Select “Remove Favorite”.

4 Select “Yes” when the confir-

mation screen appears.

5 Check that a confirmation

screen is displayed when the

operation is complete.

Calls can be made by saying the

voice tag of a registered contact

in the contact list. (P.458)

1 Select “Manage Voice Tags”.

2 Select the desired item to be

set.

Select to register a new voice

tag. (P.488)

Select to edit a voice tag.

(P.489)

Select to delete a voice tag.

(P.489)

■ Registering a voice tag

Up to 50 voice tags can be reg-

istered.

1 Select “New”.

2 Select the desired contact to

3 Select “REC” and record a

voice tag.

 When recording a voice tag,

Setting voice tags

489

5-14. Phone settings

Audio

do so in a quiet area.

“Play”: Select to play the voice tag.

4 Select “OK” when voice tag

registration is complete.

■ Editing a voice tag

1 Select “Edit”.

2 Select the desired contact to

edit.

3 Follow the steps in “Register-

ing a voice tag” from step 3.

(P.488)

■ Deleting the voice tag

1 Select “Delete”.

2 Select the desired contact

and select “Delete”.

3 Select “Yes” when the confir-

mation screen appears.

● Multiple data can be selected and

deleted at the same time.

● Voice tags are deleted when the

set language of the system is

changed. (P.414)

1 Display the phone settings

screen. (P.481)

2 Select “Messaging”.

3 Select the desired item to be

set.

Select to set automatic mes-

sage transfer on/off.

Select to set automatic mes-

sage readout on/off.

Select to set updating mes-

sage read status on phone

on/off.

Select to set display of mes-

saging account names on the

message screen on/off.

When set to on, messaging

account names used on the

cellular phone will be dis-

played.

Select to set adding the vehi-

cle signature to outgoing

messages on/off.

The vehicle signature can be

edited. (P.489)

Select to reset all setup

items.

● Depending on the phone, these

functions may not be available.

1 Select “Vehicle Signature”.

Message settings screen

Vehicle signature settings

490

5-14. Phone settings

2 Select the desired item to be

set.

Select to set adding the vehi-

cle signature to outgoing

messages on/off.

Select to edit the vehicle sig-

nature. (P.490)

Select to reset all setup

items.

■ Editing vehicle signature

1 Select “Edit Vehicle Signa-

ture”.

2 Enter desired signature with

using keyboard.

3 Select “OK”.

4 Select “OK” on the confirma-

tion screen, or select “Edit

Again” when it needs to

amend.

491

5-15. What to do if... (Bluetooth

)

Audio

5-15.What to do if... (Bluetooth

)

■ When using the hands-free

system with a Bluetooth

device

The hands-free system or

Bluetooth

device does not

work.

■ When registering/connect-

ing a cellular phone

A cellular phone cannot be reg-

istered.

Troubleshooting

If there is a problem with the

hands-free system or a

Bluetooth

device, first

check the table below.

Troubleshooting

Likely cause Solution

The connected

device may not

be a compatible

Bluetooth

cellu-

lar phone.

For a list of spe-

cific devices

which operation

has been con-

firmed on this

system, check

with your Toyota

dealer or the fol-

lowing website:

http://www.

toyota.com/

audio-multimedia

in the United

States,

http://www.

toyota.ca/

connected

in Canada, and

http://www.

toyotapr.com/

audio-multimedia

in Puerto Rico

The Bluetooth

version of the

connected cellu-

lar phone may

be older than the

specified ver-

sion.

Use a cellular

phone with

Bluetooth

ver-

sion 2.0 or

higher (recom-

mended: Ver. 4.2

or higher).

(P.393)

492

5-15. What to do if... (Bluetooth

)

A Bluetooth

connection can-

not be made.

■ When making/receiving a

call

A call cannot be made/received.

■ When using the phonebook

Phonebook data cannot be

transferred manually/automati-

cally.

Likely cause Solution

An incorrect

passcode was

entered on the

cellular phone.

Enter the correct

passcode on the

cellular phone.

The registration

operation has

not been com-

pleted on the cel-

lular phone side.

Complete the

registration oper-

ation on the cel-

lular phone

(approve regis-

tration on the

phone).

Old registration

information

remains on

either this sys-

tem or the cellu-

lar phone.

Delete the exist-

ing registration

information from

both this system

and the cellular

phone, then reg-

ister the cellular

phone you wish

to connect to this

system.

(P.397)

Likely cause Solution

Another

Bluetooth

device is already

connected.

Manually con-

nect the cellular

phone you wish

to use to this

system.

(P.395)

Bluetooth

func-

tion is not

enabled on the

cellular phone.

Enable the

Bluetooth

func-

tion on the cellu-

lar phone.

Automatic

Bluetooth

con-

nection on this

system is set to

off.

Set automatic

Bluetooth

con-

nection on this

system to on

when the engine

switch is in ACC

or ON. (P. 40 0)

Preferred device

settings function

on this system is

set to on.

Set preferred

device settings

function on this

system to off.

(P.400)

Set the desired

cellular phone to

the highest auto-

matic connec-

tion priority.

(P.400)

Likely cause Solution

Your vehicle is in

a area.

Move to where

no longer

appears on the

display.

Likely cause Solution

493

5-15. What to do if... (Bluetooth

)

Audio

Phonebook data cannot be

edited.

■ When using the Bluetooth

message function

Messages cannot be viewed.

New message notifications are

not displayed.

Likely cause Solution

The profile ver-

sion of the con-

nected cellular

phone may not

be compatible

with transferring

phonebook data.

For a list of spe-

cific devices

which operation

has been con-

firmed on this

system, check

with your Toyota

dealer or the fol-

lowing website:

http://www.

toyota.com/

audio-multimedia

in the United

States,

http://www.

toyota.ca/

connected

in Canada, and

http://www.

toyotapr.com/

audio-multimedia

in Puerto Rico

Automatic con-

tact transfer

function on this

system is set to

off.

Set automatic

contact transfer

function on this

system to on.

(P.484)

Passcode has

not been entered

on the cellular

phone.

Enter the pass-

code on the cel-

lular phone if

requested

(default pass-

code: 1234).

Transfer opera-

tion on the cellu-

lar phone has

not completed.

Complete trans-

fer operation on

the cellular

phone (approve

transfer opera-

tion on the

phone).

Likely cause Solution

Automatic con-

tact transfer

function on this

system is set to

on.

Set automatic

contact transfer

function on this

system to off.

(P.484)

Likely cause Solution

Message trans-

fer is not enabled

on the cellular

phone.

Enable mes-

sage transfer on

the cellular

phone (approve

message trans-

fer on the

phone).

Automatic trans-

fer function on

this system is set

to off.

Set automatic

transfer function

on this system to

on. (P.484)

Likely cause Solution

Notification of

SMS/MMS/E-

mail reception on

this system is set

to off.

Set notification

of SMS/MMS/E-

mail reception on

this system to

on. (P.482)

Automatic mes-

sage transfer

function is not

enabled on the

cellular phone.

Enable auto-

matic transfer

function on the

cellular phone.

494

5-15. What to do if... (Bluetooth

)

■ In other situations

The Bluetooth

connection sta-

tus is displayed at the top of the

screen each time the engine

switch is in ACC or ON.

Even though all conceivable

measures have been taken, the

symptom status does not

change.

● For details, refer to the owner’s

manual that came with the cellular

phone.

Likely cause Solution

Connection con-

firmation display

on this system is

set to on.

To turn off the

display, set con-

nection confir-

mation display

on this system to

off. (P.400)

Likely cause Solution

The cellular

phone is not

close enough to

this system.

Bring the cellu-

lar phone closer

to this system.

Radio interfer-

ence has

occurred.

Turn off Wi-Fi

devices or other

devices that may

emit radio

waves.

The cellular

phone is the

most likely cause

of the symptom.

Turn the cellular

phone off,

remove and rein-

stall the battery

pack, and then

restart the cellu-

lar phone.

Enable the cellu-

lar phone’s

Bluetooth

con-

nection.

Disable the

W-Fi

connec-

tion of the cellu-

lar phone.

Stop the cellular

phone’s security

software and

close all applica-

tions.

Before using an

application

installed on the

cellular phone,

carefully check

its source and

how its opera-

tion might affect

this system.

Likely cause Solution

495

5-16. Connected Services overview

Audio

5-16.Connected Se rvices overview

: This function is not made avail-

able in some countries or areas.

 The functions included are

classified into the following

four types.

• Type A: Function achieved by

using a smartphone or an embed-

ded cellular device in the vehicle

(DCM: Data Communication

Module) and the system

• Type B: Function achieved by

using DCM and the system

• Type C: Function achieved by

using DCM

• Type D: Function achieved by

using DCM and a smartphone

● Connected Services functionality

is dependent upon network recep-

tion level and signal strength.

● Each function is available in the

following areas:

• Toyota Apps is available in the

contiguous United States, Wash-

ington D.C. and Alaska.

•Wi-Fi

Hotspot is available in the

contiguous United States, Wash-

ington D.C. and Alaska.

• Safety Connect is available in the

contiguous United States, Wash-

ington D.C. and Alaska.

• Remote Connect is available in

the contiguous United States,

Washington D.C. and Alaska.

• Service Connect is available in the

contiguous United States, Wash-

ington D.C. and Alaska.

Connected Services

includes Toyota Apps, Ser-

vice Connect, Wi-Fi

Hotspot, Safety Connect

and Remote Connect.

Functional overview

Function Type

Toyota Apps Type A

Wi-Fi

Hotspot

Type B

Safety Connect Type C

Remote Connect, Ser-

vice Connect

Type D

496

5-16. Connected Services overview

Content provider

Provides contents to the application server.

Application server

Type A: Function achieved by using a smartphone

or DCM

Of the functions included with Connected Services, the Toyota

Apps rely on the use of a smartphone or DCM.

 Using a smartphone

• Toyota audio multimedia system enables applicable apps

installed on a smartphone to be displayed on and operated from

the screen via a Bluetooth

 Via DCM

• Toyota audio multimedia system enables applicable apps

installed on the system to be displayed on and operated from the

screen.

A few settings must be performed before Toyota Apps can be

used. (P. 49 8 )

By using a smartphone or DCM

497

5-16. Connected Services overview

Audio

Provides applications to the system or a smartphone.

Smartphone

Using the Toyota mobile application, communication is relayed

between the system, application server and content provider.

Applications

Display usable content from the content providers on the screen

using the data connection of the connected smartphone or DCM.

System

Content received, via a smartphone or DCM, from content pro-

vider servers is displayed on the screen. The system is equipped

with an application player to run applications.

Via DCM

: For known compatible phones, refer to http://www.toyota.com/

connected-services in the United States.

The required operations to acti-

vate applications and connect a

smartphone to the system, and

the registration steps for the

Connected Services are

explained in this section.

■ Subscription

 Services requiring a separate

contract can also be used.

: For details, refer to

http://www.toyota.com/

connected-services

or call 1-800-331-4331 in the

United States.

■ Availability of function

 Toyota Apps is available in the

contiguous United States,

Washington D.C. and Alaska.

● Data usage fees may apply while

using Toyota Apps. Confirm data

usage fees before using this func-

tion.

● For details regarding operation of

the Toyota Apps, refer to

http://www.toyota.com/

connected-services

in the United States.

● These functions are not made

available in some countries or

areas. Availability of functions of

the Toyota Apps is dependent on

network reception level.

■ Initializing personal data

The personal data used in appli-

cations can be reset. (P.417)

 The following personal data

can be deleted and returned

to their default settings:

• Downloaded contents

• Radio stations that were listened

● Once initialized, the data and set-

tings will be erased. Pay much

attention when initializing the data.

Before using the function

498

5-16. Connected Services overview

■ Settings required to use

Toyota mobile application

Perform the settings in the fol-

lowing order.

1 Download the Toyota mobile

application to your smart-

phone.

2 Open the Toyota mobile

application on your smart

phone and follow instruc-

tions. Bluetooth

Pairing is

required.

In order to use Toyota mobile appli-

cation, the following must first be

performed:

 Register a Bluetooth

phone

with the hands-free system.

(P.390)

● Applications can only be used

when the Toyota mobile applica-

tion has been downloaded to your

smartphone, and the application is

running.

● Toyota mobile application opera-

tional procedures can also be con-

firmed by visiting

http://www.toyota.com/

connected-services

in the United States.

● If a Toyota mobile application is

used while iPod audio/video is

being played back, system opera-

tion may become unstable.

: Vehicles equipped with DCM

■ Subscription

 After you have signed the

Telematics Subscription Ser-

vice Agreement and are

enrolled, you can begin

receiving services. A variety

of subscription terms are

available. Contact your Toyota

Preparation before using

Toyota mobile application

Type B: Function

achieved by using

DCM and the system

The functionality of Wi-Fi

Hotspot is made possible

through the shared work of

the DCM and the system.

These are subscription-

based telematics services

that use Global Positioning

System (GPS) data and

embedded cellular technol-

ogy to provide safety and

security as well as conve-

nience features.

These services are available

by subscription on select,

telematics hardware-

equipped vehicles and sup-

ported by the Toyota

response center, which

operates 24 hours a day, 7

days a week.

For details about Wi-Fi

Hotspot:P. 40 2

Before using the function

499

5-16. Connected Services overview

Audio

dealer, or call 1-800-331-4331

in the United States, for fur-

ther subscription details.

(P.497)

■ Availability of functions

 Wi-Fi

Hotspot is available in

the contiguous United States,

Washington D.C. and Alaska.

: Vehicles equipped with DCM

● Free/Open Source Software Infor-

mation

This product contains Free/Open

Source Software (FOSS).

The license information and/or the

source code of such FOSS can be

found at the following URL.

http://opensource.lge.com

● Exposure to radio frequency sig-

nals:

The Toyota audio multimedia sys-

tem installed in your vehicle

includes a low power radio trans-

mitter and receiver. The system

receives and also sends out radio

frequency (RF) signals.

● In August 1996, the Federal Com-

munications Commission (FCC)

adopted RF exposure guidelines

with safety levels for mobile wire-

less phones. Those guidelines are

consistent with the safety stan-

dards previously set by both U.S.

and international standards bod-

ies.

• ANSI (American National Stan-

dards Institute) C95.1 [1992]

• NCRP (National Council on Radi-

ation Protection and Measure-

ment) Report 86 [1986]

• ICNIRP (International Commis-

sion on Non-Ionizing Radiation

Protection) [1996]

● These standards are based on

comprehensive and periodic eval-

uations of the relevant scientific lit-

erature. Over 120 scientists,

engineers, and physicians from

Type C: Function

achieved by using

DCM

The functionality of Safety

Connect is made possible

by the use of a DCM.

For details, (P. 65 )

500

5-16. Connected Services overview

universities, government health

agencies, and industry reviewed

the available body of research to

develop the ANSI Standard

(C95.1).

● The design of Toyota audio multi-

media system complies with the

FCC guidelines in addition to

those standards.

● Contact with the Toyota response

center is dependent upon the

telematics device being in opera-

tive condition, cellular connection

availability and GPS satellite sig-

nal reception, which can limit the

ability to reach the Toyota

response center or receive sup-

port. Enrollment and Telematics

Subscription Service Agreement

required. A variety of subscription

terms are available; charges vary

by subscription term selected.

● The Toyota response center offers

support in multiple languages.

● Select Safety Connect-sub-

scribed vehicles are capable of

communicating vehicle informa-

tion. Please see the terms and

conditions for additional details.

Owners who do not wish to have

their vehicle transmit this informa-

tion can opt out at the time of

enrollment or by calling 1-800-

331-4331 in the United States,

and following the prompts for

Safety Connect.

● For further details about the ser-

vice, contact your Toyota dealer.

● Toyota audio multimedia are not

subject to section 255 of the Tele-

communications Act and the sys-

tem is not TTY compatible.

501

5-16. Connected Services overview

Audio

● Certification

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

502

5-16. Connected Services overview

: Vehicles equipped with remote

connect only

Remote Connect is a service

that lets you view and remotely

control certain aspects of your

vehicle.

■ Subscription

 After you sign the Telematics

Subscription Service Agree-

ment (see the Safety Connect

section P.65), download the

Toyota App from your smart-

phone app store, and register

within the app (or enroll and

complete registration at the

dealer), you can begin using

these services.

 A variety of subscription terms

are available. Contact your

Toyota dealer, or call 1-800-

331-4331 for further subscrip-

tion details.

■ Availability of function

 Remote Connect is available

in the contiguous United

States, Washington D.C. and

Alaska.

● Availability of functions of the

Remote Connect is dependent on

network reception level.

● Remote Connect should only be

used by authorized users.

● Laws in some communities may

require that the vehicle be within

view of the user when operating

Remote Connect.

In some states, use of Remote

Connect may violate state or local

laws. Before using Remote Con-

nect, check your state and local

laws.

● Any malfunction of the vehicle

should be repaired by your Toyota

dealer.

● Remote Connect is designed to

work at temperatures above

approximately -22 °F (-30 °C).

This specification is related to the

Remote Connect operation, but is

dependent on the vehicle’s oper-

ating temperature range which

may be different.

● Content is subject to change with-

out notice.

● Additional information can be

found at http://www.toyota.com/

connected-services in the United

States.

Type D: Function

achieved by using

DCM and a smart-

phone

The functionality of Remote

Connect and Service Con-

nect are made possible by

the use of a DCM and a

smartphone.

For details about these ser-

vices, refer to

http://www.toyota.com/

connected-services.

Remote Connect

WARNING

● Operating Remote Connect

incorrectly may lead to unfore-

seen accidents or malfunctions.

Check the vehicle condition and

assume full responsibility before

using.

503

5-16. Connected Services overview

Audio

Service Connect uses DCM to

collect and transmit vehicle data

that allows Toyota to provide:

 Vehicle Health Report (VHR)

(Safety Recalls, Service Cam-

paigns, Current Vehicle

Alerts, Required Mainte-

nance, and Vehicle Condition

Status)

 Maintenance Notifications

 Vehicle Alert Notifications

■ Availability of function

 Service Connect is available

in the contiguous United

States, Washington D.C. and

Alaska.

● Availability of functions of the Ser-

vice Connect is dependent on net-

work reception level.

Service Connect

504

5-17. Connected Services operation

5-17.Connected Se rvices operation

 From the “MENU” button

1 Press the “MENU” button.

2 Select “Apps”.

3 Follow the steps in “From the

“APPS” button” from step 2.

(P.504)

 From the “APPS” button

1 Press the “APPS” button.

 If a specific application screen

is displayed, press the

“APPS” button again.

2 Select the desired application

screen button.

: Select to activate an applica-

tion.

“Update”: Select to update the

applications. (P.504)

: Displays the number of new

notifications for the application

When the Toyota Apps is acti-

vated, an application may need

to be updated. To update an

application, it is necessary to

download update data and

install it.

■ Downloading update

If an update is available,

“Update” can be selected.

1 Select “Update” on the appli-

cation screen. (P.504)

2 Check that downloading

starts.

Toyota Apps

Toyota Apps is a function

that enables certain apps

installed on a smartphone

or the system to be dis-

played on and operated

from the system screen.

Before the Toyota Apps can

be used, some setup needs

to be performed. (P.498)

For details about the func-

tions and services provided

by each application, refer to

http://www.toyota.com/

connected-services

in the United States.

Using Toyota Apps

Updating an application

505

5-17. Connected Services operation

Audio

“Download in Background”: Select

to operate other functions while

downloading.

“Cancel”: Select to cancel updating.

3 Check that downloading is

complete.

“Later”: Select to install later. When

this screen button is selected, the

screen will return to the last dis-

played screen. To install the update

data: (P.5 05 )

“See Detail”: Select to display

detailed information on the update

data.

“Install”: Select to install the update

data. Follow the steps “Installing

the update data” from step 2.

(P.505)

■ Installing the update data

After the downloading is com-

plete, “Update” will be changed

to “Install”.

1 Select “Install” on the appli-

cation screen. (P.504)

2 Select “Continue”.

“Later”: Select to postpone the

installation of the update data and

go back to the previous screen.

3 Check that installing is

started.

“Install in Background”: Select to

operate other functions while

installing.

4 Select “OK” after the install-

ing is complete.

● The Toyota Apps cannot be oper-

ated while installing.

When problems occur with start-

ing the application player, a

message will appear on the

screen. Referring to the table

below, identify the problem and

take the suggested corrective

action.

 “When it is safe and legal to

do so, please ensure your

Toyota mobile application is

running and logged in on your

phone.”

The Toyota mobile application can-

not be connected to Bluetooth

SPP.

Refer to

http://www.toyota.com/

connected-services

in the United States, to confirm if

the phone is Bluetooth

SPP com-

patible or not, and then activate the

Toyota mobile application.

 “Installation failed, please try

again”

Installation can be attempted again

by changing to the application

screen and pressing the “Install”

switch.

 “Application download error.

Please try again later.”

Downloading can be attempted

again by checking the communica-

tion status, changing to the applica-

tion screen and pressing the

“Download” switch again.

 “Download error, some Toyota

mobile application functions

may not work as expected.

Please reinitiate the download

process.”

If a message appears on

the screen

506

5-17. Connected Services operation

The Toyota mobile application can-

not be connected to Bluetooth

SPP.

Refer to

http://www.toyota.com/

connected-services

in the United States, to confirm if

the phone is Bluetooth

SPP com-

patible or not, and then activate the

Toyota mobile application.

Please ensure your Toyota mobile

application is running and logged in

on your phone while vehicle is not

moving.

 “To use the services, Toyota

mobile application needs to

be running on your phone.

For more information, please

visit toyota.com or call 1-800-

331-4331 in the United

States.”

The Toyota mobile application can-

not be connected to Bluetooth

SPP.

Refer to

http://www.toyota.com/

connected-services

in the United States, to confirm if

the phone is Bluetooth

SPP com-

patible or not, and then activate the

Toyota mobile application.

 “Communication unsuccess-

ful. Please try again.”

Communication was disconnected.

After a few moments, retry the

operation.

A keyword can be entered to an

application by the software key-

board or voice recognition func-

tion. For details about the

functions and services provided

by each application, refer to

http://www.toyota.com/

connected-services

in the United States.

 The keyboard layout can be

changed. (P.414)

1 Display the application

screen. (P.504)

2 Select the desired application

screen button.

3 Select the character entering

space.

4 Enter a search term, and

then select “OK”.

5 Entering characters will be

reflected on the character

entering space.

 For details on operating the

keyboard: P.385

1 Display the application

screen. (P.504)

Entering keyword opera-

tion

Entering a keyword using

the software keyboard

Entering a keyword using

the voice recognition func-

tion

507

5-17. Connected Services operation

Audio

2 Select the desired application

screen button.

3 Press the talk switch.

(P.458)

4 Say the desired keyword.

 Completion of the keyword

will be detected automatically.

5 Search results will be dis-

played on the screen.

508

5-18. Setup

5-18.Setup

1 Press the “MENU” button.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Toyota Apps”.

4 Select the desired items to

be set.

Select to set the pop up

reminder for smartphone

data usage. (P.508)

Select to detect iPhone app

automatically on/off.

Select to turn on/off the

enhanced USB connection

mode.

• When an iPhone is connected

while this setting is “On”, commu-

nication with any devices con-

nected to the other USB port is

not possible. Also, depending on

the device, charging may not be

possible.

Select to reset all setup items

to default setting

The data usage notification pop-

up, which indicates that the sys-

tem will use an internet connec-

tion, can be enabled/disabled.

1 Display the Toyota Apps set-

tings screen. (P.508)

2 Select “Data Usage Mes-

sage”.

3 Change the setting as

desired.

Toyota Apps settings

Toyota Apps settings can be

changed.

Displaying the Toyota

Apps settings screen

Toyota Apps settings

screen

Data usage notification

pop-up settings

509

Interior features

6-1. Using the air conditioning

system and defogger

Manual air conditioning sys-

tem............................ 510

Automatic air conditioning

system....................... 515

Heated steering wheel/seat

heaters/seat ventilators

.................................. 522

6-2. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list.......... 525

6-3. Using the storage features

List of storage features 528

Luggage compartment fea-

tures.......................... 532

6-4. Using the other interior

features

Other interior features. 537

Garage door opener.... 548

510

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

6-1.Using t he air conditioning s ystem and defogger

: If equipped

Fan speed control switch

Temperature control switch

On/off switch

Windshield defogger switch

Rear window defogger and outside rear view mirror defoggers

switch

Airflow mode control switch

Outside/recirculated air mode switch

“A/C” switch

“MAX A/C” switch

: If equipped

■ Adjusting the temperature

setting

To adjust the temperature set-

ting, turn the temperature con-

trol switch clockwise (warm) or

counterclockwise (cool).

If “A/C” switch is not pressed, the

system will blow ambient tempera-

ture air or heated air.

■ Fan speed setting

To adjust the fan speed, turn the

fan speed control switch clock-

wise (increase) or counterclock-

wise (decrease).

Pressing the on/off switch turns off

the fan.

When the fan is off, pressing the

on/off switch or turning the fan

speed control switch will turn on the

Manual air conditioning system

Air conditioning controls

511

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

fan.

■ Change the airflow mode

Press the airflow mode control

switch.

The airflow mode changes as fol-

lows each time the switch is

pressed.

1 Upper body

2 Upper body and feet

3 Feet

4 Feet and the windshield

defogger operates

■ Switching between outside

air and recirculated air

modes

Press the outside/recirculated

air mode switch.

The mode switches between

outside air mode and recircu-

lated air mode each time the

switch is operated.

When recirculated air mode is

selected, the indicator illuminates

on the outside/ recirculated air

mode switch.

■ Set cooling and dehumidifi-

cation function

Press the “A/C” switch.

When the function is on, the indica-

tor illuminates on the “A/C” switch.

■ Defogging the windshield

Defoggers are used to defog the

windshield and front side win-

dows.

Press the windshield defogger

switch.

Set the outside/recirculated air

mode switch to outside air mode if

the recirculated air mode is used.

To defog the windshield and the

side windows quickly, turn the air

flow and temperature up.

To return to the previous mode,

press the windshield defogger

switch again when the windshield is

defogged.

When the windshield defogger

switch is on, the indicator illumi-

nates on the windshield defogger

switch.

■ Defogging the rear window

and outside rear view mir-

rors (if equipped)

Defoggers are used to defog the

rear window, and to remove

raindrops, dew and frost from

the outside rear view mirrors (if

equipped).

Press the rear window defogger

and outside rear view mirror

defoggers switch.

When the rear window defogger

and outside rear view mirror defog-

11 22 33

512

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

gers switch is on, the indicator illu-

minates on the rear window

defogger and outside rear view mir-

ror defoggers switch.

The defoggers will automatically

turn off after a while.

■ For quick cooling

Press the “MAX A/C” switch.

The air conditioning will automati-

cally turn on.

At this time, the following will occur:

● The recirculated air mode will be

set

● The windshield defogger will turn

off

● The air flow mode will change to

the upper body mode

■ Operation of the air condition-

ing system in Eco drive mode

In Eco drive mode, the air condition-

ing system is controlled to prioritize

fuel efficiency by regulating the

engine speed and compressor oper-

ation to restrict the heating/cooling

capacity.

To improve air conditioning perfor-

mance, perform the following opera-

tions:

● Adjust the fan speed

● Adjust the temperature setting

● Turn off Eco drive mode (P.351)

■ Fogging up of the windows

● The windows will easily fog up

when the humidity in the vehicle is

high. Turning the “A/C” switch on

will dehumidify the air from the

outlets and defog the windshield

effectively.

● If you turn the “A/C” switch off, the

windows may fog up more easily.

● The windows may fog up if the

recirculated air mode is used.

■ When driving on dusty roads

Close all windows. If dust thrown up

by the vehicle is still drawn into the

vehicle after closing the windows, it

is recommended that the air intake

mode be set to outside air mode and

the fan speed to any setting except

off.

■ Outside/recirculated air mode

Setting to the recirculated air mode

temporarily is recommended in pre-

venting dirty air from entering the

vehicle interior and helping to cool

the vehicle when the outside air

temperature is high.

■ When the outside temperature

falls to nearly 32°F (0°C)

The dehumidification function may

not operate even when the “A/C”

switch is pressed.

■ Ventilation and air conditioning

odors

● To let fresh air in, set the air condi-

tioning system to the outside air

mode.

● During use, various odors from

inside and outside the vehicle may

enter into and accumulate in the

air conditioning system. This may

then cause odor to be emitted

from the vents.

● To reduce potential odors from

occurring:

It is recommended that the air

conditioning system be set to out-

side air mode prior to turning the

vehicle off.

● When parking, the system auto-

matically switches to outside air

mode to encourage better air cir-

culation throughout the vehicle,

helping to reduce odors that occur

when starting the vehicle.

■ Air conditioning system opera-

tions when the engine is

stopped due to the Stop & Start

system (vehicles with Stop &

Start system)

When the engine is stopped due to

the Stop & Start system operations,

the air conditioning cooling, heating

513

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

and dehumidification functions turn

off and only ambient temperature air

is blown, and there is a possibility

that the blowing of ambient tem-

perature air will stop. To prevent the

air conditioning system from turning

off, press the Stop & Start cancel

switch to deactivate the system.

■ When the windshield is fogged

up and the engine is stopped

due to the Stop & Start system

(vehicles with Stop & Start sys-

tem)

Press the windshield defogger

switch to restart the engine and

defog the windshield.

If the windshield continuously fogs

up, press the Stop & Start cancel

switch and refrain from using the

Stop & Start system.

■ When an odor comes from the

air conditioning system while

the engine is stopped due to the

Stop & Start system (vehicles

with Stop & Start system)

Press the Stop & Start cancel switch

to restart the engine.

■ Air conditioning filter

P.599

■ Location of air outlets

The air outlets and air volume

change according to the

selected airflow mode.

If equipped

■ Adjusting the air flow direc-

tion and opening/closing

the air outlets

 Front

1 Direct air flow to the left or

right, up or down.

2 Open the vent

WARNING

■ To prevent the windshield

from fogging up

Do not use the windshield defog-

ger switch during cool air opera-

tion in extremely humid weather.

The difference between the tem-

perature of the outside air and

that of the windshield can cause

the outer surface of the wind-

shield to fog up, blocking your

vision.

■ When the outside rear view

mirror defoggers are operat-

ing (if equipped)

Do not touch the rear view mirror

surfaces when the outside rear

view mirror defoggers are on.

NOTICE

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning

system on longer than necessary

when the engine is off.

Air outlet layout and oper-

ations

514

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

3 Close the vent

 Rear (if equipped)

1 Direct air flow to the left or

right, up or down

2 Open the vent

3 Close the vent

WARNING

■ To not interrupt the wind-

shield defogger from operat-

ing

Do not place anything on the

instrument panel which may cover

the air outlets. Otherwise, air flow

may be obstructed, preventing the

windshield defoggers from defog-

ging.

515

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

Automatic mode switch

Left-hand side temperature control knob

Right-hand side temperature control knob

“SYNC” switch

“OFF” switch

Windshield defogger switch

Rear window defogger and outside rear view mirror defoggers

switch

Eco air conditioning mode switch

Fan speed decrease switch

Fan speed increase switch

Airflow mode control switch

Outside/recirculated air mode switch

S-FLOW mode switch

“A/C” switch

■ Adjusting the temperature

setting

Turn driver’s side temperature

control dial clockwise to

increases the temperature and

turn the dial counterclockwise to

Automatic air conditioning system

Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted accord-

ing to the temperature setting.

Air conditioning controls

516

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

decreases the temperature.

The air conditioning system

switches between individual and

simultaneous modes each time the

“SYNC” switch is pressed.

Simultaneous mode (the indicator

on the “SYNC” switch is on):

The driver’s side temperature con-

trol dial can be used to adjust the

temperature for the driver’s and

passenger’s side. At this time,

operate the passenger’s side tem-

perature control dial to enter indi-

vidual mode.

Individual mode (the indicator on

the “SYNC” switch is off):

The temperature for the driver’s

and passenger’s side can be

adjusted separately.

■ Setting the fan speed

Press the fan speed increase

switch to increase the fan speed

and the fan speed decrease

switch to decrease the fan

speed.

Pressing the “OFF” switch to turns

off the fan.

■ Change the airflow mode

Press the airflow mode control

switch.

The airflow mode changes as fol-

lows each time the switch is

pressed.

1 Upper body

2 Upper body and feet

3 Feet

4 Feet and the windshield

defogger operates

■ Switching between outside

air and recirculated air

modes

Press the outside/recirculated

air mode switch.

The mode switches between out-

side air mode and recirculated air

mode each time the switch is oper-

ated.

When recirculated air mode is

selected, the indicator illuminates

on the outside/ recirculated air

mode switch.

■ Set cooling and dehumidifi-

cation function

Press the “A/C” switch.

When the function is on, the indica-

tor illuminates on the “A/C” switch.

■ Eco air conditioning mode

The air conditioning is controlled

with low fuel consumption priori-

517

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

tized such as reducing fan

speed, etc.

Press the eco air conditioning

mode switch.

When the eco air conditioning

mode is on, the indicator illumi-

nates on the eco air conditioning

mode switch.

■ Defogging the windshield

Defoggers are used to defog the

windshield and front side win-

dows.

Press the windshield defogger

switch.

Set the outside/recirculated air

mode switch to outside air mode if

the recirculated air mode is used. (It

may switch automatically.)

To defog the windshield and the

side windows quickly, turn the air

flow and temperature up.

To return to the previous mode,

press the windshield defogger

switch again when the windshield is

defogged.

When the windshield defogger

switch is on, the indicator illumi-

nates on the windshield defogger

switch.

■ Defogging the rear window

and outside rear view mir-

rors (if equipped)

Defoggers are used to defog the

rear window and to remove rain-

drops, dew and frost from the

outside rear view mirrors (if

equipped).

Press the rear window defogger

and outside rear view mirror

defoggers switch.

The defoggers will automatically

turn off after 15 minutes.

When the rear window defogger

and outside rear view mirror defog-

gers switch is on, the indicator illu-

minates on the rear window

defogger and outside rear view mir-

ror defoggers switch.

■ Fogging up of the windows

● The windows will easily fog up

when the humidity in the vehicle is

high. Turning “A/C” switch on will

dehumidify the air from the outlets

and defog the windshield effec-

tively.

● If you turn “A/C” switch off, the

windows may fog up more easily.

● The windows may fog up if the

recirculated air mode is used.

■ When driving on dusty roads

Close all windows. If dust thrown up

by the vehicle is still drawn into the

vehicle after closing the windows, it

is recommended that the air intake

mode be set to outside air mode and

the fan speed to any setting except

off.

■ Outside/recirculated air mode

● Setting to the recirculated air

mode temporarily is recom-

mended in preventing dirty air

from entering the vehicle interior

and helping to cool the vehicle

when the outside air temperature

is high.

● Outside/recirculated air mode may

automatically switch depending on

the temperature setting or the

inside temperature.

■ Operation of the air condition-

ing system in Eco drive mode

● In Eco drive mode, the air condi-

tioning system is controlled as fol-

lows to prioritize fuel efficiency:

• Engine speed and compressor

518

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

operation controlled to restrict

heating/cooling capacity

• Fan speed restricted when auto-

matic mode is selected

● To improve air conditioning perfor-

mance, perform the following

operations:

• Adjust the fan speed

• Turn off Eco drive mode (P.351)

• Turn off Eco air conditioning mode

● When the driving mode is set to

Eco driving mode, the Eco air con-

ditioning mode will be turned on

automatically. Even in this case,

the Eco air conditioning mode can

be turned off by pressing the Eco

air conditioning mode switch.

■ When the outside temperature

falls to nearly 32°F (0°C)

The dehumidification function may

not operate even when “A/C” switch

is pressed.

■ Ventilation and air conditioning

odors

● To let fresh air in, set the air condi-

tioning system to the outside air

mode.

● During use, various odors from

inside and outside the vehicle may

enter into and accumulate in the

air conditioning system. This may

then cause odor to be emitted

from the vents.

● To reduce potential odors from

occurring:

• It is recommended that the air

conditioning system be set to out-

side air mode prior to turning the

vehicle off.

• The start timing of the blower may

be delayed for a short period of

time immediately after the air con-

ditioning system is started in auto-

matic mode.

● When parking, the system auto-

matically switches to outside air

mode to encourage better air cir-

culation throughout the vehicle,

helping to reduce odors that occur

when starting the vehicle.

■ Air conditioning system opera-

tions when the engine is

stopped due to the Stop & Start

system (vehicles with Stop &

Start system)

When the engine is stopped due to

Stop & Start system operations, the

automatic air conditioning cooling,

heating and dehumidification func-

tions turn off and the fan speed is

decreased according to the outside

temperature etc. or air blowing

stops. To stop the air conditioning

system from turning off, press the

Stop & Start cancel switch and

refrain from using the Stop & Start

system.

■ When the windshield is fogged

up and the engine is stopped

due to the Stop & Start system

(vehicles with Stop & Start sys-

tem)

Press the windshield defogger

switch to restart the engine and

defog the windshield.

If the windshield continuously fogs

up, press the Stop & Start cancel

switch and refrain from using the

Stop & Start system.

■ When an odor comes from the

air conditioning system while

the engine is stopped due to the

Stop & Start system (vehicles

with Stop & Start system)

Press the Stop & Start cancel switch

to restart the engine.

■ Air conditioning filter

P.599

■ Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(Customizable features: P.697)

519

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

1 Press the “AUTO” switch.

The dehumidification function

begins to operate. Air outlets and

fan speed are automatically

adjusted according to the tempera-

ture setting and humidity.

2 Adjust the temperature set-

ting.

3 To stop the operation, press-

the “OFF” switch.

If the fan speed setting or air

flow modes are operated, the

automatic mode indicator goes

off. However, automatic mode

for functions other than that

operated is maintained.

■ Using automatic mode

Fan speed is adjusted automati-

cally according to the temperature

setting and the ambient conditions.

Therefore, the fan may stop for a

while until warm or cool air is ready

to flow immediately after the auto-

matic mode switch is pressed.

This function automatically con-

trols the air conditioning airflow

so that priority is given to the

front seats. When the front pas-

senger seat is not occupied, air-

flow may switch to only the

driver’s seat. Unnecessary air

conditioning is suppressed, con-

tributing to increased fuel effi-

ciency.

Front seat concentrated airflow

mode operates in the following

situations.

 No passengers are detected

in the rear seats

 The windshield defogger is

not operating

While operating, illumi-

nates.

■ Manually turning front seat

concentrated airflow mode

on/off

In front seat concentrated air-

flow mode, directing airflow to

the front seats only and to all

seats can be switched via switch

WARNING

■ To prevent the windshield

from fogging up

Do not use the windshield defog-

ger switch during cool air opera-

tion in extremely humid weather.

The difference between the tem-

perature of the outside air and

that of the windshield can cause

the outer surface of the wind-

shield to fog up, blocking your

vision.

■ When the outside rear view

mirror defoggers are operat-

ing (if equipped)

Do not touch the rear view mirror

surfaces when the outside rear

view mirror defoggers are on.

NOTICE

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning

system on longer than necessary

when the engine is off.

Using automatic mode

Front seat concentrated

airflow mode (S-FLOW)

520

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

operation. When the mode has

been switched manually, auto-

matic airflow control stops oper-

ating.

Press on the air condition-

ing operation panel and switch

the airflow.

 Indicator illuminated: Airflow

to the front seats only

 Indicator off: Airflow to all the

seats

■ Operation of automatic airflow

control

● In order to maintain a comfortable

interior, airflow may be directed to

seats without passengers immedi-

ately after the engine is started

and at other times depending on

the outside temperature.

● After the engine is started, if pas-

sengers move around inside or

enter/exit the vehicle, the system

cannot accurately detect the pres-

ence of passengers and automatic

airflow control will not operate.

■ Operation of manual airflow

control

Even if the function is manually

switched to directing airflow to only

the front seats, when a rear seat is

occupied, it may automatically direct

airflow to all seats.

■ To return to automatic airflow

control

1 With the indicator off, turn the

engine switch off.

2 After 60 minutes or more elapse,

turn the engine switch to ON.

This feature is used to prevent

ice from building up on the wind-

shield and wiper blades.

Press the switch to turn the sys-

tem on/off.

The indicator comes on when the

system is on.

The windshield wiper de-icer will

automatically turn off after a period

of time.

■ Location of air outlets

The air outlets and air volume

change according to the

selected air flow mode.

Windshield wiper de-icer

(if equipped)

WARNING

■ To prevent burns

Do not touch the glass at lower

part of the windshield or to the

side of the front pillars when the

windshield wiper deicer is on.

Air outlet layout and oper-

ations

521

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

If equipped

■ Adjusting the air flow direc-

tion and opening/closing

the air outlets

 Front

1 Direct air flow to the left or

right, up or down

2 Open the vent

3 Close the vent

: If equipped (center air outlets

only)

 Rear (if equipped)

1 Direct air flow to the left or

right, up or down

2 Open the vent

3 Close the vent

WARNING

■ To not interrupt the wind-

shield defogger from operat-

ing

Do not place anything on the

instrument panel which may cover

the air outlets. Otherwise, air flow

may be obstructed, preventing the

windshield defoggers from defog-

ging.

522

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

: If equipped

Turns the heated steering wheel

on/off

The indicator light comes on when

the heated steering wheel is oper-

ating.

■ Operation condition

The engine switch is in ON.

 Front

Turns the seat heaters on/off

Heated steering

wheel

/seat heat-

ers

/seat ventilators

 Heated steering wheel

Warm up the grip of the steer-

ing wheel

 Seat heaters

Warm up the seat upholstery

 Seat ventilators

Maintain good ventilation by

pulling air through the seat

upholstery

WARNING

■ To prevent minor burn inju-

ries

Care should be taken if anyone in

the following categories comes in

contact with the steering wheel or

seats when the heater is on:

● Babies, small children, the

elderly, the sick and the physi-

cally challenged

● Persons with sensitive skin

● Persons who are fatigued

● Persons who have taken alco-

hol or drugs that induce sleep

(sleeping drugs, cold remedies,

etc.)

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the

seat heaters and seat ventila-

tors

Do not put heavy objects that

have an uneven surface on the

seat and do not stick sharp

objects (needles, nails, etc.) into

the seat.

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not use the functions when the

engine is not running.

Heated steering wheel

Operating the seat heat-

ers

523

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

1 High temperature

2 Low temperature

When the seat heater is on, the

indicator illuminates on the seat

heater switch.

When not in use, put the switch

in the neutral position. The indi-

cator will turn off.

 Rear

Turns the seat heaters on/off

The indicator light comes on

when the seat heater is operat-

ing.

■ Operation condition

The engine switch is in ON.

Turns the seat heaters and ven-

tilators on/off

Each time the switch is pressed,

the operation condition changes as

follows.

Hi (3 segments lit)  Mid (2 seg-

ments lit)  Lo (1 segment lit) 

Off

1 Turns the seat heater on

The level indicators (yellow)

light up during operation.

2 Turns the seat ventilator on

The level indicators (green)

light up during operation.

WARNING

■ To prevent causes of over-

heating and minor burn inju-

ries

Observe the following precautions

when using a seat heater:

● Do not cover the seat with a

blanket or cushion when using

the seat heater.

● Do not use seat heater more

than necessary.

Seat heaters and ventila-

tors

524

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ Operation condition

The engine switch is in ON.

■ Air conditioning system-linked

control mode

When a seat ventilator is set to Hi,

the fan speed of the seat ventilator

may increase according to the fan

speed of the air conditioning sys-

tem.

WARNING

■ To prevent causes of over-

heating and minor burn inju-

ries

Observe the following precautions

when using a seat heater:

● Do not cover the seat with a

blanket or cushion when using

the seat heater.

● Do not use seat heater more

than necessary.

525

6-2. Using the interior lights

Interior features

6-2.Us ing the in terior lights

Rear interior light (P.526)

Front interior lights/personal lights (P.525, 526)

Open tray lights (if equipped)

Footwell lights (if equipped)

Front cup holder lights (if equipped)

: These lights turn on when a door is unlocked.

When the shift lever is in a position other than P, the brightness of these

lights will reduce intensity.

■ Front interior lights

Turns the lights on/off

Interior lights list

Location of the interior lights

Operating interior lights

526

6-2. Using the interior lights

Turns the switch to the door

position (door linked)

When a door is opened while the

door position is on, the lights turn

on.

1 Turns the door position on

2 Turns the lights off

■ Rear interior light

1 Turns the light off

2 Turns the door position on

When a door is opened while the

door position is on, the light turns

on.

3 Turns the light on

Turns the lights on/off

■ Illuminated entry system (vehi-

cles with smart key system)

The lights automatically turn on/off

according to the engine switch

mode, the presence of the elec-

tronic key, whether the doors are

locked/unlocked, and whether the

doors are opened/closed.

■ To prevent the battery from

being discharged

If the interior lights remain on when

the engine switch is turned to OFF,

the lights will go off automatically

after 20 minutes.

■ The interior lights will turn on

automatically when

If any of the SRS airbags deploy

(inflate) or in the event of a strong

rear impact, the interior lights will

turn on automatically.

The interior lights will turn off auto-

matically after approximately 20

minutes.

The interior lights can be turned off

manually. However, in order to help

prevent further collisions, it is rec-

ommended that they be left on until

safety can be ensured.

(The interior lights may not turn on

automatically depending on the

force of the impact and conditions of

the collision.)

■ Customization

Setting (e.g. the time elapsed before

the lights turn off) can be changed.

(Customizable features: P.698)

Operating personal lights

527

6-2. Using the interior lights

Interior features

NOTICE

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the lights on longer

than necessary when the engine

is not running.

528

6-3. Using the storage features

6-3.Using the storage features

Open tray (P.531)

Auxiliary boxes (P.530)

Bottle holders (P. 53 0 )

Console box (P.529)

Cup holders (P.529)

Glove box (P.528)

Pull up the lever to open the

glove box.

List of storage features

Location of the storage features

WARNING

■ Items that should not be left

in the vehicle

Do not leave glasses, lighters or

spray cans in the storage spaces,

as this may cause the following

when cabin temperature becomes

high:

● Glasses may be deformed by

heat or cracked if they come

into contact with other stored

items.

● Lighters or spray cans may

explode. If they come into con-

tact with other stored items, the

lighter may catch fire or the

spray can may release gas,

causing a fire hazard.

Glove box

529

6-3. Using the storage features

Interior features

Lift the lid while pushing the but-

ton to release the lock.

■ Console box tray (if equipped)

The tray can be removed and stored

in the bottom of the console box.

 Front

 Rear

Pull the armrest down.

WARNING

■ Caution while driving

Keep the glove box closed. In the

event of sudden braking or sud-

den swerving, an accident may

occur due to an occupant being

struck by the open glove box or

the items stored inside.

Console box

WARNING

■ Caution while driving

Keep the console box closed.

Injuries may result in the event of

an accident or sudden braking.

Cup holders

530

6-3. Using the storage features

 Front

 Rear

■ Bottle holders

● When storing a bottle, close the

cap.

● The bottle may not be stored

depending on its size or shape.

 Type A

Push the lid.

 Type B (if equipped)

WARNING

■ Items unsuitable for the cup

holders

Do not place anything other than

cups or beverage cans in the cup

holders.

Inappropriate items must not be

stored in the cup holders even if

the lid is closed.

Other items may be thrown out of

the holders in the event of an

accident or sudden braking and

cause injury. If possible, cover hot

drinks to prevent burns.

Bottle holders

WARNING

■ Items unsuitable for the bottle

holders

Do not place anything other than

a bottle in the bottle holders.

Other items may be thrown out of

the holders in the event of an

accident or sudden braking and

cause injury.

NOTICE

■ Items that should be not

stowed in the bottle holders

Do not place open bottles or glass

and paper cups containing liquid

in the bottle holders. The contents

may spill and glasses may break.

Auxiliary boxes

531

6-3. Using the storage features

Interior features

 Driver’s side

 Front passenger’s side

 Front of console

Vehicles with wireless charger:

P. 5 40

WARNING

■ Caution while driving

Do not leave the auxiliary box

(type A) open while driving.

Injuries may result in the event of

an accident or sudden braking.

■ Items unsuitable for storing

(type A)

Do not store items heavier than

0.4 lb. (0.2 kg).

Doing so may cause the auxiliary

box to open and the items inside

may fall out, resulting in an acci-

dent.

Open tray

WARNING

■ Items unsuitable for the open

tray

Observe the following precautions

when putting items in the open

tray. Failure to do so may cause

items to be thrown out of the tray

in the event of sudden braking or

steering. In these cases, the items

may interfere with pedal operation

or cause driver distraction, result-

ing in an accident.

● Do not store items in the tray

that can easily shift or roll out.

● Do not stack items in the tray

higher than the tray’s edge.

● Do not put items in the tray that

may protrude over the tray’s

edge.

532

6-3. Using the storage features

Raise the hook to use.

The cargo hooks are provided for

securing loose items.

■ Flipping the deck board

upside down

The deck board can be flipped

upside down (resin side up)

depending on the situation.

Original position

Underside (resin side)

■ Changing the deck board

positions

Height of the deck board can be

changed by setting the deck

board under the floor.

Upper

Lower

Luggage compart-

ment features

Cargo hooks

WARNING

■ When cargo hooks are not in

use

To avoid injury, always return the

hooks to their stowed positions

when not in use.

Deck board

533

6-3. Using the storage features

Interior features

1 Pull up the tab to raise the

deck board and move it

toward you to remove.

2 Place the deck board through

the groove and move for-

ward.

■ Setting the deck board

upright

When taking out the tools, the

deck board can be set upright.

When the back surface (resin sur-

face) of the deck board is facing up,

flip it back to the original position.

1 Pull up the tab to raise the

deck board and fold it for-

ward.

2 Place the edge into the

groove, and with the deck

board in a standing state, put

the edge into the holes.

WARNING

■ When operating the deck

board

Do not place anything on the deck

board when operating the board.

Otherwise, your fingers may be

caught or an accident may result

causing injuries.

534

6-3. Using the storage features

 Type A

 Type B

■ Removing the partition plate

Disengage the claws

■ Installing the luggage cover

1 Compress the both ends of

the luggage cover and insert

into the recess to install.

2 Pull out the luggage cover

and hook it onto the anchors.

WARNING

■ Caution while driving

Keep the deck board closed.

In the event of sudden braking, an

accident may occur due to an

occupant being struck by the deck

board or the items stored under

the deck board.

Side auxiliary box

Luggage cover (if

equipped)

535

6-3. Using the storage features

Interior features

■ Removing the luggage

cover

1 Release the cover from the

left and right anchors and

allow it to retract.

2 Compress the end of the lug-

gage cover and lift the lug-

gage cover up.

■ Stowing the luggage cover

1 Open the rear deck board

and remove the side deck

covers.

When the back surface (resin sur-

face) of the deck board is facing up,

remove the deck board.

2 Place the both ends of the

luggage cover into the holder.

WARNING

■ Luggage cover

● When installing/stowing the lug-

gage cover, make sure that the

luggage cover is securely

installed/stowed. Failure to do

so may result in serious injury in

the event of sudden braking or a

collision.

● Do not place anything on the

luggage cover. In the event of

sudden braking or turning, the

item may go flying and strike an

occupant. This could lead to an

unexpected accident, resulting

in death or serious injury.

● Do not allow children to climb

on the luggage cover. Climbing

on the luggage cover could

result in damage to the luggage

cover, possibly causing death or

serious injury to the child.

536

6-3. Using the storage features

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the lug-

gage cover

Do not place anything on top of

the luggage cover. When rolling

up the luggage cover, objects may

be caught in the cover, damaging

the cover and generating noise.

537

6-4. Using the other interior features

Interior features

6-4.Using the other interior features

1 To set the visor in the forward

position, flip it down.

2 To set the visor in the side

position, flip down, unhook,

and swing it to the side.

3 To use the side extender (if

equipped), place the visor in

the side position, then slide it

backward.

Slide the cover to open.

The light turns on when the cover is

opened.

■ Automatic light off to prevent

battery discharge

If the vanity lights remain on when

the engine switch is turned to OFF,

the lights will go off automatically

after 20 minutes.

The power outlet can be used

for the following components:

12 V: Accessories that run on

less than 10 A.

120 VAC: Accessories that use

less than 100 W.

■ 12 V

 Front

Open the lid.

 Console box (if equipped)

Open the console box and open

the lid.

Other interior features

Sun visors

Vanity mirrors

NOTICE

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the vanity lights on

for extended periods while the

engine is off.

Power outlet

538

6-4. Using the other interior features

 Rear (if equipped)

Open the lid.

 Luggage compartment (if

equipped)

Open the lid.

■ 120 VAC (if equipped)

Open the lid.

■ The power outlet can be used

when

 12 V

The engine switch is in ACC or ON.

 120 VAC

The engine switch is in ON.

■ When turning the engine switch

off

Disconnect electrical devices with

charging functions, such as mobile

battery packs.

If such devices are left connected,

the engine switch may not be turned

off normally.

NOTICE

■ To avoid damaging the power

outlet

Close the power outlet lid when

the power outlet is not in use.

Foreign objects or liquids that

enter the power outlet may cause

a short circuit.

■ To prevent the fuse from

being blown

● 12 V

Do not use an accessory that

uses more than 12 V 10 A.

539

6-4. Using the other interior features

Interior features

The USB charging ports are

used to supply 2.1 A of electric-

ity at 5 V to external devices.

The USB charging ports are for

charging only. They are not

designed for data transfer or

other purposes.

Depending on the external

device, it may not charge prop-

erly. Refer to the manual

included with the device before

using a USB charging port.

■ Using the USB charging

ports

 Console box

Open the console box and open

the lid.

 Rear

Open the lid.

■ The USB charging ports can be

used when

The engine switch is in ACC or ON.

■ Situations in which the USB

charging ports may not operate

correctly

● If a device which consumes more

than 2.1 A at 5 V is connected

● If a device designed to communi-

cate with a personal computer,

such as a USB memory device, is

connected

● If the connected external device is

turned off (depending on device)

● If the temperature inside the vehi-

cle is high, such as after the vehi-

NOTICE

● 120 VAC

Do not use a 120 VAC appliance

that requires more than 100 W. If

a 120 VAC appliance that con-

sumes more than 100 W is used,

the protection circuit will cut the

power supply.

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not use the power outlet lon-

ger than necessary when the

engine is not running.

■ Appliances that may not

operate properly (120 VAC)

The following 120 VAC appliances

may not operate properly even if

their power consumption is under

100 W.

● Appliances with high initial peak

wattage

● Measuring devices that pro-

cess precise data

● Other appliances that require an

extremely stable power supply

USB charging ports (if

equipped)

540

6-4. Using the other interior features

cle has been parked in the sun

■ About connected external

devices

Depending on the connected exter-

nal device, charging may occasion-

ally be suspended and then start

again. This is not a malfunction.

A portable device can be

charged by just placing Qi stan-

dard wireless charge compatible

portable devices according to

the Wireless Power Consortium,

such as smartphones and

mobile batteries, etc., on the

charge area.

This function cannot be used

with portable devices that are

larger than the charging area.

Also, depending on the portable

device, it may not operate as

normal. Please read the opera-

tion manual for portable devices

to be used.

■ The “Qi” symbol

The “Qi” symbol is a trademark

of the Wireless Power Consor-

tium.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the

USB charging ports

● Do not insert foreign objects into

the ports.

● Do not spill water or other liq-

uids into the ports.

● When the USB charging ports

are not in use, close the lids. If a

foreign object or liquid enters a

port may cause a short circuit.

● Do not apply excessive force to

or impact the USB charging

ports.

● Do not disassemble or modify

the USB charging ports.

■ To prevent damage to exter-

nal devices

● Do not leave external devices in

the vehicle. The temperature

inside the vehicle may become

high, resulting in damage to an

external device.

● Do not push down on or apply

unnecessary force to an exter-

nal device or the cable of an

external device while it is con-

nected.

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not use the USB charging

ports for a long period of time

when the engine is off.

Wireless charger (if

equipped)

541

6-4. Using the other interior features

Interior features

■ Name for all parts

Charge area

Operation indicator light

Power supply switch

■ Using the wireless charger

1 Press the power supply

switch of the wireless char-

ger.

Switches on and off with each

press of the power supply switch.

When turned on, the operation indi-

cator light (green) comes on.

Even with the engine off, the on/off

state of the power supply switch is

memorized.

2 Place the charging side of

the portable device down.

When charging, the operation indi-

cator light (orange) comes on.

If charging is not occurring, try plac-

ing the portable device as close to

the center of the charging area as

possible.

When charging is complete, the

operation indicator light (green)

comes on.

■ Recharging function

 When charging is complete

and after a fixed time in the

charge suspension state,

charging restarts.

 When the portable device is

moved, charging is stopped

for a moment and then it

restarts.

■ Lighting conditions of oper-

ation indicator light

Operation

indicator

light

Conditions

Turning off

When the Wireless

charger power supply

is off

Green

(comes

on)

On Standby (charging

possible state)

When charging is com-

plete

542

6-4. Using the other interior features

: Depending on the portable

device, there are cases where the

operation indicator light will con-

tinue being lit up orange even

after the charging is complete.

 When the operation indicator

light flashes

When an error occurs, the oper-

ation indicator light flashes an

orange color.

Handle the error based on the

following tables.

• Flashing repeatedly once

every second (Orange)

• Repeatedly flashes 3 times

continuously (Orange)

• Repeatedly flashes 4 times

continuously (Orange)

■ The wireless charger can be

operated when

The engine switch is in ACC or ON.

■ Usable portable devices

Qi standard wireless charge stan-

dard can be used on compatible

devices.

However, not all Qi standard

devices and compatibility are guar-

anteed.

Starting with mobile phones and

smartphones, it is aimed for low

power electrically supplied portable

devices of no more than 5W.

Orange

(comes

on)

When placing the por-

table device on the

charging area (detect-

ing the portable device)

Charging

Suspected

causes

Handling method

Vehicle to char-

ger communica-

tion failure.

Contact your

Toyota dealer.

Operation

indicator

light

Conditions

Suspected

causes

Handling method

A foreign sub-

stance is

between the por-

table device and

charge area.

Remove the for-

eign substance

from between

portable device

and the charge

area.

The portable

device is out of

sync due to the

device being

shifted from the

center of the

charge area.

Place the porta-

ble device near

the center of the

charge area.

Suspected

causes

Handling method

Temperature ris-

ing within the

wireless charger.

Stop charging at

once and start

charging again

after for a while.

543

6-4. Using the other interior features

Interior features

■ When covers and accessories

are attached to portable devices

Do not charge in situations where

cover and accessories not able to

handle Qi are attached to the porta-

ble device. Depending on the type

of cover and accessory, it may not

be possible to charge. When

charging is not performed even with

the portable device placed on the

charge area, remove the cover and

accessories.

■ While charging, noise enters

the AM radio

Turn off the wireless charger and

confirm that the noise has

decreased. If the noise decreases,

continuously pushing the power

supply switch of the wireless char-

ger for 2 seconds, the frequency of

the charger can be changed and the

noise can be reduced.Also, on that

occasion, the operation indicator

light will flash orange 2 times.

■ Important points of the wire-

less charger

● If the electronic key cannot be

detected within the vehicle inte-

rior, charging cannot be done.

When the door is opened and

closed, charging may be tempo-

rarily suspended.

● When charging, the wireless

charging device and portable

device will get warmer, however

this is not a malfunction.

When a portable device gets

warm while charging, charging

may stop due to the protection

function on the portable device

side. In this case, when the tem-

perature of the portable device

drops significantly, charge again.

■ Operation sounds

When the power supply is turned

on, while searching for the portable

device a sound will be produced,

however this is not a malfunction.

■ Certification for the wireless charger

544

6-4. Using the other interior features

545

6-4. Using the other interior features

Interior features

546

6-4. Using the other interior features

WARNING

■ Caution while driving

When charging a portable device,

for safety reasons, the driver

should not operate the main part

of the portable device while driv-

ing.

■ Caution regarding interfer-

ence with electronic devices

People with implantable cardiac

pacemakers, cardiac resynchroni-

zation therapy-pacemakers or

implantable cardioverter defi-

brillators, as well as any other

electrical medical device, should

consult their physician about the

usage of the wireless charger.

The operations of the wireless

charger may have an affect on

medical devices.

■ To prevent damage or burns

Observe the following precau-

tions.

Failure to do so may result in a

possibility of equipment failure

and damage, catch fire, burns due

to overheat.

● Do not insert any metallic

objects between the charging

area and the portable device

while charging

● Do not attach stickers, metallic

objects, etc., to the charger area

or portable device

● Do not cover with cloth, etc.,

and charge

● Do not charge portable devices

other than designated

● Do not attempt to dismantle for

disassembly or modifications

● Do not hit or apply a strong

force

NOTICE

■ Conditions in which the func-

tion may not operate cor-

rectly

In the following conditions, it may

not operate correctly

● The portable device is fully

charged

● There is foreign matter between

the charge area and portable

device

● The temperature of the portable

device gets higher from

charging

● The charging surface of the por-

table device is facing up

● The placement of the portable

device is out of alignment with

the charge area

● Near a TV tower, electric power

plant, gas station, radio station,

large display, airport or other

facility that generates strong

radio waves or electrical noise

● When the electronic key is in

contact with, or is covered by

the following metallic objects

• Cards to which aluminum foil is

attached

• Cigarette boxes that have alu-

minum foil inside

• Metallic wallets or bags

• Coins

• Hand warmers made of metal

• Media such as CDs and DVDs

547

6-4. Using the other interior features

Interior features

Fold down the armrest for use.

An assist grip installed on the

ceiling can be used to support

your body while sitting on the

seat.

NOTICE

● When other wireless keys (that

emit radio waves) are being

used nearby

In addition, excluding the above-

mentioned, when the charger

does not perform normally or the

operation display lamp is flashing

continuously, it is considered that

the wireless charger is malfunc-

tioning. Contact authorized Toyota

dealer.

■ To prevent failure or damage

to data

● Do not bring magnetic cards,

such as credit cards, or mag-

netic recording media, etc.,

close to the charger while

charging, otherwise, data may

disappear under the influence of

magnetism. Also, do not bring

precision instruments such as

wrist watches, etc., close to the

charger, as such objects may

break.

● Do not leave portable devices in

the cabin. The temperature

inside the cabin may become

high, when under the sun, and

cause damage to the device.

■ To prevent battery discharge

When the engine is stopped, do

not use the wireless charger for a

long time.

Armrest

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the

armrest

Do not apply too much load on the

armrest.

Assist grips

WARNING

■ Assist grips

Do not use the assist grip when

getting in or out of the vehicle or

rising from your seat.

548

6-4. Using the other interior features

The coat hooks are provided

with the rear assist grips.

: If equipped

The HomeLink

wireless control

system in your vehicle has 3

buttons which can be pro-

grammed to operate 3 different

devices. Refer to the program-

ming methods on the following

pages to determine the method

which is appropriate for the

device.

 Vehicles with auto anti-glare

inside rear view mirror

HomeLink

indicator light

Garage door operation indi-

cators

HomeLink

icon

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the

assist grip

Do not hang any heavy object or

put a heavy load on the assist

grip.

Coat hooks

WARNING

■ Items that must not be

hanged on the hook

Do not hang coat hangers or

other hard or sharp objects on the

hook. If the SRS curtain shield air-

bags deploy, these items may

become projectiles, causing death

or serious injury.

Garage door opener

The garage door opener can

be programmed using the

HomeLink

to operate

garage doors, gates, entry

doors, door locks, home

lighting systems, security

systems, and other devices.

System components

549

6-4. Using the other interior features

Interior features

Illuminates while HomeLink

operating.

Buttons

 Vehicles with Digital Rear-

view Mirror

HomeLink

indicator light

Illuminates above each button

selected.

Garage door operation indi-

cators

HomeLink

logo

Appears while HomeLink

is oper-

ating.

When the menu button (P.145) is

pressed, the logo disappears even

while the HomeLink

is operating.

Buttons

■ Codes stored in the HomeLink

memory

● The registered codes are not

erased even if the battery cable is

disconnected.

● If learning failed when registering

a different code to a HomeLink

button that already has a code

registered to it, the already regis-

tered code will not be erased.

■ Certification for the garage door opener

 For vehicles sold in the U.S. mainland, Hawaii, Guam, Saipan, American

Samoa and Puerto Rico

550

6-4. Using the other interior features

 For vehicles sold in Canada

■ When support is necessary

Visit on the web at

www.homelink.com/toyota

or call 1-

800-355-3515.

■ Before programming

HomeLink

 During programming, it is pos-

sible that garage doors,

gates, or other devices may

operate. For this reason,

make sure that people and

objects are clear of the

garage door or other devices

to prevent injury or other

potential harm.

 It is recommended that a new

battery be placed in the

remote control transmitter for

successful programming.

WARNING

■ When programming a garage

door or other remote control

device

The garage door or other device

may operate, so ensure people

and objects are out of danger to

prevent potential harm.

■ Conforming to federal safety

standards

Do not use the HomeLink

com-

patible transceiver with any

garage door opener or device that

lacks safety stop and reverse fea-

tures as required by federal safety

standards.

This includes any garage door

that cannot detect an interfering

object. A door or device without

these features increases the risk

of death or serious injury.

■ When operating or program-

ming HomeLink

Never allow a child to operate or

play with the HomeLink

buttons.

Programming HomeLink

551

6-4. Using the other interior features

Interior features

 Garage door opener motors

manufactured after 1995 may

be equipped with rolling code

protection. If this is the case,

you may need a stepladder or

other sturdy, safe device to

reach the “Learn” or “Smart”

button on the garage door

opener motor.

■ Programming HomeLink

Steps 1 through 3 must be per-

formed within 60 seconds, oth-

erwise the HomeLink

indicator

light will stop flashing and pro-

gramming will not be success-

fully completed.

1 Press and release the

HomeLink

button you want

to program and check that

the HomeLink

indicator light

flashes (orange).

2 Point the remote control

transmitter for the device at

the rear view mirror, 1 to 3 in.

(25 to 75 mm) from the

HomeLink

buttons.

Keep the HomeLink

indicator light

in view while programming.

3 Program a device.

 Programming a device other

than an entry gate (for U.S.A.

owners)

Press and hold the remote con-

trol transmitter button until the

HomeLink

indicator light

changes from slowly flashing

orange to rapidly flashing green

(rolling code) or continuously lit

green (fixed code), then release

the button.

 Programming an entry gate

(for U.S.A. owners)/Program-

ming a device in the Cana-

dian market

Press and release the remote

control transmitter button at 2

second intervals, repeatedly,

until the HomeLink

indicator

light changes from slowly flash-

ing orange to rapidly flashing

(green) (rolling code) or continu-

ously lit (green) (fixed code).

4 Test the HomeLink

opera-

tion by pressing the newly

programmed button and

observing the HomeLink

indicator light:

552

6-4. Using the other interior features

 HomeLink

indicator light illu-

minates: Programming of a

fixed code device has com-

pleted. The garage door or

other device should operate

when a HomeLink

button is

pressed and released.

 HomeLink

indicator light

flashes rapidly: The garage

door opener or other device is

equipped with a rolling code.

To complete programming,

firmly press and hold the

HomeLink

button for 2 sec-

onds then release it.

 If the garage door or other

device does not operate, pro-

ceed to “Programming a roll-

ing code system”.

5 Repeat the steps above to

program another device for

any of the remaining

HomeLink

buttons.

■ Programming a rolling code

system

Two or more people may be

needed to complete rolling code

programming.

1 Locate the “Learn” or “Smart”

button on the garage door

opener motor in the garage.

This button can usually be found

where the hanging antenna wire is

attached to the unit. The name and

color of the button may vary by

manufacturer. Refer to the owner’s

manual supplied with the garage

door opener motor for details.

2 Press and release the

“Learn” or “Smart” button.

Perform 3 within 30 seconds after

performing 2.

3 Press and hold the desired

HomeLink

button (inside the

vehicle) for 2 seconds and

release it. Repeat this

sequence

(press/hold/release) up to 3

times to complete program-

ming.

If the garage door opener

motor operates when the

HomeLink

button is

pressed, the garage door

opener motor recognizes the

HomeLink

signal.

553

6-4. Using the other interior features

Interior features

■ Enabling 2-way communi-

cation with a garage door

(only available for compati-

ble devices)

When enabled, 2-way communi-

cation allows you to check the

status of the opening and clos-

ing of a garage door through

indicators in your vehicle.

2-way communication is only

available if the garage door

opener motor used is a compati-

ble device. (To check device

compatibility, refer to

www.homelink.com.)

1 Within 5 seconds after pro-

gramming the garage door

opener has been completed,

if the garage door opener

motor is trained to

HomeLink

, both garage

door operation indicators will

flash rapidly (green) and the

light on the garage door

opener motor will blink twice,

indicating that 2-way commu-

nication is enabled.

If the indicators do not flash, per-

form 2 and 3 within the first 10

presses of the HomeLink

button

after programming has been com-

pleted.

2 Press a programmed

HomeLink

button to oper-

ate a garage door.

3 Within 1 minute of pressing

the HomeLink

button, after

the garage door operation

has stopped, press the

“Learn” or “Smart” button on

the garage door opener

motor. Within 5 seconds of

the establishment of 2-way

communication with the

garage door opener, both

garage door operation indica-

tors in the vehicle will flash

rapidly (green) and the light

on the garage door opener

motor will blink twice, indicat-

ing that 2-way communica-

tion is enabled.

■ Reprogramming a single

HomeLink

button

When the following procedure is

performed, buttons which

already have devices registered

to them can be overwritten:

1 Press and hold the desired

HomeLink

button.

2 When the HomeLink

indica-

tor starts flashing orange,

release the HomeLink

but-

ton and perform “Program-

ming HomeLink

” 1 (it takes

20 seconds for the

HomeLink

indicator to start

flashing).

554

6-4. Using the other interior features

■ Before programming

● Install a new battery in the trans-

mitter.

● The battery side of the transmitter

must be pointed away from the

HomeLink

buttons.

Press the appropriate

HomeLink

button. The

HomeLink

indicator light

should turn on.

The status of the opening and

closing of a garage door is

shown by the garage door oper-

ation indicators.

 Vehicles with auto anti-glare

inside rear view mirror

Opening

Closing

 Vehicles with Digital Rear-

view Mirror

Opening

Closing

This function is only available if the

garage door opener motor used is a

compatible device. (To check

device compatibility, refer to

www.homelink.com.)

The indicators can operate

within approximately 820 ft. (250

m) of the garage door. However,

if there are obstructions

between the garage door and

the vehicle, such as houses and

trees, feedback signals from the

garage door may not be

received.

To recall the previous door oper-

ation status, press and release

either HomeLink

buttons

Operating HomeLink

Color Status

Orange (flash-

ing)

Currently open-

ing/closing

Green

Opening/closing

has completed

Red (flashing)

Feedback sig-

nals cannot be

received

555

6-4. Using the other interior features

Interior features

and or and (vehicles

with auto anti-glare inside rear

view mirror), and

or and (vehicles

with Digital Rear-view Mirror)

simultaneously. The last

recorded status will be dis-

played for 3 seconds.

Press and hold the 2 outside

buttons for 10 seconds until the

HomeLink

indicator light

changes from continuously lit

(orange) to rapidly flashing

(green).

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to

erase the programs stored in the

HomeLink

memory.

Erasing the entire

HomeLink

memory (all

three codes)

556

6-4. Using the other interior features

557

Maintenance and care

7-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the

vehicle exterior.......... 558

Cleaning and protecting the

vehicle interior........... 561

7-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements

.................................. 564

General maintenance.. 565

Emission inspection and

maintenance (I/M) pro-

grams........................ 568

7-3. Do-it-yourself mainte-

nance

Do-it-yourself service pre-

cautions..................... 569

Hood ........................... 571

Positioning a floor jack 572

Engine compartment... 574

Tires............................ 581

Tire inflation pressure.. 595

Wheels........................ 597

Air conditioning filter.... 599

Wiper insert replacement

.................................. 601

Wireless remote con-

trol/electronic key battery

.................................. 604

Checking and replacing

fuses.......................... 607

Light bulbs................... 609

558

7-1. Maintenance and care

7-1.Maintenance and ca re

 Working from top to bottom,

liberally apply water to the

vehicle body, wheel wells and

underside of the vehicle to

remove any dirt and dust.

 Wash the vehicle body using

a sponge or soft cloth, such

as a chamois.

 For hard-to-remove marks,

use car wash soap and rinse

thoroughly with water.

 Wipe away any water.

 Wax the vehicle when the

waterproof coating deterio-

rates.

If water does not bead on a clean

surface, apply wax when the vehi-

cle body is cool.

■ Automatic car washes

● Before washing the vehicle:

• Fold the mirrors

• Turn off the power back door (if

equipped)

Start washing from the front of the

vehicle. Make sure to extend the

mirrors before driving.

● Brushes used in automatic car

washes may scratch the vehicle

surface and harm your vehicle’s

paint.

● Rear spoiler may not be washable

in some automatic car washes.

There may also be an increased

risk of damage to vehicle.

■ High pressure car washes

As water may enter the cabin, do

not bring the nozzle tip near the

gaps around the doors or perimeter

of the windows, or spray these

areas continuously.

■ Note for a smart key system (if

equipped)

If the door handle becomes wet

while the electronic key is within the

effective range, the door may lock

and unlock repeatedly. In that case,

follow the following correction pro-

cedures to wash the vehicle:

● Place the key in a position 6 ft. (2

m) or more separate from the

vehicle while the vehicle is being

washed. (Take care to ensure that

the key is not stolen.)

● Set the electronic key to battery-

saving mode to disable the smart

key system. (P.129)

■ Aluminum wheels (if equipped)

● Remove any dirt immediately by

using a neutral detergent.

● Wash detergent off with water

immediately after use.

● To protect the paint from damage,

make sure to observe the follow-

ing precautions.

• Do not use acidic, alkaline or

abrasive detergent.

• Do not use hard brushes.

• Do not use detergent on the

wheels when they are hot, such

as after driving or parking in hot

weather.

● For vehicles with 18-inch matte

painted wheels and 19-inch matte

painted wheels: The wheels are

not maintained in the same way

as normal aluminum wheels. For

Cleaning and protect-

ing the vehicle exte-

rior

Perform the following to

protect the vehicle and

maintain it in prime condi-

tion:

Cleaning instructions

559

7-1. Maintenance and care

Maintenance and care

details, contact your Toyota

dealer.

• When washing the vehicle, use

water to wash off dirt. If the vehi-

cle is particularly dirty, use a

diluted neutral detergent and a

sponge or a soft cloth and wash

off the dirt by hand.

• Wash detergent off with water

immediately after use. After using

detergent, wash the detergent off

with water and wipe the vehicle

dry with a soft cloth.

● For vehicles with 18-inch matte

painted wheels and 19-inch matte

painted wheels: Make sure to

observe the following precautions

to prevent damage to the matte

paint.

• Do not polish or scrub with dry

cloths, brushes, etc.

• Do not use detergents containing

coatings or abrasives.

• If using an automatic car wash,

make sure it does not include ded-

icated wheel brushes.

• Do not use high-pressure spray

guns or steam cleaners.

• Do not use detergent on the

wheels when they are hot, such

as after driving or parking in hot

weather.

■ Bumpers

Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.

■ Plated portions

If dirt cannot be removed, clean the

parts as follows:

● Use a soft cloth dampened with an

approximately 5% solution of neu-

tral detergent and water to clean

the dirt off.

● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft

cloth to remove any remaining

moisture.

● To remove oily deposits, use alco-

hol wet wipes or a similar product.

WARNING

■ When washing the vehicle

Do not apply water to the inside of

the engine compartment. Doing

so may cause the electrical com-

ponents, etc. to catch fire.

■ When cleaning the windshield

(vehicles with rain-sensing

windshield wipers)

Set the wiper switch to off.

If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”,

the wipers may operate unexpect-

edly in the following situations,

and may result in hands being

caught or other serious injuries

and cause damage to the wiper

blades.

Off

AUTO

● When the upper part of the

windshield where the raindrop

sensor is located is touched by

hand

● When a wet rag or similar is

held close to the raindrop sen-

sor

● If something bumps against the

windshield

● If you directly touch the raindrop

sensor body or if something

bumps into the raindrop sensor

560

7-1. Maintenance and care

WARNING

■ Precautions regarding the

exhaust pipes

Exhaust gasses cause the

exhaust pipes to become quite

hot.

When washing the vehicle, be

careful not to touch the pipes until

they have cooled sufficiently, as

touching hot exhaust pipes can

cause burns.

■ Precaution regarding the rear

bumper with Blind Spot Moni-

tor (if equipped)

If the paint of the rear bumper is

chipped or scratched, the system

may malfunction. If this occurs,

consult your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

■ To prevent paint deteriora-

tion and corrosion on the

body and components (alumi-

num wheels, etc.)

● Wash the vehicle immediately in

the following cases:

• After driving near the sea coast

• After driving on salted roads

• If coal tar or tree sap is present

on the paint surface

• If dead insects, insect droppings

or bird droppings are present on

the paint surface

• After driving in an area contami-

nated with soot, oily smoke,

mine dust, iron powder or chem-

ical substances

• If the vehicle becomes heavily

soiled with dust or mud

• If liquids such as benzene and

gasoline are spilled on the paint

surface

● If the paint is chipped or

scratched, have it repaired

immediately.

● To prevent the wheels from cor-

roding, remove any dirt and

store in a place with low humid-

ity when storing the wheels.

■ Cleaning the exterior lights

● Wash carefully. Do not use

organic substances or scrub

with a hard brush.

This may damage the surfaces

of the lights.

● Do not apply wax to the sur-

faces of the lights.

Wax may cause damage to the

lenses.

■ When using an automatic car

wash (vehicles with rain-

sensing windshield wipers)

Set the wiper switch to off posi-

tion.

If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”,

the wipers may operate and the

wiper blades may be damaged.

■ When using a high pressure

car wash

● When washing the vehicle, do

not let water from the high-pres-

sure washer directly hit the

camera or the area around the

camera. Due to the shock from

the high pressure water, it is

possible that the device may not

operate normally.

● Do not bring the nozzle tip close

to boots (rubber or resin manu-

factured cover), or connectors

or the following parts.

The parts may be damaged if

they come into contact with

high-pressure water.

• Traction related parts

• Steering parts

• Suspension parts

• Brake parts

561

7-1. Maintenance and care

Maintenance and care

 Remove dirt and dust using a

vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty

surfaces with a cloth damp-

ened with lukewarm water.

 If dirt cannot be removed,

wipe it off with a soft cloth

dampened with neutral deter-

gent diluted to approximately

1%.

Wring out any excess water

from the cloth and thoroughly

wipe off remaining traces of

detergent and water.

■ Shampooing the carpets

There are several commercial foam-

ing-type cleaners available. Use a

sponge or brush to apply the foam.

Rub in overlapping circles. Do not

use water. Wipe dirty surfaces and

let them dry. Excellent results are

obtained by keeping the carpet as

dry as possible.

■ Handling the seat belts

Clean with mild soap and lukewarm

water using a cloth or sponge. Also

check the belts periodically for

excessive wear, fraying or cuts.

NOTICE

● Keep the cleaning nozzle at

least 11.9 in. (30 cm) away from

the vehicle body. Otherwise

resin section, such as moldings

and bumpers, may be deformed

and damaged. Also, do not con-

tinuously hold the nozzle in the

same place.

● Do not spray the lower part of

the windshield continuously. If

water enters the air conditioning

system intake located near the

lower part of the windshield, the

air conditioning system may not

operate correctly.

Cleaning and protect-

ing the vehicle interior

Perform cleaning in a man-

ner appropriate to each

component and its material.

Protecting the vehicle

interior

562

7-1. Maintenance and care

WARNING

■ Water in the vehicle

● Do not splash or spill liquid in

the vehicle.

Doing so may cause electrical

components, etc., to malfunc-

tion or catch fire.

● Do not get any of the SRS com-

ponents or wiring in the vehicle

interior wet.

(P.34)

An electrical malfunction may

cause the airbags to deploy or

not function properly, resulting

in death or serious injury.

● Vehicles with wireless charger:

Do not let the wireless charger

(P.547) get wet. Failure to do

so may cause the charger to

become hot and cause burns or

could cause electric shock

resulting in death or serious

injury.

■ Cleaning the interior (espe-

cially instrument panel)

Do not use a polish wax or polish

cleaner. The instrument panel

may reflect off the windshield,

obstructing the driver’s view and

leading to an accident, resulting in

death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ Cleaning detergents

● Do not use the following types

of detergent, as they may dis-

color the vehicle interior or

cause streaks or damage to

painted surfaces:

• Non-seat portions: Organic sub-

stances such as benzene or

gasoline, alkaline or acidic solu-

tions, dye, and bleach

• Seats: Alkaline or acidic solu-

tions, such as thinner, benzene,

and alcohol

● Do not use a polish wax or pol-

ish cleaner. The instrument

panel’s or other interior part’s

painted surface may be dam-

aged.

■ Preventing damage to leather

surfaces

Observe the following precautions

to avoid damage to and deteriora-

tion of leather surfaces:

● Remove any dust or dirt from

leather surfaces immediately.

● Do not expose the vehicle to

direct sunlight for extended peri-

ods of time. Park the vehicle in

the shade, especially during

summer.

● Do not place items made of

vinyl, plastic, or containing wax

on the upholstery, as they may

stick to the leather surface if the

vehicle interior heats up signifi-

cantly.

■ Water on the floor

Do not wash the vehicle floor with

water.

Vehicle systems such as the

audio system may be damaged if

water comes into contact with

electrical components such as the

audio system above or under the

floor of the vehicle. Water may

also cause the body to rust.

■ When cleaning the inside of

the windshield

Do not allow glass cleaner to con-

tact the lens. Also, do not touch

the lens. (P.223)

563

7-1. Maintenance and care

Maintenance and care

 Remove dirt and dust using a

vacuum cleaner.

 Wipe off any excess dirt and

dust with a soft cloth damp-

ened with diluted detergent.

Use a diluted water solution of

approximately 5% neutral wool

detergent.

 Wring out any excess water

from the cloth and thoroughly

wipe off all remaining traces

of detergent.

 Wipe the surface with a dry,

soft cloth to remove any

remaining moisture. Allow the

leather to dry in a shaded and

ventilated area.

■ Caring for leather areas

Toyota recommends cleaning the

interior of the vehicle at least twice a

year to maintain the quality of the

vehicle’s interior.

 Remove dirt and dust using a

vacuum cleaner.

 Wipe it off with a soft cloth

dampened with neutral deter-

gent diluted to approximately

1%.

 Wring out any excess water

from the cloth and thoroughly

wipe off remaining traces of

detergent and water.

NOTICE

■ Cleaning the inside of the rear

window

● Do not use a glass cleaner to

clean the rear window, as this

may cause damage to the rear

window defogger heater wires.

Use a cloth dampened with

lukewarm water to gently wipe

the window clean. Wipe the win-

dow in strokes running parallel

to the heater wires.

● Be careful not to scratch or

damage the heater wires.

Cleaning the leather areas

Cleaning the synthetic

leather areas

564

7-2. Maintenance

7-2.Maintenance

■ Repair and replacement

It is recommended that genuine

Toyota parts be used for repairs to

ensure performance of each sys-

tem. If non-Toyota parts are used in

replacement or if a repair shop other

than a Toyota dealer performs

repairs, confirm the warranty cover-

age.

■ Allow inspection and repairs to

be performed by a Toyota

dealer

● Toyota technicians are well-

trained specialists and are kept up

to date with the latest service

information. They are well

informed about the operations of

all systems on your vehicle.

● Keep a copy of the repair order. It

proves that the maintenance that

has been performed is under war-

ranty coverage. If any problem

should arise while your vehicle is

under warranty, your Toyota

dealer will promptly take care of it.

General maintenance should be

performed on a daily basis. This

can be done by yourself or by a

Toyota dealer.

Scheduled maintenance should

be performed at specified inter-

vals according to the mainte-

nance schedule.

For details about maintenance

items and schedules, refer to the

“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or

“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

Maintenance require-

ments

To ensure safe and econom-

ical driving, day-to-day care

and regular maintenance

are essential. It is the

owner’s responsibility to

perform regular checks.

Toyota recommends the fol-

lowing maintenance:

WARNING

■ If your vehicle is not properly

maintained

Improper maintenance could

result in serious damage to the

vehicle and possible death or seri-

ous injury.

■ Handling of the battery

● Engine exhaust, some of its

constituents, and a wide variety

of automobile components con-

tain or emit chemicals known to

the State of California to cause

cancer and birth defects and

other reproductive harm. Work

in a well ventilated area.

● Oils, fuels and fluids contained

in vehicles as well as waste pro-

duced by component wear con-

tain or emit chemicals known to

the State of California to cause

cancer and birth defects or

other reproductive harm. Avoid

exposure and wash any

affected area immediately.

● Battery posts, terminals and

related accessories contain lead

and lead compounds which are

known to cause brain damage.

Wash your hands after han-

dling. (P.579)

General maintenance

Scheduled maintenance

565

7-2. Maintenance

Maintenance and care

■ Resetting the message indicat-

ing maintenance is required

After the required maintenance is

performed according to the mainte-

nance schedule, please reset the

reminder light or message.

To reset the reminder light or mes-

sage, follow the procedure

described below:

1 Press or of the meter

control switches and select

on the multi-information display.

2 Press or of the meter

control switches and select

“Vehicle Settings”. Then press

3 Press or of the meter

control switches and select

“Scheduled Maintenance”. Then

press .

4 Select “Yes” and press .

You can perform some mainte-

nance procedures by yourself.

Please be aware that do-it-your-

self maintenance may affect

warranty coverage.

The use of Toyota Repair Manuals

is recommended.

For details about warranty cover-

age, refer to the separate “Owner’s

Warranty Information Booklet” or

“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

Do-it-yourself mainte-

nance

General maintenance

Listed below are the general

maintenance items that

should be performed at the

intervals specified in the

“Owner’s Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet” or “Owner’s

Manual Supplement/Sched-

uled Maintenance Guide”. It

is recommended that any

problem you notice should

be brought to the attention

of your Toyota dealer or

qualified service shop for

advice.

WARNING

■ If the engine is running

Turn the engine off and ensure

that there is adequate ventilation

before performing maintenance

checks.

Engine compartment

Items Check points

Battery

Check the connec-

tions. (P. 57 9)

Brake fluid

Is the brake fluid at

the correct level?

(P.577)

Engine coolant

Is the engine cool-

ant at the correct

level? (P.576)

Engine oil

Is the engine oil at

the correct level?

(P.574)

566

7-2. Maintenance

Exhaust sys-

tem

There should not

be any fumes or

strange sounds.

Radiator/con-

denser

The radiator and

condenser should

be free from for-

eign objects.

(P.577)

Washer fluid

Is there sufficient

washer fluid?

(P.579)

Vehicle interior

Items Check points

Accelerator

pedal

• The accelerator

pedal should

move smoothly

(without uneven

pedal effort or

catching).

Automatic

transmission

“Park” mecha-

nism

• When parked on

a slope and the

shift position is in

P, is the vehicle

securely

stopped?

Brake pedal

• Does the brake

pedal move

smoothly?

• Does the brake

pedal have

appropriate

clearance from

the floor?

• Does the brake

pedal have the

correct amount

of free play?

Items Check points

Brakes

• The vehicle

should not pull to

one side when

the brakes are

applied.

• The brakes

should work

effectively.

• The brake pedal

should not feel

spongy.

• The brake pedal

should not get

too close to the

floor when the

brakes are

applied.

Head

restraints

• Do the head

restraints move

smoothly and

lock securely?

Indica-

tors/buzzers

• Do the indica-

tors and buzzers

function prop-

erly?

Lights

• Do all the lights

come on?

Parking brake

• Does the park-

ing brake oper-

ate normally?

• When parked on

a slope and the

parking brake is

on, is the vehicle

securely

stopped?

Items Check points

567

7-2. Maintenance

Maintenance and care

Seat belts

• Do the seat belts

operate

smoothly?

• The seat belts

should not be

damaged.

Seats

• Do the seat con-

trols operate

properly?

Steering wheel

• Does the steer-

ing wheel rotate

smoothly?

• Does the steer-

ing wheel have

the correct

amount of free

play?

• There should not

be any strange

sounds coming

from the steer-

ing wheel.

Vehicle exterior

Items Check points

Doors

• Do the doors

operate

smoothly?

Engine hood

• Does the engine

hood lock system

work properly?

Fluid leaks

• There should not

be any signs of

fluid leakage

after the vehicle

has been parked.

Items Check points

Tires

• Is the tire infla-

tion pressure

correct?

• The tires should

not be damaged

or excessively

worn.

• Have the tires

been rotated

according to the

maintenance

schedule?

• The wheel nuts

should not be

loose.

Windshield

wipers/rear

window wiper

• The wiper blades

should not show

any signs of

cracking, split-

ting, wear, con-

tamination or

deformation.

• The wiper blades

should clear the

windshield with-

out streaking or

skipping.

Items Check points

568

7-2. Maintenance

The OBD system determines

that a problem exists some-

where in the emission control

system. Your vehicle may not

pass the I/M test and may need

to be repaired. Contact your

Toyota dealer to service the

vehicle.

 When the battery is discon-

nected or discharged

Readiness codes that are set

during ordinary driving are

erased.

Also, depending on your driv-

ing habits, the readiness

codes may not be completely

set.

 When the fuel tank cap is

loose

The malfunction indicator

lamp comes on indicating a

temporary malfunction and

your vehicle may not pass the

I/M test.

The error code in the OBD sys-

tem will not be cleared unless

the vehicle is driven 40 or more

times.

Contact your Toyota dealer to

prepare the vehicle for re-test-

ing.

Emission inspection

and maintenance (I/M)

programs

Some states have vehicle

emission inspection pro-

grams which include OBD

(On Board Diagnostics)

checks. The OBD system

monitors the operation of

the emission control sys-

tem.

If the malfunction indica-

tor lamp comes on

Your vehicle may not pass

the I/M test in the follow-

ing situations:

When the malfunction

indicator lamp still

remains on after several

driving trips

If your vehicle does not

pass the I/M test

569

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

7-3.Do -it-yourself maint enance

Do-it-yourself service

precautions

If you perform maintenance

by yourself, be sure to fol-

low the correct procedure as

given in these sections.

Maintenance

Items Parts and tools

Battery con-

dition

(P.579)

•Grease

• Conventional

wrench (for termi-

nal clamp bolts)

Brake fluid

level

(P.577)

• FMVSS No.116

DOT 3 or SAE

J1703 brake fluid

• FMVSS No.116

DOT 4 or SAE

J1704

• Rag or paper

towel

• Funnel (used only

for adding brake

fluid)

Engine cool-

ant level

(P.576)

• “Toyota Super

Long Life Coo-

lant” or a similar

high quality eth-

ylene glycol-based

non-silicate, non-

amine, non-nitrite

and non-borate

coolant with long-

life hybrid organic

acid technology

For the U.S.A.:

“Toyota Super

Long Life Coo-

lant” is pre-mixed

with 50% coolant

and 50% deion-

ized water.

For Canada:

“Toyota Super

Long Life Coo-

lant” is pre-mixed

with 55% coolant

and 45% deion-

ized water.

• Funnel (used only

for adding coolant)

Engine oil

level

(P.574)

• “Toyota Genuine

Motor Oil” or

equivalent

• Rag or paper

towel

• Funnel (used only

for adding engine

oil)

Fuses

(P.607)

• Fuse with same

amperage rating

as original

Items Parts and tools

570

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Light bulbs

(P.609)

• Bulb with same

number and watt-

age rating as origi-

nal

• Phillips-head

screwdriver

• Flathead screw-

driver

• Wrench

Radiator and

condenser

(P.577)



Tire inflation

pressure

(P.595)

• Tire pressure

gauge

• Compressed air

source

Washer fluid

(P.580)

• Water or washer

fluid containing

antifreeze (for win-

ter use)

• Funnel (used only

for adding water or

washer fluid)

WARNING

The engine compartment contains

many mechanisms and fluids that

may move suddenly, become hot,

or become electrically energized.

To avoid death or serious injury,

observe the following precautions.

■ When working on the engine

compartment

● Keep hands, clothing and tools

away from the moving fan and

engine drive belt.

● Be careful not to touch the

engine, radiator, exhaust mani-

fold, etc., right after driving as

they may be hot. Oil and other

fluids may also be hot.

Items Parts and tools ● Do not leave anything that may

burn easily, such as paper and

rags, in the engine compart-

ment.

● Do not smoke, cause sparks or

expose an open flame to fuel or

the battery. Fuel and battery

fumes are flammable.

● Be extremely cautious when

working on the battery. It con-

tains poisonous and corrosive

sulfuric acid.

■ When working near the elec-

tric cooling fan or radiator

grille

Be sure the engine switch is off.

With the engine switch in ON, the

electric cooling fan may automati-

cally start to run if the air condi-

tioning is on and/or the coolant

temperature is high. (P.577)

■ Safety glasses

Wear safety glasses to prevent

flying or falling material, fluid

spray, etc., from getting in your

eyes.

NOTICE

■ If you remove the air cleaner

filter

Driving with the air cleaner filter

removed may cause excessive

engine wear due to dirt in the air.

571

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

1 Pull the hood lock release

lever.

The hood will pop up slightly.

2 Push the auxiliary catch lever

to the left and lift the hood.

3 Hold the hood open by insert-

ing the supporting rod into

the slot.

Hood

Release the lock from the

inside of the vehicle to open

the hood.

Opening the hood

WARNING

■ Pre-driving check

Check that the hood is fully closed

and locked.

If the hood is not locked properly,

it may open while the vehicle is in

motion and cause an accident,

which may result in death or seri-

ous injury.

■ After installing the support

rod into the slot

Make sure the rod supports the

hood securely from falling down

on to your head or body.

■ When closing the hood

When closing the hood, take extra

care to prevent your fingers etc.

from being caught.

572

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Front

NOTICE

■ When closing the hood

Be sure to return the support rod

to its clip before closing the hood.

Closing the hood without return-

ing the support rod properly could

cause the hood to bend.

Positioning a floor

jack

When using a floor jack, fol-

low the instructions in the

manual provided with the

jack and perform the opera-

tion safely.

When raising your vehicle

with a floor jack, position

the jack correctly.

Improper placement may

damage your vehicle or

cause injury.

Location of the jack point

573

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

■ Rear

574

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse boxes (P.607)

Engine oil filler cap (P.575)

Engine oil level dipstick (P.574)

Battery (P.579)

Brake fluid reservoir (P.577)

Radiator (P.577)

Electric cooling fan

Condenser (P. 57 7 )

Washer fluid tank (P.580)

Engine coolant reservoir (P.576)

With the engine at operating

temperature and turned off,

check the oil level on the dip-

stick.

Engine compartment

Components

Checking and adding the

engine oil

575

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

■ Checking the engine oil

1 Park the vehicle on level

ground. After warming up the

engine and turning off the

engine, wait more than 5

minutes for the oil to drain

back into the bottom of the

engine.

2 Holding a rag under the end,

pull the dipstick out.

3 Wipe the dipstick clean.

4 Reinsert the dipstick fully.

5 Holding a rag under the end,

pull the dipstick out and

check the oil level.

Low

Normal

Excessive

The shape of the dipstick may differ

depending on the type of vehicle or

engine.

6 Wipe the dipstick and reinsert

it fully.

■ Checking the oil type and

preparing the items needed

Make sure to check the oil type

and prepare the items needed

before adding oil.

 Engine oil selection

P.666

 Oil quantity (Low  Full)

1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp. qt.)

 Item

Clean funnel

■ Adding engine oil

If the oil level is below or near

the low level mark, add engine

oil of the same type as that

already in the engine.

1 Remove the oil filler cap by

turning it counterclockwise.

2 Add engine oil slowly, check-

ing the dipstick.

3 Install the oil filler cap by

turning it clockwise.

■ Engine oil consumption

A certain amount of engine oil will

be consumed while driving. In the

following situations, oil consump-

576

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

tion may increase, and engine oil

may need to be refilled in between

oil maintenance intervals.

● When the engine is new, for

example directly after purchasing

the vehicle or after replacing the

engine

● If low quality oil or oil of an inap-

propriate viscosity is used

● When driving at high engine

speeds or with a heavy load,

when towing, or when driving

while accelerating or decelerating

frequently

● When leaving the engine idling for

a long time, or when driving fre-

quently through heavy traffic

The coolant level is satisfactory

if it is between the “FULL” and

“LOW” lines on the reservoir

when the engine is cold.

Reservoir cap

“FULL” line

“LOW” line

If the level is on or below the “LOW”

line, add coolant up to the “FULL”

line. (P.659)

WARNING

■ Used engine oil

● Used engine oil contains poten-

tially harmful contaminants

which may cause skin disorders

such as inflammation and skin

cancer, so care should be taken

to avoid prolonged and

repeated contact. To remove

used engine oil from your skin,

wash thoroughly with soap and

water.

● Dispose of used oil and filters

only in a safe and acceptable

manner. Do not dispose of used

oil and filters in household trash,

in sewers or onto the ground.

Call your Toyota dealer, service

station or auto parts store for

information concerning recy-

cling or disposal.

● Do not leave used engine oil

within the reach of children.

NOTICE

■ To prevent serious engine

damage

Check the oil level on a regular

basis.

■ When replacing the engine oil

● Be careful not to spill engine oil

on the vehicle components.

● Avoid overfilling, or the engine

could be damaged.

● Check the oil level on the dip-

stick every time you refill the

vehicle.

● Be sure the engine oil filler cap

is properly tightened.

■ If oil is spilled on the engine

cover

To prevent the engine cover from

being damaged, remove any

engine oil from the engine cover

as soon as possible using a neu-

tral detergent. Do not use an

organic solvent such as brake

cleaner.

Checking the coolant

577

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

■ Coolant selection

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life

Coolant” or a similar high quality

ethylene glycol based non-silicate,

non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-

borate coolant with long-life hybrid

organic acid technology.

U.S.A.:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is

a mixture of 50% coolant and 50%

deionized water. (Minimum tem-

perature: -31°F [-35°C])

Canada:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is

a mixture of 55% coolant and 45%

deionized water. (Minimum tem-

perature: -44°F [-42°C])

For more details about coolant, con-

tact your Toyota dealer.

■ If the coolant level drops within

a short time of replenishing

Visually check the radiators, hoses,

engine/power control unit coolant

reservoir caps, drain cock and water

pump.

If you cannot find a leak, have your

Toyota dealer, test the cap and

check for leaks in the cooling sys-

tem.

Check the radiator and con-

denser, and clear away any for-

eign objects.

If either of the above parts is

extremely dirty or you are not

sure of their condition, have

your vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

■ Checking fluid level

The brake fluid level should be

between the “MAX” and “MIN”

lines on the tank.

WARNING

■ When the engine is hot

Do not remove the engine coolant

reservoir cap.

The cooling system may be under

pressure and may spray hot cool-

ant if the cap is removed, causing

serious injuries, such as burns.

NOTICE

■ When adding coolant

Coolant is neither plain water nor

straight antifreeze. The correct

mixture of water and antifreeze

must be used to provide proper

lubrication, corrosion protection

and cooling. Be sure to read the

antifreeze or coolant label.

■ If you spill coolant

Be sure to wash it off with water to

prevent it from damaging parts or

paint.

Checking the radiator and

condenser

WARNING

■ When the engine is hot

Do not touch the radiator or con-

denser as they may be hot and

cause serious injuries, such as

burns.

■ When the electric cooling fan

is operating

Do not touch the engine compart-

ment.

With the engine switch in ON, the

electric cooling fan may automati-

cally start to run if the air condi-

tioning is on and/or the coolant

temperature is high. Be sure the

engine switch is off when working

near the electric cooling fan or

radiator grille.

Checking and adding the

brake fluid

578

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Adding fluid

1 Slide and lift up the rubber

strip to partly remove it as

shown.

2 Disconnect the claws and

remove the service cover.

3 Remove the reservoir cap.

4 Add brake fluid slowly while

checking the fluid level.

Make sure to check the fluid

type and prepare the necessary

item.

■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture

from the air

Excess moisture in the brake fluid

can cause a dangerous loss of brak-

ing efficiency. Use only newly

opened brake fluid.

Fluid

type

FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or

SAE J1703 brake fluid

FMVSS No.116 DOT 4 or

SAE J1704

Item Clean funnel

WARNING

■ When filling the reservoir

Take care as brake fluid can harm

your hands and eyes and damage

painted surfaces.

If fluid gets on your hands or in

your eyes, flush the affected area

with clean water immediately.

If you still experience discomfort,

see a doctor.

579

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

Check the battery as follows.

■ Battery exterior

Make sure that the battery termi-

nals are not corroded and that

there are no loose connections,

cracks, or loose clamps.

Terminals

Hold-down clamp

■ Before recharging

When recharging, the battery pro-

duces hydrogen gas which is flam-

mable and explosive. Therefore,

observe the following precautions

before recharging:

● If recharging with the battery

installed on the vehicle, be sure to

disconnect the ground cable.

● Make sure the power switch on

the charger is off when connecting

and disconnecting the charger

cables to the battery.

■ After recharging/reconnecting

the battery (vehicles with smart

key system)

The engine may not start. Follow the

procedure below to initialize the sys-

tem.

1 Shift the shift lever to P.

2 Open and close any of the doors.

3 Restart the engine.

● Unlocking the doors using the

smart key system may not be pos-

sible immediately after reconnect-

ing the battery. If this happens,

use the wireless remote control or

the mechanical key to lock/unlock

the doors.

● Start the engine with the engine

switch in ACC. The engine may

not start with the engine switch

turned off. However, the engine

will operate normally from the sec-

ond attempt.

● The engine switch mode is

recorded by the vehicle. If the bat-

tery is disconnected and recon-

nected, the vehicle will return the

engine switch mode to the status it

was in before the battery was dis-

connected. Make sure to turn off

the engine switch before discon-

necting the battery. Take extra

care when connecting the battery

if the engine switch mode prior to

the battery being disconnected is

unknown.

If the engine will not start even after

multiple attempts, contact your

Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

■ If the fluid level is low or high

It is normal for the brake fluid level

to go down slightly as the brake

pads wear out or when the fluid

level in the accumulator is high.

If the reservoir needs frequent

refilling, there may be a serious

problem.

Checking the battery

580

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

If any washer does not work or

the warning message appears

on the multi-information display,

the washer tank may be empty.

Add washer fluid.

WARNING

■ Chemicals in the battery

A battery contains poisonous and

corrosive sulfuric acid and may

produce hydrogen gas which is

flammable and explosive. To

reduce the risk of death or serious

injury, take the following precau-

tions while working on or near the

battery:

● Do not cause sparks by touch-

ing the battery terminals with

tools.

● Do not smoke or light a match

near the battery.

● Avoid contact with eyes, skin

and clothes.

● Never inhale or swallow electro-

lyte.

● Wear protective safety glasses

when working near the battery.

● Keep children away from the

battery.

■ Where to safely charge the

battery

Always charge the battery in an

open area. Do not charge the bat-

tery in a garage or closed room

where there is not sufficient venti-

lation.

■ Emergency measures regard-

ing electrolyte

● If electrolyte gets in your eyes

Flush your eyes with clean

water for at least 15 minutes

and get immediate medical

attention. If possible, continue

to apply water with a sponge or

cloth while traveling to the near-

est medical facility.

● If electrolyte gets on your skin

Wash the affected area thor-

oughly. If you feel pain or burn-

ing, get medical attention

immediately.

● If electrolyte gets on your

clothes

It can soak through clothing on

to your skin. Immediately take

off the clothing and follow the

procedure above if necessary.

● If you accidentally swallow elec-

trolyte

Drink a large quantity of water

or milk. Get emergency medical

attention immediately.

■ When there is insufficient bat-

tery fluid

Do not use if there is insufficient

fluid in the battery. There is a pos-

sible danger that the battery may

explode.

NOTICE

■ When recharging the battery

Never recharge the battery while

the engine is running. Also, be

sure all accessories are turned

off.

Adding the washer fluid

581

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

Check if the treadwear indica-

tors are showing on the tires.

Also check the tires for uneven

wear, such as excessive wear

on one side of the tread.

Check the spare tire condition

and pressure if not rotated.

New tread

Worn tread

Treadwear indicator

The location of treadwear indicators

is shown by a “TWI” or “ ” mark,

WARNING

■ When adding washer fluid

Do not add washer fluid when the

engine is hot or running as

washer fluid contains alcohol and

may catch fire if spilled on the

engine, etc.

NOTICE

■ Do not use any fluid other

than washer fluid

Do not use soapy water or engine

antifreeze instead of washer fluid.

Doing so may cause streaking on

the vehicle’s painted surfaces, as

well as damaging the pump lead-

ing to problems of the washer

fluid not spraying.

■ Diluting washer fluid

Dilute washer fluid with water as

necessary.

Refer to the freezing tempera-

tures listed on the label of the

washer fluid bottle.

Tires

Replace or rotate tires in

accordance with mainte-

nance schedules and tread-

wear.

Checking tires

582

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

etc., molded into the sidewall of

each tire.

Replace the tires if the treadwear

indicators are showing on a tire.

■ When to replace your vehicle’s

tires

Tires should be replaced if:

● The treadwear indicators are

showing on a tire.

● You have tire damage such as

cuts, splits, cracks deep enough

to expose the fabric, and bulges

indicating internal damage.

● A tire goes flat repeatedly or can-

not be properly repaired due to the

size or location of a cut or other

damage.

If you are not sure, consult with your

Toyota dealer.

■ Tire life

Any tire over 6 years old must be

checked by a qualified technician

even if it has seldom or never been

used or damage is not obvious.

■ Maximum load of tire

Check that the maximum load of the

replacement tire is greater than 1/2

of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings

(GAWR) of either the front axle or

the rear axle, whichever is greater.

For the GAWR, see the Certification

Regulation Label. For the maximum

load of the tire, see the load limit at

maximum cold tire inflation pressure

mentioned on the sidewall of the

tire. (P.678)

■ Tire types

● Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed perfor-

mance tires best suited to highway

driving under dry conditions. Since

summer tires do not have the same

traction performance as snow tires,

summer tires are inadequate for

driving on snow-covered or icy

roads. For driving on snow-covered

roads or icy roads, the use of snow

tires is recommended. When install-

ing snow tires, be sure to replace all

four tires.

● All season tires

All season tires are designed to pro-

vide better traction in snow and to

be adequate for driving in most win-

ter conditions as well as for use

year-round. All season tires, how-

ever, do not have adequate traction

performance compared with snow

tires in heavy or loose snow. Also,

all season tires fall short in accelera-

tion and handling performance com-

pared with summer tires in highway

driving.

● Snow tires

For driving on snow-covered roads

or icy roads, we recommend using

snow tires. If you need snow tires,

select tires of the same size, con-

struction and load capacity as the

originally installed tires. Since your

vehicle has radial tires as original

equipment, make sure your snow

tires also have radial construction.

Do not install studded tires without

first checking local regulations for

possible restrictions. Snow tires

should be installed on all wheels.

(P.367)

■ If the tread on snow tires wears

down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)

The effectiveness of the tires as

snow tires is lost.

583

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

Rotate the tires in the order

shown.

To equalize tire wear and extend

tire life, Toyota recommends that

tire rotation is carried out at the

same interval as tire inspection.

Do not fail to initialize the tire pres-

sure warning system after tire rota-

tion. (if equipped)

Front

■ When rotating the tires (vehi-

cles with tire pressure warning

system)

Make sure that the engine switch is

OFF. If the tires are rotated while the

engine switch is in ON, the tire posi-

tion information will not be updated.

If this accidentally occurs, either turn

the engine switch to OFF and then

to ON, or initialize the system after

checking that the tire pressure is

properly adjusted.

WARNING

■ When inspecting or replacing

tires

Observe the following precautions

to prevent accidents.

Failure to do so may cause dam-

age to parts of the drive train as

well as dangerous handling char-

acteristics, which may lead to an

accident resulting in death or seri-

ous injury.

● Do not mix tires of different

makes, models or tread pat-

terns.

Also, do not mix tires of remark-

ably different treadwear.

● Do not use tire sizes other than

those recommended by Toyota.

● Do not mix differently con-

structed tires (radial, bias-belted

or bias-ply tires).

● Do not mix summer, all season

and snow tires.

● Do not use tires that have been

used on another vehicle.

Do not use tires if you do not

know how they were used previ-

ously.

● Do not tow if your vehicle has a

compact spare tire installed.

NOTICE

■ Driving on rough roads

Take particular care when driving

on roads with loose surfaces or

potholes.

These conditions may cause

losses in tire inflation pressure,

reducing the cushioning ability of

the tires. In addition, driving on

rough roads may cause damage

to the tires themselves, as well as

the vehicle’s wheels and body.

■ If tire inflation pressure of

each tire becomes low while

driving

Do not continue driving, or your

tires and/or wheels may be

ruined.

Tire rotation

584

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Your vehicle is equipped with a

tire pressure warning system

that uses tire pressure warning

valves and transmitters to detect

low tire inflation pressure before

serious problems arise.

 If the tire pressure drops

below a predetermined level,

the driver is warned a screen

display

and by a warning

light. (P.634)

: Vehicles with tire inflation pres-

sure display function only

 Vehicles with tire inflation

pressure display function

only: The tire pressure

detected by the tire pressure

warning system can be dis-

played on the multi-informa-

tion display. (P. 85 )

The illustration used is intended

as an example, and may differ

from the image that is actually

displayed on the multi-informa-

tion display.

■ Routine tire inflation pressure

checks

The tire pressure warning system

does not replace routine tire inflation

pressure checks. Make sure to

check tire inflation pressure as part

of your routine of daily vehicle

checks.

■ Tire inflation pressure

: Vehicles with tire inflation pres-

sure display function only

● It may take a few minutes to dis-

play the tire inflation pressure

after the engine switch is turned to

ON. It may also take a few min-

utes to display the tire inflation

pressure after inflation pressure

has been adjusted.

● Tire inflation pressure changes

with temperature. The displayed

values may also be different from

the values measured using a tire

pressure gauge.

■ Situations in which the tire

pressure warning system may

not operate properly (if

equipped)

● In the following cases, the tire

pressure warning system may not

operate properly.

• If non-genuine Toyota wheels are

used.

• A tire has been replaced with a

tire that is not an OE (Original

Equipment) tire.

• A tire has been replaced with a

tire that is not of the specified size.

• Tire chains, etc. are equipped.

• An auxiliary-supported run-flat tire

is equipped.

• If a window tint that affects the

radio wave signals is installed.

• If there is a lot of snow or ice on

the vehicle, particularly around the

wheels or wheel housings.

• If the tire inflation pressure is

extremely higher than the speci-

fied level.

• If wheel without tire pressure

Tire pressure warning

system (if equipped)

585

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

warning valves and transmitters

are used.

• If the ID code on the tire pressure

warning valves and transmitters is

not registered in the tire pressure

warning computer.

● Performance may be affected in

the following situations.

• Near a TV tower, electric power

plant, gas station, radio station,

large display, airport or other facil-

ity that generates strong radio

waves or electrical noise

• When carrying a portable radio,

cellular phone, cordless phone or

other wireless communication

device

If tire position information is not cor-

rectly displayed due to the radio

wave conditions, the display may be

corrected by driving and changing

the radio wave conditions.

● When the vehicle is parked, the

time taken for the warning to start

or go off could be extended.

● When tire inflation pressure

declines rapidly for example when

a tire has burst, the warning may

not function.

■ Warning performance of the tire

pressure warning system (if

equipped)

The warning of the tire pressure

warning system will change in

accordance with the conditions

under which it was initialized. For

this reason, the system may give a

warning even if the tire pressure

does not reach a low enough level,

or if the pressure is higher than the

pressure that was adjusted to when

the system was initialized.

■ Certification for tire pressure warning system

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, American Samoa, Guam, Saipan

and Puerto Rico

586

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

 For vehicles sold in Canada

587

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

588

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Canada

589

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

:Vehicles with tire pressure warn-

ing system only

When replacing tires or wheels,

tire pressure warning valves and

transmitters must also be

installed.

 Except for models made in

Japan

without tire inflation

pressure display function

When new tire pressure warning

valves and transmitters are

installed, new ID codes must be

registered in the tire pressure

warning computer and the tire

pressure warning system must

be initialized. (P.593)

:The country of production is writ-

ten on the Certification Regula-

tion label. (P.665)

 For models made in Japan

without tire inflation pressure

display function

When new tire pressure warning

valves and transmitters are

installed, new ID codes must be

registered in the tire pressure

warning computer and the tire

pressure warning system must

be initialized. Have tire pressure

warning valve and transmitter ID

codes registered by your Toyota

dealer.

:The country of production is writ-

ten on the Certification Regula-

tion label. (P.665)

■ When replacing the tires and

wheels (vehicles with tire pres-

sure warning system)

If the ID code of the tire pressure

warning valve and transmitter is not

registered, the tire pressure warning

system will not work properly. After

driving for about 20 minutes, the tire

pressure warning light blinks for 1

minute and stays on to indicate a

system malfunction.

Installing tire pressure

warning valves and trans-

mitters

NOTICE

■ Repairing or replacing tires,

wheels, tire pressure warn-

ing valves, transmitters and

tire valve caps (vehicles with

tire pressure warning system)

● When removing or fitting the

wheels, tires or the tire pressure

warning valves and transmit-

ters, contact your Toyota dealer

as the tire pressure warning

valves and transmitters may be

damaged if not handled cor-

rectly.

● Make sure to install the tire

valve caps. If the tire valve caps

are not installed, water could

enter the tire pressure warning

valves and the tire pressure

warning valves could be bound.

● When replacing tire valve caps,

do not use tire valve caps other

than those specified.

The cap may become stuck.

590

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ The tire pressure warning

system must be initialized

in the following circum-

stances:

 When rotating the tires.

 When changing the tire.

 After registering the ID codes.

(P.593)

When the tire pressure warning

system is initialized, the current

tire inflation pressure is set as

the benchmark pressure.

■ How to initialize the tire

pressure warning system

 Vehicles without tire inflation

pressure display function

1 Park the vehicle in a safe

place and stop the engine.

Initialization cannot be performed

while the vehicle is moving.

2 Adjust the tire inflation pres-

sure to the specified cold tire

inflation pressure level.

(P.671)

Make sure to adjust the tire pres-

sure to the specified cold tire infla-

tion pressure level. The tire

pressure warning system will oper-

ate based on this pressure level.

3 Turn the engine switch to

ON.

4 Press or of the meter

control switches on the steer-

ing wheel and select .

5 Press or of the meter

control switches, select

“Vehicle Settings” and then

press .

6 Press or of the meter

control switches, select

“TPWS” and then press .

7 Press or of the meter

control switches, select the

“Set Pressure”. Then press

and hold .

“Setting Tire Pressure Warning

System” will be displayed on the

multi-information display and the

tire pressure warning light will blink

3 times.

When the message disappears, ini-

tialization is complete.

 Vehicles with tire inflation

pressure display function

1 Park the vehicle in a safe

place and stop the engine for

20 minutes or more.

Initialization cannot be performed

while the vehicle is moving.

2 Adjust the tire inflation pres-

sure to the specified cold tire

Initializing the tire pres-

sure warning system (if

equipped)

591

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

inflation pressure level.

(P.671)

Make sure to adjust the tire pres-

sure to the specified cold tire infla-

tion pressure level. The tire

pressure warning system will oper-

ate based on this pressure level.

3 Start the engine.

4 Press or of the meter

control switches on the steer-

ing wheel and select .

5 Press or of the meter

control switches, select

“Vehicle Settings” and then

press .

6 Press or of the meter

control switches, select

“TPWS” and then press .

7 Press or of the meter

control switches, select the

“Set Pressure”. Then press

and hold .

“Setting Tire Pressure Warning

System” will be displayed on the

multi-information display and the

tire pressure warning light will blink

3 times.

When the message disappears, ini-

tialization is complete.

A message is displayed on the

multi-information display. Also, “--”

is displayed for inflation pressure of

each tire on the multi-information

display while the tire pressure

warning system determines the

position.

8 Drive the vehicle at approxi-

mately 25mph (40 km/h) or

more for approximately 10 to

30 minutes.

When initialization is complete, the

inflation pressure of each tire will be

displayed on the multi-information

display.

Even if the vehicle is not driven at

approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or

more, initialization can be com-

pleted by driving for a long time.

However, if initialization does not

complete after driving for 1 hour or

more, park the vehicle in a safe

place for approximately 20 minutes

and then drive the vehicle again.

■ When initializing

● Vehicles with tire inflation pres-

sure display function only: Initial-

ization is performed while driving

at a vehicle speed of approxi-

mately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.

● Make sure to carry out initializa-

tion after adjusting the tire inflation

pressure. Also, make sure the

tires are cold before carrying out

initialization or tire inflation pres-

sure adjustment.

● Vehicles with tire inflation pres-

sure display function only: The tire

pressure warning system can be

initialized by yourself, but depend-

ing on the driving conditions and

driving environment, initialization

may take some time to complete.

■ The initialization operation

● If you have accidentally turned the

engine switch to OFF during ini-

tialization, it is not necessary to

restart the initialization again as

initialization will restart automati-

592

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

cally when the engine switch has

been turned to ON for the next

time.

● If you accidentally perform the ini-

tialization when initialization is not

necessary, adjust the tire inflation

pressure to the specified level

when the tires are cold, and con-

duct initialization again.

● Vehicles with tire inflation pres-

sure display function only: While

the position of each tire is being

determined and the inflation pres-

sures are not being displayed on

the multi-information display, if the

inflation pressure of a tire drops,

the tire pressure warning light will

come on.

■ When initialization of the tire

pressure warning system has

failed (vehicles without tire

inflation pressure display func-

tion)

Initialization can be completed in a

few minutes. However, in the follow-

ing cases, the settings have not

been recorded and the system will

not operate properly. If repeated

attempts to record tire inflation pres-

sure settings are unsuccessful,

have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

● When operating the tire pressure

warning reset switch, the tire pres-

sure warning light does not blink 3

times.

● After driving for a certain period of

time since the initialization has

been completed, the warning light

comes on after blinking for 1 min-

ute.

■ If the tire pressure warning sys-

tem is not initialized properly

(vehicles with tire inflation pres-

sure display function)

In the following situations, initializa-

tion may take longer than usual to

be completed or may not be possi-

ble. Normally, initialization com-

pletes within approximately 30

minutes.

• Vehicle is not driven at approxi-

mately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more

• Vehicle is driven on unpaved

roads

• Vehicle is driven near other vehi-

cles and system cannot recog-

nize tire pressure warning valve

and transmitters of your vehicle

over those of other vehicles.

If initialization does not complete

after driving for 1 hour or more, park

the vehicle in a safe place for

approximately 20 minutes and then

drive the vehicle again.

● If the vehicle is reversed during

initialization, the data up to that

point is reset, so perform the ini-

tialization procedure again from

the beginning.

● In the following situations, initial-

ization will not be started or was

not completed properly and the

system will not operate properly.

Perform the initialization proce-

dure again.

• If, when attempting to start initial-

ization, the tire pressure warning

light does not blink 3 times.

• If, when the vehicle has been

driven for about 20 minutes after

performing initialization, the tire

pressure warning light blinks for

approximately 1 minute and then

illuminates.

If the inflation pressure of each tire

is still not displayed, have the vehi-

cle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

593

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

 For models made in Japan

without tire inflation pressure

display function

Every tire pressure warning

valve and transmitter has a

unique ID code. In addition to

the set of tire pressure warning

system sensor ID codes initially

registered to the vehicle, a sec-

ond set of ID codes can be reg-

istered. A second set of tire

pressure warning system sensor

ID codes can be registered at

your Toyota dealer. When 2 sets

of ID codes have been regis-

tered, either ID code set can be

selected.

:The country of production is writ-

ten on the Certification Regula-

tion label. (P.665)

 Except for models made in

Japan

without tire inflation

pressure display function

:The country of production is writ-

ten on the Certification Regula-

tion label. (P.665)

Every tire pressure warning

valve and transmitter has a

unique ID code. When replacing

a tire pressure warning valve

and transmitter, it is necessary

to register the ID code.

When registering the ID codes,

perform the following procedure.

1 Park the vehicle in a safe

place, wait for approximately

20 minutes, and then start

the engine.

2 Press or of the meter

control switches on the steer-

ing wheel and select .

3 Press or of the meter

control switches and select

“Vehicle Settings”, and then

press .

4 Press or of the meter

control switches and select

“TPWS”, and then press .

5 Press or of the meter

control switches and select

“Change Wheel”. Then press

and hold until the tire

pressure warning light starts

slowly blinking 3 times.

The change wheel set mode is acti-

vated and registration is started.

Vehicles with a tire inflation pres-

sure display function only: Then a

message will be displayed on the

multi-information display. When

registration is being performed, the

tire pressure warning light will blink

WARNING

■ When initializing the tire pres-

sure warning system

Do not initializing tire inflation

pressure without first adjusting

the tire inflation pressure to the

specified level. Otherwise, the tire

pressure warning light may not

come on even if the tire inflation

pressure is low, or it may come on

when the tire inflation pressure is

actually normal.

Registering ID codes

(vehicles with tire pres-

sure warning system)

594

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

for approximately 1 minute then illu-

minate and “--” will be displayed for

the inflation pressure of each tire on

the multi-information display.

6 Drive the vehicle at approxi-

mately 25mph (40 km/h) or

more for approximately 10 to

30 minutes.

When registration is completed, the

tire pressure warning light will go off

and the inflation pressure of each

tire will be displayed on the multi-

information display.

Even if the vehicle is not driven at

approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or

more, registration can be com-

pleted by driving for a long time.

However, if registration does not

complete after driving for 1 hour or

more, perform the procedure again

from the beginning.

7 Initialize the tire pressure

warning system. (P.590)

■ When registering ID codes

● ID code registration is performed

while driving at a vehicle speed of

approximately 25 mph (40 km/h)

or more.

● Before performing ID code regis-

tration, make sure that no wheels

with tire pressure warning valve

and transmitters installed are near

the vehicle.

● Make sure to initialize the tire

pressure warning system after

registering the ID codes. If the

system is initialized before regis-

tering the ID codes, the initialized

values will be invalid.

● ID codes can be registered by

yourself, but depending on the

driving conditions and driving

environment, registration may

take some time to complete.

■ Canceling ID code registration

● To cancel ID code registration

after it has been started, turn the

engine switch off before driving

the vehicle. If the vehicle is driven

after ID code registration is

started, to cancel registration, per-

form the ID code registration start

procedure again and turn the

engine switch off before driving.

● If ID code registration has been

canceled, the tire pressure warn-

ing light will blink for approxi-

mately 1 minute when the engine

switch is turned to ON and then

illuminate. The tire pressure warn-

ing system will be operational

when the tire pressure warning

light turns off.

● If the warning light does not turn

off even after several minutes

have elapsed, ID code registration

may not have been canceled cor-

rectly. To cancel registration, per-

form the ID code registration start

procedure again and then turn the

engine switch off before driving.

■ If ID codes are not registered

properly

In the following situations, ID code

registration may take longer than

usual to be completed or may not be

possible. Normally, registration com-

pletes within approximately 30 min-

utes.

• Vehicle is not parked for approxi-

mately 20 minutes or more before

driving

• Vehicle is not driven at approxi-

mately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more

• Vehicle is driven on unpaved

roads

595

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

• Vehicle is driven near other vehi-

cles and system cannot recog-

nize tire pressure warning valve

and transmitters of your vehicle

over those of other vehicles

• Wheel with tire pressure warning

valve and transmitter installed is

inside or near the vehicle

If registration does not complete

after driving for 1 hour or more, per-

form the ID code registration proce-

dure again from the beginning.

● If the vehicle is reversed during

registration, the data up to that

point is reset, so perform the reg-

istration procedure again from the

beginning.

● In the following situations, ID code

registration will not be started or

was not completed properly and

the system will not operate prop-

erly. Perform the ID code registra-

tion procedure again.

• If, when attempting to start ID

code registration, the tire pressure

warning light does not blink slowly

3 times.

• If, when the vehicle has been

driven for about 20 minutes after

performing ID code registration,

the tire pressure warning light

blinks for approximately 1 minute

and then illuminates.

If the ID codes cannot be registered

even when performing the above

procedure, contact your Toyota

dealer.

The recommended cold tire

inflation pressure and tire size

are displayed on the tire and

loading information label.

(P.671)

Tire inflation pressure

Make sure to maintain the

proper tire inflation pres-

sure. Tire inflation pressure

should be checked at least

once per month. However,

Toyota recommends that

tire inflation pressure be

checked once every two

weeks. (P. 67 1 )

Checking the specified

tire inflation pressure

596

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Tire valve

Tire pressure gauge

1 Remove the tire valve cap.

2 Press the tip of the tire pres-

sure gauge onto the tire

valve.

3 Read the pressure using the

gauge gradations.

4 If the tire inflation pressure is

not at the recommended

level, adjust the pressure. If

you add too much air, press

the center of the valve to

deflate.

5 After completing the tire infla-

tion pressure measurement

and adjustment, apply soapy

water to the valve and check

for leakage.

6 Put the tire valve cap back

on.

■ Tire inflation pressure check

interval

You should check tire inflation pres-

sure every two weeks, or at least

once a month.

Do not forget to check the spare.

■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation

pressure

Driving with incorrect tire inflation

pressure may result in the following:

● Reduced fuel economy

● Reduced driving comfort and poor

handling

● Reduced tire life due to wear

● Reduced safety

● Damage to the drive train

If a tire needs frequent inflating,

have it checked by your Toyota

dealer.

■ Instructions for checking tire

inflation pressure

When checking tire inflation pres-

sure, observe the following:

● Check only when the tires are

cold.

If your vehicle has been parked for

at least 3 hours or has not been

driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5

km, you will get an accurate cold

tire inflation pressure reading.

● Always use a tire pressure gauge.

It is difficult to judge if a tire is

properly inflated based only on its

appearance.

● It is normal for the tire inflation

pressure to be higher after driving

as heat is generated in the tire. Do

not reduce tire inflation pressure

after driving.

● Never exceed the vehicle capacity

weight. Passengers and luggage

weight should be placed so that

the vehicle is balanced.

Inspection and adjust-

ment procedure

597

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

When replacing wheels, care

should be taken to ensure that

they are equivalent to those

removed in load capacity, diam-

eter, rim width and inset

Replacement wheels are avail-

able at your Toyota dealer.

: Conventionally referred to as off-

set.

Toyota does not recommend

using the following:

 Wheels of different sizes or

types

 Used wheels

 Bent wheels that have been

straightened

■ When replacing wheels (vehi-

cles with tire pressure warning

system)

The wheels of your vehicle are

equipped with tire pressure warning

valves and transmitters that allow

the tire pressure warning system to

provide advance warning in the

event of a loss in tire inflation pres-

sure. Whenever wheels are

replaced, tire pressure warning

valves and transmitters must be

installed. (P.584, 598)

WARNING

■ Proper inflation is critical to

save tire performance

Keep your tires properly inflated.

If the tires are not properly

inflated, the following conditions

may occur which could lead to an

accident resulting in death or seri-

ous injury:

● Excessive wear

● Uneven wear

● Poor handling

● Possibility of blowouts resulting

from overheated tires

● Air leaking from between tire

and wheel

● Wheel deformation and/or tire

damage

● Greater possibility of tire dam-

age while driving (due to road

hazards, expansion joints,

sharp edges in the road, etc.)

NOTICE

■ When inspecting and adjust-

ing tire inflation pressure

Be sure to put the tire valve caps

back on.

If a valve cap is not installed, dirt

or moisture may get into the valve

and cause an air leak, resulting in

decreased tire inflation pressure.

Wheels

If a wheel is bent, cracked or

heavily corroded, it should

be replaced. Otherwise, the

tire may separate from the

wheel or cause a loss of

handling control.

Wheel selection

598

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

 Use only Toyota wheel nuts

and wrenches designed for

use with your aluminum

wheels.

 When rotating, repairing or

changing your tires, check

that the wheel nuts are still

tight after driving 1000 miles

(1600 km).

 Be careful not to damage the

aluminum wheels when using

tire chains.

 Use only Toyota genuine bal-

ance weights or equivalent

and a plastic or rubber ham-

mer when balancing your

wheels.

WARNING

■ When replacing wheels

● Do not use wheels that are a dif-

ferent size from those recom-

mended in the Owner’s Manual,

as this may result in a loss of

handling control.

● Never use an inner tube in a

leaking wheel which is designed

for a tubeless tire. Doing so may

result in an accident, causing

death or serious injury.

■ When installing the wheel

nuts

● Be sure to install the wheel nuts

with the tapered ends facing

inward. (P.647) Installing the

nuts with the tapered ends fac-

ing outward can cause the

wheel to break and eventually

cause the wheel to come off

while driving, which could lead

to an accident resulting in death

or serious injury.

● Never use oil or grease on the

wheel bolts or wheel nuts. Oil

and grease may cause the

wheel nuts to be excessively

tightened, leading to bolt or disc

wheel damage. In addition, the

oil or grease can cause the

wheel nuts to loosen and the

wheel may fall off, causing an

accident and resulting in death

or serious injury. Remove any

oil or grease from the wheel

bolts or wheel nuts.

■ Use of defective wheels pro-

hibited

Do not use cracked or deformed

wheels.

Doing so could cause the tire to

leak air during driving, possibly

causing an accident.

NOTICE

■ Replacing tire pressure warn-

ing valves and transmitters

(vehicles with tire pressure

warning system)

● Because tire repair or replace-

ment may affect the tire pres-

sure warning valves and

transmitters, make sure to have

tires serviced by your Toyota

dealer or other qualified service

shop. In addition, make sure to

purchase your tire pressure

warning valves and transmit-

ters at your Toyota dealer.

● Ensure that only genuine Toyota

wheels are used on your vehi-

cle.

Tire pressure warning valves

and transmitters may not work

properly with non-genuine

wheels.

Aluminum wheel precau-

tions

599

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

1 Turn the engine switch off.

2 Open the glove box and slide

off the damper.

3 Push in each side of the

glove box to disconnect the

claws, and then slowly and

fully open the glove box while

supporting it.

4 With the glove box fully open,

slightly lift up the glove box

and pull toward the seat to

detach the bottom of the

glove box.

Do not use excessive force if the

glove box does not detach when

lightly pulled. Instead, pull toward

the seat while slightly adjusting the

height of the glove box.

5 Unlock the filter cover ( ),

pull the filter cover out of the

claws ( ), and remove the

filter cover.

Air conditioning filter

The air conditioning filter

must be changed regularly

to maintain air conditioning

efficiency.

Removal method

600

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

6 Remove the filter case.

7 Remove the air conditioning

filter from the filter case and

replace it with a new one.

The “ UP” marks shown on the

filter should be pointing up.

8 When installing, reverse the

steps listed.

■ Checking interval

Inspect and replace the air condi-

tioning filter according to the mainte-

nance schedule. In dusty areas or

areas with heavy traffic flow, early

replacement may be required. (For

scheduled maintenance information,

please refer to the “Owner’s Manual

Supplement” or “Scheduled Mainte-

nance”.)

■ If air flow from the vents

decreases dramatically

The filter may be clogged. Check

the filter and replace if necessary.

NOTICE

■ When using the air condition-

ing system

Make sure that a filter is always

installed.

Using the air conditioning system

without a filter may cause damage

to the system.

■ When removing the glove box

Always follow the specified proce-

dure to remove the glove box

(P.599). If the glove box is

removed without following the

specified procedure, the hinge of

the glove box may become dam-

aged.

■ To prevent damage to the fil-

ter cover

When moving the filter cover in

the direction of arrow to release

the fitting, pay attention not to

apply excessive force to the

claws. Otherwise, the claws may

be damaged.

601

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

■ Windshield wiper blade

removal and installation

1 While holding the hook por-

tion of the wiper arm, first

lift up the driver side, and

then lift up the passenger

side.

When returning the wiper arms to

their original positions, first lower

the passenger side, and then lower

the driver side.

2 Lift the stopper using a flat-

head screwdriver as shown

in the illustration.

To prevent damage to the wiper

arm, protect the tip of the screw-

driver with a rag.

3 Slide the wiper blade to

remove it from the wiper arm.

When installing, reverse the steps

listed.

■ Wiper insert replacement

1 Pull the wiper insert to

remove the claw of the wiper

blade from the stopper, and

pull out the wiper insert.

Wiper insert replace-

ment

When replacing the wiper

insert, perform the following

procedure to operate each

wiper.

Windshield wipers

602

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Stopper

Claw

2 Remove the 2 metal plates

from the wiper insert pulled

out, and install the plates to a

new wiper insert.

Make sure that the cutout location

and warp direction of the metal

blades are same as the original.

3 Install the wiper insert to the

wiper blade from the side

without the stopper.

4 Secure the stopper of the

wiper insert with the claw of

the wiper blade.

1 Lift up the rear window wiper

arm head cap.

2 Move the wiper blade until a

click sound can be heard and

the claw detaches, and then

remove the wiper blade from

the wiper arm.

3 Pull the wiper insert out past

the stopper on the wiper

blade, and then continue to

pull until it is completely

removed.

Lightly grasp between the claws of

the wiper blade to allow the wiper

insert to lift up, making it easier to

remove.

4 Remove the 2 metal plates

from the old wiper insert and

Rear window wiper

603

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

install them to the replace-

ment wiper insert.

5 Insert the wiper insert starting

from the claw at the center of

the wiper blade. Pass the

wiper insert through the 3

claws so that it sticks out

from the stopper, and then

pass the wiper insert through

the final remaining claw.

Applying a small amount of washer

fluid to the wiper insert can make it

easier to insert the claws into the

grooves.

6 Check that the wiper blade

claws are fitted in the

grooves of the wiper insert.

If the wiper blade claws are not fit-

ted in the grooves of the wiper

insert, grasp the wiper insert and

slide it back and forth multiple times

to insert the claws into the grooves.

Lightly lift up the center of the wiper

insert to make the rubber easier to

slide.

7 When installing a wiper

blade, reverse the procedure

in step 1.

After installing the wiper blade,

check that the connection is locked.

■ Wiper blade and wiper insert

handling

Improper handling may result in

damage to the wiper blades or wiper

insert. If you have any concerns

about replacing the wiper blades or

wiper insert yourself, contact your

Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

■ When lifting the windshield

wipers

● When raising the wiper arms off

the windshield, lift up the driver

side first, and then lift up pas-

senger side. When returning the

wipers to their original position,

return the passenger side first.

● Do not lift a windshield wiper by

the wiper blade. Otherwise, the

wiper blade may be deformed.

● Do not operate the wiper lever

when the windshield wipers are

lifted. Otherwise, the wind-

shield wipers may contact the

hood, possibly resulting in dam-

age to the windshield wipers

and/or hood.

604

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ If the key battery is depleted

The following symptoms may occur:

● The smart key system (if

equipped) and wireless remote

control will not function properly.

● The operational range will be

reduced.

Prepare the following before

replacing the battery:

 Flathead screwdriver

 Small flathead screwdriver

 Lithium battery CR2032

■ Use a CR2032 lithium battery

● Batteries can be purchased at

your Toyota dealer, local electrical

appliance shops or camera stores.

● Replace only with the same or

equivalent type recommended by

the manufacturer.

● Dispose of used batteries accord-

ing to the local laws.

 Vehicles without smart key

system

1 Remove the cover.

Use a screwdriver of an appropriate

size. Forcedly prying may cause

the cover damaged.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage

● Be careful not to damage the

claws when replacing the wiper

insert.

● After the wiper blade is removed

from the wiper arm, place a

cloth, etc., between the rear

window and wiper arm to pre-

vent damage to the rear win-

dow.

● Be sure not to pull excessively

on the wiper insert or deform its

metal plates.

Wireless remote con-

trol/electronic key bat-

tery

Replace the battery with a

new one if it is depleted.

Items to prepare

Replacing the battery

605

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

To prevent damage to the key,

cover the tip of the screwdriver with

a rag.

2 Remove the battery cover.

If the battery cover is difficult to

remove, lift the edge to remove it.

3 Remove the depleted battery.

When removing the battery, use a

screwdriver of an appropriate size.

Insert a new battery with the “+” ter-

minal facing up.

4 Install the battery cover with

the tab facing up.

Push the entire edge of the battery

cover into the key.

5 Install the key cover.

Align the key cover with the key

and then press it straight into the

key.

Make sure that the key cover is

securely installed without any gaps

between it and the key.

 Vehicles with smart key sys-

tem

1 Release the lock and remove

the mechanical key.

2 Remove the key cover.

Use a screwdriver of an appropriate

size. Forcedly prying may cause

606

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

the cover damaged.

To prevent damage to the key,

cover the tip of the flathead screw-

driver with a rag.

3 Remove the depleted battery

using a small flathead screw-

driver.

When removing the cover, the elec-

tronic key module may stick to the

cover and the battery may not be

visible. In this case, remove the

electronic key module in order to

remove the battery.

When removing the battery, use a

screwdriver of an appropriate size.

Insert a new battery with the “+” ter-

minal facing up.

4 When installing, reverse the

steps listed.

WARNING

■ Removed battery and other

parts

These parts are small and if swal-

lowed by a child, they can cause

choking. Keep away from chil-

dren. Failure to do so could result

in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ For normal operation after

replacing the battery

Observe the following precautions

to prevent accidents:

● Always work with dry hands.

Moisture may cause the battery

to rust.

● Do not touch or move any other

component inside the remote

control.

● Do not bend either of the battery

terminals.

607

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

1 Turn the engine switch off.

2 Open the fuse box cover.

 Engine compartment: Type A

fuse box (if equipped)

Push claw and to com-

pletely release the lock, and then lift

up the cover.

 Engine compartment: Type B

fuse box

Push claw and to com-

pletely release the lock, and then lift

up the cover.

 Left side instrument panel

Remove the lid.

3 Remove the fuse.

Only type A fuse can be removed

using the pullout tool.

4 Check if the fuse is blown.

Replace the blown fuse with a new

fuse of an appropriate amperage

rating. The amperage rating can be

found on the fuse box lid.

Checking and replac-

ing fuses

If any of the electrical com-

ponents do not operate, a

fuse may have blown. If this

happens, check and replace

the fuses as necessary.

Checking and replacing

fuses

608

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

 Type A

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

 Type B

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

 Type C

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

■ After a fuse is replaced

● When installing the lid, make sure

that the tab is installed securely.

● If the lights do not turn on even

after the fuse has been replaced,

a bulb may need replacement.

(P.609)

● If the replaced fuse blows again,

have the vehicle inspected by

your Toyota dealer.

■ If there is an overload in a cir-

cuit

The fuses are designed to blow, pro-

tecting the wiring harness from

damage.

WARNING

■ To prevent system break-

downs and vehicle fire

Observe the following precau-

tions.

Failure to do so may cause dam-

age to the vehicle, and possibly a

fire or injury.

● Never use a fuse of a higher

amperage rating than that indi-

cated, or use any other object in

place of a fuse.

● Always use a genuine Toyota

fuse or equivalent.

Never replace a fuse with a

wire, even as a temporary fix.

● Do not modify the fuses or fuse

boxes.

NOTICE

■ Before replacing fuses

Have the cause of electrical over-

load determined and repaired by

your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible.

609

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

Check the wattage of the light

bulb to be replaced. (P.675)

 Front (type A)

Front turn signal/parking

lights

Fog lights (if equipped)

Front side marker lights

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the

engine compartment fuse box

cover

When opening the fuse box, com-

pletely release the claw locks

before lifting up the cover. Other-

wise, the claws may be damaged.

Light bulbs

You may replace the follow-

ing bulbs by yourself. The

difficulty level of replace-

ment varies depending on

the bulb. If necessary bulb

replacement seems difficult

to perform, contact your

Toyota dealer.

For more information about

replacing other light bulbs,

contact your Toyota dealer.

Preparing for light bulb

replacement

Bulb location

610

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

 Front (type B)

Front turn signal/parking

lights

Fog lights

Front side marker lights

 Rear

Rear turn signal lights

Back-up lights

■ Lights that need to be

replaced by your Toyota

dealer

 Headlights

 Daytime running lights

 Side turn signal lights (if

equipped)

 Tail lights

 Stop lights

 Rear side marker lights

 High mounted stoplight

 License plate lights

 Outer foot lights (if equipped)

■ LED lights

The lights other than the following

lights each consist of a number of

LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out,

take your vehicle to your Toyota

dealer to have the light replaced.

● Front turn signal lights

● Parking lights

● Front side marker lights

● Fog lights (if equipped)

● Rear turn signal lights

● Back-up lights

■ Condensation build-up on the

inside of the lens

Temporary condensation build-up

on the inside of the light lens does

not indicate a malfunction. Contact

your Toyota dealer for more informa-

tion in the following situations:

● Large drops of water have built up

on the inside of the lens.

● Water has built up inside the light.

■ Front turn signal

lights/parking lights

1 Turn the bulb base counter-

clockwise.

Replacing light bulb

611

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

2 Remove the light bulb.

3 Install a new light bulb then

install the bulb base to the

light unit by inserting it and

turning the bulb base clock-

wise.

■ Front side marker lights

1 Turn the bulb base counter-

clockwise.

2 Remove the light bulb.

3 Install a new light bulb then

install the bulb base to the

light unit by inserting it and

turning the bulb base clock-

wise.

■ Fog lights (if equipped)

1 To allow enough working

space, turn the steering

wheel.

612

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

2 Remove the screws.

3 Remove the screws and

clips, partly remove the

fender liner.

4 Unplug the connector

5 Turn the bulb base counter-

clockwise.

6 Set the new light bulb.

Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb

with the mounting, and insert. Turn

it clockwise to set.

7 Set the connector.

Shake the bulb base gently to

check that it is not loose, turn the

front fog lights on once and visually

confirm that no light is leaking

through the mounting.

613

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

8 Reinstall the fender liner.

9 Reinstall the screws.

■ Rear turn signal lights

1 Open the back door and

remove the cover.

2 Remove the securing screws

and remove the unit.

Remove the lamp assembly by pull-

ing it directly backward from the

rear of the vehicle.

3 Turn the bulb base counter-

clockwise.

4 Remove the light bulb.

5 Install a new light bulb then

install the bulb base to the

light unit by inserting it and

614

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

turning the bulb base clock-

wise.

6 Align the grooves on the light

unit with the claws, and insert

the light unit straight so that

the pin on the light unit fit into

the hole.

Confirm that the light unit is com-

pletely secured.

7 Reinstall the screws.

8 Reinstall the cover.

■ Back-up lights

1 Open the back door and

remove the cover.

To prevent damage to the cover,

protect the tip of the screwdriver

with a rag.

2 Turn the bulb base counter-

clockwise.

Remove the cord from the clip

615

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

before turning the bulb base.

3 Remove the light bulb.

4 Install a new light bulb.

5 Install the bulb base to the

light unit by inserting it and

turning the bulb base clock-

wise.

Secure the cord with the clip back

again after installing the bulb base.

6 Reinstall the cover.

WARNING

■ Replacing light bulb

● Turn off the light. Do not attempt

to replace the bulb immediately

after turning off the light.

The bulb become very hot and

may cause burns.

● Do not touch the glass portion

of the light bulb with bare

hands. When it is unavoidable

to hold the glass portion, use

and hold with a clean dry cloth

to avoid getting moisture and

oils on the bulb.

Also, if the bulb is scratched or

dropped, it may blow out or

crack.

616

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

WARNING

● Fully install light bulb and any

parts used to secure it. Failure

to do so may result in heat dam-

age, fire, or water entering the

light unit. This may damage the

light or cause condensation to

build up on the lens.

● Do not attempt to repair or dis-

assemble light bulbs, connec-

tors, electric circuits or

component parts.

Doing so may result in death or

serious injury due to electric

shock.

■ To prevent damage or fire

● Make sure bulb is fully seated

and locked.

● Check the wattage of the bulb

before installing to prevent heat

damage.

617

When trouble arises

8-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers.... 618

If your vehicle has to be

stopped in an emergency

.................................. 618

If the vehicle is trapped in

rising water................ 619

8-2. Steps to take in an emer-

gency

If your vehicle needs to be

towed......................... 621

If you think something is

wrong ........................ 626

Fuel pump shut off system

.................................. 627

If a warning light turns on or

a warning buzzer sounds

.................................. 628

If a warning message is dis-

played........................ 639

If you have a flat tire.... 642

If the engine will not start

.................................. 651

If you lose your keys ... 653

If the electronic key does

not operate properly (vehi-

cles with smart key sys-

tem)........................... 653

If the vehicle battery is dis-

charged..................... 655

If your vehicle overheats

.................................. 659

If the vehicle becomes stuck

.................................. 661

618

8-1. Essential information

8-1.Essential information

Press the switch.

All the turn signal lights will flash.

To turn them off, press the switch

once again.

■ Emergency flashers

● If the emergency flashers are

used for a long time while the

engine is not running, the battery

may discharge.

● If any of the SRS airbags deploy

(inflate) or in the event of a strong

rear impact, the emergency flash-

ers will turn on automatically.

The emergency flashers will turn

off automatically after operating

for approximately 20 minutes. To

manually turn the emergency

flashers off, press the switch

twice. (The emergency flashers

may not turn on automatically

depending on the force of the

impact and conditions of the colli-

sion.)

1 Steadily step on the brake

pedal with both feet and

firmly depress it.

Do not pump the brake pedal

repeatedly as this will increase the

effort required to slow the vehicle.

2 Shift the shift lever to N.

 If the shift lever is shifted to N

3 After slowing down, stop the

vehicle in a safe place by the

road.

4 Stop the engine.

 If the shift lever cannot be

shifted to N

3 Keep depressing the brake

pedal with both feet to reduce

vehicle speed as much as

possible.

4 Perform the following proce-

dure to stop the engine:

 Vehicles without smart key

system

Turn the engine switch to ACC.

Emergency flashers

The emergency flashers are

used to warn other drivers

when the vehicle has to be

stopped in the road due to a

breakdown, etc.

Operating instructions

If your vehicle has to

be stopped in an emer-

gency

Only in an emergency, such

as if it becomes impossible

to stop the vehicle in the

normal way, stop the vehicle

using the following proce-

dure:

Stopping the vehicle

619

8-1. Essential information

When trouble arises

 Vehicles with smart key sys-

tem

Press and hold the engine switch

for 2 consecutive seconds or more,

or press it briefly 3 times or more in

succession.

5 Stop the vehicle in a safe

place by the road.

 Remove the seat belt first.

 If the door can be opened,

open the door and exit the

vehicle.

 If the door can not be opened,

open the window using the

power window switch and exit

the vehicle through the win-

dow.

 If the window can not be

opened using the power win-

dow switch, remain calm, wait

until the water level inside the

vehicle rises to the point that

the water pressure inside of

the vehicle equals the water

pressure outside of the vehi-

cle, and then open the door

and exit the vehicle.

WARNING

■ If the engine has to be turned

off while driving

● Power assist for the brakes and

steering wheel will be lost, mak-

ing the brake pedal harder to

depress and the steering wheel

heavier to turn. Decelerate as

much as possible before turning

off the engine.

● Vehicles without smart key sys-

tem: Never attempt to remove

the key, as doing so will lock the

steering wheel.

If the vehicle is

trapped in rising water

In the event the vehicle is

submerged in water, remain

calm and perform the fol-

lowing.

620

8-1. Essential information

WARNING

■ Using an emergency hammer

for emergency escape

The front side windows and rear

side windows, as well as the rear

window can be shattered with an

emergency hammer

used for

emergency escape. However, an

emergency hammer can not shat-

ter the windshield as it is lami-

nated glass.

: Contact your Toyota dealer, or

aftermarket accessory manu-

facturer for further information

about an emergency hammer.

■ Escaping the vehicle from the

window

There are cases where escaping

the vehicle from the window is not

possible due to seating position,

passenger body type, etc.

When using an emergency ham-

mer, consider your seat location

and the size of the window open-

ing to ensure that the opening is

accessible and large enough to

escape.

621

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

8-2.Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle needs

to be towed

If towing is necessary, we

recommend having your

vehicle towed by your

Toyota dealer or commercial

towing service, using a

wheel-lift type truck or flat-

bed truck.

Use a safety chain system

for all towing, and abide by

all state/provincial and local

laws.

2WD models: If towing your

vehicle with a wheel-lift type

truck from the front, the

vehicle’s rear wheels and

axles must be in good con-

ditions. (P.623)

If they are damaged, use a

towing dolly or flatbed

truck.

AWD models: If towing your

vehicle with a wheel-lift type

truck, use a towing dolly.

(P.623)

WARNING

Observe the following precau-

tions.

Failure to do so may result in

death or serious injury.

■ When towing the vehicle

 2WD models

Be sure to transport the vehicle

with the front wheels raised or

with all four wheels raised off the

ground. If the vehicle is towed

with the front wheels contacting

the ground, the drivetrain and

related parts may be damaged.

 AWD models

Be sure to transport the vehicle

with all four wheels raised off the

ground. If the vehicle is towed

with the tires contacting the

ground, the drivetrain or related

parts may be damaged, the vehi-

cle may fly off the truck.

622

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

The following may indicate a

problem with your transmission.

Contact your Toyota dealer or

commercial towing service

WARNING

■ While towing (vehicles with

towing eyelet)

● When towing using cables or

chains, avoid sudden starts, etc.

which place excessive stress on

the towing eyelets, cables or

chains. The towing eyelets,

cables or chains may become

damaged, broken debris may hit

people, and cause serious dam-

age.

● Do not turn the engine switch to

OFF.

There is a possibility that the

steering wheel is locked and

cannot be operated.

■ Installing towing eyelet to the

vehicle (vehicles with towing

eyelet)

Make sure that towing eyelet is

installed securely.

If not securely installed, towing

eyelet may come loose during

towing.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the

vehicle when towing using a

wheel-lift type truck

● Do not tow the vehicle from the

rear when the engine switch is

in OFF or the key is removed

(vehicles without smart key sys-

tem). The steering lock mecha-

nism is not strong enough to

hold the front wheels straight.

● When raising the vehicle,

ensure adequate ground clear-

ance for towing at the opposite

end of the raised vehicle. With-

out adequate clearance, the

vehicle could be damaged while

being towed.

■ To prevent damage to the

vehicle when towing with a

sling-type truck

Do not tow with a sling-type truck,

either from the front or rear.

■ To prevent damage to the

vehicle during emergency

towing (vehicles with towing

eyelet)

Do not secure cables or chains to

the suspension components.

■ When towing the vehicle

(vehicles with Stop & Start

system)

If it is necessary to tow the vehicle

with all four wheels on the ground,

perform the following procedure

before towing the vehicle, in order

to protect the system.

Turn the engine switch to OFF

and then start the engine or turn

the engine switch to ON.

■ Recreational towing (behind

motor home, etc.)

Never dinghy tow your vehicle to

prevent causing serious damage

to the AWD system (AWD mod-

els) and transmission. (P.191)

Situations when it is nec-

essary to contact dealers

before towing

623

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

before towing.

 The engine is running but the

vehicle does not move.

 The vehicle makes an abnor-

mal sound.

 From the front (2WD models)

Release the parking brake.

Turn automatic mode off.

(P.204)

 From the front (AWD models)

Use a towing dolly under the

rear wheels.

 From the rear

Use a towing dolly under the

front wheels.

When using a flat-bed truck to

transport the vehicle, use tire

strapping belts. Refer to the

owner’s manual of the flat-bed

truck for the tire strapping

method.

In order to suppress vehicle

movement during transporta-

tion, set the parking brake and

turn the engine switch off.

If a tow truck is not available in

an emergency, your vehicle may

be temporarily towed using

Towing with a wheel-lift

type truck

NOTICE

■ Towing with a sling-type truck

Do not tow with a sling-type truck

to prevent body damage.

Using a flatbed truck

Emergency towing (vehi-

cles with towing eyelet)

624

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

cables or chains secured to the

emergency towing eyelets. This

should only be attempted on

hard surfaced roads for at most

50 miles (80 km) at under 18

mph (30 km/h).

A driver must be in the vehicle to

steer and operate the brakes.

The vehicle’s wheels, drive train,

axles, steering and brakes must

be in good condition.

To have your vehicle towed by

another vehicle, the towing eye-

let must be installed to your

vehicle. Install the towing eyelet

by following the specified proce-

dure.

1 Take out the towing eyelet.

(P.643)

2 Using a flathead screwdriver,

remove eyelet cover ( ),

and then remove eyelet

cover ( ).

To protect the bodywork, place a

rag between the screwdriver and

the vehicle body as shown in the

illustration.

 Type A

 Type B

3 Insert the towing eyelet into

the hole and tighten partially

by hand.

 Type A

Emergency towing proce-

dure (vehicles with towing

eyelet)

625

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

 Type B

4 Tighten down the towing eye-

let securely using a wheel nut

wrench or hard metal bar.

 Type A

 Type B

5 Securely attach cables or

chains to the towing eyelet.

Take care not to damage the vehi-

cle body.

6 Enter the vehicle being towed

and start the engine.

Turn off the Parking Support Brake

function. (if equipped): P.282

If the engine does not start, turn the

engine switch to ON.

Vehicles with Stop & Start system:

Before towing the vehicle, turn the

engine switch to OFF once, and

then start the engine.

7 Shift the shift lever to N and

release the parking brake.

When the shift lever cannot be

shifted: P.2 00

■ While towing

If the engine is not running, the

power assist for the brakes and

steering will not function, making

steering and braking more difficult.

■ Wheel nut wrench

Wheel nut wrench is installed in the

tool bag. (P.643)

626

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

 Fluid leaks under the vehicle

(Water dripping from the air

conditioning after use is nor-

mal.)

 Flat-looking tires or uneven

tire wear

 Engine coolant temperature

gauge needle continually

points higher than normal.

 Changes in exhaust sound

 Excessive tire squeal when

cornering

 Strange noises related to the

suspension system

 Pinging or other noises

related to the engine

 Engine missing, stumbling or

running roughly

 Appreciable loss of power

 Vehicle pulls heavily to one

side when braking

 Vehicle pulls heavily to one

side when driving on a level

road

 Loss of brake effectiveness,

spongy feeling, pedal almost

touches the floor

If you think something

is wrong

If you notice any of the fol-

lowing symptoms, your

vehicle probably needs

adjustment or repair. Con-

tact your Toyota dealer as

soon as possible.

Visible symptoms

Audible symptoms

Operational symptoms

627

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

Follow the procedure below to

restart the engine after the sys-

tem is activated.

1 Turn the engine switch to

ACC or off.

2 Restart the engine.

Fuel pump shut off

system

To minimize the risk of fuel

leakage when the engine

stalls or when an airbag

inflates upon collision, the

fuel pump shut off system

stops the supply of fuel to

the engine.

Restarting the engine

NOTICE

■ Before starting the engine

Inspect the ground under the

vehicle.

If you find that fuel has leaked

onto the ground, the fuel system

has been damaged and is in need

of repair. Do not restart the

engine.

628

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)

■ Brake system warning light

■ Charging system warning light

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer

sounds

Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning

lights comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but

then goes off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunc-

tion in the system. However, if this continues to occur, have

the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Actions to the warning lights or warning buzzers

Warning light Details/Actions

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

(Red)

Indicates that:

 The brake fluid level is low; or

 The brake system is malfunctioning

 Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe

place and contact your Toyota dealer.

Continuing to drive the vehicle may be

dangerous.

Warning light Details/Actions

(Yellow)

Indicates a malfunction in the parking brake sys-

tem

 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota

dealer immediately.

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging

system

 Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe

place and contact your Toyota dealer.

629

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

■ High coolant temperature warning light

(warning buzzer)

: This light illuminates on the multi-information display with a message.

■ Low engine oil pressure warning light

(warning buzzer)

: This light illuminates on the multi-information display with a message.

■ Malfunction indicator lamp

■ SRS warning light

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates that the engine is overheating

 Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe

place.

Handling method (P.659)

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low

 Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe

place and contact your Toyota dealer.

Warning light Details/Actions

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Indicates a malfunction in:

 The electronic engine control system;

 The electronic throttle control system; or

 The emission control system (if equipped)

 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota

dealer immediately.

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in:

 The SRS airbag system;

 The front passenger occupant classification

system; or

 The seat belt pretensioner system

 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota

dealer immediately.

630

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ ABS warning light

■ Electric power steering system warning light (warning

buzzer)

■ PCS warning light (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Indicates a malfunction in:

 The ABS; or

 The brake assist system

 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota

dealer immediately.

Warning light Details/Actions

(Red/yellow)

Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric

Power Steering) system

 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota

dealer immediately.

Warning light Details/Actions

(Flashes or illuminates)

When a buzzer sounds simultaneously:

Indicates a malfunction has occurred in the PCS

(Pre-Collision System).

 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota

dealer immediately.

When a buzzer does not sound:

The PCS (Pre-Collision System) has become

temporarily unavailable, corrective action may

be necessary.

 Follow the instructions displayed on the

multi-information display. (P.227, 641)

If the PCS (Pre-Collision System) or VSC (Vehi-

cle Stability Control) system is disabled, the

PCS warning light will illuminate.

 P.2 36

631

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

■ LTA indicator (warning buzzer)

■ Stop & Start cancel indicator

■ Intuitive parking assist OFF indicator (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions

(Orange)

Indicates a malfunction in the LTA (Lane Tracing

Assist)

 Follow the instructions displayed on the

multi-information display. (P.246)

Warning light Details/Actions

(Flashes)

(If equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in the Stop & Start sys-

tem

 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota

dealer immediately.

Warning light Details/Actions

(Flashes)

(If equipped)

When a buzzer sounds:

Indicates a malfunction in the Intuitive parking

assist function

 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota

dealer immediately.

When a buzzer does not sound:

Indicates that the system is temporarily unavail-

able, possibly due to a sensor being dirty or cov-

ered with ice, etc.

 Follow the instructions displayed on the

multi-information display. (P.273, 639)

632

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ PKSB OFF indicator (warning buzzer)

■ RCTA OFF indicator (warning buzzer)

■ Slip indicator light

Warning light Details/Actions

(Flashes)

(If equipped)

When a buzzer sounds:

Indicates a malfunction in the PKSB (Parking

Support Brake) system

 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota

dealer immediately.

When a buzzer does not sound:

Indicates that the system is temporarily unavail-

able, possibly due to a sensor being dirty or cov-

ered with ice, etc.

 Follow the instructions displayed on the

multi-information display. (P.281, 639)

Warning light Details/Actions

(Flashes)

(If equipped)

When a buzzer sounds:

Indicates a malfunction in the RCTA (Rear

Cross Traffic Alert) function

 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota

dealer immediately.

When a buzzer does not sound:

Indicates that the rear bumper around the radar

sensor is covered with dirt, etc. (P. 26 3)

 Follow the instructions displayed on the

multi-information display. (P.262, 639)

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in:

 Multi-terrain Select brake control (if equipped);

 The VSC/Trailer Sway Control system;

 The TRAC system;

 The hill-start assist control system; or

 The downhill assist control system (if

equipped)

 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota

dealer immediately.

633

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

■ Brake Override System/Drive-Start Control/PKSB (if

equipped) warning light

(warning buzzer)

: This light illuminates on the multi-information display with a message.

■ Brake hold operated indicator (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions

Brake Override System

Indicates that the accelerator and brake pedals

are being depressed simultaneously, and the

Brake Override System is operating.

 Release the accelerator pedal and

depress the brake pedal.

Indicates a malfunction in the Brake Override

System (with warning buzzer)

 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota

dealer immediately.

Drive-Start Control

Indicates that the shift position was changed

and Drive-Start Control was operated while

depressing the accelerator pedal. (with warning

buzzer)

 Momentarily release the accelerator pedal.

Indicates a malfunction in the Drive-Start Con-

trol (with warning buzzer)

 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota

dealer immediately.

PKSB (if equipped)

Parking Support Brake function (for static

objects) is operating. (P.277)

 If a warning message is shown on the

multi-information display, read the mes-

sage and follow the instructions.

Warning light Details/Actions

(Flashes)

Indicates a malfunction in the brake hold system

 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota

dealer immediately.

634

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ Parking brake indicator

■ Tire pressure warning light

■ Low fuel level warning light

Warning light Details/Actions

(U.S.A.)

(Flashes)

(Canada)

(Flashes)

It is possible that the parking brake is not fully

engaged or released

 Operate the parking brake switch once

again.

This light comes on when the parking brake is

not released. If the light turns off after the park-

ing brake is fully released, the system is operat-

ing normally.

Warning light Details/Actions

(If equipped)

When the light comes on after blinking for 1 min-

ute:

Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system

 Have the system checked by your Toyota

dealer.

When the light comes on:

Low tire inflation pressure such as

 Natural causes

 Flat tire

 Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe

place.

Handling method (P.636)

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates that remaining fuel is approximately

2.2 gal. (8.3 L, 1.8 Imp. gal.) or less

 Refuel the vehicle.

635

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

■ Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light (warn-

ing buzzer

)

: Driver’s seat belt warning buzzer:

The driver’s seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or

her seat belt is not fastened. Once the engine switch is turned to ON, the

buzzer sounds. If the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer sounds inter-

mittently for a certain period of time after the vehicle reaches a certain

speed.

Front passenger’s seat belt warning buzzer:

The front passenger’s seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the front

passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. If the seat belt is

unfastened, the buzzer sounds intermittently for a certain period of time

after the vehicle reaches a certain speed.

■ Rear passengers’ seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer

)

: Rear passengers’ seat belt warning buzzer:

The rear passengers’ seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the rear

passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. If the seat belt is

unfastened, the buzzer sounds intermittently for a certain period of time,

after the seat belt is fastened and unfastened and the vehicle reaches a

certain speed.

■ Warning buzzer

In some cases, the buzzer may not

be heard because of noisy place or

an audio sound.

■ Front passenger detection sen-

sor, seat belt reminder and

warning buzzer

● If luggage is placed on the front

passenger seat, the front passen-

ger detection sensor may cause

the warning light to flash and the

warning buzzer to sound even if a

Warning light Details/Actions

Warns the driver and/or front passenger to fas-

ten their seat belts

 Fasten the seat belt.

If the front passenger’s seat is occupied,

the front passenger’s seat belt also needs

to be fastened to make the warning light

(warning buzzer) turn off.

Warning light Details/Actions

(If equipped)

Warns the rear passengers to fasten their seat

belts

 Fasten the seat belt.

636

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

passenger is not sitting in the

seat.

● If a cushion is placed on the seat,

the sensor may not detect a pas-

senger, and the warning light may

not operate properly.

■ SRS warning light

This warning light system monitors

the airbag sensor assembly, front

impact sensors, side impact sensors

(front door), side impact sensors

(front), side impact sensors (rear),

driver’s seat position sensor,

driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front

passenger occupant classification

system (ECU and sensors), “AIR

BAG ON” indicator light, “AIR BAG

OFF” indicator light, front passen-

ger’s seat belt buckle switch, seat

belt pretensioners and force limiters,

airbags, interconnecting wiring and

power sources. (P. 34 )

■ If the malfunction indicator

lamp comes on while driving

First check the following:

● Is the fuel tank empty?

If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.

● Is the fuel tank cap loose?

If it is, tighten it securely.

The light will go off after several

driving trips.

If the light does not go off even after

several trips, contact your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible.

■ Electric power steering system

warning light (warning buzzer)

When the battery charge becomes

insufficient or the voltage temporar-

ily drops, the electric power steering

system warning light may come on

and the warning buzzer may sound.

■ When the tire pressure warning

light comes on (vehicles with

tire pressure warning system)

Inspect the tires to check if a tire is

punctured.

If a tire is punctured: P.642

If none of the tires are punctured:

Turn the engine switch to OFF then

turn it to ON. Check if the tire pres-

sure warning light comes on or

blinks.

 If the tire pressure warning light

blinks for approximately 1 minute

then stays on

There may be a malfunction in the

tire pressure warning system. Have

the vehicle inspected by your Toyota

dealer immediately.

 If the tire pressure warning light

comes on

1 After the temperature of the tires

has lowered sufficiently, check

the inflation pressure of each tire

and adjust them to the specified

level.

2 If the warning light does not turn

off even after several minutes

have elapsed, check that the

inflation pressure of each tire is

at the specified level and perform

initialization. (P.590)

■ The tire pressure warning light

may come on due to natural

causes (vehicles with tire pres-

sure warning system)

The tire pressure warning light may

come on due to natural causes such

as natural air leaks and tire inflation

pressure changes caused by tem-

perature. In this case, adjusting the

tire inflation pressure will turn off the

warning light (after a few minutes).

■ When a tire is replaced with a

compact spare tire (vehicles

with tire pressure warning sys-

tem)

The compact spare tire is not

equipped with a tire pressure warn-

ing valve and transmitter. If a tire

goes flat, the tire pressure warning

light will not turn off even though the

flat tire has been replaced with the

spare tire. Replace the spare tire

with the standard tire and adjust the

tire inflation pressure. The tire pres-

637

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

sure warning light will go off after a

few minutes.

■ Conditions that the tire pres-

sure warning system may not

function properly

P.584

WARNING

■ If a warning light comes on or

a warning buzzer sounds

when a warning message is

shown on the multi-informa-

tion display

Check and follow the message

shown on the multi-information

display.

Failure to do so may result in

death or serious injury.

: Warning lights illuminate in red

or yellow and the warning

buzzer beeps once or sounds

continuously.

■ When the electric power

steering system warning light

comes on

When the light comes on yellow,

the assist to the power steering is

restricted. When the light comes

on red, the assist to the power

steering is lost and handling oper-

ations of the steering wheel

become extremely heavy.

If the steering wheel becomes

heavier than usual when operat-

ing, hold firmly and operate using

more force than usual.

■ If the tire pressure warning

light comes on (vehicles with

tire pressure warning system)

Be sure to observe the following

precautions. Failure to do so

could cause a loss of vehicle con-

trol and result in death or serious

injury.

● Stop your vehicle in a safe place

as soon as possible. Adjust the

tire inflation pressure immedi-

ately.

● If the tire pressure warning light

comes on even after tire infla-

tion pressure adjustment, it is

probable that you have a flat

tire. Check the tires. If a tire is

flat, change it with the spare tire

and have the flat tire repaired by

the nearest Toyota dealer.

● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and

braking. If the vehicle tires dete-

riorate, you could lose control of

the steering wheel or the

brakes.

■ If a blowout or sudden air

leakage should occur (vehi-

cles with tire pressure warn-

ing system)

The tire pressure warning system

may not activate immediately.

638

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

WARNING

■ Maintenance of the tires

(vehicles with tire pressure

warning system)

Each tire, including the spare (if

provided), should be checked

monthly when cold and inflated to

the inflation pressure recom-

mended by the vehicle manufac-

turer on the vehicle placard or tire

inflation pressure label (tire and

load information label). (If your

vehicle has tires of a different size

than the size indicated on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation

pressure label [tire and load infor-

mation label], you should deter-

mine the proper tire inflation

pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your

vehicle has been equipped with a

tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS-tire pressure warning sys-

tem) that illuminates a low tire

pressure telltale (tire pressure

warning light) when one or more

of your tires is significantly under-

inflated. Accordingly, when the

low tire pressure telltale (tire pres-

sure warning light) illuminates,

you should stop and check your

tires as soon as possible, and

inflate them to the proper pres-

sure. Driving on a significantly

under-inflated tire causes the tire

to overheat and can lead to tire

failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire

tread life, and may affect the vehi-

cle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS (tire

pressure warning system) is not a

substitute for proper tire mainte-

nance, and it is the driver’s

responsibility to maintain correct

tire pressure, even if under-infla-

tion has not reached the level to

trigger illumination of the TPMS

low tire pressure telltale (tire pres-

sure warning light).

Your vehicle has also been

equipped with a TPMS (tire pres-

sure warning system) malfunc-

tion indicator to indicate when the

system is not operating properly.

The TPMS (tire pressure warning

system) malfunction indicator is

combined with the low tire pres-

sure telltale (tire pressure warning

light). When the system detects a

malfunction, the telltale will flash

for approximately one minute and

then remain continuously illumi-

nated. This sequence will con-

tinue upon subsequent vehicle

start-ups as long as the malfunc-

tion exists. When the malfunction

indicator is illuminated, the sys-

tem may not be able to detect or

signal low tire pressure as

intended.

TPMS (tire pressure warning sys-

tem) malfunctions may occur for a

variety of reasons, including the

installation of replacement or

alternate tires or wheels on the

vehicle that prevent the TPMS

(tire pressure warning system)

from functioning properly. Always

check the TPMS (tire pressure

warning system) malfunction tell-

tale after replacing one or more

tires or wheels on your vehicle to

ensure that the replacement or

alternate tires and wheels allow

the TPMS (tire pressure warning

system) to continue to function

properly.

NOTICE

■ To ensure the tire pressure

warning system operates

properly (vehicles with tire

pressure warning system)

Do not install tires with different

specifications or manufacturers

as the tire pressure warning sys-

tem may not operate properly.

639

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

■ Warning messages

The warning messages explained

below may differ from the actual

messages according to operation

conditions and vehicle specifica-

tions.

■ If a message about an operation

is shown

● If a message about an operation

of the accelerator pedal or brake

pedal is shown

A warning message about an opera-

tion of the brake pedal may be

shown while the driving assist sys-

tems such as PCS (Pre-Collision

system) or the dynamic radar cruise

control with full-speed range is oper-

ating. If a warning message is

shown, be sure to decelerate the

vehicle or follow an instruction

shown on the multi-information dis-

play.

A warning message is shown when

Brake Override System, Drive-Start

Control or Parking Support Brake (if

equipped) (P.170, 277) operates.

Follow the instructions on the multi-

information display.

● If a message about an operation

of the engine switch is shown

An instruction for operation of the

engine switch is shown when the

incorrect procedure for starting the

engine is performed or the engine

switch is operated incorrectly. Fol-

low the instructions shown on the

multi-information display to operate

the engine switch again.

● If a message about a shift lever

operation is shown

To prevent the shift lever from being

operated incorrectly or the vehicle

from moving unexpectedly, a mes-

sage that requires shifting the shift

lever may be shown on the multi-

information display. In that case, fol-

low the instruction of the message

and shift the shift lever.

● If a message or image about an

open/close state of a part or

replenishment of a consumable is

shown

Confirm the part indicated by the

multi-information display or a warn-

ing light, and then perform the cop-

ing method such as closing the

open door or replenishing a con-

If a warning message

is displayed

The multi-information dis-

play shows warnings of sys-

tem malfunctions,

incorrectly performed oper-

ations, and messages that

indicate a need for mainte-

nance. When a message is

shown, perform the correc-

tion procedure appropriate

to the message.

If a warning message is dis-

played again after the appro-

priate actions have been

performed, contact your

Toyota dealer.

640

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

sumable.

■ If a message that indicates the

need for visiting your Toyota

dealer is displayed

The system or part shown on the

multi-information display is malfunc-

tioning. Have the vehicle inspected

by your Toyota dealer immediately.

■ If a message that indicates the

need for referring to Owner’s

Manual is displayed

● If “Engine Coolant Temp High” is

shown, follow the instructions

(P.659).

● If the following messages are

shown, there may be a malfunc-

tion.

Immediately stop the vehicle in a

safe place and contact your

Toyota dealer. Continuing to drive

the vehicle may be dangerous.

• “Charging System Malfunction”

• “High Transmission Fluid Temp”

• “Smart Key System Malfunction”

● If the following messages are

shown, there may be a malfunc-

tion.

Immediately have the vehicle

inspected by your Toyota dealer.

• “Oil Pressure Low”

• “Braking Power Low”

■ If “Shift to P when Parked” is

shown

Message is displayed when the

driver’s door is opened without turn-

ing the engine switch to OFF with

the shift lever in any position other

than P.

Shift the shift lever to P.

■ If “Auto Power OFF to Conserve

Battery” is shown

Power was turned off due to the

automatic power off function.

Next time when starting the engine,

increase the engine speed slightly

and maintain that level for approxi-

mately 5 minutes to recharge the

battery.

■ If “Engine Oil Level Low Add or

Replace” is displayed

The engine oil level may be low.

Check the level of the engine oil,

and add engine oil if necessary. This

message may be displayed if the

vehicle is stopped on a slope. Move

the vehicle to a level surface and

check if the message disappears.

■ If “Maintenance Required

Soon” is shown

Indicates that all maintenance

according to the driven distance on

the maintenance schedule

should

be performed soon.

Comes on approximately 4500

miles (7200 km) after the message

has been reset.

If necessary, perform maintenance.

Please reset the message after the

maintenance is performed.

(P.565)

: Refer to the separate “Scheduled

Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’

Manual Supplement” for the main-

tenance interval applicable to your

vehicle.

■ If “Maintenance Required Visit

Your Dealer” is shown

Indicates that all maintenance is

required to correspond to the driven

distance on the maintenance sched-

ule

Comes on approximately 5000

miles (8000 km) after the message

has been reset. (The indicator will

not work properly unless the mes-

sage has been reset.)

Perform the necessary mainte-

nance. Please reset the message

after the maintenance is performed.

(P.565)

: Refer to the separate “Scheduled

Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’

Manual Supplement” for the main-

tenance interval applicable to your

vehicle.

641

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

■ If “Front Camera Unavailable”

or “Front Camera Unavailable

See Owner’s Manual” is dis-

played

The following systems may be sus-

pended until the problem shown in

the message is resolved. (P.445,

630)

● PCS (Pre-Collision System)

● LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)

● Automatic High Beam

● RSA (Road Sign Assist)

● Dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range

: If equipped

■ If “Radar Cruise Control

Unavailable See Owner’s Man-

ual” is shown

The dynamic radar cruise control

with full-speed range system is sus-

pended temporarily or until the prob-

lem shown in the message is

resolved. (causes and coping meth-

ods: P.445)

■ If “Radar Cruise Control

Unavailable” is shown

The dynamic radar cruise control

with full-speed range system cannot

be used temporarily. Use the system

when it becomes available again.

■ Warning buzzer

P.635

WARNING

■ If a warning light comes on or

a warning buzzer sounds

when a warning message is

shown on the multi-informa-

tion display

P.6 37

NOTICE

■ “High Power Consumption

Partial Limit On AC/Heater

Operation” is frequently

shown

There is a possible malfunction

relating to the charging system or

the battery may be deteriorating.

Have the vehicle inspected by

your Toyota dealer.

642

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

 Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface.

 Set the parking brake.

 Shift the shift lever to P.

 Stop the engine.

 Turn on the emergency flashers. (P.618)

 For vehicles with power back door: Turn off the power back door

system. (P.12 7 )

If you have a flat tire

Your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire. The flat tire can be

replaced with the spare tire.

For details about tires: P.581

WARNING

■ If you have a flat tire

Do not continue driving with a flat tire.

Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the

wheel beyond repair, which could result in an accident.

Before jacking up the vehicle

643

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

Jack

Tool bag

Spare tire

Jack handle

Wheel nut wrench

Jack handle

Wheel nut wrench

Towing eyelet

(if equipped)

:Except for models made in Japan

:For models made in Japan

:The country of production is written on the Certification Regulation label.

(P.665)

Location of the spare tire, jack and tools

644

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

1 Open the deck board

(P.532).

2 Take out the jack.

Do not touch the threaded portion

of the jack as it is greased.

Take out the tool bag.

WARNING

■ Using the tire jack

Observe the following precau-

tions.

Improper use of the tire jack may

cause the vehicle to suddenly fall

off the jack, leading to death or

serious injury.

● Do not use the tire jack for any

purpose other than replacing

tires or installing and removing

tire chains.

● Only use the tire jack that

comes with this vehicle for

replacing a flat tire.

Do not use it on other vehicles,

and do not use other tire jacks

for replacing tires on this vehi-

cle.

● Put the jack properly in its jack

point.

● Do not put any part of your body

under the vehicle while it is sup-

ported by the jack.

● Do not start the engine or drive

the vehicle while the vehicle is

supported by the jack.

● Do not raise the vehicle while

someone is inside.

● When raising the vehicle, do not

put an object on or under the

jack.

● Do not raise the vehicle to a

height greater than that required

to replace the tire.

● Use a jack stand if it is neces-

sary to get under the vehicle.

● Stop the vehicle on firm, flat and

level ground, firmly set the park-

ing brake and shift the shift lever

to P. Block the wheel diagonally

opposite to the one being

changed if necessary.

● When lowering the vehicle,

make sure that there is no-one

near the vehicle. If there are

people nearby, warn them

vocally before lowering.

Taking out the jack

Taking out the tool bag

645

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

1 Take out the jack holder.

2 Loosen the center fastener

that secures the spare tire.

1 Chock the tires.

2 For vehicles with full wheel

ornament: Remove the wheel

ornament using the wrench.

To prevent damage, cover the tip of

the wrench with a rag.

Taking out the spare tire

WARNING

■ When storing the spare tire

Be careful not to catch fingers or

other body parts between the

spare tire and the body of the

vehicle.

Replacing a flat tire

Flat tire Wheel chock positions

Front left-

hand side

Behind the rear right-

hand side tire

Front right-

hand side

Behind the rear left-

hand side tire

Rear left-

hand side

In front of the front

right-hand side tire

Rear right-

hand side

In front of the front

left-hand side tire

646

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

3 Slightly loosen the wheel

nuts (one turn).

4 Turn the tire jack portion

by hand until the notch of the

jack is in contact with the jack

point.

After removing the jack from the

jack holder, turn the jack portion

in the opposite direction to lower

the jack, and then adjust the jack

set position.

The jack point guides are located

under the rocker panel. They indi-

cate the jack point positions.

5 Assemble the jack handle

and the wheel nut wrench as

shown in the illustration.

 Except for models made in

Japan

: The country of production is writ-

ten on the Certification Regula-

tion label. (P.665)

 For models made in Japan

: The country of production is writ-

ten on the Certification Regula-

tion label. (P.665)

6 Raise the vehicle until the tire

is slightly raised off the

ground.

7 Remove all the wheel nuts

and the tire.

When resting the tire on the

ground, place the tire so that the

wheel design faces up to avoid

647

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

scratching the wheel surface.

1 Remove any dirt or foreign

matter from the wheel con-

tact surface.

If foreign matter is on the wheel

contact surface, the wheel nuts

may loosen while the vehicle is in

motion, causing the tire to come off.

2 Install the spare tire and

loosely tighten each wheel

nut by hand by approximately

the same amount.

When replacing a steel wheel with

WARNING

■ Replacing a flat tire

● Do not touch the disc wheels or

the area around the brakes

immediately after the vehicle

has been driven.

After the vehicle has been

driven the disc wheels and the

area around the brakes will be

extremely hot. Touching these

areas with hands, feet or other

body parts while changing a tire,

etc. may result in burns.

● Failure to follow these precau-

tions could cause the wheel

nuts to loosen and the tire to fall

off, resulting in death or serious

injury.

• Have the wheel nuts tightened

with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf

(103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m) as soon

as possible after changing

wheels.

• Do not attach a heavily dam-

aged wheel ornament, as it may

fly off the wheel while the vehi-

cle is moving.

• When installing a tire, only use

wheel nuts that have been spe-

cifically designed for that wheel.

• If there are any cracks or defor-

mations in the bolt screws, nut

threads or bolt holes of the

wheel, have the vehicle

inspected by your Toyota

dealer.

• When installing the wheel nuts,

be sure to install them with the

tapered ends facing inward.

● For vehicles with power back

door: In cases such as when

replacing tires, make sure to

turn off the power back door

system (P.127). Failure to do

so may cause the back door to

operate unintentionally if the

power back door switch is acci-

dentally touched, resulting in

hands and fingers being caught

and injured.

Installing the spare tire

648

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

a steel wheel, tighten the nuts until

the tapered portion comes into

loose contact with the disc wheel

seat .

When replacing an aluminum wheel

with a steel wheel, tighten the

wheel nuts until the tapered portion

comes into loose contact with

the disc wheel seat .

When replacing an aluminum wheel

with an aluminum wheel, turn the

wheel nuts until the washers

come into contact with the disc

wheel .

3 Lower the vehicle.

4 Firmly tighten each wheel nut

two or three times in the

order shown in the illustra-

tion.

Tightening torque:

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

5 For vehicles with full wheel

ornament: When reinstalling

an original wheel, reinstall

the wheel ornament

Align the cutout of the wheel orna-

ment with the valve stem as shown.

: The wheel ornament cannot be

649

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

installed on the compact spare

tire.

6 Stow the flat tire, tire jack and

all tools.

■ The compact spare tire

● The compact spare tire is identi-

fied by the label “TEMPORARY

USE ONLY” on the tire sidewall.

Use the compact spare tire tempo-

rarily, and only in an emergency.

● Make sure to check the tire infla-

tion pressure of the compact

spare tire. (P.671)

■ When using the compact spare

tire

As the compact spare tire is not

equipped with a tire pressure warn-

ing valve and transmitter, low infla-

tion pressure of the spare tire will

not be indicated by the tire pressure

warning system. Also, if you replace

the compact spare tire after the tire

pressure warning light comes on,

the light remains on.

■ When the compact spare tire is

attached

The vehicle height may become

lower when driving with the compact

spare tire compared to when driving

with standard tires.

■ If you have a flat front tire on a

road covered with snow or ice

Install the compact spare tire on one

of the rear wheels of the vehicle.

Perform the following steps and fit

tire chains to the front tires:

1 Replace a rear tire with the com-

pact spare tire.

2 Replace the flat front tire with the

tire removed from the rear of the

vehicle.

3 Fit tire chains to the front tires.

■ When stowing the jack

Before storing the jack, adjust the

height of the jack to match the

shape of the jack holder.

The storage direction of the jack dif-

fers depending on the type, so make

sure to store the jack in the correct

direction.

Except for models made in Japan

For models made in Japan

: The country of production is writ-

ten on the Certification Regulation

label. (P.665)

WARNING

■ When using the compact

spare tire

● Remember that the compact

spare tire provided is specifi-

cally designed for use with your

vehicle. Do not use your com-

pact spare tire on another vehi-

cle.

● Do not use more than one com-

pact spare tire simultaneously.

● Replace the compact spare tire

with a standard tire as soon as

possible.

● Avoid sudden acceleration,

abrupt steering, sudden brak-

ing and shifting operations that

cause sudden engine braking.

650

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

WARNING

■ When the compact spare tire

is attached

The vehicle speed may not be

correctly detected, and the follow-

ing systems may not operate cor-

rectly:

• ABS & Brake assist

• VSC/Trailer Sway Control

•TRAC

• Dynamic radar cruise control

with full-speed range

• Dynamic radar cruise control

• PCS (Pre-Collision System)

•EPS

• LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)

• Tire pressure warning system (if

equipped)

• AHB (Automatic High Beam)

• BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) (if

equipped)

• Downhill assist control system

(if equipped)

• Rear view monitor system (if

equipped)

• Panoramic view monitor (if

equipped)

• Toyota parking assist monitor (if

equipped)

• Intuitive parking assist (if

equipped)

• Navigation system (if equipped)

Also, not only can the following

systems not be utilized fully, but

they may actually negatively

affect the drive-train components:

• Dynamic Torque Control AWD

system (if equipped)

• Dynamic Torque Vectoring AWD

system (if equipped)

■ Speed limit when using the

compact spare tire

Do not drive at speeds in excess

of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a com-

pact spare tire is installed on the

vehicle.

The compact spare tire is not

designed for driving at high

speeds. Failure to observe this

precaution may lead to an acci-

dent causing death or serious

injury.

■ After using the tools and jack

Before driving, make sure all the

tools and jack are securely in

place in their storage location to

reduce the possibility of personal

injury during a collision or sudden

braking.

NOTICE

■ Be careful when driving over

bumps with the compact

spare tire installed on the

vehicle

The vehicle height may become

lower when driving with the com-

pact spare tire compared to when

driving with standard tires. Be

careful when driving over uneven

road surfaces.

■ Driving with tire chains and

the compact spare tire

Do not fit tire chains to the com-

pact spare tire.

Tire chains may damage the vehi-

cle body and adversely affect driv-

ing performance.

651

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

One of the following may be the

cause of the problem:

 There may not be sufficient

fuel in the vehicle’s tank.

Refuel the vehicle.

 The engine may be flooded.

Try to restart the engine again

following correct starting pro-

cedures. (P.193, 194)

 There may be a malfunction

in the engine immobilizer sys-

tem. (P.70)

One of the following may be the

cause of the problem:

 The battery may be dis-

charged. (P.655)

NOTICE

■ When replacing the tires

(vehicles with tire pressure

warning system)

When removing or fitting the

wheels, tires or the tire pressure

warning valve and transmitter,

contact your Toyota dealer as the

tire pressure warning valve and

transmitter may be damaged if not

handled correctly.

If the engine will not

start

If the engine will not start

even though correct starting

procedures are being fol-

lowed (P.193, 194), con-

sider each of the following

points:

The engine will not start

even though the starter

motor operates normally

The starter motor turns

over slowly, the interior

lights and headlights are

dim, or the horn does not

sound or sounds at a low

volume

652

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

 The battery terminal connec-

tions may be loose or cor-

roded.

The engine starting system may

be malfunctioning due to an

electrical problem such as elec-

tronic key battery depletion or a

blown fuse. However, an interim

measure is available to start the

engine. (P.652)

One of the following may be the

cause of the problem:

 The battery may be dis-

charged. (P.655)

 One or both of the battery ter-

minals may be disconnected.

 There may be a malfunction

in the steering lock system

(vehicles with smart key sys-

tem).

Contact your Toyota dealer if the

problem cannot be repaired, or if

repair procedures are unknown.

When the engine does not start,

the following steps can be used

as an interim measure to start

the engine if the engine switch is

functioning normally:

1 Pull the parking brake switch

to check that the parking

brake is set. (P.203)

Parking brake indicator will come

on.

2 Shift the shift lever to P.

3 Turn the engine switch to

ACC.

4 Press and hold the engine

switch for about 15 seconds

while depressing the brake

pedal firmly.

Even if the engine can be

started using the above steps,

the system may be malfunction-

ing. Have the vehicle inspected

by your Toyota dealer.

The starter motor does

not turn over (vehicles

with smart key system)

The starter motor does

not turn over, the interior

lights and headlights do

not turn on, or the horn

does not sound

Emergency start function

(vehicles with smart key

system)

653

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

■ When the electronic key does

not work properly

● Make sure that the smart key sys-

tem has not been deactivated in

the customization setting. If it is

off, turn the function on.

(Customizable features: P.691)

● Check if battery-saving mode is

set. If it is set, cancel the function.

(P.129)

Use the mechanical key

(P.107) in order to perform the

If you lose your keys

New genuine keys can be

made by your Toyota dealer

using the other key and the

key number stamped on

your key number plate.

Keep the plate in a safe

place such as your wallet,

not in the vehicle.

NOTICE

■ When an electronic key is lost

(if equipped)

If the electronic key remains lost,

the risk of vehicle theft increases

significantly. Visit your Toyota

dealer immediately with all

remaining electronic keys that

were provided with your vehicle.

If the electronic key

does not operate prop-

erly (vehicles with

smart key system)

If communication between

the electronic key and vehi-

cle is interrupted (P.129)

or the electronic key cannot

be used because the battery

is depleted, the smart key

system and wireless remote

control cannot be used. In

such cases, the doors can

be opened and the engine

can be started by following

the procedure below.

NOTICE

■ In case of a smart key system

malfunction, or other key

Toyota RAV4 2020 XLE

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

Toyota RAV4 Questions and Answers

#1 How do I start the engine using my Toyota remote engine
starter?

#2 What warranty coverage do I have on my Toyota vehicle?

#3 How does the Tire Pressure Monitoring System work in my
vehicle?

#4 What does ToyotaCare roadside assistance include?

#5 How do I operate the cruise control in my vehicle?

Related Products

Toyota Yaris XLE 2020 Car

Toyota Camry XLE 2020

Toyota 2020 Avalon XLE

Toyota Yaris XLE Hatchback 2020

Toyota Camry Hybrid XLE 2020 Camry Hybrid XLE 2020

Toyota RAV4 2020 XLE

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

Toyota RAV4 Questions and Answers

#1 How do I start the engine using my Toyota remote engine starter?

#2 What warranty coverage do I have on my Toyota vehicle?

#3 How does the Tire Pressure Monitoring System work in my vehicle?

#4 What does ToyotaCare roadside assistance include?

#5 How do I operate the cruise control in my vehicle?

Related Products

Toyota Yaris XLE 2020 Car

Toyota Camry XLE 2020

Toyota 2020 Avalon XLE

Toyota Yaris XLE Hatchback 2020

Toyota Camry Hybrid XLE 2020 Camry Hybrid XLE 2020

#1 How do I start the engine using my Toyota remote engine
starter?

#3 How does the Tire Pressure Monitoring System work in my
vehicle?